REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
x
Pre-Effective Amendment No.
____
o
Post-Effective Amendment
No. 35
x
and/or
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
x
Amendment No. 302
x
(Check appropriate box or boxes)
SEPARATE ACCOUNT A
(Exact Name of Registrant)
PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
(Name of Depositor)
700 Newport Center Drive Newport Beach, California92660
(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Offices)(Zip Code)
(949) 219-3943
(Depositor’s Telephone Number, including Area Code)
Brandon J. Cage Assistant Vice President Pacific
Life Insurance Company 700 Newport Center Drive Newport Beach, California92660
(Name and address of agent for service)
Approximate Date of Proposed Public
Offering:
It is proposed that this filing will become effective (check appropriate box)
o
immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
ţ
on May 1, 2011 pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
o
60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a) (1) of Rule 485
o
on _____ pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485
If appropriate, check the following box:
o
this post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a previously filed post-effective
amendment.
Title of Securities Being Registered: Interests in the Separate Account Under
Pacific Odyssey individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract.
Pacific Odyssey is
an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity
contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific
Life).
This Prospectus
provides information you should know before buying a Contract.
It’s accompanied by current Prospectuses for the Funds that
provide the underlying Portfolios for the Variable Investment
Options offered under the Contract. The Variable Investment
Options are funded by Separate Account A of Pacific Life. Please
read both Prospectuses carefully, and keep them for future
reference.
Here’s a list
of all the Investment Options currently available under your
Contract; the Variable Investment Options are listed according
to the underlying Funds:
VARIABLE
INVESTMENT OPTIONS
Pacific Select
Fund
International Small-Cap
Mid-Cap Value
Equity Index
Small-Cap Index
Small-Cap Equity
American
Funds®
Asset Allocation
American
Funds®
Growth-Income
American
Funds®
Growth
Large-Cap Value
Technology
Floating Rate Loan
Small-Cap Growth
Comstock
Growth LT
Focused 30
Health Sciences
International Value
Long/Short Large-Cap
Mid-Cap Equity
International Large-Cap
Mid-Cap Growth
Real Estate
Small-Cap Value
Main
Street®
Core
Emerging Markets
Cash Management
High Yield Bond
Managed Bond
Inflation Managed
Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth
Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth
Pacific Dynamix – Growth
Portfolio Optimization Conservative
Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative
Portfolio Optimization Moderate
Portfolio Optimization Growth
Portfolio Optimization Aggressive-Growth
Dividend Growth
Short Duration Bond
Large-Cap Growth
Diversified Bond
Inflation Protected
AIM Variable Insurance
Funds
(Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund
Series II
AllianceBernstein Variable
Products Series Fund, Inc. AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth
Strategy Portfolio Class B
BlackRock Variable Series
Funds, Inc. BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund
Class III
Franklin Templeton Variable
Insurance Products Trust Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds
Allocation Fund Class 4
GE Investments Funds,
Inc. GE Investments Total Return Fund Class 3
MFS®
Variable Insurance Trust MFS®
Total Return Series – Service Class
PIMCO Variable Insurance
Trust PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio –
Advisor Class
FIXED OPTIONS Fixed
Option
DCA Plus Fixed Option
The Fixed Option is
only available to Contracts issued before July 1, 2003.
The DCA Plus Fixed
Option is only available to Contracts issued before
November 14, 2003.
You will find more
information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the
Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1,2011. The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to
be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by
reference. You will find a table of contents for the SAI on
page 110 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI
without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life or you can
visit our website at www.pacificlife.com. You can also visit
the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the
SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference,
and other information about registrants that file electronically
with the SEC.
This Contract is not
available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any
state or jurisdiction where we are not legally permitted to
offer the Contract.
The Contract is
described in detail in this Prospectus and its SAI. A Fund is
described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to
describe the Contract or a Fund any differently than they have
been described in these documents.
You should be aware
that the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not
reviewed the Contract and does not guarantee that the
information in this Prospectus is accurate or complete.
It’s a criminal offense to say otherwise.
This material is not
intended to be used, nor can it be used by any taxpayer, for the
purpose of avoiding U.S. federal, state or local tax penalties.
Pacific Life, its distributors and their respective
representatives do not provide tax, accounting or legal advice.
Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s
particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.
This Contract is
not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by,
any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Federal Reserve Board, or any
other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk,
including possible loss of principal.
This overview tells
you some key things you should know about your Contract.
It’s designed as a summary only – please read
this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional
Information (SAI) for more detailed information.
In this Prospectus,
you and your mean the Contract Owner or
Policyholder. Pacific Life, we, us and our refer
to Pacific Life Insurance Company. Contract means a
Pacific Odyssey variable annuity contract, unless we state
otherwise.
Certain Contract
features described in this Prospectus may vary or may not be
available in your state. The state in which your Contract is
issued governs whether or not certain features, Riders, charges
or fees are allowed or will vary under your Contract. These
variations are reflected in your Contract and in Riders or
Endorsements to your Contract. See your financial advisor or
contact us for specific information that may be applicable to
your state. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State
Considerations. This prospectus provides a description of
the material rights and obligations under the Contract. Your
Contract (including any riders and/or endorsements) represents
the contractual agreement between you and us. Any guarantees
provided for under your Contract or through optional riders are
backed by our financial strength and claims paying ability. You
must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard
to such guarantees. Your financial advisor or financial
advisor’s firm is not responsible for any Contract
guarantees.
Some of the Terms
used in this Prospectus may be new to you. You will find a
glossary of certain terms in the TERMS USED IN THIS
PROSPECTUS section.
Pacific Odyssey
Basics
An annuity contract may be appropriate if you are looking for
retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial
objectives. Discuss with your financial advisor whether a
variable annuity, optional benefits and which underlying
Investment Options are appropriate for you, taking into
consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance
needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs,
time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information.
Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for
you.
This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to
withdraw money for short-term needs, because tax penalties for
early withdrawal may apply.
You should consider the Contract’s investment and income
benefits, as well as its costs.
Pacific Odyssey is an annuity contract between you and Pacific
Life. Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase
and the annuitization (income) phase. The two phases are
discussed below.
This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It
allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for
retirement or other goals, and/or to receive income in a variety
of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a
specified period of years.
Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a
Non-Qualified Contract with “after-tax” dollars. You
buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension
plan, or some form of an individual retirement annuity or
account (IRA). It is important to know that IRAs and qualified
plans are already tax-deferred which means the tax deferral
feature of a variable annuity does not provide a benefit in
addition to that already offered by an IRA or qualified plan. An
annuity contract should only be used to fund an IRA or qualified
plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax
deferral.
Pacific Odyssey is a variable annuity, which means that your
Contract Value fluctuates depending on the performance of the
Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose
how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”)
and how much you add each time.
3
AN OVERVIEW OF
PACIFIC ODYSSEY
Your
Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)
During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your
Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your
financial advisor for a refund. The amount refunded may be more
or less than the Purchase Payments you have made and the length
of the Free Look period may vary, depending on the state where
you signed your application and the type of Contract you
purchased.
You will find more information about the Right to Cancel
(“Free Look”) period starting on page 38.
The Accumulation
Phase
The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will
affect your Contract Value during the accumulation phase, as
well as the amount available to annuitize on the Annuity
Date.
The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and
continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation
phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Purchase
Payments subject to certain limitations, and choose Investment
Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out
of your Contract by making a withdrawal.
Investments
(“Purchase Payments”)
Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $25,000 for a
Non-Qualified Contract or a Qualified Contract. Additional
Purchase Payments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified
Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not
enforcing the minimum initial Purchase Payment on Qualified
Contracts or the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts on
Qualified and Non-Qualified Contracts, but we reserve the right
to enforce such minimums in the future.
You will find more information about Making Your Investments
(“Purchase Payments”) starting on page 20.
Investment
Options
Ask your financial advisor to help you choose the right
Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance. Any
financial firm or financial advisor you engage to provide advice
and/or make transfers for you is not acting on our behalf. We
are not responsible for any investment decisions or allocations
you make, recommendations such financial advisors make or any
allocations or specific transfers they choose to make on your
behalf. Some broker-dealers may not allow or may limit the
amount you may allocate to certain Investment Options.
You can choose from a variety of Variable Investment Options
(also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a
corresponding Portfolio of a Fund. The value of each Portfolio
will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and
returns are not guaranteed.
You can also choose any available fixed option that earns a
guaranteed rate of interest of at least 3% annually.
We allocate your Purchase Payments to the Investment Options you
choose. Your Contract Value will fluctuate during the
accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you have
chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment
Options you choose.
You will find more information about the Investment Options
and the Investment Advisers starting on page 16.
Transferring
Among Investment Options
You can transfer among Investment Options any time, subject to
certain limitations, until your Annuity Date without paying any
current income tax. Transfers are limited to 25 for each
calendar year. Only 2 transfers per month may involve the
Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund, BlackRock
Global Allocation V.I. Fund, GE Investments Total Return
Fund, International Value, International Small-Cap,
International Large-Cap, Emerging Markets, or PIMCO Global
Multi-Asset Investment Options. In addition, only 2 transfers
into or out of each American Funds Investment Option (American
Funds Asset Allocation, American Funds Growth or American Funds
Growth-Income) may occur in any calendar month. If you have used
all 25 transfers in a calendar year, you may make 1
additional transfer of all or a portion of your Variable Account
Value to the Cash Management Investment Option before the start
of the next calendar year. You can also make systematic
transfers by enrolling in our dollar cost averaging, portfolio
rebalancing or earnings sweep programs. Transfers made under
these systematic transfer programs or automatic quarterly
rebalancing under the Custom Model program are excluded from
these limitations. Some restrictions may apply to transfers to
or from any fixed option.
You will find more information about transfers and transfer
limitations starting on page 23.
4
Withdrawals
You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your
income or for other purposes. There is no withdrawal charge.
Some restrictions apply to making partial withdrawals from any
fixed option.
In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or
other distributions from your Contract. If you are under age
591/2,
a 10% federal tax penalty may also apply to taxable withdrawals.
You will find more information about withdrawals and
withdrawal minimums starting on page 37.
The Income
Phase
The income phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date.
Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive
a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive
a series of income payments over a fixed period or for life.
You can choose fixed or variable annuity payments, or a
combination of both. Variable annuity payments may not be
available in all states. You can choose monthly, quarterly,
semi-annual or annual payments. We will make the income payments
to you or your designated payee. The Owner is responsible for
any tax consequences of any annuity payments.
If you choose variable annuity payments, the amount of the
payments will fluctuate depending on the performance of the
Variable Investment Options you choose. After your Annuity Date,
if you choose variable annuity payments, you can exchange your
Subaccount Annuity Units among the Variable Investment Options
up to 4 times in any
12-month
period.
You will find more information about annuitization starting
on page 29 and annuity options available under the Contract
starting on page 30.
The Death
Benefit
Generally, the Contract provides a death payout upon the first
death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death
benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and
payment instructions in proper form. To whom we pay a death
benefit, and how we calculate the amount of the death benefit
depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own.
You will find more information about the death benefit
starting on page 32.
Optional
Riders
Optional Riders are subject to availability (including state
availability). Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure
you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with
your financial advisor for advice on whether an optional Rider
is appropriate for you. We reserve the right to restrict the
purchase of an optional living benefit Rider to only Contract
issue in the future.
Stepped-Up
Death Benefit
This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market
gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit,
which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract
Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s
81st birthday)
adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals. You
can only buy this Rider when you buy your Contract.
You will find more information about the Stepped-Up Death
Benefit starting on page 35.
Optional
Living Benefit Riders
You may purchase an optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary (if available). In addition, if you
purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or,
if available, within 60 days after any Contract
Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date
or Contract Anniversary. Your election to purchase an optional
Rider must be received in a form satisfactory to us at our
Service Center.
At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an
optional living benefit Rider, you must invest your entire
Contract Value in an asset allocation program or in Investment
Options we make available for these Riders. The allocation
limitations associated with these Riders may limit the number of
Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under
your Contract. See OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – General
Information – Investment Allocation
Requirements. Failure to adhere to the Investment Allocation
Requirements may cause your Rider to terminate. We reserve
the right to add, remove or change asset allocation programs or
Investment Options we make available for these Riders at any
time. We may make such a change due to a fund reorganization,
fund substitution, or when we believe a change is necessary to
protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these
Riders.
5
AN OVERVIEW OF
PACIFIC ODYSSEY
Distributions made due to divorce instructions or under Code
Section 72(t)/72(q) (substantially equal periodic payments)
are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may
adversely affect Rider benefits.
Taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is
greater than the annual withdrawal amount (“excess
withdrawal”) under a particular Rider may result in adverse
consequences such as a permanent reduction in Rider benefits or
the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under a Rider.
Some optional riders allow for owner elected
Resets/Step-Ups.
If you elect to
Reset/Step-Up,
your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at
our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract
Anniversary (“60 day period”) on which the
Reset/Step-Up
is effective. We may, at our sole discretion, allow
Resets/Step-Ups
after the 60 day period. We reserve the right to refuse a
Reset/Step-Up
request after the 60 day period regardless of whether we
may have allowed you or others to
Reset/Step-Up
in the past. Each Contract Anniversary starts a new 60 day
period in which a
Reset/Step-Up
may be elected.
Taking a loan while an optional living benefit Rider is in
effect will terminate your Rider. Work with your financial
advisor before taking a loan.
CoreIncome
Advantage Plus (Single)
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 4% of your Protected Payment Base per year (once
age 591/2
is reached), lock in market gains, and provides the potential to
withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount for life, if certain
conditions are met. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year
exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider,
then the Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you
may withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.
Beginning with the
1st anniversary
of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever
is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Resets or
Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Any reset may include a
change in the annual charge percentage (up to a maximum of
1.20%) associated with the Rider. Protected Payment Base,
Protected Payment Amount, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset
and Reset Date are described in OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single).
This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit VII
Rider – Single Life in the Rider attached to your
Contract.
You will find more information about CoreIncome Advantage
Plus (Single) starting on page 42.
CoreIncome
Advantage Plus (Joint)
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 4% of your Protected Payment Base per year (once
age 591/2
is reached), lock in market gains, and provides the potential to
withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, until the Rider
terminates, if certain conditions are met. If your total
withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal
amount allowed under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base
may decrease and the amount you may withdraw in the future under
the Rider may be reduced.
Beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to
an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Any reset may
include an increase in the annual charge percentage (up to a
maximum of 1.50%) associated with the Rider. Protected Payment
Base, Protected Payment Amount, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected
Reset and Reset Date are described in OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint).
Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status may
adversely affect the benefits of this Rider (see CoreIncome
Advantage Plus (Joint) – Ownership and
Beneficiary Changes).
This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit VII
Rider – Joint Life in the Rider attached to your
Contract.
You will find more information about CoreIncome Advantage
Plus (Joint) starting on page 46.
CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Single)
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year (once
age 591/2
is reached), lock in market gains, and provides the potential to
withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount for life, if certain
conditions are met. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year
exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider,
then the Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you
may withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.
Beginning with the
1st anniversary
of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever
is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Resets or
Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Any reset may include a
change in the annual charge percentage (up to a maximum of
1.50%) associated with the Rider. Protected Payment Base,
6
Protected Payment Amount, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset
and Reset Date are described in OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single).
This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit V
Rider – Single Life in the Rider attached to your
Contract.
You will find more information about CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Single) starting on page 51.
CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Joint)
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year (once
age 591/2
is reached), lock in market gains, and provides the potential to
withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, until the Rider
terminates, if certain conditions are met. If your total
withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal
amount allowed under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base
may decrease and the amount you may withdraw in the future under
the Rider may be reduced.
Beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to
an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Any reset may
include an increase in the annual charge percentage (up to a
maximum of 1.75%) associated with the Rider. Protected Payment
Base, Protected Payment Amount, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected
Reset and Reset Date are described in OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint).
Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status may
adversely affect the benefits of this Rider (see CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Joint) – Ownership and
Beneficiary Changes).
This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit V
Rider – Joint Life in the Rider attached to your
Contract.
You will find more information about CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Joint) starting on page 54.
CoreIncome
Advantage 5
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year, lock in market
gains, and provides the potential to receive 5% of a Protected
Payment Base for life, if certain conditions are met. Lifetime
withdrawals are available if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal was taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later. If your total withdrawals
in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed
under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base may decrease
and the amount you may withdraw in the future under the Rider
may be reduced.
Beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the
Contract Value. Any reset may include a change in the annual
charge percentage (up to a maximum of 1.20%) associated with the
Rider. Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance,
Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset and Reset Date are
described in OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – CoreIncome
Advantage 5.
This Rider is called the Core Withdrawal Benefit II Rider in the
Rider attached to your Contract.
You will find more information about CoreIncome
Advantage 5 starting on page 59.
CoreProtect
Advantage
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year, lock in market
gains, and provides the potential to withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount for life, if certain conditions are
met. Lifetime withdrawals are available if the oldest Owner (or
youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken after
the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year
exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider,
then the Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you
may withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.
Before the first withdrawal or 10 Contract Anniversaries from
the Rider Effective Date (whichever occurs first), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be increased
to the greater of the Annual Credit Value (a 5% Annual Credit is
added to this value) or the Highest Anniversary Value.
After the first withdrawal or 10 Contract Anniversaries
from the Rider Effective Date (whichever occurs first), the
Rider provides for Automatic Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of
the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Any reset may
include a change in the annual charge percentage (up to a
maximum of 1.50%) associated with the
7
AN OVERVIEW OF
PACIFIC ODYSSEY
Rider. Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance,
Rider Effective Date, Highest Anniversary Value, Annual Credit
Value, Annual Credit, Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset and
Reset Date are described in OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS –
CoreProtect Advantage.
This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit IV Rider
in the Rider attached to your Contract.
You will find more information about CoreProtect Advantage
starting on page 64.
CoreIncome
Advantage
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 4% of your Protected Payment Base per year, lock in market
gains, and provides the potential to receive 4% of a Protected
Payment Base for life, if certain conditions are met. Lifetime
withdrawals are available if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65
or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the
annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider, then the
Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you may
withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.
Beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the
Contract Value. Any reset may include a change in the annual
charge percentage (up to a maximum of 1.00%) associated with the
Rider. Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance,
Automatic Reset, Owner-Elected Reset and Reset Date are
described in OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – CoreIncome
Advantage.
This Rider is called the Core Withdrawal Benefit Rider in the
Rider attached to your Contract.
You will find more information about CoreIncome Advantage
starting on page 70.
Income
Access
This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw
up to 7% of your Protected Payment Base per year and lock in
market gains, if certain conditions are met. If your total
withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal
amount allowed under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base
may decrease and the amount you may withdraw in the future under
the Rider may be reduced. This Rider does not provide lifetime
withdrawal benefits.
Starting May 1, 2007, on any Contract Anniversary beginning
with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent
Step-Up
Date, whichever is later, this Rider provides for Automatic
Step-Ups or
Owner-Elected
Step-Ups of
the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. If you want to
participate in Automatic
Step-Ups,
you must make an affirmative election in a form satisfactory to
us. Any
Step-Up may
include a change in the annual charge percentage (up to a
maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider. Protected Payment
Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Automatic
Step-Up,
Owner-Elected
Step-Up, and
Step-Up Date
are described in OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – Income
Access.
You will find more information about Income Access starting
on page 74.
Guaranteed
Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3)
This optional Rider allows for an additional amount that may be
added to your Contract Value at the end of a
10-year
period (the “Term”), if certain conditions are met.
The Rider also provides for an additional option (the
“Step-Up”)
on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the
3rd anniversary
of the Rider Effective Date and before the Annuity Date. If the
Step-Up is
elected, your
10-year Term
would begin again as of the effective date of the
Step-Up
election, and may include a change in the annual charge
percentage (up to a maximum of 1.00%) associated with the Rider.
You will find more information about GPA 3 starting on
page 78.
Guaranteed
Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)
This optional Rider allows for an additional amount that may be
added to your Contract Value at the end of a
10-year
period (the “Term”), if certain conditions are met.
The Rider also provides for an additional option (the
“Step-Up”)
on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the
5th
anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the
Annuity Date. If the
Step-Up is
elected, your
10-year Term
would begin again as of the effective date of the
Step-Up
election, and may include a change in the annual charge
percentage (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.
You will find more information about GPA 5 starting on
page 80.
8
Guaranteed
Protection Advantage (GPA)
This optional Rider is only available if the original Effective
Date of the Rider is before April 1, 2003. The optional
Rider provides for an additional amount that may be added to
your Contract Value at the end of a
10-year
period (the “Term”), if certain conditions are met.
The Term begins on the Effective Date of the Rider.
You will find more information about GPA starting on
page 81.
9
AN OVERVIEW OF
PACIFIC ODYSSEY
Fees and
Expenses
This section of the
overview explains the fees and expenses that you will pay when
buying, owning and surrendering your Pacific Odyssey Contract.
Contract
Transaction Expenses
There are no front-end sales charges or withdrawal charges.
Premium taxes and/or other taxes may apply to your Contract. We
generally charge state premium taxes and/or other taxes when you
annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we
charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract
for details.
Periodic
Expenses
The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay
periodically during the time you own your Contract not including
Portfolio fees and expenses.
Separate
Account A Annual Expenses
(as a
percentage of the average daily Variable Account
Value1):
Without any
With
Stepped-Up
With Premier
Death Benefit
Rider
Death Benefit
Rider Only
Death Benefit
Rider Only
• Mortality and Expense Risk
Charge2
0.15%
0.15%
0.15%
• Administrative
Fee2
0.25%
0.25%
0.25%
• Death Benefit Rider
Charge2,3
N/A
0.20%
0.35%
• Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses
0.40%
0.60%
0.75%
Loan Expenses (interest on Contract Debt) (Loans are only
available with certain Qualified Contracts. See FEDERAL TAX
ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – General
Rules – Loans on page 96):
• Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus)
Charge20
0.75%
0.75%
• Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5)
Charge21
0.40%
0.75%
1
The
Variable Account Value is the value of your Variable Investment
Options on any Business Day.
2
This
is an annual rate and is assessed on a daily basis. The daily
rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.
10
3
If
you buy an optional Death Benefit Rider, we will add this charge
to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge until your Annuity
Date. The Premier Death Benefit is only available on Contracts
issued before May 1, 2003.
4
If
we process a loan on your Contract, we will charge you a gross
interest rate of 5.00% on your outstanding principal amount. We
will credit you the amount of 3.00% on any Contract Value
attributed to your Loan Account. The net amount of interest you
pay on your loan will be 2.00% annually. See FEDERAL TAX
ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – General
Rules – Loans.
5
Only
one withdrawal benefit rider (CoreIncome Advantage Plus
(Single), CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint), CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Single), CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus
(Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 5, CoreProtect Advantage,
CoreIncome Advantage, Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Single),
Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Joint), Foundation 10,
Automatic Income Builder, Flexible Lifetime Income (Single),
Flexible Lifetime Income (Joint), Lifetime Income Access Plus,
Income Access Plus, or Income Access) may be owned or in effect
at the same time. Only one income benefit rider (GIA Plus or
GIA 5) may be owned or in effect at the same time. Only one
accumulation benefit rider (GPA 3, GPA 5, or GPA) may
be owned or in effect at the same time.
6
If
you buy CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint), the
annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a
quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge
percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment
Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to
the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract
Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment
Base, see the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – CoreIncome
Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint). The quarterly
amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your
Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase
due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals
or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge
proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA
Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective
Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in
effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the Single
version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates
as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving
Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your
Contract Value is zero. Under the Joint version, we will waive
the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the
death of the surviving Designated Life, upon full annuitization
of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. The annual
charge is only waived for the quarter that we are notified of
death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES, AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
7
If
you buy CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint), the
annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a
quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge
percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment
Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to
the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract
Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment
Base, see the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS – CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint). The
quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to
changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment
Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease
due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the
charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding
the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider
Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider
is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the Single
version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates
as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving
Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your
Contract Value is zero. Under the Joint version, we will waive
the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the
death of the surviving Designated Life, upon full annuitization
of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. The annual
charge is only waived for the quarter that we are notified of
death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES, AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
8
If
you buy CoreIncome Advantage 5, the annual charge is
deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The
quarterly charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4)
multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected
Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if
purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if
the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete
explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage 5. The
quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to
changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment
Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease
due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the
charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding
the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider
Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider
is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. We will waive
the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the
death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full
annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is
zero. The annual charge is only waived for the quarter that we
are notified of death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES,
AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
9
If
you buy CoreProtect Advantage, the annual charge is deducted
from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly
charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4)
multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected
Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if
purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if
the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete
explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – CoreProtect Advantage. The quarterly
amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your
Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase
due to additional Purchase Payments, increases to the Annual
Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value, decrease due to
withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct this charge
proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA
Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective
Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in
effect, and when the Rider is terminated. We will waive the
annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death
of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization
of your Contract or if your Contract Value is zero. The annual
charge is only waived for the quarter that we are notified of
death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES, AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
10
If
you buy CoreIncome Advantage, the annual charge is deducted from
your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge
is the current charge percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by
the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at
Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is
purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation
of the Protected Payment Base, see OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage. The quarterly
amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your
Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase
due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals
or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge
proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA
Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective
Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in
effect, and when the Rider is terminated. We will waive the
annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death
of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization
of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. The annual
charge is only waived for the quarter that we are notified of
death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES, AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
11
If
you purchased Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Single or Joint),
the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage
multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The charge is deducted
from your Contract Value on an annual basis. The initial
Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment
if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value
if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a
complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see
APPENDIX I. The amount deducted may increase or decrease
due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected
Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments
and Annual Credits, decrease due to withdrawals or also change
due to Resets. We deduct this charge proportionately from your
Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the
Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and
while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated.
Under the Single version, we will waive the annual charge if the
Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract or
after the Contract Value is zero. Under the Joint version, we
will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result
of the death of the surviving Designated Life, upon full
annuitization of the Contract or after the Contract Value is
zero. The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year
that we are notified of the death or annuitization. See
CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges. Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Single or Joint) is
no longer available for purchase.
11
AN OVERVIEW OF
PACIFIC ODYSSEY
12
If
you purchased Foundation 10, the annual charge is equal to
the current charge percentage multiplied by the Protected
Payment Base. The charge is deducted from your Contract Value on
an annual basis. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to
the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or
is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a
Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the
Protected Payment Base, see the APPENDIX I. The amount
deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your
Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase
due to additional Purchase Payments and Annual Credits, decrease
due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct this
charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each
Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider
during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect,
and when the Rider is terminated. We will waive the annual
charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an
Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of
your Contract. The annual charge is only waived for the Contract
Year that we are notified of the death or annuitization. See
CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges. Foundation 10 is no longer available for purchase.
13
If
you purchased Automatic Income Builder, the annual charge is
equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the
Protected Payment Base. The charge is deducted from your
Contract Value on an annual basis. The initial Protected Payment
Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at
Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is
purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation
of the Protected Payment Base, see APPENDIX I. The amount
deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your
Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase
due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals
or also change due to Resets. We deduct this charge
proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract
Anniversary following the Rider Effective Date, during the term
of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the
Rider is terminated. We will waive the annual charge if the
Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract or
after the Contract Value is zero. The annual charge is only
waived for the Contract Year that we are notified of the death
or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. Automatic
Income Builder is no longer available for purchase.
14
If
you purchased Flexible Lifetime Income (Single or Joint), the
annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage
multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The charge is deducted
from your Contract Value on an annual basis. The initial
Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment
if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value
if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a
complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see
APPENDIX I. The amount deducted may increase or decrease
due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected
Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments
and Annual Credits, decrease due to withdrawals or also change
due to Resets. We deduct this charge proportionately from your
Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the
Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and
while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated.
Under the Single version, we will waive the annual charge if the
Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract.
Under the Joint version, we will waive the annual charge if the
Rider terminates as a result of the death of the surviving
Designated Life or upon full annuitization of the Contract. The
annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that we are
notified of the death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. Flexible
Lifetime Income (Single or Joint) is no longer available for
purchase.
15
If
you purchased Lifetime Income Access Plus or Income Access Plus,
the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage
multiplied by the Contract Value. The charge is deducted from
your Contract Value on an annual basis. We deduct this charge
proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract
Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the
term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the
Rider is terminated. Under the terms and conditions of the
Rider, the annual charge percentage may change to the current
charge percentage if an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset
occurs, but will never be more than the maximum charge
percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider
terminates as a result of death of an Owner or sole surviving
Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. The
annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that we are
notified of the death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES,
AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. Lifetime
Income Access Plus and Income Access Plus are no longer
available for purchase.
16
If
you buy Income Access, the annual charge is equal to the current
charge percentage multiplied by the Contract Value. The charge
is deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis. We
deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options
on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the
Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in
effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and
conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may change
to the current charge percentage if an Automatic
Step-Up or
Owner-Elected
Step-Up
occurs, but will never be more than the maximum charge
percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider
terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract.
The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that we
are notified of the death or annuitization. See CHARGES,
FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
17
If
you buy GPA 3, the annual charge is equal to the current
charge percentage multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection
Amount. The charge is deducted from your Contract Value on an
annual basis. The initial Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal
to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue
or is equal to Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a
Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the
Guaranteed Protection Amount, see OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3
(GPA 3). We deduct this charge proportionately from
your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following
the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and
while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated.
Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual charge
percentage may change to the current charge percentage if a
Step-Up is
elected but will never be more than the maximum charge
percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider
terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract.
The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that we
are notified of the death or annuitization. See CHARGES,
FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
18
If
you buy GPA 5, the annual charge is equal to the current
charge percentage multiplied by the Contract Value. The charge
is deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis. We
deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options
on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the
Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in
effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and
conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may change
to the current charge percentage if a
Step-Up is
elected but will never be more than the maximum charge
percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider
terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract.
The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that we
are notified of the death or annuitization. See CHARGES,
FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
19
If
you purchased GPA, the annual charge is equal to the current
charge percentage multiplied by the Contract Value. The charge
is deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis. We
deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options
on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the
Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in
effect. GPA is only available if the original Effective Date of
the Rider is before April 1, 2003. We will waive the annual
charge if the Rider terminates as a result of death of an Owner
or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your
Contract. The annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year
that we are notified of the death or annuitization. See
CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges.
20
If
you purchased GIA Plus, the annual charge is equal to the
current charge percentage multiplied by the greater of the
Contract Value or the Guaranteed Income Base. The charge is
deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis. The
initial Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase
Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to Contract
Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. The
Guaranteed Income Base is the amount invested to date grown at
5% annually (until the Contract Anniversary prior to the
youngest Annuitant’s
81st birthday)
that may be used for fixed annuity payments starting on the
Annuity Date. For a complete explanation of the Guaranteed
Income Base, see APPENDIX I. We deduct this charge
proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract
Anniversary and when you make a full withdrawal if the Rider is
in effect on that date, and when the Rider is terminated. We
will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result
of death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full
annuitization of your Contract. The annual charge is only waived
for the
12
Contract
Year that we are notified of the death or annuitization. See
CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges. GIA Plus is no longer available for purchase.
21
If
you purchased GIA 5, the annual charge is equal to the
current charge percentage multiplied by the Contract Value. The
charge is deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis.
We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment
Options on each Contract Anniversary, the Annuity Date, and when
you make a full withdrawal, if the Rider is in effect on that
date, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and
conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may change
to the current charge percentage if a
Step-Up
occurs, but will never be more than the maximum charge
percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider
terminates as a result of death of an Owner or sole surviving
Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. The
annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that we are
notified of the death or annuitization. See CHARGES, FEES,
AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.
GIA 5 is no longer available for purchase.
13
AN OVERVIEW OF
PACIFIC ODYSSEY
Total Annual Fund
Operating Expenses
You will find more about the underlying Funds starting on
page 16, and in each underlying Fund Prospectus which
accompanies this Prospectus.
This table shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating
expenses incurred by the Portfolios that you indirectly pay
during the time you own the Contract. This table shows the range
(minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses (including management
fees, shareholder servicing and/or distribution
(12b-1)
fees, and other expenses) charged by any of the Portfolios,
expressed as an annual percentage of average daily net assets.
The amounts are based on expenses paid in the year ended
December 31, 2010, adjusted to reflect anticipated changes
in fees and expenses, or, for new Portfolios, are based on
estimates for the current fiscal year.
Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares
of the corresponding Fund Portfolio at net asset value. The net
asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other
expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The
advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified
under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to
year. These fees and expenses are described in each Fund
Prospectus.
Minimum
Maximum
Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses
before any waivers or expense reimbursements
0.28%
1.74%
Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses
after any waivers or expense reimbursements
0.28%
1.70%
To help limit Fund expenses, Fund advisers have contractually
agreed to reduce investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse
certain Portfolios of their respective Funds which may reduce
the Portfolio’s expenses. The range of expenses in the
first row above does not include the effect of any waiver
and/or
expense reimbursement arrangement. The range of expenses in the
second row above includes the effect of waiver
and/or
expense reimbursement arrangements that will remain in effect at
least through April 30, 2012. There can be no assurance
that expense waivers or reimbursements will be extended beyond
their current terms, and they may not cover certain expenses
such as extraordinary expenses. See each Fund prospectus for
complete information regarding annual operating expenses of that
Fund.
14
Examples
The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost
of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in
other variable annuity contracts. The maximum amounts reflected
below include the maximum periodic Contract expenses, Contract
Transaction Expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the
Portfolio with the highest fees and expenses for the year ended
December 31, 2010. The maximum amounts also include the
combination of optional Riders whose cumulative maximum charge
expenses totaled more than any other optional Rider combination.
The optional Riders included are Premier Death Benefit,
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint), GPA 3 and
GIA Plus. The minimum amounts reflected below include the
minimum periodic Contract expenses, Separate Account annual
expenses and the Portfolio with the lowest fees and expenses for
the year ended December 31, 2010. The minimum amounts do
not include any optional Riders.
The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for
the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Purchase
Payment has a 5% return each year and assumes the maximum and
minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options
available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower,
based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would
be:
•
If you surrendered, annuitized, or left your money in your
Contract:
1 Year
3 Years
5 Years
10 Years
Maximum*
$632
$1,939
$3,300
$6,930
Minimum*
$69
$218
$379
$847
*
In calculating the examples above,
we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all
the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section
of each Fund Prospectus. For more information on fees and
expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this
Prospectus, and see each Fund Prospectus. See the FINANCIAL
HIGHLIGHTS section in this Prospectus for condensed
financial information about the Subaccounts.
Some broker-dealers may not allow or may limit the amount you
may allocate to certain Investment Options. Work with your
financial advisor to help you choose the right Investment
Options for your investment goals and risk tolerance.
You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options,
for Contracts issued before November 14, 2003, the DCA Plus
Fixed Option, and for Contracts issued before July 1, 2003,
the Fixed Option.
Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Portfolio
of a Fund. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes
some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a
summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio,
including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment
techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see
the applicable Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a
Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ
EACH FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.
PACIFIC SELECT FUND
INVESTMENT GOAL
MANAGER
International Small-Cap
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Batterymarch Financial Management, Inc.
Mid-Cap Value
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
BlackRock Capital Management, Inc.
Equity Index
Seeks investment results that correspond to the total return of
common stocks that are publicly traded in the U.S.
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC
Small-Cap Index
Seeks investment results that correspond to the total return of
an index of small capitalization companies.
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC
Small-Cap Equity
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Franklin Advisory Services, LLC &
BlackRock Investment Management, LLC
American Funds Asset Allocation
Seeks high total returns (including income and capital gains)
consistent with preservation of capital over the long-term.
Capital Research and Management Company
(adviser to the Master Asset Allocation
Fund)
American Funds
Growth-Income
Seeks long-term growth of capital and income.
Capital Research and Management Company
(adviser to the Master Growth-Income
Fund)
American Funds
Growth
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Capital Research and Management Company
(adviser to the Master Growth Fund)
Large-Cap Value
Seeks long-term growth of capital; current income is of
secondary importance.
ClearBridge Advisors, LLC
Technology
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Columbia Management Investment Advisers, LLC
Floating Rate Loan
Seeks a high level of current income.
Eaton Vance Management
Small-Cap Growth
Seeks capital appreciation; no consideration is given to income.
Fred Alger Management, Inc.
Comstock
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Invesco Advisers, Inc.
Growth LT
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Janus Capital Management LLC
Focused 30
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Janus Capital Management LLC
Health Sciences
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Jennison Associates LLC
International Value
Seeks long-term capital appreciation primarily through
investment in equity securities of corporations domiciled in
countries with developed economies and markets other than the
U.S. Current income from dividends and interest will not be an
important consideration.
J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Long/Short Large-Cap
Seeks above-average total returns.
J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Mid-Cap Equity
Seeks capital appreciation.
Lazard Asset Management LLC
16
PACIFIC
SELECT FUND
INVESTMENT
GOAL
MANAGER
International Large-Cap
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
MFS Investment Management
Mid-Cap Growth
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.
Real Estate
Seeks current income and long-term capital appreciation.
Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.
Small-Cap Value
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
NFJ Investment Group LLC
Main Street Core
Seeks long-term growth of capital and income.
OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Emerging Markets
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Cash Management
Seeks current income consistent with preservation of capital.
Pacific Asset Management
High Yield Bond
Seeks a high level of current income.
Pacific Asset Management
Managed Bond
Seeks to maximize total return consistent with prudent
investment management.
Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Inflation Managed
Seeks to maximize total return consistent with prudent
investment management.
Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Pacific Dynamix –
Conservative Growth
Seeks current income and moderate growth of capital.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Pacific Dynamix –
Moderate Growth
Seeks long-term growth of capital and low to moderate income.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Pacific Dynamix –
Growth
Seeks moderately high, long-term growth of capital with low,
current income.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Portfolio Optimization Conservative
Seeks current income and preservation of capital.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative
Seeks current income and moderate growth of capital.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Portfolio Optimization Moderate
Seeks long-term growth of capital and low to moderate income.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Portfolio Optimization Growth
Seeks moderately high, long-term capital appreciation with low,
current income.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Portfolio Optimization Aggressive-Growth
Seeks high, long-term capital appreciation.
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC
Dividend Growth
Seeks long-term growth of capital.
T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.
Short Duration Bond
Seeks current income; capital appreciation is of secondary
importance.
T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.
Large-Cap Growth
Seeks long-term growth of capital; current income is of
secondary importance.
UBS Global Asset Management (Americas) Inc.
Diversified Bond
Seeks to maximize total return consistent with prudent
investment management.
Western Asset Management Company
Inflation Protected
Seeks to maximize total return consistent with prudent
investment management.
Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund Series II
Total return with a low to moderate correlation to traditional
financial market indices.
Invesco Advisers, Inc.
ALLIANCEBERNSTEIN
VARIABLE PRODUCTS
SERIES FUND, INC.
INVESTMENT GOAL
MANAGER
AllianceBernstein VPS
Balanced Wealth
Strategy Portfolio
Class B
Maximize total return.
AllianceBernstein L.P.
BLACKROCK VARIABLE
SERIES FUNDS, INC.
INVESTMENT GOAL
MANAGER
BlackRock Global
Allocation V.I. Fund
Class III
Seeks high total investment return.
BlackRock Advisors, LLC
FRANKLIN TEMPLETON
VARIABLE INSURANCE
PRODUCTS TRUST
INVESTMENT GOAL
MANAGER
Franklin Templeton VIP
Founding Funds
Allocation Fund
Class 4
Seeks capital appreciation, with income as a secondary goal.
Franklin Templeton Services, LLC serves as the Fund’s
administrator.
GE INVESTMENTS
FUNDS, INC.
INVESTMENT GOAL
MANAGER
GE Investments Total Return Fund
Class 3
Highest total return, composed of current income and capital
appreciation, as is consistent with prudent investment risk.
GE Asset Management Incorporated
MFS VARIABLE
INSURANCE TRUST
INVESTMENT GOAL
MANAGER
MFS Total Return Series –
Service Class
Seeks total return.
Massachusetts Financial Services Company
PIMCO VARIABLE
INSURANCE TRUST
INVESTMENT GOAL
MANAGER
PIMCO Global
Multi-Asset Portfolio – Advisor Class
Seeks total return which exceeds that of a blend of 60% MSCI
World Index/40% Barclays Capital U.S. Aggregate Index.
Pacific Investment Management Company, LLC
18
The
Investment Advisers
Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), a subsidiary of Pacific
Life Insurance Company, is the investment adviser for the
Pacific Select Fund. PLFA and the Pacific Select Fund’s
Board of Trustees oversee the management of all the Pacific
Select Fund’s Portfolios, and PLFA also manages certain
portfolios directly. PLFA also does business under the name
“Pacific Asset Management” and manages the Pacific
Select Fund’s Cash Management and High Yield Bond
Portfolios under that name.
Invesco Advisers, Inc. is the investment adviser for the AIM
Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds).
AllianceBernstein L.P. is the investment adviser for the
AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc.
BlackRock Advisors, LLC is the investment adviser for the
BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. and has retained various
sub-advisors for its portfolios.
Franklin Templeton Services, LLC is the fund administrator for
the Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund of the
Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust.
GE Asset Management Incorporated is the investment adviser for
the GE Investments Funds, Inc.
Massachusetts Financial Services Company is the investment
adviser for the MFS Variable Insurance Trust.
Pacific Investment Management Company LLC is the investment
adviser for the PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust.
Invesco Advisers, Inc. is the investment adviser for the AIM
Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds).
The fixed options offer you a guaranteed minimum interest rate
on amounts that you allocate to these options. Amounts you
allocate to these options, and your earnings credited are held
in our General Account. For more detailed information about
these options, see THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.
To purchase a Contract, you must work with your financial
advisor to fill out an application and submit it along with your
initial Purchase Payment to Pacific Life Insurance Company at
P.O. Box 2290, Omaha, Nebraska
68103-2290.
In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of
the information on the application from your financial
advisor’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative
procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the
application to be received on the Business Day we receive the
transmission. If your application and Purchase Payment are
complete when received, or once they have become complete, we
will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some
information is missing from your application, we may delay
issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information.
However, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment for more
than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case,
we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment after
20 Business Days.
You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing
annuity. Call your financial advisor or call us at
(800) 722-4448.
Financial advisors may call us at
(800) 722-2333.
We reserve the right to reject any application or Purchase
Payment for any reason, subject to any applicable
nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines.
On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax
identification number for federal and state tax reporting
purposes.
The maximum age of a Contract Owner/Annuitant, including Joint
and Contingent Owners/Annuitants, for which a Contract will be
issued is 90. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of
his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole
Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies and we
are notified of the death before we issue the Contract, then we
will return the amount we received. If we are not notified of
the death and we issue the Contract, then the application for
the Contract and/or any Contract issued will be deemed cancelled
and a refund will be issued. Depending on the state where your
application was signed, the amount of the refund may be more or
less than the initial Purchase Payment received, or any other
Purchase Payment we received in connection with an exchange or
transfer. In most states, the refund will be the Contract Value
based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV)
after we receive proof of death, in proper form, of the Contract
Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amount used to pay
premium taxes and/or any other taxes, and minus the Contract
Value attributable to any additional amount as described in
CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Waivers and Reduced
Charges. Any refund may subject the refunded assets to
probate.
Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $25,000 for
Non-Qualified or Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not
enforcing the minimum initial Purchase Payment on Qualified
Contracts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum
initial Purchase Payment on Qualified Contracts in the future.
For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial
Purchase Payment is not included when you submit your
application, you must submit a portion of the required Contract
minimum and/or establish a pre-authorized checking plan (PAC). A
PAC allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial
Purchase Payment in equal installments over the first year.
Further requirements for PAC are discussed in the PAC form.
You must obtain our consent before making an initial or
additional Purchase Payment that will bring your aggregate
Purchase Payments over $1,000,000. If you allocate all or part
of your Account Value to the Fixed Option, the maximum aggregate
Account Value you may allocate to the Fixed Option is currently
$250,000. This limitation is subject to change at any time. Ask
your financial advisor about current limitations.
Making
Additional Purchase Payments
If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest
additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your
Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and
contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan or
the Internal Revenue Code (“the Code”). Each
additional Purchase Payment must be at least $250 for
Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts.
Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Purchase
Payment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum
additional Purchase Payment amounts in the future. Additional
Purchase Payments will be allocated according to the
instructions we have on file unless we receive specific
allocation instructions. Contracts issued in certain states may
limit additional Purchase Payments. If your Contract is in
closed status (e.g. Purchase Payments are no longer
accepted under the terms of your Contract, the Contract was
surrendered, a Free Look was exercised, or death of an Owner or
Annuitant occurred, etc.) and we receive additional Purchase
Payments that are equal to or less than $10.00 (“residual
payments”), the residual payments will not be refunded to
you. Instead, the funds will be donated to the Pacific Life
Foundation. We reserve the right to adjust the designated
threshold amount ($10.00) as deemed necessary. We will refund
any residual payment that is greater than $10.00.
Forms of
Purchase Payment
Your initial and additional Purchase Payments may be sent by
personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Purchase Payments
must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process
it. Acceptable forms of Purchase Payments are:
•
personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a
U.S. bank,
•
money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations
of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,
•
third party payments when there is a clear connection of the
third party to the underlying transaction, and
•
wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.
We will not accept Purchase Payments in the following forms:
•
cash,
•
credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,
•
money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations
of $10,000 or less,
•
starter checks,
•
cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or
personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the
payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,
•
third party payments if there is not a clear connection of the
third party to the underlying transaction, and
•
wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.
All unacceptable forms of Purchase Payments will be returned to
the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the
right to reject or accept any form of payment. If you make
Purchase Payments by check other than a cashier’s check,
your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during
the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we
receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that
your check has cleared.
You may allocate your Purchase Payments among any of the
available Investment Options. Allocations of your initial
Purchase Payment to the Investment Options you selected will be
effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Purchase
Payment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to
your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent
instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in
WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free
Look”). We reserve the right to require that your
allocation to any particular Investment Option must be at least
$500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining
Account Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment
Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent
allocation instructions.
If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity
contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative
procedures may vary depending on the state in which your
Contract is delivered.
The Custom Model program allows you, with the help of your
financial advisor, to create your own asset allocation model
that will comply with the Investment Allocation Requirements for
certain optional living benefit Riders. (See OTHER OPTIONAL
RIDERS – General Information –
Investment Allocation Requirements.) You will create
your own model using the parameters listed below.
Parameters. To create your model, you may select
Investment Options from the 4 Categories
(Categories A, B, C and D) listed below. You must
allocate at least 25% into each of Categories A, B, and C.
You may not allocate more than 15% into any one Investment
Option within Category A, B, or C. Category D is
optional and you are not required to allocate any part of your
Purchase Payment or Contract Value to this Category. If you
choose to allocate your Purchase Payment or Contract Value to
Category D, you are allowed to allocate up to 25% into any
one Investment Option within Category D. Allocation
percentages among the Categories must total 100%. The percentage
allocation requirements only apply to your Variable Account
Value. The model you create will be automatically rebalanced on
a quarterly basis.
Example: Assume a $100,000 Purchase Payment.
Following the parameters and using the Investment Options listed
from the Categories below, you may allocate your Purchase
Payment as follows:
•
Category A – 15% to Diversified Bond, 10% to
Managed Bond and 5% to Cash Management,
•
Category B – 15% to Focused 30, 10% to Small-Cap
Index, 10% to Mid-Cap Growth, 5% to Large-Cap Growth and 5% to
Large-Cap Value, and
•
Category C – 10% to International Value, 10% to
International Large-Cap and 5% to Emerging Markets.
The total allocated is 100%: Category A = 30%,
Category B = 45% and
Category C = 25%. If you want to include all
4 Categories when creating your model, you could adjust
your allocation percentages in Categories A, B and C and
allocate up to 25% to any combination of the Investment Options
in Category D. Keep in mind that you may select any
Investment Option within a Category and the allocation
percentages among the Categories must total 100%.
Category A – Fixed Income Investment
Options
Short Duration Bond
Cash Management
Managed Bond
Floating Rate Loan
High Yield Bond
Inflation Managed
Diversified Bond
Inflation Protected
Category B – Domestic Equity Investment
Options
Small-Cap Growth
Long/Short Large-Cap
American Funds
Growth-Income
American Funds Growth
Dividend Growth
Growth LT
Focused 30
Mid-Cap Equity
Large-Cap Value
Small-Cap Value
Small-Cap Equity
Main Street Core
Large-Cap Growth
Mid-Cap Growth
Small-Cap Index
Mid-Cap Value
Comstock
Equity Index
Category C – International Equity and
Sector Investment Options
Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds
Allocation Fund
American Funds Asset Allocation
Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth
Portfolio Optimization Moderate
Pacific Dynamix – Growth
Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth
MFS Total Return Series
You may make transfers between Investment Options within a
particular Group or from one Group to another Group as long as
you follow the Custom Model parameters. Transfers made will be
subject to any transfer and market timing restrictions (see
HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED –
Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions). Subsequent
Purchase Payments will be allocated according to your current
model allocation instructions. Any withdrawals must be made on a
pro rata basis from each of the Investment Options you selected
for your model.
You may terminate your participation in the Custom Model program
at any time. However, if you own an optional living benefit
rider and do not allocate your entire Contract Value to another
asset allocation model or Investment Options we make available
for the Riders, your Rider will terminate. If you allocate any
subsequent Purchase Payment or Contract Value inconsistent with
the Custom Model parameters, make transfers between Investment
Options outside the Custom Model parameters, or do not make a
withdrawal on a pro rata basis, you will no longer be
participating in the Custom Model program and your Rider will
terminate. Work with your financial advisor and consider your
options before making any Investment Option transfers. Any
changes in the allocation percentages due to market performance
will not be a violation of the program, since the model you
created will automatically be rebalanced on a quarterly basis.
We are under no contractual obligation to continue this program
and have the right to terminate or change the Custom Model
program at any time.
Each time you allocate your Purchase Payment to a Variable
Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of
“Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of
Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have
allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit
Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.
Example: You allocate $600 to Subaccount A. At
the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is
effective, the value of one Unit in Subaccount A is $15. As
a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract
for your $600 ($600 / $15 = 40).
Your
Variable Account Value Will Change
After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value
of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from
time to time, your Purchase Payment allocated to the Variable
Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original
Purchase Payments to which those amounts can be attributed.
Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number
of Units credited to your Contract.
Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the
investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For
example, the value of Units in the Equity Index Subaccount will
change to reflect the performance of the Equity Index Portfolio
(including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital
gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are
also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable
Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.
We calculate the value of all Subaccount Units on each Business
Day.
22
Calculating
Subaccount Unit Values
We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each
Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock
Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on
each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit
Value for a Subaccount is equal to:
Y × Z
where
(Y)
=
the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the
preceding Business Day; and
(Z)
=
the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a
“valuation period”) between that Business Day and the
immediately preceding Business Day.
The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any
valuation period is equal to:
(A ¸ B) − C
where
(A)
=
the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount
as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to:
a + b + c
where
(a)
=
the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio
shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation
period;
(b)
=
the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain
distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that
valuation period; and
(c)
=
any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive
number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other
amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for
any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have
resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract,
and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to
Investments;
(B)
=
the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio
shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding
valuation period; and
(C)
=
a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for
each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge
plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the
Administrative Fee (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS).
The Subaccount Unit Value may increase or decrease from one
valuation period to another.
Your initial Purchase Payment is effective on the day we issue
your Contract. Any additional Purchase Payment is effective on
the day we receive it in proper form. See ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION – Inquiries and Submitting Forms and
Requests.
The day your Purchase Payment is effective determines the Unit
Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract.
In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day
determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are
debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is
the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your
transaction is effective. Your Variable Account Value begins to
reflect the investment performance results of your new
allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.
Transfers are allowed 30 days after the Contract Date.
Currently, we are not enforcing this restriction but we reserve
the right to enforce it in the future. Once your Purchase
Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected,
you may transfer your Account Value less Loan Account Value from
any Investment Option to any other Investment Option, except the
DCA Plus Fixed Option. Transfers are limited to 25 for each
calendar year. Only 2 transfers in any calendar month may
involve any of the following Investment Options:
Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund, BlackRock
Global Allocation V.I. Fund, GE Investments Total Return
Fund, International Value, International Small-Cap,
International Large-Cap, Emerging Markets, or PIMCO Global
Multi-Asset. In addition, only 2 transfers into or out of each
American Funds Investment Option (American Funds Asset
Allocation, American Funds Growth or American Funds
Growth-Income) may occur in any calendar month.
Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made
before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to
or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh
calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not
occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer
is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this
requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Equity
Index Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any
transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the
following Monday. Transfers to or from the Cash Management
Variable Investment Option are excluded from this limitation.
23
For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers
that occur on the same day are considered 1 transfer. A
transfer of Account Value from the Loan Account back into your
Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered
a transfer under these limitations. Transfers that occur as a
result of the DCA Plus program, the dollar cost averaging
program, the portfolio rebalancing program, the earnings sweep
program, approved corporate owned life insurance policy
rebalancing programs or automatic quarterly rebalancing under
the Custom Model program are excluded from these limitations.
Also, allocations of Purchase Payments are not subject to these
limitations.
If you have used all 25 transfers available to you in a
calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the
Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year.
However, you may make 1 transfer of all or a portion of the
Account Value remaining in the Variable Investment Options into
the Cash Management Investment Option prior to the start of the
next calendar year.
There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the
absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options,
or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other
extraordinary circumstances.
If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your financial
advisor via telephone. If you (or your financial advisor)
request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above
limitations, we will notify you (or your financial advisor)
immediately.
Certain restrictions apply to any available fixed option. See
THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Transfer requests are generally
effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form,
unless you request a systematic transfer program with a future
date.
We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by
law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection
with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and
a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from
which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If
your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account
Value in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately
after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your
other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your
most recent allocation instructions.
We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit
the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that
you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend
transfers, and to impose further limits on the number and
frequency of transfers you can make. We also reserve the right
to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with
regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied
uniformly to all Contract Owners.
Market-timing
Restrictions
The Contract is not designed to serve as a vehicle for frequent
trading in response to short-term fluctuations in the market.
Accordingly, organizations or individuals that use market-timing
investment strategies and make frequent transfers should not
purchase the Contract. Such frequent trading can disrupt
management of the underlying Portfolios and raise expenses. The
transfer limitations set forth above are intended to reduce
frequent trading. In addition, we monitor certain large
transaction activity in an attempt to detect trading that may be
disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is
found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such
Contract Owners, or by a financial advisor or other party acting
on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require
preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are
disruptive to portfolio management can have an adverse effect on
Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s
performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value
of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners.
While these issues can occur in connection with any of the
underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are
subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to
abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities
may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to
take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the
time of the closing of the market on which the security is
traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.
Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency
of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on
certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract
Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and
procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity
or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part.
Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable
annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying
funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or
restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such
funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event
the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a
redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass
them on to you.
We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and
without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing
organization or individual or other party authorized to give
transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners.
Such restrictions could include:
•
not accepting transfer instructions from a financial advisor
acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and
•
not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or
other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner
at a time.
24
We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice,
restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole
discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or
interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any
applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.
Exchanges
of Annuity Units
Exchanges of Annuity Units in any Subaccount(s) to any other
Subaccount(s) after the Annuity Date are limited to 4 in any
12-month
period. For purposes of applying the limitations, multiple
exchanges that occur on the same day are considered 1 exchange.
See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus and
THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.
We offer 3 systematic transfer options: dollar cost
averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweep. There is
no charge for these options and transfers under these options
are not counted towards your total transfers in a calendar year.
However, they are subject to the same requirements and
restrictions as non-systematic transfers. You can have only one
dollar cost averaging or earnings sweep program in effect at one
time. Only portfolio rebalancing is available after you
annuitize.
Dollar
Cost Averaging
Dollar cost averaging is a method in which you buy securities in
a series of regular purchases instead of in a single purchase.
This allows you to average the securities’ prices over
time, and may permit a “smoothing” of abrupt peaks and
drops in price. Prior to your Annuity Date, you may use dollar
cost averaging to transfer amounts, over time, from any
Investment Option with an Account Value of at least $5,000 to
one or more Variable Investment Options. Each transfer must be
for at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum
Account Value and/or transfer amounts but we reserve the right
to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Transfers from
the Fixed Option (if available) under the dollar cost averaging
program are subject to a minimum duration of 12 months.
Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum duration but we
reserve the right to enforce such minimum in the future.
Detailed information appears in the SAI.
DCA
Plus
The DCA Plus Program is only available to Contracts issued
before November 14, 2003. The following information is only
applicable to those Contracts.
DCA Plus provides a way to transfer amounts monthly from the DCA
Plus Fixed Option to one or more Variable Investment Option(s)
over a period of up to one year. The initial minimum amount that
you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. The
minimum amount for subsequent Purchase Payments is $250.
Currently, we are not enforcing the initial or subsequent
Purchase Payment minimum amounts but we reserve the right to
enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Amounts allocated to
the DCA Plus Fixed Option are held in our General Account and
receive interest at rates declared periodically by us, but not
less than an annual rate of 3% (the “Guaranteed Interest
Rate”). The DCA Plus program can also be used with
allowable Asset Allocation Models or allowable Investment
Options to qualify for certain optional benefit riders offered
under your Contract. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.
Portfolio
Rebalancing
You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable
Investment Options under your Contract (e.g. 30% in
Subaccount A, 40% in Subaccount B, and 30% in
Subaccount C). Periodically, we will “rebalance”
your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you
have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts
from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one
earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have
rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually until your
Annuity Date. Only Variable Investment Options are available for
rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.
Earnings
Sweep
You may instruct us to make automatic periodic transfers of your
earnings from the Cash Management Subaccount or from the Fixed
Option (if available) to one or more Variable Investment Options
(other than the Cash Management Subaccount). Detailed
information appears in the SAI.
We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to
compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we
assume under the Contract (the “Risk Charge”). The
risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive
more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial
calculations at the time the Contract is issued is
“mortality risk.” We also bear mortality risk in
connection with
25
death benefit payable under the Contract. The risk that the
expense charges and fees under the Contract and Separate Account
are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses
is called “expense risk.”
This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to
0.15% of each Subaccount’s assets.
The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date if you select
fixed annuity payments. The base Risk Charge will continue after
the Annuity Date if you choose variable annuity payments, even
though we do not bear mortality risk if your Annuity Option is
Period Certain Only.
We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual
cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such
actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part
of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including
covering sales expenses on the Contracts.
Increase
in Risk Charge if an Optional Death Benefit Rider is
Purchased
We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.20% of
each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Stepped-Up
Death Benefit or 0.35% if your Contract was issued before
May 1, 2003 and you purchased the Premier Death Benefit.
The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 0.35% if the
Stepped-Up Death Benefit is purchased or 0.50% if the Premier
Death Benefit was purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge
will not continue after the Annuity Date. See DEATH BENEFITS
AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits.
We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we
incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and
administering the Contracts, including processing applications
and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory
authorities.
The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal
to 0.25% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is
guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A
correlation will not necessarily exist between the actual
administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract
and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of that particular
Contract. The Administrative Fee will continue after the Annuity
Date if you choose any variable payout option. We do not intend
to realize a profit from this fee.
If you purchase an optional Rider listed in the table below, we
will deduct an annual charge from your Investment Options
(excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option if you own CoreIncome
Advantage Plus (Single or Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 5
Plus (Single or Joint), CoreIncome Advantage, CoreProtect
Advantage or CoreIncome Advantage 5) on a proportionate
basis.
Depending on which Rider you own, the charge is deducted each
Contract Anniversary or every 3 months following the Rider
Effective Date (“Quarterly Rider Anniversary”). The
Rider charge will be deducted while the Rider remains in effect,
when the Rider terminates and for some Riders on the Annuity
Date. The annual charge for GIA 5 will be charged on the
Annuity Date if the Rider is still in effect. The charge is
deducted in arrears each Contract Anniversary or Quarterly Rider
Anniversary.
If your Rider charge is deducted each Contract Anniversary
and your Rider terminates on a Contract Anniversary, the
entire charge for the prior year will be deducted on that
anniversary. If the Rider terminates prior to a Contract
Anniversary, a prorated charge will be deducted on the earlier
of the day your Contract terminates or the Contract Anniversary
immediately following the day your Rider terminates. The charge
will be determined as of the day your Rider terminates.
If your Rider charge is deducted each Quarterly Rider
Anniversary and your Rider terminates on a Quarterly Rider
Anniversary, the entire charge for the prior quarter will be
deducted on that anniversary. If the Rider terminates prior to a
Quarterly Rider Anniversary, a prorated charge will be deducted
on the earlier of the day the Contract terminates or on the
Quarterly Rider Anniversary immediately following the day your
Rider terminates. The charge will be determined as of the day
your Rider terminates.
Any portion of the Rider’s charge we deduct from any fixed
option will not be greater than the annual interest credited in
excess of 3%. If you make a full withdrawal of the amount
available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct
the charge from the final payment made to you.
An optional Rider annual charge percentage may change if a
Step-Up/Reset occurs under the Rider provisions. However, the
annual charge percentage will not exceed the maximum annual
charge percentage (indicated in the table below) for the
applicable Rider. You may elect to opt-out of a Reset and your
annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was before
the Reset. If an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset never
occurs, the annual charge percentage established on the Rider
Effective Date is guaranteed not to change.
26
Annual
Charge Percentage Table
Maximum
Current
Annual Charge
To determine the amount to be
Annual Charge
Percentage
deducted, the Annual Charge
The Charge is
Optional Rider
Percentage
Under the Rider
Percentage is multiplied by the:
deducted on each:
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single)
0.30%
1.20%
Protected Payment Base
Quarterly Rider Anniversary
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint)
0.50%
1.50%
Protected Payment Base
Quarterly Rider Anniversary
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single)
0.60%
1.50%
Protected Payment Base
Quarterly Rider Anniversary
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint)
0.80%
1.75%
Protected Payment Base
Quarterly Rider Anniversary
CoreIncome Advantage 5
0.60%
1.20%
Protected Payment Base
Quarterly Rider Anniversary
CoreProtect
Advantage1
0.85%
1.50%
Protected Payment Base
Quarterly Rider Anniversary
CoreIncome
Advantage2
0.30%
1.00%
Protected Payment Base
Quarterly Rider Anniversary
Flexible Lifetime Income Plus
(Single)3
1.50%
1.50%
Protected Payment Base
Contract Anniversary
Flexible Lifetime Income Plus
(Joint)4
1.75%
1.75%
Protected Payment Base
Contract Anniversary
Foundation 105
1.50%
1.50%
Protected Payment Base
Contract Anniversary
Automatic Income
Builder6
1.05%
1.50%
Protected Payment Base
Contract Anniversary
Flexible Lifetime Income
(Single)7
0.90%
1.20%
Protected Payment Base
Contract Anniversary
Flexible Lifetime Income
(Joint)8
1.10%
1.20%
Protected Payment Base
Contract Anniversary
Lifetime Income Access
Plus9
0.90%
1.20%
Contract Value
Contract Anniversary
Income Access
Plus10
0.80%
1.20%
Contract Value
Contract Anniversary
Income
Access11
0.75%
0.75%
Contract Value
Contract Anniversary
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA
3)12
0.95%
1.00%
Guaranteed Protection Amount
Contract Anniversary
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA
5)13
0.75%
0.75%
Contract Value
Contract Anniversary
Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA)
0.10%
0.10%
Contract Value
Contract Anniversary
Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA
Plus)14
0.75%
0.75%
Greater of Contract Value or
Guaranteed Income Base
Contract Anniversary
Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5)
0.40%
0.75%
Contract Value
Contract Anniversary
1
If you purchased CoreProtect
Advantage and the Rider Effective Date is before May 2,2011, the charge percentage is equal to 1.05%. A Reset must
occur on or after May 2, 2011 to receive the reduced charge
percentage of 0.85%.
2
If you purchased CoreIncome
Advantage and the Rider Effective Date is before June 1,2010, the charge percentage is equal to 0.40%. A Reset must
occur on or after June 1, 2010 to receive the reduced
charge percentage of 0.30%.
3
If you purchased Flexible Lifetime
Income Plus (Single) and the Rider Effective Date is before
January 1, 2009, the charge percentage is equal to 0.85%
unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider
Effective Date is on or after January 1, 2009 and before
May 1, 2009, the charge percentage is equal to 0.95% unless
a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider
Effective Date is on or after May 1, 2009 and before
October 1, 2009, the charge percentage is equal to 1.25%
unless a Reset occurs.
4
If you purchased Flexible Lifetime
Income Plus (Joint) and the Rider Effective Date is before
January 1, 2009, the charge percentage is equal to 1.00%
unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider
Effective Date is on or after January 1, 2009 and before
May 1, 2009, the charge percentage is equal to 1.10% unless
a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider
Effective Date is on or after May 1, 2009 and before
October 1, 2009, the charge percentage is equal to 1.40%
unless a Reset occurs.
5
If you purchased Foundation 10
and the Rider Effective Date is before January 1, 2009, the
charge percentage is equal to 0.85% unless a Reset occurs. If
you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or
after January 1, 2009 and before October 1, 2009, the
charge percentage is equal to 1.35% unless a Reset occurs.
6
If you purchased Automatic Income
Builder and the Rider Effective Date is before January 1,2009, the charge percentage is equal to 0.85% unless a Reset
occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date
is on or after January 1, 2009 and before November 1,2010, the charge percentage is equal to 0.95% unless a Reset
occurs.
7
If you purchased Flexible Lifetime
Income (Single) and the Rider Effective Date is before
November 1, 2010, the charge percentage is equal to 0.65%
unless a Reset occurs.
8
If you purchased Flexible Lifetime
Income (Joint) and the Rider Effective Date is before
November 1, 2010, the charge percentage is equal to 0.85%
unless a Reset occurs.
9
If you purchased Lifetime Income
Access Plus and the Rider Effective Date is before July 1,2006, the charge percentage is equal to 0.40% unless a Reset
occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date
is on or after July 1, 2006 and before November 1,2010, the charge percentage is equal to 0.60% unless a Reset
occurs.
27
10
If you purchased Income Access Plus
and the Rider Effective Date is before November 1, 2010,
the charge percentage is equal to 0.40% unless a Reset occurs.
If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on
or after November 1, 2010 and before May 2, 2011, the
charge percentage is equal to 0.60% unless a Reset occurs.
11
If you purchased Income Access and
the Rider Effective Date is before March 1, 2004, the
charge percentage is equal to 0.30% unless a Step-Up occurs. If
you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or
after March 1, 2004 and before May 1, 2009, the charge
percentage is equal to 0.40% unless a
Step-Up
occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date
is on or after May 1, 2009 and before October 1, 2009,
the charge percentage is equal to 0.65% unless a Step-Up occurs.
12
If you purchased GPA 3 and the
Rider Effective Date is before January 1, 2009, the charge
percentage is equal to 0.45% unless a Step-Up occurs. If you
purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after
January 1, 2009 and before May 1, 2009, the charge
percentage is equal to 0.55% unless a
Step-Up
occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date
is on or after May 1, 2009 and before October 1, 2009,
the charge percentage is equal to 0.75% unless a Step-Up occurs.
13
If you purchased GPA 5 and the
Rider Effective Date is before March 1, 2004, the charge
percentage is equal to 0.10% unless a Step-Up occurs. If you
purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after
March 1, 2004 and before May 1, 2008, the charge
percentage is equal to 0.25% unless a Step-Up occurs. If you
purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after
May 1, 2008 and before January 1, 2009, the charge
percentage is equal to 0.40% unless as Step-Up occurs. If you
purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after
January 1, 2009 and before November 1, 2010, the
charge percentage is equal to 0.55% unless a Step-Up occurs.
14
If you purchased GIA Plus and the
Rider Effective Date is before May 1, 2009, the charge
percentage is equal to 0.50%.
See Mortality and Expense Risk Charge for the Stepped-Up
Death Benefit and Premier Death Benefit charge information.
Depending on your state of residence (among other factors), a
tax may be imposed on your Purchase Payments (“premium
tax”) at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a
partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit
proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as
taxes may be imposed. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are
currently in effect, but may change in the future. Some local
jurisdictions also impose a tax.
If we pay any premium taxes attributable to Purchase Payments,
we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value.
Premium tax is subject to state requirements. We normally will
charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract
Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable
premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial
withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or
when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium
taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory
taxes and any federal, state or local income, excise, business
or any other type of tax (or component thereof) measured by or
based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Purchase
Payments we have received. We currently base this charge on your
Contract Value, but we reserve the right to base this charge on
the amount of the transaction, the aggregate amount of Purchase
Payments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount,
that in our sole discretion we deem appropriately reimburses us
for premium taxes paid on this Contract.
We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value
for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract,
including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or
to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes
attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments.
Currently, we do not impose any such charges.
We may agree to waive or reduce charges under our Contracts, in
situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated
with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several
Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large
Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or
sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple
Contracts.
In addition, we may agree to waive or reduce some or all of such
charges and/or credit additional amounts under our Contracts, or
waive minimum Investment requirements for those Contracts sold
to persons who meet criteria established by us, who may include
current and retired officers, directors and employees of us and
our affiliates, trustees of the Pacific Select Fund, financial
advisors and employees of broker/dealers with a current selling
agreement with us and their affiliates, and immediate family
members of such persons (“Eligible Persons”). If such
Contracts are purchased directly through Pacific Select
Distributors, Inc. (PSD), Eligible Persons will not be afforded
the benefit of services of any broker/dealer and will bear the
responsibility of determining whether a variable annuity,
optional benefits and underlying Investment Options are
appropriate, taking into consideration age, income, net worth,
tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment
goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other
relevant information. In addition, Eligible Persons who
purchased their Contract through PSD, must contact us directly
with servicing questions, Contract changes and other matters
relating to their Contracts.
We will only waive or reduce such charges or credit additional
amounts on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale
or distribution of the Contract and/or costs associated with
administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. Any
additional amounts will be added to the Contract when we apply
Purchase Payments. We reserve the right to terminate waiver,
reduced charge and crediting programs at any time, including for
issued Contracts.
With respect to additional amounts as described above, in most
states you may not receive any amount credited if you return
your Contract during the Free Look period as described under
WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free
Look”).
Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees and other
expenses incurred by the various Fund Portfolios, net of any
applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and
expenses may vary. Each Fund is governed by its own Board of
Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of
expenses of any Portfolio. A Fund’s fees and expenses are
described in detail in the applicable Fund Prospectus and SAI.
Some Investment Options available to you are “fund of
funds”. A fund of funds portfolio is a fund that invests in
other funds in addition to other investments that the portfolio
may make. Expenses of fund of funds Investment Options may be
higher than non fund of funds Investment Options due to the two
tiered level of expenses. See the Fund prospectuses for detailed
portfolio expenses and other information before investing.
When you submit your Contract application, you must choose a
sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a
Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are
buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or
another person as Annuitant. Whether you have a sole or Joint
Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The
Contingent Annuitant will not have any Contract benefits,
including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole
surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a
sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However,
if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint
Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change
a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of
your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs
first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the
Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent
Annuitant may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or
Contingent) may be named upon or after reaching his or her
91st birthday.
We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the
Annuitant(s).
Annuitization occurs on the Annuity Date when you convert your
Contract from the accumulation phase to the annuitization
(income) phase. You may choose both your Annuity Date and your
Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize
some or all of your Net Contract Value, less any applicable
charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, (the
“Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion
Amount annuitized is at least $10,000. We will send the annuity
payments to the payee that you designate.
If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract
Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any Contract
Debt, any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other
taxes, and any optional Rider charges. This option of
distribution may or may not be available, or may be available
for only certain types of Contracts. Any such distribution will
be made to you in a single sum if the remaining Conversion
Amount is less than $10,000 on your Annuity Date. Distributions
under your Contract may have tax consequences. You should
consult a qualified tax adviser for information on full or
partial annuitization.
If you annuitize only a portion of your Net Contract Value on
your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to
elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value
distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that
remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If
this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity
Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this
Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection
with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second
Annuity Date. The second Annuity Date may not be later than the
date specified in the Choosing Your Annuity Date section
of this Prospectus. This option may not be available, or may be
available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be
aware that some or all of the payments received before the
second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. We recommend that you
contact a qualified tax adviser for more information if you are
interested in this option.
You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your
application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your
Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, in
proper form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of
your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity
Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary.
Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an
Annuity Date that is prior to an Annuitant’s attained
age 591/2.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date cannot be later
than his or her
100th birthday.
If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date cannot be later
than your younger Joint Annuitant’s
100th birthday.
Different requirements may apply as required by any applicable
state law or the Code.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be
subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet the Code
minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions
(RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance,
under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and
Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest
under the Contract must be
29
distributed to the Owner/Annuitant not later than the
Owner/Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date
(“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the
Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his or her
Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more
information see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an
Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date
will be your Annuitant’s
100th birthday
or your younger Joint Annuitant’s
100th birthday,
whichever applies. If you have a Qualified Contract and you do
not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application,
your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s
100th birthday.
However some states’ laws may require a different Annuity
Date. Certain Qualified Contracts may require distributions to
occur at an earlier age.
If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct
us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Net Contract Value, less
any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be
annuitized (if this net amount is at least $10,000) as follows:
•
the net amount from a fixed option will be converted into fixed
annuity payments, and
•
the net amount from your Variable Account Value will be
converted into variable annuity payments directed to the
Subaccounts proportionate to your Account Value in each.
Additionally:
•
If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, your default Annuity
Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain.
•
If you have a Qualified Contract, your default Annuity Option
will be Life with a five year Period Certain or a shorter
period certain as may be required by federal regulation. If you
are married, different requirements may apply. Please contact
your plan administrator for further information, if applicable.
•
If the net amount is less than $10,000, the entire amount will
be distributed in one lump sum.
You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified
tax adviser, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be
made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of
the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments,
Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other
matters.
You may make 3 basic decisions about your annuity payments.
First, you may choose whether you want those payments to be a
fixed-dollar amount and/or a variable-dollar amount. Second, you
may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity
Options below). Third, you may decide how often you want
annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the
payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity
Date.
Fixed and
Variable Payment Options
You may choose fixed annuity payments based on a fixed rate and
the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back
10 years, variable annuity payments that vary with the
investment results of the Subaccounts you select, or you may
choose both, converting one portion of the net amount you
annuitize into fixed annuity payments and another portion into
variable annuity payments.
If you select fixed annuity payments, each periodic annuity
payment received will be equal to the initial annuity payment,
unless you select a Joint and Survivor Life annuity with reduced
survivor payments when the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net
amount you convert to fixed annuity payments will be held in our
General Account (but not under any fixed option).
If you select variable annuity payments, you may choose as many
Variable Investment Options as you wish. The amount of the
periodic annuity payments will vary with the investment results
of the Variable Investment Options selected and may be more or
less than a fixed payment option. After the Annuity Date,
Annuity Units may be exchanged among available Variable
Investment Options up to 4 times in any 12 month
period. How your Contract converts into variable annuity
payments is explained in more detail in THE CONTRACTS AND THE
SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.
Annuity
Options
Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract,
although additional options may become available in the future.
For other Annuity Options see OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS.
1.
Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the
designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments
stop when the Annuitant dies.
30
2.
Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made
to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime,
with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose
to have payments guaranteed from 5 through 30 years (in
full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on
Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.
3.
Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made
to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary
Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic
payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the
secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to
have the payments during the lifetime of the surviving secondary
Annuitant equal 50%,
662/3%
or 100% of the original amount payable made during the lifetime
of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you
choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment
based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity
payments will be equal to 50% or
662/3%
of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the
Primary Annuitant; variable annuity payments will be determined
using 50% or
662/3%,
as applicable, of the number of Annuity Units for each
Subaccount credited to the Contract as of the date of death of
the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have
died.
4.
Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to
the designated payee, guaranteed for a specified period. You may
choose to have payments guaranteed from 5 through 30 years
(in full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on
Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.
Periodic payment amounts will differ based on the Annuity Option
selected. Generally, the longer the possible payment period, the
lower the payment amount.
Additionally, if variable payments are elected under Annuity
Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed
variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under
Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed
variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. If
you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments
in a single sum, we will not make any additional variable
annuity payments during the Annuitant’s lifetime or the
remaining guaranteed period after the redemption. The amount
available upon a full redemption would be the present value of
any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed
investment return. Full or partial redemptions of remaining
guaranteed variable payments are explained in more detail in the
SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.
If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under
Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the
remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among
the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or
corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed
payments:
•
the Owner;
•
the Joint Owner;
•
the Contingent Owner;
•
the Beneficiary; or
•
the Contingent Beneficiary.
If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation
entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments),
we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the
Owner’s estate.
If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments
have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining
amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as
rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the
date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights
granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the
following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or
corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted
by the Contract:
•
the Joint Owner;
•
the Contingent Owner;
•
the Beneficiary; or
•
the Contingent Beneficiary.
If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation
entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the
Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the
Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.
For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your
Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract
was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to
Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of
1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be
required when you seek any distribution under your Contract,
unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with
survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint
Annuitant.
You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly,
semi-annually, or annually. The amount of a variable payment
will be determined in each period on the date corresponding to
your Annuity Date, and payment will be made on the next
succeeding day.
Your initial annuity payment must be at least $250. Depending on
the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your
options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity
payments.
Amount of
the First Payment
Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the
amount of the first annuity payment under your Contract, taking
into consideration the annuitized portion of your Net Contract
Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on
the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount
will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities
and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this
amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint
and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make
payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If
you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount
will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the
Annuity Date and, for some Contracts in some states, the sex of
the Annuitant(s).
For fixed annuity payments, the guaranteed income factors in our
tables are based on an annual interest rate of 3% and the 1983a
Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If
you elect a fixed annuity, fixed annuity payments will be based
on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on
the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income
factors under the Contract.
For variable annuity payments, the tables are based on an
assumed annual investment return of 5% and the 1983a Annuity
Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you
elect a variable annuity, your initial variable annuity payment
will be based on the applicable variable annuity income factors
in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at
least the variable annuity income factors under the Contract.
You may choose any other annuity option we may offer on the
option’s effective date. A higher assumed investment return
would mean a larger first variable annuity payment, but
subsequent payments would increase only when actual net
investment performance exceeds the higher assumed rate and would
fall when actual net investment performance is less than the
higher assumed rate. A lower assumed rate would mean a smaller
first payment and a more favorable threshold for increases and
decreases. If the actual net investment performance is a
constant 5% annually, annuity payments will be level. The
assumed investment return is explained in more detail in the SAI
under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.
Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on
proof of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or of any
Contract Owner while the Contract is in force. Any death benefit
payable will be calculated on the “Notice Date”, which
is the day on which we receive, in proper form, proof of death
and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If
a Contract has multiple recipients, death benefit proceeds will
be calculated when we first receive proof of death and
instructions, in proper form, from any recipient. The death
benefit proceeds still remaining to be paid to other recipients
will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment
Options.
Death
Benefit Proceeds
Death benefit proceeds will be payable on the Notice Date. Such
proceeds will be reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or
other taxes and any Contract Debt. The death benefit proceeds
may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available
under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity
Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the
IRS and approved by us. The Owner’s spouse may continue the
Contract (see Death Benefits – Spousal
Continuation). In addition, there may be legal requirements
that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing
of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax
adviser before making a death benefit election.
The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the
following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or
corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in
the following order:
•
Owner,
•
Joint Owner,
•
Contingent Owner,
32
•
Beneficiary, or
•
Contingent Beneficiary.
If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation
entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds
will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.
Death
Benefit Amount
The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the
Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:
•
your Contract Value as of that day, or
•
your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each
withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate
Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio
of the amount of the withdrawal to the Contract Value
immediately prior to each withdrawal. The reduction made, when
the Contract Value is less than aggregate Purchase Payments made
into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount
withdrawn.
We calculate the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and
the death benefit will be paid in accordance with the Death
Benefit Proceeds section above.
See APPENDIX H: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP
DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.
Spousal
Continuation
Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s
spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the
deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract
until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the
Annuitant, or the Annuity Date, except in the case of a
Qualified Contract issued under section 403 of the Code.
The spousal continuation election must be made by the fifth
anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner for Non-Qualified
Contracts, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which
the fifth anniversary of the Contract Owner’s death falls
for Qualified Contracts. On the Notice Date, if the surviving
spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the
Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would
have been payable to the spouse as the deemed
Beneficiary/designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds.
This “Add-In Amount” is the difference between the
Contract Value and the death benefit proceeds that would have
been payable. The Add-In Amount will be added to the Contract
Value on the Notice Date. There will not be an adjustment to the
Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than
the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date. The Add-In
Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance
with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and
may be, under certain circumstances, considered earnings. The
Add-In Amount is not treated as a new Purchase Payment. A Joint
or Contingent Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the
Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract. Under IRS
Guidelines, once a surviving spouse continues the Contract, the
Contract may not be continued again in the event the surviving
spouse remarries. If you have purchased an optional living
benefit Rider, please refer to the Rider attached to your
Contract to determine how any guaranteed amounts may be affected
when a surviving spouse continues the Contract.
Example: On the Notice Date, the Owner’s
surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract. On that date,
the death benefit proceeds were $100,000 and the Contract Value
was $85,000. Since the surviving spouse elected to continue the
Contract in lieu of receiving the death benefit proceeds, we
will increase the Contract Value by an Add-In Amount of
$15,000 ($100,000 − $85,000 = $15,000).
If the Contract Value on the Notice Date was $100,000 or higher,
then nothing would be added to the Contract Value.
Death of
Annuitant
If a sole surviving Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the
amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death
Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in
accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.
If there is more than one Annuitant and an Annuitant who is not
an Owner dies, no death benefit proceeds will be payable. The
designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person
in the following order:
•
a surviving Joint Annuitant, or
•
a surviving Contingent Annuitant.
33
Death of
Owner
The amount of the death benefit will be the Death Benefit
Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance
with the Death Benefit Proceeds section if:
•
a Contract Owner who is an Annuitant dies before the Annuity
Date, or
•
a Contract Owner, who is not an Annuitant, and the Annuitant die
simultaneously.
If a Contract Owner who is not an Annuitant dies before the
Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to your
Contract Value as of the Notice Date and will be paid in
accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.
Non-Natural
Owner
If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a
Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in
Section 401 or 403 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will
be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the
Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules. If there are
Joint or Contingent Annuitants, the death benefit proceeds will
be payable on proof of death of the first annuitant. If there is
a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date,
such change will be treated as the death of the Owner (however,
under the terms of your Contract, you cannot change the Primary
Annuitant). The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the
Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the
Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in
the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or
(b) the Contract Value, less any charge for premium taxes
and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash
distribution and will be paid in accordance with the Death
Benefits Proceeds section.
Non-Qualified
Contract Distribution Rules
The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable
provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor
provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as
an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner
of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date,
distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within
1 year after the Owner’s death or complete
distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death.
In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient
must receive a final lump sum payment by the
5th anniversary
of the Contract Owner’s death, or elect to receive an
annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life
expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments
that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or,
if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic
distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s
life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for
purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under
section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an
annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof,
in proper form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier,
60 days (or shorter period as we permit) prior to the
1st anniversary
of the Owner’s death, the option to receive annuity
payments is no longer available. If a Non-Qualified Contract has
Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract
Owner to die.
The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death
benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with
Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in
writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the
designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us.
Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the
Owner’s designation.
Qualified
Contract Distribution Rules
Under Internal Revenue Service regulations and our
administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a
Qualified Plan as defined in Sections 401, 403, 457(b) or
Sections 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies
before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death
benefit proceeds must be made to the designated recipient in
accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires
the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by
December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar
year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of
his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”).
The second rule requires distribution of the entire death
benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar
year in which the
5th anniversary
of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year
rule”).
However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are
modified if the sole primary Beneficiary is a surviving spouse.
If the surviving spouse elects not to do an eligible rollover to
an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name,
then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However,
the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and
elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy. If
the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of
required distributions beyond the
1st anniversary
of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse may defer
required distributions until the later of:
•
December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant
died, or
•
December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant
would have turned
701/2.
You are responsible for monitoring distributions that must be
taken to meet IRS guidelines.
34
If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in
the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the
Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a
Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in
the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at
least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at
the time of the Annuitant’s death.
This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market
gains for your beneficiaries with a
stepped-up
death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any
previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s
81st birthday)
increased by the amount of additional Purchase Payments and
decreased by withdrawals that you make.
Purchasing
the Rider
You may purchase this optional Rider at the time your
application is completed. You may not purchase this Rider after
the Contract Date. This Rider may only be purchased if the age
of each Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date.
How the
Rider Works
If you purchase this Rider at the time your application is
completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first
Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), or the first Owner who is
also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit
proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or
(b) below:
(a)
the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.
The Death Benefit Amount as of any day before the Annuity Date
is equal to the greater of:
•
your Contract Value as of that day, or
•
your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each
withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate
Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio
of the amount of the withdrawal to the Contract Value
immediately prior to each withdrawal. The reduction made, when
the Contract Value is less than aggregate Purchase Payments made
into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount
withdrawn.
(b)
the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice
Date.
The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated
only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of
the death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant for
Non-Natural Owners), or the first death of an Owner who is also
an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date and is determined as
follows:
First we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been
as of your first Contract Anniversary and each subsequent
Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living
and before the Annuitant reaches his or her
81st birthday
(each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone
Date”).
We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date
by:
•
adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by
us since the Milestone Date, and
•
subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred
since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying
the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of
the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that
Milestone Date, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the
withdrawal. The reduction made, when the Contract Value is less
than the Death Benefit Amount, may be greater than the actual
amount withdrawn.
The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each
Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed
Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase this Rider.
Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit
Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable
under your Contract.
Any death benefit paid under this Rider will be paid in
accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.
See APPENDIX H: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP
DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.
Termination
The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:
•
the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for
withdrawal is made under the Contract,
•
the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the
Contract,
35
•
the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract, or
This Rider is not available for Contracts issued on or after
May 1, 2003. All references to this Rider in this section,
the Prospectus, and the Statement of Additional Information do
not apply to such Contracts.
If you purchased this Rider at the time your application was
completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or
the first Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity
Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of
(a) or (b) below:
(a)
the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.
The Death Benefit Amount as of any day prior to the
Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:
•
your Contract Value as of that day, or
•
your aggregate Purchase Payments less an adjusted amount for
each withdrawal increased at an effective annual rate of 6% to
that day, subject to a maximum of two times the difference
between the aggregate Purchase Payments and withdrawals.
The 6% annual rate of growth will take into account the timing
of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred by
applying a daily factor of 1.00015965 to each day’s
balance. The 6% effective annual rate of growth will stop
accruing as of the earlier of:
•
the Contract Anniversary following the date the Annuitant
reaches his or her
80th
birthday, or
•
the date of death of the sole Annuitant, or
•
the Annuity Date.
To determine the adjusted amount for each withdrawal we:
•
divide the amount of each withdrawal by your Contract Value
immediately before that withdrawal, and
•
then multiply the result by your Death Benefit Amount
immediately before that withdrawal.
For Contracts issued on or after February 2, 2003 and
before May 1, 2003, the effective annual rate of growth is
5% and a daily factor of 1.00013368 will apply.
(b)
the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the
Notice Date.
The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is
calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a
result of the death of the sole Annuitant (first Annuitant for
Non-Natural Owners), or the first death of an Owner who is also
an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, and is determined as
follows:
First, we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have
been as of the quarterly anniversary following the Contract Date
and as of each subsequent quarterly anniversary that occurs
while the Annuitant is living and up to and including the
Contract Anniversary following the Annuitant’s
65th birthday.
Quarterly anniversaries are measured from the Contract Date.
After the Contract Anniversary following the Annuitant’s
65th birthday,
we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of
each Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is
living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her
81st birthday.
Each quarterly anniversary and each Contract Anniversary in
which a Death Benefit Amount is calculated is referred to as a
“Milestone Date”.
We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date
by:
•
adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by
us since that Milestone Date, and
•
subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred
since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying
the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of
the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that
Milestone Date to the Contract Value immediately before the
withdrawal.
The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts as of the
notice date is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit if the
Rider is purchased. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed
Minimum Death Benefit is only made once death benefit proceeds
become payable under your Contract.
Any death benefit paid under this Rider will be paid in
accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.
36
Termination
The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:
•
the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for
withdrawal is made under the Contract,
•
the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the
Contract,
•
the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract, or
You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a
portion of the amount available under your Contract while the
Annuitants are living and your Contract is in force. You may
surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time.
If you surrender your Contract it will be terminated as of the
Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after
your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from
your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not
requiring the
30-day
waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right
to require a
30-day
waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may
request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific
percentage of an Account Value or your Net Contract Value. You
may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment
Options. If you do not specify Investment Options, your
withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options
proportionately.
Each partial withdrawal must be for $500 or more. Pre-authorized
partial withdrawals must be at least $250, except for
pre-authorized withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds
Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial
withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining
Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we
also reserve the right, at our option, to transfer that
remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a
proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation
instructions.
If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value
of less than $1,000, or if your partial withdrawal request is
for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as
described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section
below, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your
Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. However, we will
not terminate your Contract if you own an optional rider and a
partial withdrawal reduces the Net Contract Value to an amount
less than $1,000. Partial withdrawals from any fixed option in
any Contract Year may be subject to restrictions.
See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.
Amount
Available for Withdrawal
The amount available for withdrawal is your Net Contract Value
(Contract Value less Contract Debt) at the end of the Business
Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any
applicable optional Rider Charges, and any charge for premium
taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your
“withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required
or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. If you
own optional Riders, taking a withdrawal before a certain age or
a withdrawal that is greater than the allowed annual withdrawal
amount under a Rider, may result in adverse consequences such as
a reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime
withdrawals under the Rider.
You assume investment risk on Purchase Payments in the
Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for
withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the
total Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.
Pre-Authorized
Withdrawals
If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the
pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly,
quarterly, semi-annual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are
not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve
the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each
withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals
distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at
least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal
income tax on its taxable portion and may be subject to a tax
penalty of 10% if you have not reached
age 591/2.
Pre-authorized withdrawals cannot be used to continue the
Contract beyond the Annuity Date. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES
and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Additional information and
options are set forth in the SAI.
37
Special
Requirements for Full Withdrawals and Payments to Third Party
Payees
Instructions for a full withdrawal and surrender of your
Contract in proper form includes, among other things, a return
of the original Contract or a lost contract affidavit. For your
convenience, our Withdrawal Request form includes a lost
contract affidavit for your use in providing us with your full
withdrawal and surrender instructions. If you wish to have a
full or partial withdrawal check made payable to a third-party
payee, you must provide complete instructions and an original
signature is required on the Withdrawal Request form or your
withdrawal request instructions. If you wish to withdraw the
entire amount available under your Contract, you must either
return your Contract to us or sign and submit a Withdrawal
Request form or a Lost Contract Affidavit if no Withdrawal
Request form is completed.
Special
Restrictions Under Qualified Plans
Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals
from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your
Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may
not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made
pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in
Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) or to transfers from a
custodial account (as defined in Section 403(b)(7) of the
Code) except in cases of your:
•
severance from employment,
•
death,
•
disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,
•
reaching age
591/2,
or
•
hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.
These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges
between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from
these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or
individual retirement annuity. In the case of a
403(b) plan, these limitations do not apply to certain
salary reduction contributions made, and investment results
earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.
Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are
restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction
contributions, and do not include investment results. This
additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction
contributions made, or investment results earned, prior to dates
specified in the Code.
Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to
mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a tax
penalty of 10% if the distribution is not transferred directly
to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of
an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual
retirement annuity. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES. Distributions
may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and
ERISA rules relating to withdrawals from Contracts issued to
Qualified Plans are complex. We are not the administrator of any
Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax adviser
and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion
of your Contract Value.
Effective
Date of Withdrawal Requests
Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day
we receive them in proper form. If you make Purchase Payments by
check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards,
payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we
receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that
your check has cleared.
If your financial advisor is also an investment adviser
representative (“investment adviser”) associated with
his or her broker-dealer’s affiliated registered investment
adviser, you may authorize us to process a withdrawal from your
Contract to pay the investment advisory fee by signing a
Registered Investment Advisory Fee Withdrawal Authorization
form. Thereafter, your investment adviser must submit an
original Registered Investment Advisory Fee Withdrawal Request
form for each withdrawal.
Your investment adviser will be solely responsible for the
accuracy of any such fee payment calculation as well as the
frequency or reasonableness of each such fee withdrawal request.
We have no duty to inquire into the amount of the Contract Value
withdrawn.
All withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will
generally have federal income tax consequences, which could
include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified
tax adviser before making any withdrawal or selecting the
pre-authorized withdrawal option. See FEDERAL TAX
ISSUES.
You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund
during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually
the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your
Contract, but may vary if required by state law. The amount of
your refund may be more
38
or less than the Purchase Payments you have made. If you return
your Contract and it is post-marked during the Free Look period,
it will be cancelled as of the date we receive your Contract. In
most states, you will then receive a refund of your Contract
Value, based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value
(AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a
refund of any amount that may have been deducted as Contract
fees and charges, and minus any additional amount credited as
described in CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Waivers
and Reduced Charges. You bear the investment risk on any
additional amount credited.
In some states we are required to refund your Purchase Payments.
If your Contract was issued in such a state and you cancel your
Contract during the Free Look period, we will return the greater
of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the
Contract Value. In addition, if your Contract was issued as an
IRA and you return your Contract within 7 days after you
receive it, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments
(less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value.
Your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options
you indicated on your application, unless otherwise required by
state law. If state law requires that your Purchase Payments
must be allocated to Investment Options different than you
requested, we will comply with state requirements. At the end of
the Free Look period, we will allocate your Purchase Payments
based on your allocation instructions.
See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State
Considerations.
For replacement business and in some states, the Free Look
period may be extended and the amount returned may be different
than as otherwise described above. Please consult with your
financial advisor if you have any questions regarding your
state’s Free Look period and the amount of any refund.
You will find a complete description of the Free Look period and
amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the
Contract’s cover page, or on a notice that accompanies your
Contract.
If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity
contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative
procedures may vary, depending on the state in which your
Contract is issued.
Optional Riders are subject to availability (including state
availability). Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure
you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with
your financial advisor for advice on whether an optional Rider
is appropriate for you. We reserve the right to restrict the
purchase of an optional living benefit Rider to only Contract
issue in the future.
You may purchase an optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary (if available). In addition, if you
purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or,
if available, within 60 days after any Contract
Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date
or Contract Anniversary. Your election to purchase an optional
Rider must be received in a form satisfactory to us at our
Service Center.
Distributions made due to divorce instructions or under Code
Section 72(t)/72(q) (substantially equal periodic payments)
are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may
adversely affect Rider benefits.
Taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is
greater than the annual withdrawal amount (“excess
withdrawal”) under a particular Rider may result in adverse
consequences such as a permanent reduction in Rider benefits or
the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under a Rider.
Some optional riders allow for owner elected
Resets/Step-Ups.
If you elect to
Reset/Step-Up,
your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at
our Service Center within 60 days after the Contract
Anniversary (“60 day period”) on which the
Reset/Step-Up
is effective. We may, at our sole discretion, allow
Resets/Step-Ups
after the 60 day period. We reserve the right to refuse a
Reset/Step-Up
request after the 60 day period regardless of whether we
may have allowed you or others to
Reset/Step-Up
in the past. Each Contract Anniversary starts a new 60 day
period in which a
Reset/Step-Up
may be elected.
Some broker/dealers may limit their clients from purchasing some
optional Riders based upon the client’s age or other
factors. You should work with your financial advisor to decide
whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.
Taking a loan while an optional living benefit Rider is in
effect will terminate your Rider. Work with your financial
advisor before taking a loan.
Investment
Allocation Requirements
At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an
optional living benefit Rider, you must allocate your entire
Contract Value to an asset allocation program or Investment
Options we make available for these Riders. You may allocate
your Contract Value according to the following requirements:
39
•
100% to one allowable Asset Allocation Model, OR
•
100% among allowable Investment Options.
You may also use the DCA Plus program to transfer amounts to an
Asset Allocation Model or among the Investment Options listed
below. Currently, the allowable Asset Allocation Models and
Investment Options are as follows:
Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund
Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative
GE Investments Total Return Fund
Portfolio Optimization Moderate
Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund
Portfolio Optimization Growth
MFS Total Return Series
Portfolio Optimization
Aggressive-Growth1
Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth
PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio
1
This Investment Option is not
available for any optional living benefit rider with a Rider
Effective Date on or after January 1, 2009.
You may transfer your entire Contract Value between an allowable
Asset Allocation Model and allowable Investment Options, between
allowable Asset Allocation Models or between allowable
Investment Options, subject to certain transfer limitations. See
HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED –
Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions. Keep in mind that
you must allocate your entire Contract Value to either
one allowable Asset Allocation Model or among the
allowable Investment Options. If you do not allocate your
entire Purchase Payment or Contract Value according to
the requirements above, your Rider will terminate.
Allowable Asset Allocation Models – Custom
Model. You may also make transfers between the
Investment Options available under the Custom Model program as
long as you follow the Custom Model parameters. However, if you
make transfers, subsequent Purchase Payments or change the
allocation percentages within your Custom Model and they do not
comply with the Custom Model parameters, you will no longer be
participating in the Custom Model program and your Rider will
terminate. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE
ALLOCATED – Custom Model for information about the
program.
Allowable Investment Options. You may allocate your
entire Contract Value among any of the allowable Investment
Options listed in the table above.
By adding an optional living benefit Rider to your Contract, you
agree to the above referenced investment allocation requirements
for the entire period that you own a Rider. These requirements
may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise
available to you under your Contract. We reserve the right to
add, remove or change allowable asset allocation programs or
allowable Investment Options at any time. We may make such a
change due to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, or when
we believe a change is necessary to protect our ability to
provide the guarantees under these riders. If such a change is
required, we will provide you with reasonable notice (generally
90 calendar days unless we are required to give less
notice) prior to the effective date of such change to allow you
to reallocate your Contract Value to maintain your rider
benefits. If you do not reallocate your Contract Value your
rider will terminate.
We will send you written notice in the event any transaction
made by you will involuntarily cause the Rider to terminate for
failure to invest according to the investment allocation
requirements. However, you will have 10 Business Days after the
date of our written notice (“10 day period”), to
instruct us to take appropriate corrective action to continue
participation in an allowable asset allocation program or
allowable Investment Options to continue the Rider.
Multiple
Rider Ownership
Only one withdrawal benefit rider (CoreIncome Advantage Plus
(Single), CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint), CoreIncome
Advantage 5 Plus (Single), CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus
(Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 5, CoreProtect Advantage,
CoreIncome Advantage, Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Single),
Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Joint), Foundation 10,
Automatic Income Builder, Flexible Lifetime Income (Single),
Flexible Lifetime Income (Joint), Lifetime Income Access Plus,
Income Access Plus, or Income Access) may be owned or in effect
at the same time. Only one income benefit rider (GIA Plus or
GIA 5) may be owned or in effect at the same time. Only one
accumulation benefit rider (GPA 3, GPA 5, or GPA) may
be owned or in effect at the same time.
40
Withdrawal
Benefit Rider Exchanges
Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange among the
following withdrawal benefit Riders:
FROM
TO
WHEN
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
Income Access
On any Contract Anniversary.
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
CoreIncome Advantage 5
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
CoreProtect Advantage
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
CoreIncome Advantage
Income Access
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
Income Access Plus
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
Lifetime Income Access Plus
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
Flexible Lifetime Income (Single) or (Joint)
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
Foundation 10
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
41
FROM
TO
WHEN
Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Single) or (Joint)
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
Automatic Income Builder
Income Access
CoreIncome Advantage
CoreProtect Advantage
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)
CoreIncome Advantage 5
CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)
On any Contract Anniversary.
When you elect an exchange, you are terminating your existing
Rider and purchasing a new Rider. The Initial Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance (if applicable) under the
new Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. Generally, if your Contract Value is lower than
the Protected Payment Base under your existing Rider, your
election to exchange from one rider to another may result in a
reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment
Amount, any applicable Remaining Protected Balance and any
Annual Credit that may be applied. In other words, your existing
protected balances will not carryover to the new Rider. If you
elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge for the new
Rider in effect at the time of the exchange. Only one exchange
may be elected each Contract Year. In addition, there are
withdrawal percentages, annual credit percentages, and lifetime
income age requirements that differ between the Riders listed
above. Work with your financial advisor prior to electing an
exchange.
Accumulation
Benefit Rider Exchanges
Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange among the
following accumulation benefit Riders:
When you elect an exchange, you are terminating your existing
Rider and purchasing a new Rider. The initial Guaranteed
Protection Amount under the new Rider will be equal to the
Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Generally, if
your Contract Value is lower than the Guaranteed Protection
Amount under your existing Rider, your election to exchange from
one rider to another may result in a reduction in the Guaranteed
Protection Amount. In other words, your existing Guaranteed
Protection Amount will not carryover to the new Rider. If you
elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge for the new
Rider in effect at the time of the exchange. Only one exchange
may be elected each Contract Year. In addition, there are
Step-Up eligibility requirements that differ between the Riders
listed above. Work with your financial advisor prior to electing
an exchange.
Optional
Riders Not Available for Purchase
The Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Single), Flexible Lifetime
Income Plus (Joint), Automatic Income Builder, Flexible Lifetime
Income (Single), Flexible Lifetime Income (Joint),
Foundation 10, Lifetime Income Access Plus, Income Access
Plus, GIA Plus and GIA 5 Riders are no longer available for
purchase. If you purchased one of these Riders, you will find
more information about the Rider in APPENDIX I: OPTIONAL
RIDERS NOT AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary if the age of each Annuitant is
85 years or younger on the date of purchase, the Contract
is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth IRA or
Inherited TSA, and you allocate your entire Contract Value
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be
distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
42
Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs
before the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age.
Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an
RMD withdrawal) that occurs after the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 4% of
the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during
that Contract Year and will be reset to 4% of the Protected
Payment Base each Contract Anniversary. If the oldest Owner (or
youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is
younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0);
however, once the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the
case of a Non-Natural Owner) reaches
age 591/2,
the Protected Payment Amount will equal 4% of the Protected
Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The
initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the
oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner).
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the
1st anniversary
of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever
is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or
Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is
purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see
the Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 4% of the
Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).
The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic
Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the
Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the
Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the
Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment
Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment
Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment
Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount
that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA or
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g.
reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
When the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment
Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be
reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and
will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 4% of the Protected
Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not
withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the
next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal,
the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.
43
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will
(immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected
Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess
of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX
A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for a
numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment
Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is
greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value
is less than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment
Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the
excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Early
Withdrawal
If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following
the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either
on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount,
whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example
5 in APPENDIX A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the adjustments to
the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
See example 6 in APPENDIX A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS for numerical examples that describe what
occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made
during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract
Year.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is younger than
age 591/2
when the Contract Value is zero, the Rider will terminate.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider
will terminate.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) that did not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the
date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole
surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner),
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base
On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall
apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was
originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase
Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any
future reset
44
options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply
and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when
the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount equal to the
Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this
Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment
Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual
charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before
the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue
in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future Participation. You may
elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time.
Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at
our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and before the
Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future
Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any
Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An
Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in
effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of
this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base and
Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will
occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by
the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of
this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase
Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments
received on or after the later of the
1st Contract
Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without
our prior approval.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment
Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any
annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine
if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity
Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take
withdrawals under the Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
This Rider terminates upon the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant. If the surviving spouse continues the
Contract, the surviving spouse may re-purchase this Rider (if
available) on any Contract Anniversary. The existing protected
balances will not carry over to the new Rider.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH
BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death
Benefits).
45
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the date of the death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant,
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of any
Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information),
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount, or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the oldest
Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural
Owner) is younger than
age 591/2.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (see the
Depletion of Contract Value subsection). In this case,
the Rider and the Contract will terminate the date of death of
an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX
A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS (SINGLE AND JOINT) SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples
are not intended to serve as projections of future investment
returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary if you meet the following eligibility
requirements:
•
the Contract is issued as:
•
Non-Qualified Contract (this Rider is not available if the Owner
is a trust or other entity), or
•
Qualified Contract under Code Section 408(a), 408(k), 408A,
408(p) or 403(b), except for Inherited IRAs, Inherited Roth IRAs
and Inherited TSAs,
•
both Designated Lives are 85 years or younger on the date
of purchase,
•
you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the
Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the Contract must be structured so that upon the death of one
Designated Life, the surviving Designated Life may retain or
assume ownership of the Contract, and
•
any Annuitant must be a Designated Life.
For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated
Lives must be any one of the following:
•
a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole
primary Beneficiary,
•
Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or
•
if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the
beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s
Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under
the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA or TSA,
for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as
sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the
beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the
custodial account.
46
If this Rider is added on a Contract Anniversary, naming your
Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will
not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Designated Lives (each a “Designated
Life”) – Designated Lives must be natural
persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider Effective
Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while this Rider is
in effect.
To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:
•
be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA
or TSA),
•
remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first
in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for
payment of any death benefit.
Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that
occurs before the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age.
Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except
an RMD withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated
Life is
age 591/2
or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum
amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing
the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 4% of
the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during
that Contract Year and will be reset to 4% of the Protected
Payment Base each Contract Anniversary. If the youngest
Designated Life is younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0).
However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches
age 591/2,
the Protected Payment Amount will equal 4% of the Protected
Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The
initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the
youngest Designated Life.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
Spouse – The Owner’s spouse who is
treated as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law. If
the Contract is a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the
Annuitant’s spouse who is treated as the Annuitant’s
spouse pursuant to federal law.
Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of
a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned
IRA or TSA).
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the
1st anniversary
of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever
is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or
Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is
purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see
the Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
If the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 4% of the
Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is
younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).
The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic
Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the
Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the
Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the
Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment
Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment
Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment
Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount
that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the
47
provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are
not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more
favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA or
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g.
reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
When the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment
Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be
reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and
will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 4% of the Protected
Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not
withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the
next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal,
the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will
(immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected
Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess
of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in
APPENDIX A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS SAMPLE CALCULATIONS
for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected
Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a
withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the
Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, the
Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is
greater than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Early
Withdrawal
If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following
the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either
on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount,
whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example
5 in APPENDIX A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the adjustments to
the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only,
•
the youngest Designated Life is
age 591/2
or older, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
See example 6 in APPENDIX A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS for numerical examples that describe what
occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made
during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract
Year.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If the youngest Designated Life is younger than
age 591/2
when the Contract Value is zero, the Rider will terminate.
If the youngest Designated Life is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider
will terminate.
48
If the youngest Designated Life is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) that did not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the
death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base
On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall
apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was
originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase
Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any
future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will
again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset
occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount
equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this
Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment
Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual
charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before
the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue
in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future Participation. You may
elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time.
Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at
our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and before the
Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future
Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any
Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An
Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in
effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of
this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base and
Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will
occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by
the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of
this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase
Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments
received on or after the later of the
1st Contract
Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without
our prior approval.
49
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment
Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any
annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine
if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity
Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take
withdrawals under the Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies and the Surviving Spouse (who is also a
Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits) elects to
continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the
Surviving Spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the
Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Rider
terminates.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH
BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death
Benefits).
Ownership
and Beneficiary Changes
Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status,
including a dissolution of marriage, may adversely affect the
benefits of this Rider. A particular change may make a
Designated Life ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits
under this Rider. As a result, the Rider may remain in effect
and you may pay for benefits that you will not receive. You
are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor and
consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary changes to your Contract.
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for
lifetime benefits,
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the
Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving
Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change
in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of
the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant,
in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information),
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount, or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest
Designated Life is younger than
age 591/2.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (see the
Depletion of Contract Value subsection). In this case,
the Rider and the Contract will terminate the date of death of
all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits.
50
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX
A: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS (SINGLE AND JOINT) SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples
are not intended to serve as projections of future investment
returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary if the age of each Annuitant is
85 years or younger on the date of purchase, the Contract
is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth IRA or
Inherited TSA, and you allocate your entire Contract Value
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be
distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs
before the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age.
Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an
RMD withdrawal) that occurs after the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of
the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during
that Contract Year and will be reset to 5% of the Protected
Payment Base each Contract Anniversary. If the oldest Owner (or
youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is
younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0);
however, once the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the
case of a Non-Natural Owner) reaches
age 591/2,
the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected
Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The
initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the
oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner).
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the
1st anniversary
of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever
is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or
Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is
purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see
the Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the
Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).
The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic
Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the
Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the
Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the
Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment
Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment
Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment
Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount
that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
51
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA or
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g.
reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
When the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
591/2 years
of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment
Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be
reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and
will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected
Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not
withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the
next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal,
the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will
(immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected
Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess
of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX
B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for a
numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment
Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is
greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value
is less than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment
Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the
excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Early
Withdrawal
If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following
the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either
on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount,
whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example
5 in APPENDIX B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the adjustments to
the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
See example 6 in APPENDIX B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for numerical examples that describe
what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are
made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual
RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a
Contract Year.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is younger than
age 591/2
when the Contract Value is zero, the Rider will terminate.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider
will terminate.
52
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) that did not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the
date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole
surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner),
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base
On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall
apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was
originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase
Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any
future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will
again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset
occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount
equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this
Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment
Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual
charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before
the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue
in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future Participation. You may
elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time.
Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at
our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and before the
Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future
Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any
Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An
Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in
effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of
this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base and
Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will
occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by
the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of
this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase
Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments
received on or after the later of the
1st Contract
Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without
our prior approval.
53
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment
Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any
annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine
if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity
Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take
withdrawals under the Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
This Rider terminates upon the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant. If the surviving spouse continues the
Contract, the surviving spouse may re-purchase this Rider (if
available) on any Contract Anniversary. The existing protected
balances will not carry over to the new Rider.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH
BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death
Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the date of the death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant,
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of any
Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information),
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount, or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the oldest
Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural
Owner) is younger than
age 591/2.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (see the
Depletion of Contract Value subsection). In this case,
the Rider and the Contract will terminate the date of death of
an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX
B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS (SINGLE AND JOINT) SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples
are not intended to serve as projections of future investment
returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary if you meet the following eligibility
requirements:
•
the Contract is issued as:
•
Non-Qualified Contract (this Rider is not available if the Owner
is a trust or other entity), or
54
•
Qualified Contract under Code Section 408(a), 408(k), 408A,
408(p) or 403(b), except for Inherited IRAs, Inherited Roth IRAs
and Inherited TSAs,
•
both Designated Lives are 85 years or younger on the date
of purchase,
•
you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the
Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the Contract must be structured so that upon the death of one
Designated Life, the surviving Designated Life may retain or
assume ownership of the Contract, and
•
any Annuitant must be a Designated Life.
For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated
Lives must be any one of the following:
•
a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole
primary Beneficiary,
•
Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or
•
if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the
beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s
Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under
the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA or TSA,
for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as
sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the
beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the
custodial account.
If this Rider is added on a Contract Anniversary, naming your
Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will
not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Designated Lives (each a “Designated
Life”) – Designated Lives must be natural
persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider Effective
Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while this Rider is
in effect.
To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:
•
be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA
or TSA),
•
remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first
in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for
payment of any death benefit.
Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that
occurs before the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age.
Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except
an RMD withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated
Life is
age 591/2
or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum
amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing
the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of
the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during
that Contract Year and will be reset to 5% of the Protected
Payment Base each Contract Anniversary. If the youngest
Designated Life is younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0).
However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches
age 591/2,
the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected
Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The
initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the
youngest Designated Life.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
Spouse – The Owner’s spouse who is
treated as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law. If
the Contract is a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the
Annuitant’s spouse who is treated as the Annuitant’s
spouse pursuant to federal law.
Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of
a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned
IRA or TSA).
55
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the
1st anniversary
of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever
is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or
Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is
purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see
the Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
If the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the
Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is
younger than
591/2 years
of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).
The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic
Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the
Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the
Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the
Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment
Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment
Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment
Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount
that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA or
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g.
reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
When the youngest Designated Life is
591/2 years
of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment
Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be
reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and
will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected
Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not
withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the
next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal,
the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will
(immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected
Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess
of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in
APPENDIX B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS SAMPLE CALCULATIONS
for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected
Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a
withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the
Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, the
Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is
greater than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Early
Withdrawal
If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following
the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either
on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount,
whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example
5 in APPENDIX B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the adjustments to
the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
56
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only,
•
the youngest Designated Life is
age 591/2
or older, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
See example 6 in APPENDIX B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for numerical examples that describe
what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are
made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual
RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a
Contract Year.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If the youngest Designated Life is younger than
age 591/2
when the Contract Value is zero, the Rider will terminate.
If the youngest Designated Life is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider
will terminate.
If the youngest Designated Life is
age 591/2
or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a
withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) that did not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the
death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base
On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall
apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was
originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase
Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any
future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will
again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset
occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount
equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this
Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount
equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment
Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual
charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before
the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue
in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future Participation. You may
elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time.
Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at
our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and before the
Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future
Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any
Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An
Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in
effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of
this Reset.
57
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base and
Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will
occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by
the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of
this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase
Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments
received on or after the later of the
1st Contract
Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without
our prior approval.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment
Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any
annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine
if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity
Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take
withdrawals under the Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies and the Surviving Spouse (who is also a
Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits) elects to
continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the
Surviving Spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the
Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Rider
terminates.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH
BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death
Benefits).
Ownership
and Beneficiary Changes
Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status,
including a dissolution of marriage, may adversely affect the
benefits of this Rider. A particular change may make a
Designated Life ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits
under this Rider. As a result, the Rider may remain in effect
and you may pay for benefits that you will not receive. You
are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor and
consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary changes to your Contract.
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for
lifetime benefits,
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the
Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving
Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change
in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of
the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant,
in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA),
58
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information),
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount, or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest
Designated Life is younger than
age 591/2.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (see the
Depletion of Contract Value subsection). In this case,
the Rider and the Contract will terminate the date of death of
all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits.
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX
B: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 PLUS (SINGLE AND JOINT) SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples
are not intended to serve as projections of future investment
returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary (if available) if the age of each
Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase,
the Contract is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth
IRA or Inherited TSA, and you allocate your entire Contract
Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider
Effective Date is equal to 5% multiplied by the Protected
Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during
that Contract Year.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is younger than age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) when the first
withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider
Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date
is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider, unless
withdrawals are guaranteed until the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner). The initial Remaining Protected Balance is
equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary
after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the
guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the
Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the
Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the
Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
59
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. Lifetime withdrawals up to the
Protected Payment Amount may continue after the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or
youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal was taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later. If a withdrawal was
taken before age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) and there was no
subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). Once the
Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the
Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for
more information).
In addition, beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will
increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset
Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected
Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by
the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected
Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected
Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater
than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are
greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event
(e.g. reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a
withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in APPENDIX C: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the
adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a
withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the
Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be
reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount
withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
60
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to
zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the
Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
•
was age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the
Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the day of
the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole
surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner).
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this
Rider will terminate, or
•
was age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may
elect to withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each year
until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of
death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the
case of a Non-Natural Owner). If an Automatic or Owner-Elected
Reset occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated
to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal before 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) and you would like to
be eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an Automatic
or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and your first withdrawal
after that Reset must be taken on or after age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California). See the Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
subsection of this Rider. If you are younger than 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) when the Remaining
Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value remains, the Rider
will terminate and there is no opportunity for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal
will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
61
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The
limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and
withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future reset
options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply
and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when
the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are
changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset
Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this
Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract
Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage
may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES,
FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected
Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount.
Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is
less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract
Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised
to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an
Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written
confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine
62
if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity
Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take
withdrawals under the Rider.
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to
age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) and no Resets have
occurred.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Contract Value or Remaining Protected Balance is zero
when the Owner dies, this Rider will terminate. If the Contract
Value and Remaining Protected Balance are greater than zero and
the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect, the surviving
spouse of the deceased Owner may elect to continue the Contract
in accordance with its terms, and the surviving spouse may
continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero.
The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If a reset takes place then the provisions of
this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the
surviving spouse. In addition, if the surviving spouse is
age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal is taken after the most recent Reset Date and this
Reset Date occurred after the surviving spouse continued the
Contract, then the surviving spouse may take withdrawals of the
Protected Payment Amount (based on the new Protected Payment
Base) for life.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT
RIDERS – Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. In this
case, the Rider will terminate the date of the first death of an
Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount. In this case, the
Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or
63
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65
(591/2
if the Rider Effective Date is on or after March 14, 2011
and your Rider was issued in California) or older when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX
C: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 5 SAMPLE CALCULATIONS. The examples
are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for
example purposes only. These examples are not intended to
serve as projections of future investment returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary (if available) if the age of each Owner
and Annuitant is at least 55 and no greater than 85 years
of age on the date of purchase, the Contract is not issued as an
Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth IRA or Inherited TSA, and you
allocate your entire Contract Value according to the
Investment Allocation Requirements.
Rider
Terms
Annual Credit – An amount added to the Annual
Credit Value.
Annual Credit Value – One of two values (the
other value is the Highest Anniversary Value) that determine the
Protected Payment Base prior to the earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date.
The Annual Credit Value is increased each year by any Annual
Credits, plus any subsequent Purchase Payments received from the
most recent Contract Anniversary, during the periods described
above.
The initial Annual Credit Value is equal to the initial Purchase
Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract
Anniversary.
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be
distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Highest Anniversary Value – One of two values
(the other value is the Annual Credit Value) that determine the
Protected Payment Base prior to the earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date.
On any day after the Rider Effective Date and during the periods
described above, the Highest Anniversary Value is equal to:
•
the Highest Anniversary Value as of the prior day, plus
•
Purchase Payments received by us on that day.
On any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the
Highest Anniversary Value is equal to the greater of:
•
the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary, or
•
the Highest Anniversary Value immediately prior to that Contract
Anniversary.
The initial Highest Anniversary Value is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is age 65 or older when the first
withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider
Effective Date is equal to 5% multiplied by the Protected
Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during
the Contract Year.
64
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is age 64 or younger when the first
withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider
Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
5% multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less
cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The Protected Payment Amount will never be less than zero. The
initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is
equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will never be less than zero and will remain unchanged
except as otherwise described under the provisions of this
Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the
initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the
Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective
Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider, unless
withdrawals are guaranteed until the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner). The Remaining Protected Balance will never
be less than zero. The initial Remaining Protected Balance is
equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective
Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
Adjustment
to Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance Using
the Annual Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value
On each Contract Anniversary, while this Rider is in effect,
before the Annuity Date, and before the earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,
the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will
be equal to the greater of the Annual Credit Value or the
Highest Anniversary Value. An increase to the Annual Credit
Value or Highest Anniversary Value is not considered an
Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset and will not result in
a change to the annual charge percentage. In addition, once
resets become available (after the first withdrawal or 10
Contract Anniversaries as described above), eligibility for the
Annual Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value adjustment
cannot be reinstated by any Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected
Reset.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date and
prior to the earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,
will result in an increase in the Annual Credit Value, Highest
Anniversary Value, Protected Payment Base, and Remaining
Protected Balance equal to the Purchase Payment Amount.
Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date and
after the earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,
will result in an increase in the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the Purchase Payment Amount.
In addition, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to
restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of
all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the
1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each contract year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Lifetime
withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may continue
after the Remaining
65
Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest
Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural
Owner) was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was
taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later. If a withdrawal was taken at
age 64 or younger and there was no subsequent Reset, the
Rider will terminate once the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for a Highest
Anniversary Value feature and for an amount (an “Annual
Credit”) to be added to the Annual Credit Value. Once the
Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the
Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for
more information).
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The Annual Credit Value or the Highest
Anniversary Value (whichever is greater) will increase the
Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance prior
to the earlier of the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective
Date or 10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective
Date. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or
decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A
withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment
Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by the amount
of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected Payment
Base. If a withdrawal is greater than Protected Payment Amount
and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base,
both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess
amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the
Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected
Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event
(e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in APPENDIX D: COREPROTECT ADVANTAGE
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the
adjustments to the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount as a result of an excess
withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected
Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater
than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
66
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – General Rules – Required
Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment
Amount will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero, or
•
was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment
Amount will be paid each year until the day of death of an Owner
or sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner).
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will
terminate, or
•
was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw
up to the Protected Payment Amount each year until the day of
death of an Owner or the sole surviving Annuitant (first
Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner). If an Automatic
or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance
will be reinstated to an amount equal to the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal at age 64 or younger and you would
like to be eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an
Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and your first
withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or after
age 65. See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you
are age 64 or younger when the Remaining Protected Balance
is zero and Contract Value remains, the Rider will terminate and
there is no opportunity for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Annual
Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an
Annual Credit will be added to the Annual Credit Value until the
earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal from the Contract since the Rider Effective
Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries measured from the Rider Effective Date.
The Annual Credit is equal to 5% of either:
•
total Purchase Payments if the Rider is purchased on the
Contract Issue Date, or
67
•
the Contract Anniversary Value at the time the Rider is added to
the Contract plus any subsequent Purchase Payments received
after the Rider Effective Date.
Once a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) or 10 Contract
Anniversaries has occurred, as measured from the Rider Effective
Date, no Annual Credit will be added to the Annual Credit Value.
In addition, Annual Credit eligibility cannot be reinstated by
any Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset.
The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal to the Contract
Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary, while
this Rider is in effect, before the Annuity Date, and after the
earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,
we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the
Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the
Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge
percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see
CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected
Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary after the earlier of:
•
the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or
•
10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,
elect to reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic
Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may change as
a result of this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount.
Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is
less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract
Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised
to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an
Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written
confirmation of your election.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
68
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to
age 65 and no Resets have occurred.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Contract Value or Remaining Protected Balance is zero
when the Owner dies, the Rider will terminate. If the Contract
Value and Remaining Protected Balance are greater than zero and
the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect, the surviving
spouse of the deceased Owner may elect to continue the Contract
in accordance with its terms and the surviving spouse may
continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero.
The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If a reset takes place, then the provisions of
this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the
surviving spouse. In addition, if the surviving spouse is age 65
or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most
recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the
surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving
spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
(based on the new Protected Payment Base) for life.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT
RIDERS – Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
•
the date of death of an Owner or the sole surviving Annuitant
(except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if
Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of an
Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount. In this case, the
Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or
•
the date of death of an Owner or the sole surviving Annuitant if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or older when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
69
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached
APPENDIX D: COREPROTECT ADVANTAGE SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples
are not intended to serve as projections of future investment
returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary (if available) if the age of each
Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase,
the Contract is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth
IRA or Inherited TSA, and you allocate your entire Contract
Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is age 65 or older when the first
withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider
Effective Date is equal to 4% multiplied by the Protected
Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during
that Contract Year.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is younger than age 65 when the first
withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider
Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
4% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date
is equal to 4% of the initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider, unless
withdrawals are guaranteed until the death of an Owner or sole
surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner). The initial Remaining Protected Balance is
equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary
after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the
guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the
Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the
Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the
Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. Lifetime withdrawals up to the
Protected Payment Amount may continue after the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or
youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age
65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later. If a withdrawal was taken before age 65 and there
was no subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).
Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of
the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider
for more information).
In addition, beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value.
70
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will
increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset
Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected
Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by
the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected
Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected
Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater
than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are
greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event
(e.g. reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a
withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in APPENDIX E: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE SAMPLE
CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of the adjustments to
the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance as a
result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than
the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than
the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is
greater than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
71
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to
zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than age 65 when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment
Amount will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero, or
•
was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment
Amount will be paid each year until the day of the first death
of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant
(first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner).
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than age 65 when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will
terminate, or
•
was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken
under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw
up to the Protected Payment Amount each year until the day of
the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole
surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner). If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset
occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an
amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal before 65 and you would like to be
eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an Automatic or
Owner-Elected Reset must occur and your first withdrawal after
that Reset must be taken on or after age 65. See the
Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are younger than 65
when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value
remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity
for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal
will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The
limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and
withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future reset
options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply
and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when
the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are
changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset
Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract
Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage
may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES,
FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
72
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected
Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount.
Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is
less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract
Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised
to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an
Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written
confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to
age 65 and no Resets have occurred.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Contract Value or Remaining Protected Balance is zero
when the Owner dies, this Rider will terminate. If the Owner
dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse
of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in
accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may continue to
take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this
Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.
The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If a reset takes place then the provisions of
this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the
surviving spouse. In addition, if the surviving spouse is age 65
or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most
recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the
73
surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving
spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
(based on the new Protected Payment Base) for life.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT
RIDERS – Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 65 when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the
date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount. In this case, the
Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 65 when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX
E: COREINCOME ADVANTAGE SAMPLE CALCULATIONS. The examples
are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for
example purposes only. These examples are not intended to
serve as projections of future investment returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any Contract Anniversary if the age of each Annuitant is
85 years or younger on the date of purchase, the Contract
is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth IRA or
Inherited TSA, and you allocate your entire Contract Value
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.
74
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum
amount that can be withdrawn each Contract Year under this Rider
without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is
equal to the lesser of:
•
7% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The Protected Payment Amount for a Contract Year is determined
at the beginning of that Contract Year and will remain unchanged
throughout that Contract Year. The initial Protected Payment
Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 7% of the initial
Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Step-Up Date – Any Contract Anniversary
beginning with the
1st Contract
Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent
Step-Up Date, whichever is later, on which an Automatic Step-Up
occurs or you elect to Step-Up the Remaining Protected Balance
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as
of that Contract Anniversary.
Rider Effective Date – The date the
guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the
Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the
Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the
Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
This Rider allows for withdrawals up to the Protected Payment
Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. This Rider does not provide lifetime
withdrawal benefits. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot
request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination
subsection of this Rider for more information).
The Income Access Rider also provides, on any Contract
Anniversary beginning with the
1st anniversary
of the Effective Date or most recent Step-Up Date, Automatic
Annual Step-Ups and Owner-Elected Step-Ups of the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal
to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. An Automatic Step-Up or Owner-Elected Step-Up
will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on
the Step-Up Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the
Protected Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected
Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the
Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the
Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the
Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is
greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that
are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the
Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under the Rider will reduce the Contract Value
by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event
(e.g. reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While the Rider is in effect, you may make cumulative
withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract
Year, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining
Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected
Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be
carried over to the next Contract Year.
75
Under your Contract, you may withdraw more than the Protected
Payment Amount each Contract Year. However, withdrawals of
more than the Protected Payment Amount in a Contract Year will
cause an immediate adjustment to the Remaining Protected
Balance, the Protected Payment Base, and, at the next Contract
Anniversary, the Protected Payment Amount.
If a withdrawal does not cause the total amount withdrawn during
the Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the
Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining
Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount
immediately following the withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
causes the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount, we will (immediately
following the excess withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment
Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the
Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the Remaining Protected
Balance either on a proportionate basis or by the total
withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining
Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX F:
INCOME ACCESS SAMPLE CALCULATIONS for a numerical example of
the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a
withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the
Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be
reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount
withdrawn.
The Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged until the
next Contract Anniversary, when the Protected Payment Amount for
the new Contract Year is determined.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
A withdrawal may not exceed the amount available for withdrawal
under the Contract, if such withdrawal would cause the
cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year to exceed the
Protected Payment Amount and reduce the Contract Value to zero.
Except as otherwise provided under the Required Minimum
Distributions subsection below, if, immediately after a
withdrawal, the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year do
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value
is reduced to zero, the following will apply:
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency, as elected
by you, but no less frequently than annually, until the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum or may not be applied to provide payments
under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract
Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected
Balance will be paid to the designated Beneficiary under the
series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency then
in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving
Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected
Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life
expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal
amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be
paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s
life expectancy.
Required
Minimum Distributions
On and after August 1, 2005, no adjustment will be made to
the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, RMD withdrawals will
cease and any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid under a
series of pre-authorized withdrawals in accordance with the
terms of the Rider.
76
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Step-Up
of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance
Regardless of which
Step-Up
option is used, on and after each
Step-Up
Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The
limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and
withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future
Step-Up
options available on and after the
Step-Up
Date, will again apply and will be measured from that
Step-Up
Date. Please discuss with your financial advisor your
Contract’s maximum Annuity Date when considering
Step-Up
options. A
Step-Up
occurs when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance are stepped-up to an amount equal to the Contract Value
as of the
Step-Up Date.
If you want to participate in Automatic
Step-Ups,
you must make an affirmative election in a form satisfactory to
us. Otherwise, you may
Step-Up the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance as
outlined under Owner-Elected
Step-Ups
(Non-Automatic) below.
Automatic
Step-Up. On
each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and
before the Annuity Date, we will automatically
Step-Up the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected
Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic
Step-Up (see
CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges).
Automatic
Step-Up –
Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract
Anniversary on which an Automatic
Step-Up is
effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected
Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and any change in the
annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately
before the Automatic
Step-Up. Any
future Automatic
Step-Ups
will continue in accordance with the Automatic
Step-Up
paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the
Step-Up is
effective.
Automatic
Step-Up –
Future Participation. You may elect not to participate
in future Automatic
Step-Ups at
any time. Your election must be received, in a form satisfactory
to us, at our Service Center, while this Rider is in effect and
before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for
future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Step-Ups,
you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Step-Ups at
any time. Your election to resume participation must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic
Step-Up
paragraph above.
Owner-Elected
Step-Ups
(Non-Automatic). On any Contract Anniversary beginning
with the
1st Contract
Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent
Step-Up
Date, whichever is later, you may elect to
Step-Up the
Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Base to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. The annual charge
percentage may change as a result of this
Step-Up.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the
Step-Up is
effective. The
Step-Up will
be based on the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.
Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and
Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will
occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
Step-Up.
You are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor
prior to electing an Owner-Elected
Step-Up.
We will provide you with written confirmation of your
election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive any additional Purchase Payments to the Contract,
we will immediately increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payment. However, the Protected Payment Amount will remain
unchanged until the next Contract Anniversary, when the
Protected Payment Amount for the new Contract Year is determined.
For purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict
additional Purchase Payments.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the
Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may
continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero (0). The surviving spouse may elect any of the
Step-Up options available under this Rider for subsequent
Contract Anniversaries.
77
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS –
Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically end on
the earliest of:
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day any
portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according
to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
subsection),
•
for Contracts with a
Non-Natural
Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including
Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract, except as otherwise provided in the
paragraph below,
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date, or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate on the first death
of an Owner or death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the day
the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of
the Contract if, at the time of those events, the Contract Value
is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the
Remaining Protected Balance under the provisions of the Rider.
If we are making pre-authorized withdrawals, the Contract will
terminate on the Contract Anniversary immediately following the
day the Remaining Protected Balance is zero.
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached
APPENDIX F: INCOME ACCESS SAMPLE CALCULATIONS. The
examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions
and are for example purposes only. These examples are not
intended to serve as projections of future investment
returns.
You may purchase the optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:
•
the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the
date of purchase,
•
the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your
selected Annuity Date, and
•
you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the
Investment Allocation Requirements.
How the
Rider Works
The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated,
for a
10-year period
(the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the
Rider.
On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to
your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less
than the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount
will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on
the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount.
The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be
considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options
according to your most recent allocation instructions.
Additional Purchase Payments that are not part of the Guaranteed
Protection Amount (Purchase Payments made after the first year
of a Term and not included in a
Step-Up)
will not be included in the benefit calculation at the end of
Term.
The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus
(b) minus (c) as indicated below:
(a)
is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
(b)
is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received
during the first year of the Term, and
78
(c)
is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract
during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is
calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior
to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal,
including any applicable premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to
the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.
For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of
the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract
Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase
Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract
Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value
on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments
received after the first year of a Term are not included in the
Guaranteed Protection Amount.
If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the
first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving
Annuitant occurs (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural
Owners), or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will
reflect any additional amount owed under the Rider before the
payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No
additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last
day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed
Protection Amount.
Optional
Step-Up in
the Guaranteed Protection Amount
On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the
3rd anniversary
of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date,
you may elect to increase
(“Step-Up”)
your Guaranteed Protection Amount.
If you elect the optional
Step-Up, the
following conditions will apply:
•
your election of a
Step-Up must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the
Step-Up is
effective,
•
the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract
Value as of the Effective Date of the
Step-Up
(“Step-Up
Date”),
•
a new
10-year Term
will begin as of the
Step-Up
Date, and
•
you may not elect another
Step-Up
until on or after the
3rd anniversary
of the latest
Step-Up Date.
We will not permit a
Step-Up if
the new
10-year Term
will extend beyond the Annuity Date.
The annual charge percentage may change if you elect a
Step-Up, but
it will never be more than the maximum annual charge percentage
associated with the Rider. If you do not elect any
Step-Up of
the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the Term of the Rider,
your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was on
the Effective Date of the Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of
the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance
with its terms, then the provisions of the Rider will continue
until the end of the Term.
Termination
The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term,
or, if earlier on:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the
Rider,
•
the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for
withdrawal is made under the Contract,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the last surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions
of the Contract, or
•
the Annuity Date.
If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our
Service Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary,
the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your
request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center
more than 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
will terminate the day we receive the request.
If the Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract
Anniversary that is at least 1 year from the Effective Date
of the termination before the Rider may be purchased again (if
available).
79
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached
APPENDIX G: GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 3
(GPA 3) AND GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 5
(GPA 5) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on
certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes
only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections
of future investment returns.
You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on
any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:
•
the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the
date of purchase,
•
the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your
selected Annuity Date, and
•
you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the
Investment Allocation Requirements.
How the
Rider Works
The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated,
for a
10-year period
(the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the
Rider.
On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to
your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less
than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection
Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the
difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the
Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount
added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and
allocated to your Investment Options according to your most
recent allocation instructions.
The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus
(b) minus (c) as indicated below:
(a)
is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
(b)
is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received
during the first year of the Term, and
(c)
is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract
during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is
calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior
to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal,
including any premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract
Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.
For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of
the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract
Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase
Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract
Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value
on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments
received after the first year of the Term are not included in
the Guaranteed Protection Amount. However, the Rider charge will
be based on the Contract Value which may include any subsequent
Purchase Payments that are not included in the Guaranteed
Protection Amount.
If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the
first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving
Annuitant occurs (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural
Owners), or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will
reflect any additional amount owed under the Rider before the
payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No
additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last
day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed
Protection Amount.
Optional
Step-Up in
the Guaranteed Protection Amount
On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the
5th anniversary
of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date,
you may elect to increase
(“Step-Up”)
your Guaranteed Protection Amount.
If you elect the optional
Step-Up, the
following conditions will apply:
•
your election of a
Step-Up must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the
Step-Up is
effective,
•
the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract
Value as of the Effective Date of the
Step-Up
(“Step-Up
Date”),
•
a new
10-year Term
will begin as of the
Step-Up
Date, and
•
you may not elect another
Step-Up
until on or after the
5th anniversary
of the latest
Step-Up Date.
We will not permit a
Step-Up if
the new
10-year Term
will extend beyond the Annuity Date.
80
The Guaranteed Protection Charge (“GPA 5 Charge”)
may change if you elect a
Step-Up, but
it will never be more than the GPA 5 Charge being charged
under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider. If you
do not elect any
Step-Up of
the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the lifetime of the
Rider, your GPA 5 Charge will remain the same as it was on
the Effective Date of the Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of
the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance
with its terms, then the provisions of the Rider will continue
until the end of the Term.
Termination
The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term,
or, if earlier on:
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any
portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according
to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we
receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,
•
the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for
withdrawal is made under the Contract,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the last surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions
of the Contract, or
•
the Annuity Date.
If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our
Service Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary,
the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your
request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center
more than 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
will terminate the day we receive the request.
If the Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract
Anniversary that is at least 1 year from the Effective Date
of the termination before the Rider may be purchased again (if
available).
Sample
Calculations
Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached
APPENDIX G: GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 3
(GPA 3) AND GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 5
(GPA 5) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS. The examples are based on
certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes
only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections
of future investment returns.
This Rider is only available if the original Effective Date of
the Rider is before April 1, 2003.
You may purchase this Rider on the Contract Date or on any
subsequent Contract Anniversary if:
•
the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the
date of purchase,
•
the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your
selected Annuity Date, and
•
you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the
Investment Allocation Requirements.
How the
Rider Works
The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated,
for a
10-year period
(the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the
Rider.
On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to
your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less
than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection
Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the
difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the
Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount
added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and
allocated to your Investment Options according to your most
recent allocation instructions.
81
The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus
(b) minus (c) as indicated below:
(a)
is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
(b)
is a percentage of each additional Purchase Payment, as
determined from the table below, paid to the Contract during the
Term,
Number
of Years Since
Percentage of
Purchase Payment
Beginning
of Term
Added to
Guaranteed Protection Amount
1 through 4
100
%
5
90
%
6
85
%
7
80
%
8 through 10
75
%
(c)
is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract
during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is
calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior
to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal
to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.
For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of
the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract
Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase
Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract
Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value
on that Contract Anniversary.
If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the
first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving
Annuitant occurs, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract
Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the Rider
before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full
withdrawal.
No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the
last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed
Protection Amount.
On or before the end of the Term, you can elect to repurchase
the Rider subject to its availability and the then current terms
and conditions of the Rider provided:
•
all Annuitant(s) are 80 years or younger at the start of
the new Term, and
•
the new Term does not extend beyond your selected Annuity Date.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of
the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance
with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue
until the end of the Term. Subject to the terms of the Rider,
the surviving spouse may repurchase the Rider for another Term
at the then current terms and conditions of the Rider, provided
the surviving spouse is age 80 or younger at the start of the
new Term and the new Term does not extend beyond the selected
Annuity Date. If the surviving spouse elects to not repurchase
the Rider, it will automatically terminate the day immediately
following the end of the Term.
Termination
The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:
•
the end of a Term,
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any
portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according
to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we
receive notification from the Owner to terminate this Rider,
•
the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for
withdrawal is made under the Contract,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the last surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues
Contract subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract, or
Pacific Life Insurance Company is a life insurance company
domiciled in Nebraska. Along with our subsidiaries and
affiliates, our operations include life insurance, annuity,
pension and institutional products, mutual funds, broker-dealer
operations, and investment advisory services. At the end of
2010, we had $215.5 billion of individual life insurance in
force and total admitted assets of approximately
$98.8 billion.
We are authorized to conduct our life insurance and annuity
business in the District of Columbia and in all states except
New York. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport
Center Drive, Newport Beach, California92660.
We were originally organized on January 2, 1868, under the
name “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company of
California” and reincorporated as “Pacific Mutual Life
Insurance Company” on July 22, 1936. On
September 1, 1997, we converted from a mutual life
insurance company to a stock life insurance company ultimately
controlled by a mutual holding company and were authorized by
California regulatory authorities to change our name to Pacific
Life Insurance Company. On September 1, 2005, Pacific Life
changed from a California corporation to a Nebraska corporation.
Pacific Life is a subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, a holding
company, which, in turn, is a subsidiary of Pacific Mutual
Holding Company, a mutual holding company. Under their
respective charters, Pacific Mutual Holding Company must always
hold at least 51% of the outstanding voting stock of Pacific
LifeCorp, and Pacific LifeCorp must always own 100% of the
voting stock of Pacific Life. Owners of Pacific Life’s
annuity contracts and life insurance policies have certain
membership interests in Pacific Mutual Holding Company,
consisting principally of the right to vote on the election of
the Board of Directors of the mutual holding company and on
other matters, and certain rights upon liquidation or
dissolutions of the mutual holding company.
Our subsidiary, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) serves
as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts.
PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach,
California92660. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with
broker-dealers, whose financial advisors are authorized by state
insurance departments to sell the Contracts.
We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an
insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with
respect to our General Account assets.
Separate Account A was established on September 7, 1994 as
a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under
the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the
“1940 Act”), as a type of investment company
called a “unit investment trust.” We established the
Separate Account under the laws of the state of California. The
Separate Account is maintained under the laws of the state of
Nebraska.
Obligations arising under your Contract are our general
corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets
in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account
attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the
Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by
the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising
from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss
(whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate
Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account
without regard to our other income, gain or loss.
We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence
its operations and for other purposes, but not to support
contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of
the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of
charges we make against the Separate Account and investment
results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are
ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any
time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider
any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on the
Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the
right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our
General Account.
The Separate Account is not the sole investor in the Funds.
Investment in a Fund by other separate accounts in connection
with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may
create conflicts. See the accompanying Prospectus and SAI for
the Funds for more information.
The table below is designed to help you understand how the
Variable Investment Options have performed. It shows the value
of a Subaccount Unit at the beginning and end of each period, as
well as the number of Subaccount Units at the end of each
period. A Subaccount Unit is also called an Accumulation Unit.
You should read the table in conjunction with the financial
statements for Separate Account A, which are included in its
annual report dated as of December 31, 2010.
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit
Death Benefit Rider
With Premier Death Benefit Rider
Number of
Number of
Number of
Subaccount
Subaccount
Subaccount
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
International Small-Cap
2010
$7.23
$8.99
376,237
$7.18
$8.91
82,057
$7.14
$8.85
1,118
2009
$5.57
$7.23
368,956
$5.54
$7.18
77,661
$5.52
$7.14
1,191
2008
$10.73
$5.57
354,474
$10.69
$5.54
59,904
$10.66
$5.52
908
2007
$10.28
$10.73
331,705
$10.27
$10.69
44,555
$10.26
$10.66
757
05/05/2006-12/31/2006
$10.16
$10.28
194,812
$10.16
$10.27
19,437
$10.16
$10.26
733
Mid-Cap Value
2010
$13.20
$15.94
245,672
$13.18
$15.88
45,980
$13.17
$15.84
692
05/01/2009-12/31/2009
$10.00
$13.20
232,324
$10.00
$13.18
46,640
$10.00
$13.17
708
Equity Index
2010
$10.01
$11.45
580,553
$9.85
$11.24
102,736
$9.72
$11.08
2,771
2009
$7.96
$10.01
970,470
$7.84
$9.85
172,165
$7.75
$9.72
3,744
2008
$12.75
$7.96
494,338
$12.59
$7.84
66,642
$12.46
$7.75
2,174
2007
$12.17
$12.75
261,040
$12.03
$12.59
34,979
$11.93
$12.46
1,775
2006
$10.57
$12.17
236,247
$10.48
$12.03
20,027
$10.41
$11.93
1,932
2005
$10.14
$10.57
176,215
$10.07
$10.48
4,286
$10.02
$10.41
2,165
2004
$9.21
$10.14
84,656
$9.16
$10.07
1,491
$9.13
$10.02
0
2003
$7.21
$9.21
93,860
$7.19
$9.16
1,511
$7.17
$9.13
0
2002
$9.32
$7.21
28,722
$9.31
$7.19
1,943
$9.30
$7.17
922
09/07/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.32
27,684
$10.00
$9.31
1,384
$10.00
$9.30
0
Small-Cap Index
2010
$13.02
$16.40
86,241
$12.81
$16.09
4,406
$12.64
$15.86
4,667
2009
$10.20
$13.02
91,948
$10.05
$12.81
5,038
$9.94
$12.64
4,673
2008
$15.76
$10.20
108,907
$15.56
$10.05
4,944
$15.41
$9.94
4,668
2007
$16.15
$15.76
271,673
$15.98
$15.56
25,613
$15.85
$15.41
5,178
2006
$13.77
$16.15
143,708
$13.65
$15.98
7,113
$13.55
$15.85
4,721
2005
$13.24
$13.77
146,700
$13.15
$13.65
7,779
$13.08
$13.55
5,179
2004
$11.29
$13.24
110,898
$11.24
$13.15
2,735
$11.19
$13.08
5,229
2003
$7.74
$11.29
46,892
$7.71
$11.24
4,400
$7.70
$11.19
3,887
2002
$9.86
$7.74
35,200
$9.85
$7.71
398
$9.84
$7.70
3,905
11/28/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.86
973
$10.00
$9.85
0
$10.00
$9.84
1,032
Small-Cap Equity
2010
$13.71
$16.40
210,133
$13.58
$16.21
38,469
$13.48
$16.08
902
2009
$10.57
$13.71
170,679
$10.49
$13.58
29,355
$10.43
$13.48
616
2008
$14.36
$10.57
169,509
$14.28
$10.49
29,415
$14.23
$10.43
378
2007
$13.60
$14.36
85,523
$13.55
$14.28
12,046
$13.52
$14.23
143
2006
$11.50
$13.60
19,249
$11.49
$13.55
5,930
$11.48
$13.52
77
05/06/2005-12/31/2005
$10.16
$11.50
12,897
$10.16
$11.49
91
$10.16
$11.48
142
American
Funds®
Asset Allocation
2010
$12.93
$14.43
23,402
$12.91
$14.38
2,165
N/A
N/A
N/A
04/09/2009-12/31/2009
$10.44
$12.93
14,654
$13.00
$12.91
2,208
N/A
N/A
N/A
American
Funds®
Growth-Income
2010
$10.48
$11.59
521,363
$10.39
$11.46
68,281
$10.31
$11.37
2,454
2009
$8.05
$10.48
608,406
$7.99
$10.39
80,253
$7.95
$10.31
2,655
2008
$13.06
$8.05
592,229
$12.99
$7.99
83,210
$12.93
$7.95
2,299
2007
$12.52
$13.06
607,588
$12.48
$12.99
88,494
$12.45
$12.93
2,517
2006
$10.96
$12.52
360,045
$10.94
$12.48
46,846
$10.93
$12.45
2,360
05/06/2005-12/31/2005
$10.10
$10.96
158,027
$10.10
$10.94
9,236
$10.10
$10.93
1,159
American
Funds®
Growth
2010
$11.19
$13.18
353,645
$11.09
$13.03
49,250
$11.01
$12.92
579
2009
$8.09
$11.19
385,980
$8.03
$11.09
46,256
$7.99
$11.01
597
2008
$14.55
$8.09
578,452
$14.48
$8.03
78,746
$14.42
$7.99
1,137
2007
$13.05
$14.55
426,710
$13.01
$14.48
52,129
$12.98
$14.42
656
2006
$11.94
$13.05
363,072
$11.92
$13.01
46,295
$11.91
$12.98
1,037
05/06/2005-12/31/2005
$10.15
$11.94
192,152
$10.15
$11.92
12,195
$10.15
$11.91
1,231
84
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit
Death Benefit Rider
With Premier Death Benefit Rider
Number of
Number of
Number of
Subaccount
Subaccount
Subaccount
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
Large-Cap Value
2010
$10.73
$11.66
843,194
$10.55
$11.44
168,993
$10.42
$11.28
3,452
2009
$8.75
$10.73
877,172
$8.62
$10.55
172,414
$8.52
$10.42
3,607
2008
$13.48
$8.75
731,263
$13.30
$8.62
122,952
$13.17
$8.52
2,893
2007
$13.07
$13.48
602,077
$12.92
$13.30
86,645
$12.82
$13.17
2,860
2006
$11.16
$13.07
388,752
$11.06
$12.92
50,607
$10.98
$12.82
2,613
2005
$10.55
$11.16
154,795
$10.48
$11.06
12,324
$10.42
$10.98
2,717
2004
$9.64
$10.55
154,605
$9.59
$10.48
16,576
$9.55
$10.42
4,850
2003
$7.37
$9.64
89,918
$7.35
$9.59
7,138
$7.33
$9.55
4,044
2002
$9.61
$7.37
25,369
$9.60
$7.35
5,224
$9.59
$7.33
3,654
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.61
4,108
$10.00
$9.60
2,871
$10.00
$9.59
0
Technology
2010
$7.67
$9.28
46,804
$7.54
$9.11
6,195
$7.45
$8.98
0
2009
$5.05
$7.67
38,158
$4.97
$7.54
803
$4.92
$7.45
0
2008
$10.48
$5.05
40,296
$10.34
$4.97
0
$10.24
$4.92
0
2007
$8.55
$10.48
29,529
$8.46
$10.34
6,398
$8.39
$10.24
0
2006
$7.85
$8.55
5,970
$7.78
$8.46
2,960
$7.73
$8.39
0
2005
$6.48
$7.85
5,575
$6.43
$7.78
0
$6.40
$7.73
0
2004
$6.27
$6.48
1,880
$6.24
$6.43
0
$6.22
$6.40
0
2003
$4.42
$6.27
5,634
$4.40
$6.24
0
$4.39
$6.22
0
2002
$8.27
$4.42
0
$8.26
$4.40
0
$8.25
$4.39
0
09/17/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$8.27
0
$10.00
$8.26
0
$10.00
$8.25
0
Floating Rate Loan
2010
$8.53
$9.12
417,014
$8.49
$9.05
104,061
$8.46
$9.00
234
2009
$6.89
$8.53
361,900
$6.87
$8.49
75,542
$6.85
$8.46
212
2008
$9.79
$6.89
278,739
$9.77
$6.87
55,518
$9.76
$6.85
736
05/04/2007-12/31/2007
$10.00
$9.79
205,251
$10.00
$9.77
39,793
$10.00
$9.76
726
Small-Cap Growth
2010
$10.11
$12.69
175,910
$9.94
$12.45
24,744
$9.81
$12.27
1,864
2009
$6.88
$10.11
184,831
$6.78
$9.94
31,916
$6.71
$9.81
1,922
2008
$13.07
$6.88
267,711
$12.90
$6.78
39,480
$12.77
$6.71
2,073
2007
$11.40
$13.07
195,170
$11.27
$12.90
19,271
$11.18
$12.77
1,753
2006
$10.89
$11.40
92,135
$10.80
$11.27
8,355
$10.72
$11.18
1,571
2005
$10.65
$10.89
75,289
$10.58
$10.80
3,875
$10.52
$10.72
1,735
2004
$8.99
$10.65
11,846
$8.95
$10.58
172
$8.91
$10.52
1,575
2003
$6.78
$8.99
8,652
$6.76
$8.95
93
$6.75
$8.91
1,573
2002
$9.09
$6.78
8,153
$9.08
$6.76
140
$9.07
$6.75
1,565
09/17/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.09
0
$10.00
$9.08
0
$10.00
$9.07
0
Comstock
2010
$10.23
$11.76
554,200
$10.06
$11.54
118,696
$9.93
$11.38
1,766
2009
$7.98
$10.23
601,050
$7.86
$10.06
120,040
$7.78
$9.93
1,780
2008
$12.68
$7.98
586,157
$12.52
$7.86
96,021
$12.40
$7.78
1,307
2007
$13.13
$12.68
668,893
$12.98
$12.52
105,636
$12.88
$12.40
1,685
2006
$11.33
$13.13
335,287
$11.23
$12.98
37,468
$11.15
$12.88
1,013
2005
$10.90
$11.33
135,718
$10.82
$11.23
9,673
$10.77
$11.15
760
2004
$9.34
$10.90
83,461
$9.29
$10.82
1,525
$9.26
$10.77
823
2003
$7.14
$9.34
19,573
$7.12
$9.29
920
$7.10
$9.26
687
2002
$9.21
$7.14
3,741
$9.20
$7.12
206
$9.19
$7.10
0
06/19/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.21
0
$10.00
$9.20
0
$10.00
$9.19
0
Growth LT
2010
$9.53
$10.56
368,433
$9.37
$10.36
71,348
$9.25
$10.22
1,055
2009
$6.97
$9.53
359,240
$6.87
$9.37
70,421
$6.79
$9.25
1,050
2008
$11.85
$6.97
381,115
$11.70
$6.87
62,577
$11.59
$6.79
1,035
2007
$10.29
$11.85
244,803
$10.18
$11.70
33,963
$10.10
$11.59
693
2006
$9.42
$10.29
200,615
$9.33
$10.18
26,956
$9.27
$10.10
950
2005
$8.78
$9.42
64,387
$8.72
$9.33
9,027
$8.67
$9.27
887
2004
$7.99
$8.78
52,124
$7.95
$8.72
12,832
$7.92
$8.67
1,333
2003
$5.98
$7.99
44,138
$5.97
$7.95
6,199
$5.95
$7.92
1,128
2002
$8.46
$5.98
20,476
$8.45
$5.97
2,761
$8.45
$5.95
1,391
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$8.46
1,361
$10.00
$8.45
1,506
$10.00
$8.45
0
Focused 30
2010
$17.59
$19.33
51,302
$17.29
$18.97
2,884
$17.07
$18.70
2,437
2009
$11.74
$17.59
58,048
$11.56
$17.29
9,214
$11.43
$17.07
2,437
2008
$23.64
$11.74
144,434
$23.33
$11.56
18,085
$23.11
$11.43
2,652
2007
$18.00
$23.64
66,594
$17.80
$23.33
14,460
$17.66
$23.11
2,437
2006
$14.61
$18.00
42,686
$14.48
$17.80
7,486
$14.38
$17.66
2,437
2005
$12.02
$14.61
13,961
$11.93
$14.48
1,181
$11.87
$14.38
2,437
2004
$10.50
$12.02
4,518
$10.45
$11.93
1,181
$10.41
$11.87
354
2003
$7.41
$10.50
1,752
$7.39
$10.45
0
$7.37
$10.41
0
2002
$10.54
$7.41
678
$10.53
$7.39
0
$10.53
$7.37
0
09/17/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$10.54
0
$10.00
$10.53
0
$10.00
$10.53
0
85
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit
Death Benefit Rider
With Premier Death Benefit Rider
Number of
Number of
Number of
Subaccount
Subaccount
Subaccount
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
Health Sciences
2010
$13.44
$16.51
37,072
$13.22
$16.20
5,810
$13.05
$15.97
0
2009
$10.61
$13.44
30,142
$10.45
$13.22
2,926
$10.33
$13.05
0
2008
$14.83
$10.61
27,948
$14.63
$10.45
1,702
$14.49
$10.33
0
2007
$12.78
$14.83
29,044
$12.64
$14.63
2,504
$12.54
$14.49
0
2006
$11.87
$12.78
20,012
$11.76
$12.64
3,347
$11.68
$12.54
0
2005
$10.34
$11.87
15,457
$10.26
$11.76
3,166
$10.21
$11.68
0
2004
$9.65
$10.34
9,746
$9.60
$10.26
1,042
$9.57
$10.21
664
2003
$7.58
$9.65
18,817
$7.56
$9.60
380
$7.54
$9.57
0
2002
$9.92
$7.58
4,861
$9.91
$7.56
0
$9.91
$7.54
0
11/28/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.92
496
$10.00
$9.91
0
$10.00
$9.91
0
International Value
2010
$11.01
$11.25
498,355
$10.83
$11.04
92,740
$10.69
$10.89
3,613
2009
$8.64
$11.01
614,627
$8.51
$10.83
105,429
$8.41
$10.69
3,873
2008
$16.61
$8.64
812,167
$16.40
$8.51
132,652
$16.24
$8.41
4,251
2007
$15.70
$16.61
706,231
$15.53
$16.40
104,135
$15.40
$16.24
3,926
2006
$12.54
$15.70
427,151
$12.43
$15.53
50,100
$12.34
$15.40
3,740
2005
$11.50
$12.54
186,610
$11.42
$12.43
10,415
$11.36
$12.34
3,853
2004
$9.92
$11.50
137,721
$9.87
$11.42
5,132
$9.84
$11.36
4,439
2003
$7.80
$9.92
92,717
$7.78
$9.87
3,817
$7.76
$9.84
4,281
2002
$9.10
$7.80
37,729
$9.09
$7.78
2,539
$9.08
$7.76
3,694
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.10
1,023
$10.00
$9.09
1,336
$10.00
$9.08
0
Long/Short Large-Cap
2010
$8.36
$9.35
556,681
$8.34
$9.30
113,664
$8.32
$9.26
1,549
2009
$6.58
$8.36
516,431
$6.57
$8.34
103,110
$6.57
$8.32
1,471
05/02/2008-12/31/2008
$10.16
$6.58
331,990
$10.16
$6.57
56,232
$10.16
$6.57
827
Mid-Cap Equity
2010
$14.33
$17.63
373,685
$14.09
$17.30
63,770
$13.91
$17.05
2,085
2009
$10.30
$14.33
393,926
$10.15
$14.09
69,283
$10.04
$13.91
2,158
2008
$16.96
$10.30
802,690
$16.74
$10.15
125,023
$16.58
$10.04
3,048
2007
$17.40
$16.96
730,222
$17.21
$16.74
86,177
$17.07
$16.58
2,904
2006
$15.20
$17.40
508,689
$15.06
$17.21
55,988
$14.96
$17.07
2,804
2005
$14.01
$15.20
243,264
$13.92
$15.06
16,676
$13.84
$14.96
2,602
2004
$11.25
$14.01
124,753
$11.19
$13.92
5,178
$11.15
$13.84
2,313
2003
$8.75
$11.25
119,169
$8.72
$11.19
2,666
$8.70
$11.15
2,590
2002
$10.27
$8.75
59,258
$10.26
$8.72
1,635
$10.25
$8.70
2,435
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$10.27
718
$10.00
$10.26
1,144
$10.00
$10.25
998
International Large-Cap
2010
$15.53
$17.08
516,372
$15.27
$16.75
97,597
$15.08
$16.52
1,230
2009
$11.67
$15.53
533,768
$11.50
$15.27
95,136
$11.37
$15.08
1,360
2008
$18.13
$11.67
584,046
$17.89
$11.50
93,454
$17.72
$11.37
1,060
2007
$16.66
$18.13
595,384
$16.47
$17.89
90,022
$16.34
$17.72
1,178
2006
$13.17
$16.66
579,822
$13.05
$16.47
65,314
$12.96
$16.34
1,901
2005
$11.73
$13.17
300,268
$11.65
$13.05
14,079
$11.59
$12.96
2,575
2004
$9.93
$11.73
140,294
$9.88
$11.65
8,838
$9.84
$11.59
4,705
2003
$7.64
$9.93
78,304
$7.62
$9.88
5,513
$7.60
$9.84
4,555
2002
$9.31
$7.64
44,547
$9.30
$7.62
4,806
$9.29
$7.60
1,474
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.31
9,481
$10.00
$9.30
2,411
$10.00
$9.29
0
Mid-Cap Growth
2010
$8.96
$11.90
443,062
$8.81
$11.68
72,514
$8.70
$11.51
894
2009
$5.65
$8.96
445,305
$5.56
$8.81
84,323
$5.50
$8.70
1,041
2008
$10.98
$5.65
390,582
$10.84
$5.56
42,255
$10.74
$5.50
775
2007
$8.97
$10.98
390,378
$8.87
$10.84
48,957
$8.80
$10.74
750
2006
$8.27
$8.97
315,080
$8.19
$8.87
44,484
$8.14
$8.80
831
2005
$7.04
$8.27
95,940
$6.99
$8.19
14,011
$6.96
$8.14
0
2004
$5.81
$7.04
87,134
$5.78
$6.99
4,906
$5.76
$6.96
685
2003
$4.48
$5.81
65,335
$4.46
$5.78
9,043
$4.45
$5.76
0
2002
$8.49
$4.48
31,698
$8.48
$4.46
689
$8.47
$4.45
0
09/17/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$8.49
0
$10.00
$8.48
0
$10.00
$8.47
0
Real Estate
2010
$19.83
$25.78
102,314
$19.49
$25.29
12,076
$19.25
$24.94
1,210
2009
$15.05
$19.83
99,711
$14.83
$19.49
15,887
$14.66
$19.25
1,249
2008
$25.18
$15.05
108,739
$24.85
$14.83
12,685
$24.61
$14.66
1,101
2007
$30.15
$25.18
126,997
$29.82
$24.85
11,103
$29.58
$24.61
1,127
2006
$21.93
$30.15
105,467
$21.73
$29.82
9,091
$21.58
$29.58
1,108
2005
$18.85
$21.93
59,122
$18.72
$21.73
4,217
$18.62
$21.58
1,164
2004
$13.75
$18.85
51,274
$13.68
$18.72
2,714
$13.63
$18.62
1,441
2003
$10.04
$13.75
30,856
$10.01
$13.68
1,198
$9.99
$13.63
2,233
2002
$10.11
$10.04
21,445
$10.10
$10.01
306
$10.09
$9.99
2,112
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$10.11
7,606
$10.00
$10.10
153
$10.00
$10.09
0
86
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit
Death Benefit Rider
With Premier Death Benefit Rider
Number of
Number of
Number of
Subaccount
Subaccount
Subaccount
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
Small-Cap Value
2010
$19.70
$24.59
152,652
$19.44
$24.22
15,683
$19.25
$23.94
167
2009
$15.55
$19.70
164,299
$15.38
$19.44
19,430
$15.25
$19.25
285
2008
$21.76
$15.55
135,411
$21.55
$15.38
15,970
$21.40
$15.25
152
2007
$21.18
$21.76
107,350
$21.02
$21.55
19,235
$20.91
$21.40
220
2006
$17.76
$21.18
71,136
$17.66
$21.02
13,931
$17.59
$20.91
217
2005
$15.69
$17.76
29,964
$15.63
$17.66
6,374
$15.59
$17.59
235
2004
$12.66
$15.69
39,954
$12.64
$15.63
2,371
$12.63
$15.59
855
05/01/2003-12/31/2003
$10.00
$12.66
10,078
$10.00
$12.64
734
$10.00
$12.63
604
Main
Street®
Core
2010
$9.11
$10.54
331,621
$8.96
$10.34
62,507
$8.84
$10.19
3,005
2009
$7.07
$9.11
363,154
$6.97
$8.96
65,832
$6.89
$8.84
2,447
2008
$11.61
$7.07
545,783
$11.46
$6.97
86,908
$11.35
$6.89
2,778
2007
$11.17
$11.61
513,218
$11.05
$11.46
77,442
$10.96
$11.35
2,816
2006
$9.74
$11.17
353,278
$9.65
$11.05
55,190
$9.58
$10.96
2,919
2005
$9.22
$9.74
151,579
$9.16
$9.65
6,922
$9.11
$9.58
3,238
2004
$8.45
$9.22
33,543
$8.41
$9.16
1,414
$8.38
$9.11
3,103
2003
$6.68
$8.45
35,844
$6.66
$8.41
1,520
$6.65
$8.38
2,443
2002
$9.37
$6.68
13,809
$9.36
$6.66
463
$9.36
$6.65
1,418
11/28/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.37
545
$10.00
$9.36
1,057
$10.00
$9.36
0
Emerging Markets
2010
$46.39
$58.68
130,584
$45.60
$57.58
20,806
$45.03
$56.77
1,230
2009
$25.20
$46.39
126,991
$24.83
$45.60
20,338
$24.55
$45.03
1,261
2008
$48.37
$25.20
135,080
$47.74
$24.83
17,838
$47.28
$24.55
1,279
2007
$36.49
$48.37
131,201
$36.09
$47.74
17,744
$35.79
$47.28
1,244
2006
$29.45
$36.49
103,612
$29.18
$36.09
12,962
$28.99
$35.79
1,288
2005
$20.90
$29.45
56,818
$20.75
$29.18
4,851
$20.64
$28.99
1,413
2004
$15.59
$20.90
32,198
$15.51
$20.75
776
$15.45
$20.64
1,819
2003
$9.29
$15.59
13,869
$9.26
$15.51
429
$9.24
$15.45
1,348
2002
$9.62
$9.29
3,049
$9.61
$9.26
229
$9.60
$9.24
1,057
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.62
87
$10.00
$9.61
97
$10.00
$9.60
0
Cash Management
2010
$11.72
$11.67
223,194
$11.53
$11.45
82,622
$11.38
$11.29
0
2009
$11.75
$11.72
520,824
$11.58
$11.53
140,247
$11.45
$11.38
0
2008
$11.53
$11.75
828,409
$11.38
$11.58
130,429
$11.27
$11.45
0
2007
$11.02
$11.53
1,377,494
$10.90
$11.38
19,830
$10.81
$11.27
0
2006
$10.57
$11.02
1,545,795
$10.48
$10.90
50,001
$10.41
$10.81
0
2005
$10.32
$10.57
1,440,420
$10.25
$10.48
4,539
$10.20
$10.41
0
2004
$10.26
$10.32
1,344,866
$10.21
$10.25
2,218
$10.17
$10.20
0
2003
$10.22
$10.26
1,247,684
$10.19
$10.21
1,334
$10.17
$10.17
0
2002
$10.12
$10.22
2,195,431
$10.11
$10.19
4,001
$10.10
$10.17
590
09/07/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$10.12
180,016
$10.00
$10.11
1,022
$10.00
$10.10
0
High Yield Bond
2010
$15.25
$17.39
329,239
$14.99
$17.06
49,261
$14.80
$16.82
132
2009
$10.94
$15.25
301,708
$10.78
$14.99
36,836
$10.66
$14.80
131
2008
$14.12
$10.94
195,045
$13.94
$10.78
26,419
$13.81
$10.66
331
2007
$13.84
$14.12
170,967
$13.69
$13.94
30,377
$13.58
$13.81
343
2006
$12.70
$13.84
180,644
$12.59
$13.69
18,208
$12.50
$13.58
337
2005
$12.46
$12.70
87,168
$12.37
$12.59
5,568
$12.30
$12.50
484
2004
$11.43
$12.46
104,684
$11.37
$12.37
3,049
$11.33
$12.30
463
2003
$9.54
$11.43
80,332
$9.51
$11.37
1,587
$9.49
$11.33
320
2002
$9.87
$9.54
47,463
$9.86
$9.51
1,207
$9.86
$9.49
318
09/07/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.87
795
$10.00
$9.86
680
$10.00
$9.86
0
Managed Bond
2010
$17.42
$18.90
1,395,751
$17.12
$18.54
211,256
$16.90
$18.28
2,798
2009
$14.45
$17.42
1,150,978
$14.23
$17.12
153,574
$14.08
$16.90
1,951
2008
$14.76
$14.45
1,069,461
$14.57
$14.23
167,764
$14.43
$14.08
2,459
2007
$13.65
$14.76
996,282
$13.50
$14.57
127,996
$13.39
$14.43
2,916
2006
$13.08
$13.65
681,306
$12.96
$13.50
76,458
$12.88
$13.39
2,873
2005
$12.79
$13.08
316,485
$12.71
$12.96
20,879
$12.64
$12.88
3,097
2004
$12.19
$12.79
216,238
$12.13
$12.71
11,080
$12.08
$12.64
2,966
2003
$11.52
$12.19
182,349
$11.49
$12.13
12,799
$11.46
$12.08
4,539
2002
$10.43
$11.52
61,331
$10.42
$11.49
4,470
$10.41
$11.46
2,942
09/07/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$10.43
10,790
$10.00
$10.42
4,173
$10.00
$10.41
0
87
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit
Death Benefit Rider
With Premier Death Benefit Rider
Number of
Number of
Number of
Subaccount
Subaccount
Subaccount
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
AUV at
AUV
Units
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
Beginning
at End
Outstanding
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
of Year
of Year
at End of Year
Inflation Managed
2010
$16.57
$17.96
907,797
$16.29
$17.62
161,823
$16.09
$17.37
2,369
2009
$13.77
$16.57
892,292
$13.57
$16.29
137,367
$13.42
$16.09
2,273
2008
$15.25
$13.77
876,172
$15.06
$13.57
139,278
$14.91
$13.42
2,556
2007
$13.91
$15.25
852,601
$13.75
$15.06
122,226
$13.64
$14.91
2,994
2006
$13.89
$13.91
564,220
$13.76
$13.75
70,305
$13.67
$13.64
2,911
2005
$13.60
$13.89
230,386
$13.50
$13.76
16,918
$13.43
$13.67
2,533
2004
$12.54
$13.60
175,008
$12.48
$13.50
5,688
$12.43
$13.43
2,471
2003
$11.63
$12.54
135,958
$11.59
$12.48
3,020
$11.57
$12.43
3,950
2002
$10.11
$11.63
34,040
$10.10
$11.59
1,144
$10.10
$11.57
2,074
09/07/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$10.11
5,439
$10.00
$10.10
841
$10.00
$10.10
0
Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth
2010
$11.39
$12.52
191,309
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
07/28/2009-12/31/2009
$10.59
$11.39
118,029
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth
2010
$11.93
$13.30
22,773
$12.17
$13.25
58
N/A
N/A
N/A
10/14/2009-12/31/2009
$11.83
$11.93
2,125
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Pacific Dynamix – Growth
2010
$12.40
$14.06
30,145
$12.38
$14.01
2,812
N/A
N/A
N/A
05/06/2009-12/31/2009
$10.47
$12.40
16,923
$10.38
$12.38
93
N/A
N/A
N/A
Dividend Growth
2010
$10.17
$11.22
316,020
$10.00
$11.01
58,496
$9.87
$10.86
2,240
2009
$7.71
$10.17
141,604
$7.60
$10.00
22,786
$7.51
$9.87
1,840
2008
$12.71
$7.71
288,927
$12.55
$7.60
38,024
$12.43
$7.51
4,561
2007
$12.61
$12.71
368,269
$12.47
$12.55
39,253
$12.37
$12.43
7,335
2006
$11.31
$12.61
324,880
$11.21
$12.47
40,391
$11.13
$12.37
9,537
2005
$10.79
$11.31
168,488
$10.71
$11.21
14,398
$10.66
$11.13
11,614
2004
$9.74
$10.79
89,980
$9.69
$10.71
6,340
$9.66
$10.66
9,506
2003
$7.37
$9.74
31,661
$7.35
$9.69
192
$7.34
$9.66
7,157
2002
$9.77
$7.37
21,502
$9.76
$7.35
0
$9.75
$7.34
4,118
12/24/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.77
2,206
$10.00
$9.76
0
$10.00
$9.75
0
Short Duration Bond
2010
$11.35
$11.69
684,496
$11.20
$11.51
114,692
$11.09
$11.38
565
2009
$10.49
$11.35
559,125
$10.37
$11.20
81,103
$10.28
$11.09
493
2008
$11.10
$10.49
534,783
$10.99
$10.37
100,294
$10.92
$10.28
773
2007
$10.66
$11.10
488,035
$10.59
$10.99
105,419
$10.53
$10.92
967
2006
$10.27
$10.66
444,365
$10.21
$10.59
85,953
$10.17
$10.53
1,795
2005
$10.15
$10.27
185,779
$10.12
$10.21
11,075
$10.09
$10.17
1,373
2004
$10.07
$10.15
89,712
$10.06
$10.12
4,019
$10.05
$10.09
1,834
05/01/2003-12/31/2003
$10.00
$10.07
41,290
$10.00
$10.06
2,334
$10.00
$10.05
1,437
Large-Cap Growth
2010
$7.11
$8.12
537,393
$7.00
$7.96
110,417
$6.91
$7.85
1,390
2009
$5.08
$7.11
544,006
$5.01
$7.00
106,229
$4.95
$6.91
1,417
2008
$10.31
$5.08
309,365
$10.17
$5.01
50,780
$10.08
$4.95
860
2007
$8.51
$10.31
282,565
$8.42
$10.17
37,189
$8.35
$10.08
717
2006
$8.88
$8.51
416,397
$8.80
$8.42
47,611
$8.74
$8.35
1,766
2005
$8.66
$8.88
129,586
$8.60
$8.80
6,799
$8.56
$8.74
1,292
2004
$8.31
$8.66
181,484
$8.27
$8.60
7,653
$8.24
$8.56
4,693
2003
$6.66
$8.31
68,963
$6.64
$8.27
3,810
$6.62
$8.24
3,593
2002
$9.02
$6.66
30,134
$9.01
$6.64
3,375
$9.01
$6.62
3,211
07/02/2001-12/31/2001
$10.00
$9.02
722
$10.00
$9.01
1,847
$10.00
$9.01
0
Diversified Bond
2010
$11.05
$11.89
909,036
$10.97
$11.78
191,110
$10.91
$11.70
1,318
2009
$9.72
$11.05
647,296
$9.67
$10.97
119,895
$9.63
$10.91
668
2008
$10.59
$9.72
598,762
$10.55
$9.67
111,817
$10.52
$9.63
1,197
2007
$10.49
$10.59
562,586
$10.48
$10.55
86,447
$10.47
$10.52
1,493
05/05/2006-12/31/2006
$10.01
$10.49
202,888
$10.01
$10.48
24,888
$10.01
$10.47
729
Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation (formerly called Invesco Van Kampen V.I. Global Tactical
Asset Allocation)
The following summary of federal income tax issues is based
on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which
may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative
action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as
tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable
foreign, state or local tax laws. We do not make any guarantee
regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of
any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts.
Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax adviser for
complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract.
Additional tax information is included in the SAI.
Diversification
Requirements and Investor Control
Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments
underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain
diversification requirements in order for the contract to be
treated as an annuity contract and qualify for tax deferral. We
believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the
contract meet these requirements. Details on these
diversification requirements appear in the Pacific Select Fund
SAI.
In addition, for a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax
deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the
contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company
and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a
contract owner has excessive control over the investments made
by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract
owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the
account or fund. In other words, in such a case of investor
control the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits
normally associated with variable annuities. For more
information regarding investor control, please refer to the
contract SAI.
Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in
general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements
of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current
law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal
income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or
an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing
insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be
treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract.
Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner
as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive
money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how
amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following
discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an
annuity for federal income tax purposes.
These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As
discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified
Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax adviser if you
are purchasing a Qualified Contract.
Taxes
Payable
A Contract Owner is not taxed on the increases in the value of a
Contract until an amount is received or deemed to be received.
An amount could be received or deemed to be received, for
example, if there is a partial distribution, a lump sum
distribution, an Annuity payment or a material change in the
Contract. See the Addition of Optional Rider or Material
Change to Contract section below. Increases in Contract
Value that are received or deemed to be received are taxable to
the Contract Owner as ordinary income. Distributions of net
investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives
from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in
such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account,
elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal
income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only
when it is distributed to you.
Beginning in 2013, any taxable distribution of the investment
income from your Contract will also be subject to a net
investment income tax of 3.8%. This tax applies to various
investment income such as interest, dividends, royalties,
payments from annuities, and the disposition of property, but
only to the extent a married taxpayer’s modified adjusted
gross income exceeds $250,000 ($200,000 if single). Please
speak to your tax advisor about this new tax.
Non-Natural
Persons as Owners
If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as
agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be
treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that
the contract owner will be subject to current tax on annual
increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some
other exception applies. Certain entities, such as some trusts,
may be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons.
Corporations, including S corps, C corps, LLCs,
partnerships and FLPs, and tax exempt entities are non-natural
persons that will not be deemed to be acting as agents for
natural persons.
Addition
of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract
The addition of a rider to the Contract, or a material change in
the Contract’s provisions, such as a change in Contract
ownership or an assignment of the Contract, could cause it to be
considered newly issued or entered into for tax purposes, and
thus could cause a taxable event or the Contract to lose certain
grandfathered tax status. Please contact your tax adviser for
more information.
90
Taxes
Payable on Withdrawals Prior to the Annuity Date
Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts
withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial
withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, including
registered investment advisory fees, will be treated first as
taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds
the aggregate of your Purchase Payments reduced by non-taxable
amounts previously received (investment in the Contract), and
then as non-taxable recovery of your Purchase Payments.
Therefore, you include in your gross income the smaller of:
a) the amount of the partial withdrawal, or b) the
amount by which your Contract Value immediately before you
receive the distribution exceeds your investment in the Contract
at that time. If at the time of a partial withdrawal your
Contract Value does not exceed your investment in the Contract,
then the withdrawal will not be includable in gross income and
will simply reduce your investment in the Contract. Exceptions
to this rule are distributions in full discharge of your
Contract (a full surrender) or distributions from contracts
issued and investments made before August 14, 1982.
The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge)
the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a
withdrawal subject to these rules. You should consult your tax
adviser for additional information regarding taking a partial or
a full distribution from your Contract.
Multiple
Contracts (Aggregation Rule)
Multiple Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued after
October 21, 1988, by us or our affiliates to the same Owner
during the same calendar year are treated as one Contract for
purposes of determining the taxation of distributions (the
amount includible in gross income under Code Section 72(e))
prior to the Annuity Date from any of the Contracts. A Contract
received in a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035 may
be treated as a new Contract for this purpose. For Contracts
subject to the Aggregation Rule, the values of the Contracts and
the investments in the Contracts should be added together to
determine the taxation under Code Section 72(e).
Withdrawals will be treated first as withdrawals of income until
all of the income from all such Contracts is withdrawn. The
Treasury Department has specific authority under Code
Section 72(e)(11) to issue regulations to prevent the
avoidance of the income-out-first rules for withdrawals prior to
the Annuity Date through the serial purchase of Contracts or
otherwise. As of the date of this Prospectus there are no
regulations interpreting these aggregation provisions.
10% Tax
Penalty Applicable to Certain Withdrawals and Annuity
Payments
The Code provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or
other distribution may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10%
of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:
•
made on or after the date you reach
age 591/2,
•
made by a Beneficiary after your death,
•
attributable to your becoming disabled,
•
any payment made under an immediate annuity,
•
attributable to an investment in the Contract made prior to
August 14, 1982, or
•
any distribution that is a part of a series of substantially
equal periodic payments (Code Section 72(q) payments) made
(at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the
joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated
beneficiary.
Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts
(see Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments and the
applicable Qualified Contracts).
Taxes
Payable on Optional Rider Charges
It is our understanding that the charges relating to any
optional death benefit rider are not subject to current taxation
and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may
determine that these charges should be treated as partial
withdrawals subject to current taxation to the extent of any
gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the
right to report any optional death benefit rider charges as
partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to
report them in accordance with IRS regulations.
Distributions
After the Annuity Date
After you annuitize, a portion of each annuity payment you
receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial
recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments”
means the aggregate Purchase Payments less any amounts that were
previously received under the Contract but not included in
income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances,
subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment
pattern may result in the imposition of a tax penalty.) The
remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary
income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments
has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will
be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is
divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the
period over which annuity payments are expected to be received,
which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and,
where a
91
lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the
Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to
a tax penalty if taken prior to age
591/2.
Same-Sex
Spouses
Pursuant to Section 3 of the federal Defense of Marriage
Act (“DOMA”), same-sex marriages currently are not
recognized for purposes of federal law. Therefore, the favorable
income-deferral options afforded by federal tax law to an
opposite-sex spouse under Internal Revenue Code
sections 72(s) and 401(a)(9) are currently NOT available to
a same-sex spouse. Same-sex spouses who own or are considering
the purchase of annuity products that provide benefits based
upon status as a spouse should consult a tax advisor. To the
extent that an annuity contract or certificate accords to
spouses other rights or benefits that are not affected by DOMA,
same-sex spouses remain entitled to such rights or benefits to
the same extent as any annuity holder’s spouse.
Distributions
to Beneficiary After Contract Owner’s Death
Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the
Beneficiary as those that apply to the Contract Owner, except
that the early withdrawal tax penalty does not apply. Thus, any
annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into
taxable and non-taxable portions.
If death occurs after the Annuity Date, but before the
expiration of a period certain option, the Beneficiary will
recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made and
may be allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the
unrecovered Investments. A lump sum payment taken by the
Beneficiary in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not
considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of
any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate
unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.
Contract
Owner’s Estate
Generally, any amount payable to a Beneficiary after the
Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity
Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for
federal estate tax purposes. If the inclusion of the value of
the Contract triggers a federal estate tax to be paid, the
Beneficiary may be able to use a deduction called Income in
Respect of Decedent (IRD) in calculating the income taxes
payable upon receipt of the death benefit proceeds. In addition,
designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is
371/2
or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild
of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax
(GSTT) consequences under section 2601 of the Code. You
should consult with a qualified tax advisor if you have
questions about federal estate tax, IRD, or GSTT.
Gifts of
Annuity Contracts
Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity
start date will trigger tax reporting to the donor on the gain
on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for
the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% early
withdrawal tax penalty and gift tax also may be applicable. This
provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or
incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting
as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.
Tax
Withholding for Non-Qualified Contracts
Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under
your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be
subject to withholding to meet federal income tax obligations.
For nonperiodic distributions, you will have the option to
provide us with withholding information at the time of your
withdrawal request. If you do not provide us with withholding
information, we will generally withhold 10% of the taxable
distribution amount and remit it to the IRS. For periodic
(annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined
on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us
with your application. If you do not provide us with withholding
information, we are required to determine the withholding, from
every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3
exemptions.
Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity
withholding will apply to payments made to residents.
Please call
(800) 722-4448
with any questions about the required withholding information.
Financial advisors may call us at
(800) 722-2333.
Tax
Withholding for
Non-resident
Aliens or Non U.S. Persons
Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident
aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to
U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a
lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are
advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state
and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.
92
Exchanges
of Non-Qualified Contracts (1035 Exchanges)
You may make your initial or an additional Purchase Payment
through an exchange of an existing annuity contract or endowment
life insurance contract pursuant to Section 1035 of the
Code (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by
completing the Transfer/Exchange form, indicating in the
appropriate section of the form that you are making a
1035 exchange and submitting any applicable state
replacement form. The form is available by calling your
financial advisor or by calling our Contract Owner number at
(800) 722-4448.
Financial advisors can call
(800) 722-2333.
Once completed, the form should be mailed to us. If you are
making an initial Purchase Payment, a completed Contract
application should also be attached.
In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no
gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity or life
insurance contract for another annuity contract. Transactions
under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special
rules and may require special procedures and record keeping,
particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior
to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax adviser
prior to effecting a 1035 exchange.
Partial
1035 Exchanges
A partial exchange is the direct transfer of only a portion of
an existing annuity’s Contract Value to a new annuity
contract.
Rev. Proc. 2008-24
adopted the provisions of
Notice 2003-51,
with some modifications, finalizing the guidelines for partial
1035 exchanges. Under
Rev. Proc. 2008-24,
the 24 month period is reduced to 12 months, so that a
partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code
Section 1035 if there are no distributions, from either
annuity, within 12 months of the partial
1035 exchange. Alternatively, a partial 1035 exchange
will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if the
taxpayer demonstrates that any distribution taken within the
12 months is due to a specifically identified condition
that occurred between the date of the partial transfer and the
distribution (the conditions are death, disability, attaining
age 591/2,
divorce or loss of employment).
Rev Proc. 2008-24
removes the subjective element of
Notice 2003-51
(whether the distribution was contemplated at the time of the
partial exchange). Also,
Rev. Proc. 2008-24
provides that if the partial exchange does not qualify as a
tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035, it will be
treated as a taxable distribution with a subsequent repurchase,
and that if the partial exchange is treated as tax-free under
Code Section 1035 and this Rev. Proc., the two contracts
will not be aggregated and treated as one contract, but rather
will be treated as two separate contracts for tax and penalty
purposes.
You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a partial
1035 exchange.
In general, in the case of Non-Qualified Contracts, if you are
an individual and expect to accumulate your Contract Value over
a relatively long period of time without making significant
withdrawals, there may be federal income tax advantages in
purchasing such a Contract. This is because any increase in
Contract Value is not subject to current taxation. Income taxes
are deferred until the money is withdrawn, at which point
taxation occurs only on the gain from the investment in the
Contract. With income taxes deferred, you may accumulate more
money over the long term through a variable annuity than you may
through non-tax-deferred investments. The advantage may be
greater if you decide to liquidate your Contract Value in the
form of monthly annuity payments after your retirement, or if
your tax rate is lower at that time than during the period that
you held the Contract, or both.
When withdrawals or distributions are taken from the variable
annuity, the gain is taxed as ordinary income. This may be a
potential disadvantage because money that had been invested in
other types of assets may qualify for a more favorable federal
tax rate. For example, in 2011 the tax rate applicable both to
the sale of capital gain assets held more than 1 year and
to the receipt of qualifying dividends by individuals is
generally 15% (0% for lower-income individuals). In contrast, an
ordinary income tax rate of up to 35% applies to taxable
withdrawals on distributions from a variable annuity in 2011.
Also, withdrawals or distributions taken from a variable annuity
prior to attaining age
591/2
may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of the taxable
portion, although exceptions to the tax penalty may apply.
An owner of a variable annuity cannot deduct or offset losses on
transfers to or from Subaccounts, or at the time of any partial
withdrawals. If you surrender your Contract and your Net
Contract Value is less than the aggregate of your investments in
the Contract (reduced by any previous non-taxable
distributions), there may be a deductible ordinary income loss,
although the deduction may be limited. Consult with your tax
adviser regarding the impact of federal income taxes on your
specific situation.
Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment
company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code.
The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our
operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for
our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium
taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of
charges to the Separate Account or your Contract for such taxes.
Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income
taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or to
our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable,
directly or indirectly, to investments in your Contract.
93
Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in
addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these
taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the
Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change
in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any
such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account
or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in
a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your
Contract.
Given the uncertainty of future changes in applicable federal,
state or local tax laws, we cannot appropriately describe the
effect a tax law change may have on taxes that would be
attributable to the Separate Account or your Contract.
The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans and
IRAs. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each
type of Qualified Plan and IRAs differ from each other and from
those for
Non-Qualified
Contracts. No attempt is made herein to provide more than
general information about the use of the Contract with the
various types of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Participants under
such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and
Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to
any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the
terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by
applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the
Contract issued in connection therewith.
Tax
Deferral
It is important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as
well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity
contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to
benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax
deferral. The other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund
a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options,
guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer
among Investment Options. You should consider if the Contract is
a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified
Plan or IRA.
Registered
Investment Advisory Fees
For Qualified Contracts, withdrawals to pay registered
investment advisory fees will not be treated as distributions
for tax purposes, and therefore will not be reported on a
Form 1099-R.
Taxes
Payable
Generally, amounts received from Qualified Contracts are taxed
as ordinary income under Section 72, to the extent that
they are not treated as a tax free recovery of contributions.
Different rules apply for Roth IRAs. Consult your tax advisor
before requesting a distribution from a Qualified Contract.
10% Tax
Penalty for Early Withdrawals
Generally, distributions from IRAs and Qualified Plans that
occur before you attain
age 591/2
are subject to a 10% tax penalty imposed on the amount of the
distribution that is includable in gross income, with certain
exceptions. These exceptions include distributions:
•
made to a beneficiary after the owner’s/participant’s
death,
•
attributable to the owner/participant becoming disabled under
Section 72(m)(7),
•
that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic
payments (also referred to as SEPPs or 72(t) payments) made
(at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the
joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your
designated beneficiary,
•
for certain higher education expenses (IRAs only),
•
used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical
expenses (IRAs only),
•
for costs related to the purchase of your first home (IRAs
only), and
•
(except for IRAs) made to an employee after separation from
service after reaching age 55 (or age 50 in the case
of a qualified public safety employee).
Tax
Withholding for Qualified Contracts
Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not
including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code
Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee,
surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee
under a qualified domestic relations
94
order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity
payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are
subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the
taxable amount of the distribution, unless:
•
the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to
another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or
•
the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.
The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the
amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of
taxable distributions are subject to withholding unless the
distributee elects not to have withholding apply.
Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity
withholding will apply to payments made to residents.
IRAs and
Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders
As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special
considerations for purchases of any optional living or death
benefit riders. IRS regulations state that Individual Retirement
Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance
contracts. We believe that these regulations do not prohibit the
optional living or death benefit riders from being added to your
Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA
or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible
that a Contract that has optional living or death benefit riders
and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE
IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to
the Owner.
Similarly, section 401 plans, section 403(b), 457(b)
annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer
incidental death benefits. The Internal Revenue Service
(IRS) could take the position that the enhanced death benefits
provided by optional benefit riders are not incidental. In
addition, to the extent that the optional benefit riders alter
the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a
Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation
of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.
It is our understanding that the charges relating to the
optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and
we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine
that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals
subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain
and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to
report the rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe
that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS
regulations.
Required
Minimum Distributions
The regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in Qualified
Plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be
distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)),
Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must
be distributed each year.
Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and
Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest
under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant no
later than the Owner/Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over
the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his
beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD.
The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained
for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally
April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which
the Owner/Annuitant reaches
age 701/2.
The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified
retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code or
a Section 403(b) annuity is April 1 of the calendar
year following the later of the year in which the
Owner/Annuitant reaches
age 701/2,
or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the
Owner/Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA
maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.
The IRS issued Final and Temporary Regulations on April 17,2002 (“Final Regulations”). Effective January 1,2003, the IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan
Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the
Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.
The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy
and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the
beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note
that under these Final Regulations, the IRA owner does not need
to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn
age 701/2.
The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse,
who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary
on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and
life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.
If the Owner/Annuitant dies prior to his RBD or complete
distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be
distributed as provided in the “Qualified Contract
Distribution Rules” section of this Prospectus. For
non-spouse beneficiaries, life expectancy is initially computed
by use of the Single Life Table of the Final Regulations
(Regulation
Section 1.401(a)(9)-9).
Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the
life expectancy of the Beneficiary by one in each following
calendar year.
For calendar year 2003 and thereafter, taxpayers (and the
underlying Qualified Plan) must rely on the Final and Temporary
Regulations (discussed above) for determining RMDs. If any
future guidance from the IRS is more restrictive than the
guidance in these Final and Temporary Regulations, the future
guidance will be issued without retroactive effect.
95
The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum
distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the
applicable proposed Regulations thereunder.
Actuarial
Value
In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, RMDs
and Roth IRA conversions may be calculated based on the sum of
the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional
death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have
purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs may be larger
than if the calculation were based on the contract value only,
which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the
required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an
increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract
owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any
optional riders.
RMDs and
Annuity Options
Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify
under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected
for receipt of RMDs as annuity payments under Annuity
Options 2 and 4 generally may be:
•
no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and
Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches
age 701/2,
and
•
must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the
Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than
10 years younger than the Annuitant.
Under Annuity Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the
Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger
than the Annuitant, the
662/3%
and 100% elections specified below may not be available. The
restrictions on options for retirement plans that qualify under
Sections 401 and 408 also apply to a retirement plan that
qualifies under Section 403(b) with respect to amounts that
accrued after December 31, 1986.
Loans
Certain Owners of Qualified Contracts may borrow against their
Contracts. Otherwise loans from us are not permitted. You may
request a loan from us, using your Contract Value as your only
security if yours is a Qualified Contract that is:
•
not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,
•
issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and
•
issued under a Plan that permits Loans (a “Loan Eligible
Plan”).
You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum
loan amount is $1,000, subject to certain state limitations.
Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not
exceed the lesser of:
•
50% of the amount available for withdrawal under this Contract
(see WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals –
Amount Available for Withdrawal), or
•
$50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the
12-month
period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.
If your request for a loan is processed, you will be charged
interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to
5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will
earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. The net amount of
interest you pay on your loan will be 2.00% annually. These
rates may vary by state.
Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning
on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan
Account Value accrues daily beginning on the day following the
effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be
transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance
with your most recent allocation instructions. Your loan,
including principal and accrued interest, generally must be
repaid in quarterly installments and loan repayments are not
considered Purchase Payments. For more information about loans,
including the consequences of loans, loan procedures, loan terms
and repayment terms, see the SAI.
Taking a loan while an optional living benefit Rider is in
effect will terminate your Rider. Work with your financial
advisor before taking a loan.
We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the
Code or interpretations thereof. We urge you to consult with
a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction
under your Contract.
The following is only a general discussion about types of
IRAs and Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available.
We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan
administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but
not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties
including, but not limited to, notification of distribution
options, disbursement of Plan benefits,
96
handling any processing and administration of Qualified
Plan loans, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and
state tax reporting of income/distributions from the Plan to
Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan
participants and IRA contributions from Plan participants. Our
administrative duties are limited to administration of the
Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the
Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable.
Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state
tax reporting of income/distributions to the applicable payee
and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded
on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan
administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with
information regarding individuals with signatory authority on
the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified
Contract, you should consult with your plan administrator and/or
a qualified tax adviser. You should also consult with a
qualified tax adviser and/or plan administrator before you
withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.
Individual
Retirement Annuities (“IRAs”)
In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under
Code 408, there are SEP IRAs under Code
Section 408(k), Roth IRAs governed by Code
Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code
Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under
Section 401, 403(b), or 457(b) of the Code that include
after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs
subject to the same rules and limitations as traditional IRAs.
Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to
differing limitations. The following is a very general
description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans.
Traditional
IRAs
Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that
may be contributed each year, the persons who may be eligible to
contribute, when rollovers are available and when distributions
must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the
individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a
deductible or non-deductible basis.
Annual contributions are generally allowed for persons who have
not attained
age 701/2
and who have compensation (as defined by the IRS) of at least
the contribution amount. Distributions of minimum amounts
specified by the Code must commence by April 1 of the
calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain
age 701/2.
Failure to make mandatory minimum distributions may result in
imposition of a 50% tax penalty on any difference between the
required distribution amount and the amount actually
distributed. Additional distribution rules apply after your
death.
You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds
(such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity
contracts or securities) from certain existing Qualified Plans
into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will
require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the
existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply
to any rollover distribution from your existing Qualified Plan
if the distribution is not transferred directly to your
traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash
transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee
to your traditional IRA.
SIMPLE
IRAs
The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small
Employers (“SIMPLE Plan”) is a type of IRA established
under Code Section 408(p)(2). Depending upon the SIMPLE
Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA
established by each participant of the SIMPLE Plan. Like other
IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that
occur before an employee attains
age 591/2.
In addition, the tax penalty is increased to 25% for amounts
received or rolled to another IRA or Qualified Plan during the
2-year
period beginning on the date an employee first participated in a
qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan
maintained by their employer. Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will
generally include employee salary deferral contributions and
employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be
transferred to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible
for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, a 403(b), a 457(b)
or other Qualified Plan after the required
2-year
period.
SEP-IRAs
A Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) is an employer sponsored
retirement plan under which an employer is allowed to make
contributions toward their employees’ retirement, as well
as their own retirement (if the employer is self-employed). A
SEP is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(k).
Under a SEP, a separate IRA account called a SEP-IRA is set up
by or for each eligible employee and the employer makes the
contribution to the account. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty
is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an
employee attains
age 591/2.
Roth
IRAs
Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to
establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not
deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the
earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject
to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to
limitations on the amount that may be contributed and the
persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to
certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract
Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to
minimum required distribution rules during the Contract
Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining
in a
97
Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after
the death of the Contract Owner/Annuitant or distributed over
the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of
a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA
under certain circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA
to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted
traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the
purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a
“conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified
tax adviser.
In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at
the time of either a full or partial conversion from a
Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination
of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the
annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which
will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges
assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the
conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional
contract benefits.
Tax
Sheltered Annuities (“TSAs”)
Employees of certain tax-exempt organizations, such as public
schools or hospitals, may defer compensation through an eligible
plan under Code Section 403(b). Salary deferral amounts
received from employers for these employees are excludable from
the employees’ gross income (subject to maximum
contribution limits). Distributions under these Contracts must
comply with certain limitations as to timing, or result in tax
penalties. Distributions from amounts contributed to a TSA
pursuant to a salary reduction arrangement, may be made from a
TSA only upon attaining
age 591/2,
severance from employment, death, disability, or financial
hardship. Section 403(b) annuity distributions can be
rolled over to other Qualified Plans in a manner similar to
those permitted by Qualified Plans that are maintained pursuant
to Section 401 of the Code.
In accordance with Code Section 403(b) and final
regulations published on July 26, 2007 (“Final
Regulations”), as of January 1, 2009, we are required
to provide information regarding contributions, loans,
withdrawals, and hardship distributions from your Contract to
your 403(b) employer or an agent of your
403(b) employer, upon request. In addition, prior to
processing your request for certain transactions, we are
required to verify certain information about you with your
403(b) employer (or if applicable, former
403(b) employer) which may include obtaining authorization
from either your employer or your employer’s third party
administrator.
Certain employees of governmental entities or tax exempt
employers may defer compensation through an eligible plan under
Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Contract of an
eligible plan are subject to limitations. Subject to plan
provisions and a qualifying triggering event, assets in a
Section 457(b) plan established by a governmental entity
may be transferred or rolled into an IRA or another Qualified
Plan, if the Qualified Plan allows the transfer or rollover. If
a rollover to an IRA is completed, the assets become subject to
IRA rules, including the 10% penalty on distributions prior to
age 591/2.
Assets from other plans may be rolled into a governmental
457(b) plan if the 457(b) plan allows the rollover and
if the investment provider is able to segregate the assets for
tax reporting purposes. Consult both the distributing plan and
the receiving plan prior to making this election. Assets in a
457(b) plan set up by a tax exempt employer may not be
rolled to a different type of Qualified Plan or IRA at any time.
401(k) Plans;
Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans
Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain
eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These
plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other
pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are
subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be
available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan
description for more information.
We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by
the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at
shareholders’ meetings of the Funds. However, our current
interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number
of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your
“voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.
We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an
opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting
interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in
person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of
a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not
receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in
the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held
by that Subaccount for which we have received timely
voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting
instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote
the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as
the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which
we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a
Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in
the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our
separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote
shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in
the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts
of ours and our insurance affiliates. As a result of
proportional voting, the votes cast by a small number of
Contract Owners may determine the outcome of a vote.
98
We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios
held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted
to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws
or regulations, or in their interpretation.
The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your
voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the
Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:
•
your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to
that Portfolio, divided by
•
the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.
Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if
required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or
their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting
interest.
After your Annuity Date, if you have selected a variable
annuity, the voting rights under your Contract will continue
during the payout period of your annuity, but the number of
shares that form the basis for your voting interest, as
described above, will decrease throughout the payout period.
Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax
and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax
adviser before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from
joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership.
If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract
ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to
your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or
remove a Joint Owner or Contingent Owner. A Contract cannot name
more than two Contract Owners (either as Joint or Contingent
Owners) at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including
Joint and/or Contingent Owners, must be under the age of 91 at
the time of change or addition. The Contract Owner(s) may make
all decisions regarding the Contract, including making
allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions
under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both
Owners.
If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 401 or
457(b), the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the
Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a
triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified
Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the
Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Code
Sections 408 and 403(b), you must be the sole Owner of the
Contract and no changes can be made.
Annuitant
and Contingent or Joint Annuitant
Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants
cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued.
Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent
Annuitants. See ANNUITIZATION – Selecting Your
Annuitant. There may be limited exceptions for certain
Qualified Contracts.
Beneficiaries
Your Beneficiary is the person(s) or entity who may receive
death benefit proceeds under your Contract or any remaining
annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or
Owner dies. See the DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT
RIDERS section for additional information regarding death
benefit payouts. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or
add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the
Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will
generally take effect only when we receive all necessary
documents, in proper form, at our Service Center and we record
the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect
any payment made or any other action taken by us before the
change or addition was received and recorded. Under our
administrative procedures, a signature guarantee and/or other
verification of identity or authenticity may be required when
processing a claim payable to a Beneficiary.
Spousal consent may be required to change an IRA Beneficiary. If
you are considering removing a spouse as a Beneficiary, it is
recommended that you consult your legal or tax advisor regarding
any applicable state or federal laws prior to requesting the
change. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will
need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any
changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on
naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued
in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of
ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require
that Contracts issued under Code Sections 401 and 457(b)
name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving
Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate will receive
any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.
If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by
Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes
unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable
Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not
expect that a
99
Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could
arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions,
tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.
Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing
forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any
Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or
shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract)
with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment
company or series of another investment company, or another
investment vehicle. Required approvals of the SEC and state
insurance regulators will be obtained before any such
substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any
planned substitution.
We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A and any new
Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of a Fund or in other
investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to
existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion.
We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other
procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators,
to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the
right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do
any of the following:
•
cease offering any Subaccount;
•
add or change designated investment companies or their
portfolios, or other investment vehicles;
•
add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other
assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any
Variable Account;
•
permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes
of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;
•
add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;
•
combine the assets of any Variable Account with any other of our
separate accounts or of any of our affiliates;
•
register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable
Account under the 1940 Act;
•
operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company
under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;
•
run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee,
board, or other group;
•
restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect
to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights
as to any Variable Account;
•
make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal
securities laws;
•
make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the
Contracts as annuities under the Code;
•
make other changes required under federal or state law relating
to annuities;
You may reach our service representatives at
(800) 722-4448
between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific
time. Financial advisors may call us at
(800) 722-2333.
Please send your forms and written requests or questions to:
If you are submitting a Purchase Payment or other payment by
mail, please send it, along with your application if you are
submitting one, to the following address:
The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is
determined by the date and time on which we receive the notice
or instructions in proper form. In those instances when we
receive electronic transmission of the information on the
application from your financial advisor’s broker-dealer
firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer
so provide, we consider the application to be received on the
Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your
Contract specification pages is different and our administrative
procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those
instances when information regarding your Purchase Payment is
electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will
consider the Purchase Payment to be received by us on the
Business Day we receive the transmission of the information.
Please call us at
(800) 722-4448
if you have any questions regarding which address you should
use. Financial advisors may call us at
(800) 722-2333.
We reserve the right to process any Purchase Payment received at
an incorrect address when it is received at either the address
indicated in your Contract specification pages or the
appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.
Purchase Payments after your initial Purchase Payment, loan
requests, transfer requests, loan repayments and withdrawal
requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock
Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time,
will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day
that we receive them in “proper form,” unless the
transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day.
Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or
request, your instructions will be effective on the next
Business Day after we receive them in “proper form”
unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another
day. “Proper form” means in a form satisfactory to us
and may require, among other things, a signature guarantee or
other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require
a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may
have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be
yours; or an executed application or confirmation of
application, as applicable, in proper form is not received by
us; or, to protect you or us. Requests regarding death benefit
proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and
instructions regarding payment satisfactory to us. You should
call your financial advisor or us if you have questions
regarding the required form of a request.
You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by
telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may
also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests
by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so
indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in
writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you
or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach
us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for
example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our
website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as
periods of substantial market fluctuations or other drastic
economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be
out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions
or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should
submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us).
Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or
electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange,
which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any
Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day,
and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or
electronic transaction.
We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm
that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically
are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting
a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain
personal identification upon our request. We may also record all
or part of any telephone conversation with respect to
transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any
transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are
authorizing us to accept and to act upon instructions received
by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract,
and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures,
neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their
directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be
liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including
attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we
believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we
comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss
arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction
privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners,
each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic
transaction requests.
Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide
prospectuses, prospectus supplements, annual and semi-annual
reports, quarterly statements and immediate confirmations, proxy
solicitation, privacy notice and other notices and documentation
in electronic format when available instead of receiving paper
copies of these documents by U.S. mail. You may enroll in
this service by so indicating on the application, via our
Internet website, or by sending us instructions in writing in a
form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically.
Not all contract documentation and notifications may be
currently available in electronic format. You will continue to
receive paper copies of any documents and notifications not
available in electronic format by U.S. mail. In addition,
you will continue to receive paper copies of annual statements
if required by state or federal law. By enrolling in this
service, you consent to receive in electronic format any
documents added in the future. For jointly owned contracts, both
owners are consenting to receive information electronically.
Documents will be available on our Internet website. As
documents become available, we will notify you of this by
sending you an
e-mail
message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the
document. You must have ready access to a computer with Internet
access, an active
e-mail
account to receive this information electronically, and the
ability to read and retain it. You may access and print all
documents provided through this service.
101
If you plan on enrolling in this service, or are currently
enrolled, please note that:
•
We impose no additional charge for electronic delivery, although
your Internet provider may charge for Internet access.
•
You must provide a current
e-mail
address and notify us promptly when your
e-mail
address changes.
•
You must update any
e-mail
filters that may prevent you from receiving
e-mail
notifications from us.
•
You may request a paper copy of the information at any time for
no charge, even though you consented to electronic delivery, or
if you decide to revoke your consent.
•
For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting that the
primary owner will receive information electronically. (Only the
primary owner will receive
e-mail
notices.)
•
Electronic delivery will be cancelled if
e-mails are
returned undeliverable.
•
This consent will remain in effect until you revoke it.
We are not required to deliver this information electronically
and may discontinue electronic delivery in whole or in part at
any time. If you are currently enrolled in this service, please
call
(800) 722-4448
if you would like to revoke your consent, wish to receive a
paper copy of the information above, or need to update your
e-mail
address.
For withdrawals, including exchanges under Code
Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the
Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments
attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally
send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request
is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We
will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that
corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the
following day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a
longer period under certain extraordinary circumstances. These
include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on
a regular holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by
the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC. Amounts withdrawn
or transferred from any
fixed-rate
General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to six
months after the request is effective. See THE GENERAL
ACCOUNT for more details.
Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Purchase Payments
and transfers, loans, loan repayments, unscheduled partial
withdrawals, a full withdrawal, optional living benefit rider
Automatic or Owner Elected Resets/Step-Ups, and on payment of
any death benefit proceeds. Periodically, we will send you a
statement that provides certain information pertinent to your
Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount
values, any fixed option values, fees and charges applied to
your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract
data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your
transactions under the pre-authorized checking plan, dollar cost
averaging, earnings sweep, portfolio rebalancing, and
pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly
account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain
annual information about your Contract Value and transactions.
You may also access these statements online.
If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly
statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to
ensure proper accounting to your Contract. When you write, tell
us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected
error. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us
otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction
confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the
quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the
quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may
not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.
You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account
and the Funds and a list of the securities held in each
Portfolio of the Funds, as required by the 1940 Act; or
more frequently if required by law.
Contract Owner Mailings. To help reduce expenses,
environmental waste and the volume of mail you receive, only one
copy of Contract Owner documents (such as the prospectus,
supplements, announcements, and each annual and semi-annual
report) may be mailed to Contract Owners who share the same
household address (Householding). If you are already
participating, you may opt out by contacting us. Please allow
30 calendar days for regular delivery to resume. You may
also elect to participate in Householding by writing to us. The
current documents are available on our website any time or an
individual copy of any of these documents may be
requested – see the last page of this Prospectus for
more information.
PSD, a broker-dealer and our subsidiary, pays various forms of
compensation to broker-dealers (including other affiliates) that
solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD also may reimburse
other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of
applications for the Contracts. Broker-dealers will receive no
commissions from PSD based either on Purchase Payments or on
Account Value. Certain
102
broker-dealers may be paid an amount under a persistency
program which will be based on assets under management and
duration of contracts. The amount under the persistency program
for a financial advisor is not expected to exceed 0.25% of their
total assets under management.
Additional
Compensation and Revenue Sharing
To the extent permitted by SEC and FINRA rules and other
applicable laws and regulations, selling broker-dealers may
receive additional payments in the form of cash, other special
compensation or reimbursement of expenses, sometimes called
“revenue sharing”. These additional compensation or
reimbursement arrangements may include, for example, payments in
connection with the firm’s “due diligence”
examination of the contracts, payments for providing conferences
or seminars, sales or training programs for invited financial
advisors and other employees, payments for travel expenses,
including lodging, incurred by financial advisors and other
employees for such seminars or training programs, seminars for
the public, advertising and sales campaigns regarding the
Contracts, and payments to assist a firm in connection with its
administrative systems, operations and marketing expenses and/or
other events or activities sponsored by the firms. Subject to
applicable FINRA rules and other applicable laws and
regulations, PSD and its affiliates may contribute to, as well
as sponsor, various educational programs, sales contests and/or
promotions in which participating firms and their salespersons
may receive prizes such as merchandise, cash, or other awards.
Such additional compensation may give us greater access to
financial advisors of the broker-dealers that receive such
compensation or may otherwise influence the way that a
broker-dealer and financial advisor market the Contracts.
These arrangements may not be applicable to all firms, and the
terms of such arrangements may differ between firms. We provide
additional information on special compensation or reimbursement
arrangements involving selling firms and other financial
institutions in the Statement of Additional Information, which
is available upon request. Any such compensation will not result
in any additional direct charge to you by us.
The compensation and other benefits provided by PSD or its
affiliates may be more or less than the overall compensation on
similar or other products. This may influence your financial
advisor or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other
investment options available in the marketplace. You may ask
your financial advisor about these differing and divergent
interests, how he/she is personally compensated and how his/her
broker-dealer is compensated for soliciting applications for the
Contract.
We have entered into services agreements with certain Funds, or
Fund affiliates, which pay us for administrative and other
services, including, but not limited to, certain communications
and support services. The fees are based on an annual percentage
of average daily net assets of certain Fund portfolios purchased
by us at Contract Owner’s instructions. Currently, the fees
received do not exceed an annual percentage of 0.30% and each
Fund (or Fund affiliate) may not pay the same annual percentage
(some may pay significantly less). Because we receive such fees,
we may be subject to competing interests in making these Funds
available as Investment Options under the Contracts.
AllianceBernstein Investments, Inc. pays us for each
AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. portfolio
(Class B) held by our separate accounts. BlackRock
Distributors, Inc. pays us for each BlackRock Variable Series
Funds, Inc. portfolio (Class III) held by our separate
accounts. Franklin Templeton Services, LLC pays us for each
Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust portfolio
(Class 4) held by our separate accounts. Invesco Advisers,
Inc. and its affiliates pay us for each AIM Variable Insurance
Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) portfolio
(Series II) held by our separate accounts. Massachusetts
Financial Services Company pays us for each MFS Variable
Insurance Trust portfolio (Service Class) held by our separate
accounts. Pacific Investment Management Company LLC pays us for
each PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust portfolio (Advisor Class)
held by our separate accounts. GE Investments Funds, Inc. pays
us for each GE Investments Funds, Inc. portfolio
(Class 3) held by our separate accounts.
PSD shall pay American Funds Distributors, Inc. at a rate of
0.16% of Purchase Payments up to $1.5 billion, 0.14% on
Purchase Payments on the next $1.5 billion and 0.10% on
Purchase Payments made in excess, attributable to the Master
Funds for certain marketing assistance.
The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the
life insurance industry and is described more fully below.
Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to
understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of
insurance.
A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or
contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an
existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited,
assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used
in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs
when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity
contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of
an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through
withdrawal, surrender or loan.
103
There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life
insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a
general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest.
Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs
and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the
proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is
in your best interest.
Certain Contract features described in this Prospectus may
vary or may not be available in your state. The state in which
your Contract is issued governs whether or not certain features,
Riders, charges or fees are available or will vary under your
Contract. These variations are reflected in your Contract and in
Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. See your financial
advisor or contact us for specific information that may be
applicable to your state.
For Contracts issued in the state of Pennsylvania, any person
who knowingly and with intent to defraud any insurance company
or other person files an application for insurance or statement
of claim containing any materially false information or conceals
for the purpose of misleading, information concerning any fact
material thereto commits a fraudulent insurance act, which is a
crime and subjects such person to criminal and civil penalties.
In addition, you understand that benefits and values provided
under the Contract may be on a variable basis. Amounts directed
into one or more variable Investment Options will reflect the
investment experience of those Investment Options. These amounts
may increase or decrease and are not guaranteed as to a dollar
amount.
For Flexible Lifetime Income (Joint) and Foundation 10 issued in
the state of Washington, the annual rider charge is the current
charge percentage multiplied by the Contract Value. For
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) issued in
the state of Washington, the current charge percentage is 0.55%.
California
Applicants Age 60 or Older
For residents of the state of California 60 years of age or
older, the Free Look period is a
30-day period
beginning on the day you receive your Contract. If you are a
California applicant age 60 or older and your Contract is
delivered or issued for delivery on or after July 1, 2004,
you must elect, at the time you apply for your Contract, to
receive a return of either your Purchase Payments or your
Contract Value proceeds if you exercise your Right to Cancel and
return your Contract to us.
If you elect to receive the return of Purchase Payments option,
the following will apply:
•
We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment we
receive to any available fixed option if you instruct us to do
so. We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment
designated for any Variable Investment Option to the Cash
Management Subaccount until the Free Look Transfer Date. The
Free Look Transfer Date is 30 days from the Contract Date.
On the Free Look Transfer Date, we will automatically transfer
your Cash Management Subaccount Value according to the
instructions on your application, or your most recent
instruction, if any. This automatic transfer to the Variable
Investment Options according to your initial allocation
instruction is excluded from the Transfer limitations. See
HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED –
Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.
•
If you specifically instruct us to allocate all or any portion
of any additional Purchase Payments we receive to any Variable
Investment Option other than the Cash Management Subaccount
before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically
change your election to the return of your Contract Value
proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of
the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the
entire Contract.
•
If you request a transfer of all or any portion of your Contract
Value from the Cash Management Subaccount to any other Variable
Investment Option before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will
automatically change your election to the return of your
Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel
your election of the “return of Purchase Payments”
option for the entire Contract.
•
If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your
Purchase Payments.
If you elect the return of Contract Value proceeds option, the
following will apply:
•
We will immediately allocate any Purchase Payments we receive to
the Investment Options you select on your application or your
most recent instructions, if any.
•
If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your
Contract Value proceeds described in the Right to Cancel
(“Free Look”) section of this prospectus.
•
Once you elect this option, it may not be changed.
The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A
as of December 31, 2010, the related statements of
operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes
in net assets for each of the periods presented and the
financial highlights for each of the periods presented are
incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional
Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated
December 31, 2010. Pacific Life’s consolidated
statements of financial condition as of December 31, 2010
and 2009, and the related consolidated statements of operations,
equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period
ended December 31, 2010 are contained in the Statement of
Additional Information.
Rule
12h-7 Representation
In reliance on the exemption provided by
Rule 12h-7
of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934
(“34 Act”), we do not intend to file periodic
reports as required under the 34 Act.
All amounts allocated to a fixed option become part of our
General Account. Subject to applicable law, we exercise sole
discretion over the investment of General Account assets, and
bear the associated investment risk. You will not share in the
investment experience of General Account assets. Unlike the
Separate Account, the General Account is subject to liabilities
arising from any of our other business. Any guarantees provided
for under the contract or through optional riders are backed by
our financial strength and claims paying ability. You must look
to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such
guarantees.
Because of exemptive and exclusionary provisions, interests in
the General Account under the Contract are not registered under
the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the General Account
has not been registered as an investment company under the 1940
Act. Any interest you have in a fixed option is not subject to
these Acts, and we have been advised that the SEC staff has not
reviewed disclosure in this Prospectus relating to any fixed
option. This disclosure may, however, be subject to certain
provisions of federal securities laws relating to the accuracy
and completeness of statements made in prospectuses.
Guarantee
Terms
When you allocate any portion of your Purchase Payments or
Contract Value to any fixed option, we guarantee you an interest
rate (a “Guaranteed Interest Rate”) for a specified
period of time (a “Guarantee Term”) of up to one year.
Guarantee Terms will be offered at our discretion.
Guaranteed Interest Rates for any fixed option may be changed
periodically for new allocations. Your allocation will receive
the Guaranteed Interest Rate in effect for that fixed option on
the effective date of your allocation. All Guaranteed Interest
Rates will credit interest daily at a rate that compounds over
one year to equal the annual effective rate. The Guaranteed
Interest Rate on your fixed option will remain in effect for the
Guarantee Term and will never be less than an annual rate of 3%.
Withdrawals
and Transfers
Prior to the Annuity Date, you may withdraw or transfer amounts
from any fixed option to one or more of the other Variable
Investment Options. No partial withdrawal or transfer may be
made from a fixed option within 30 days of the Contract
Date. Currently, we are not requiring the
30-day
waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers, but we
reserve the right to require the
30-day
waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers in the
future. If your withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value
of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to
terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.
Amounts transferred or withdrawn from any fixed option may be
delayed, as described under ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION – Timing of Payments and Transactions.
Any amount delayed, so long as it is held under any fixed
option, will continue to earn interest at the Guaranteed
Interest Rate then in effect until that Guarantee Term has
ended, and the minimum guaranteed interest rate of 3%
thereafter, unless state law requires a greater rate be paid.
The DCA Plus Fixed Option is only available for Contracts issued
before November 14, 2003. All references to the DCA Plus
Fixed Option in this Prospectus and in the SAI apply only to
those Contracts issued when this option was available.
Before your Annuity Date, you can allocate all or some of your
Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. The initial
minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed
Option is $5,000. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum
amount you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option but we
reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future.
Additional Purchase Payments into the DCA Plus Fixed Option are
limited to a maximum aggregate amount of $5,000 per
Contract Year. You may not
105
transfer any amount to the DCA Plus Fixed Option from any other
Investment Option. All Purchase Payments allocated to the DCA
Plus Fixed Option will earn interest at the then current
Guaranteed Interest Rate declared by us.
The DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on any Business Day is the DCA
Plus Fixed Option Value on the prior Business Day, increased by
any additions to the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a
result of any:
•
interest, plus
•
Purchase Payments received by us then allocated to the DCA Plus
Fixed Option, plus
•
any additional amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option,
and decreased by any deductions from the DCA Plus Fixed Option
on that day as a result of any;
•
transfers, including transfers to the Loan Account,
•
withdrawals,
•
amounts applied to provide an annuity,
•
charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, and
•
proportionate reductions for annual charges for expenses
relating to optional benefit riders attached to the Contract.
The DCA Plus program will automatically terminate at the end of
your DCA Plus Guarantee Term, or upon the earliest of:
•
the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the
Contract,
•
the date you transfer the entire amount from the DCA Plus Fixed
Option to another Investment Option,
•
the date the Contract is terminated, or
•
the Annuity Date.
At the end of the DCA Plus program, upon receipt of an
additional Purchase Payment that satisfies our minimum
allocation requirements, you may request, in a form satisfactory
to us, a new DCA Plus program.
We reserve the right to change the terms and conditions of the
DCA Plus program, but not a DCA Plus program you already have in
effect.
Guarantee
Terms
The day that the first Investment allocation is made to the DCA
Plus Fixed Option will begin the Guarantee Term. You can choose
a Guarantee Term of up to one year. Currently, we offer
Guarantee Terms of 6 or 12 months with monthly transfers on
the same day of each month thereafter to the Variable Investment
Options that you selected. The amount transferred each month is
equal to your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on that day divided by
the remaining number of monthly transfers in the Guarantee Term.
Example: On May 1, you submit a $10,000
Investment entirely to the DCA Plus Fixed Option at a then
current Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5.00% with a Guarantee Term
of 6 months. On June 1, the value of the DCA Plus
Fixed Option is $10,041.52. On June 1, a transfer equal to
$1,673.59
($10,041.52 / 6)
will be made according to your DCA Plus transfer instructions.
Your remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value after the transfer is
$8,367.93. On July 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option has now
increased to $8,401.56. We will transfer $1,680.31
($8,401.56 / 5)
to the Variable Investment Options, leaving a remaining value of
$6,721.25 in the DCA Plus Fixed Option.
During the Guarantee Term, you can allocate all or a part of any
additional Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option.
Additional allocations must be at least $250. Each additional
allocation will be transferred to the Variable Investment
Options you select over the remaining Guarantee Term. Transfers
will be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value attributed to
the oldest Investment allocation and each subsequent Purchase
Payment in the order received.
Example: (using the previous example): On
July 15, an additional $5,000 is allocated to the DCA Plus
Option at a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 4.00%. On August 1,
your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value has increased to $11,758.30. An
amount equal to $2,939.58
($11,758.30 / 4)
is transferred from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the Variable
Investment Options. The remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value is
$8,818.72.
Transfers
DCA Plus transfers must be made on a monthly basis to the
Variable Investment Options. No transfers to the DCA Plus Fixed
Option may be made at any time. You cannot choose to transfer
other than monthly. Unless otherwise instructed, any additional
Purchase Payment we receive during a Guarantee Term will be
allocated to the Investment Options, including the DCA Plus
Fixed Option if so indicated, according to your most recent
allocation instructions.
106
If the Owner dies while transfers are being made from the DCA
Plus Fixed Option and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner
elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms,
transfers will continue to be made from the DCA Plus Fixed
Option to the selected Variable Investment Options, until the
Guarantee Term ends.
DCA Plus Fixed Option interest is compounded annually and
credited to your Contract daily. The Guaranteed Interest Rate is
credited on a declining balance as money is transferred from the
DCA Plus Fixed Option to the selected Variable Investment
Options. The equivalent annual rate reflects the amount of
interest that will be transferred to selected Variable
Investment Options over the entire Guarantee Term divided by the
amount originally invested in the DCA Plus Fixed Option.
Example: On May 1, you submit a $10,000
Purchase Payment entirely to the DCA Plus Fixed Option at a then
current Guaranteed Interest Rate of 4.00% with a Guarantee Term
of 12 months. Over the entire Guarantee Term, $215.40 of
interest is transferred to the selected Variable Investment
Options. The equivalent annual rate will equal 2.15% during the
Guarantee Term.
The Fixed Option is no longer available for new Contracts issued
on or after July 1, 2003. All references to the Fixed
Option in this Prospectus and in the Statement of Additional
Information do not apply to such Contracts.
Each allocation (or rollover) you make to the Fixed Option
receives a Guarantee Term that begins on the day that allocation
or rollover is effective and ends at the end of that Contract
Year or, if earlier, on your Annuity Date. At the end of that
Contract Year, we will roll over your Fixed Option Value on that
day into a new Guarantee Term of one year (or, if shorter, the
time remaining until your Annuity Date) at the then current
Guaranteed Interest Rate, unless you instruct us otherwise.
Example: Your Contract Anniversary is
February 1. On February 1 of year 1, you allocate
$1,000 to the Fixed Option and receive a Guarantee Term of one
year and a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5%. On August 1, you
allocate another $500 to the Fixed Option and receive a
Guaranteed Interest Rate of 6%. Through January 31,
year 1, your first allocation of $1,000 earns 5% interest
and your second allocation of $500 earns 6% interest. On
February 1, year 2, a new interest rate may go into
effect for your entire Fixed Option Value.
Withdrawals
and Transfers
After the
1st
Contract Anniversary, you may make one transfer or partial
withdrawal from your Fixed Option during any Contract Year,
except as provided under the dollar cost averaging, earnings
sweep and pre-authorized withdrawal programs. You may make one
transfer or one partial withdrawal within the 30 days after
the end of each Contract Anniversary. Normally, you may transfer
or withdraw up to one-third
(331/3%)
of your Fixed Option Value in any given Contract Year. However,
in consecutive Contract Years you may transfer or withdraw up to
one-third
(331/3%)
of your Fixed Option Value in one year; you may transfer or
withdraw up to one-half (50%) of your remaining Fixed Option
Value in the next year; and you may transfer or withdraw up to
the entire amount (100%) of any remaining Fixed Option Value in
the third year. In addition, if, as a result of a partial
withdrawal or transfer, the Fixed Option Value is less than
$500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer the entire
remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a
proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation
instructions.
We reserve the right to waive the restrictions that limit
transfers from the Fixed Option to one transfer within the
30 days after the end of each Contract Anniversary. We also
reserve the right to waive the limitations on the maximum amount
you may transfer from the Fixed Option in any given Contract
Year. Currently, we are not enforcing any of the Fixed Option
withdrawal and transfer restrictions. We may process requests
for transfers from the Fixed Option that are within the maximum
number of allowable transfers among the Investment Options each
calendar year; i.e. transfers are limited to 25 for each
calendar year.
Some of the terms
we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you.
We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the
first letter of each word. You will find an explanation of what
they mean below.
If you have any
questions, please ask your financial advisor or call us at
(800) 722-4448.
Financial advisors may call us at
(800) 722-2333.
Account
Value –
The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified
Variable Investment Option or any fixed option.
Annuitant –
A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An
Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain
increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date.
A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two
(“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a
“Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants
or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the
sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.
Annuity
Date –
The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later
elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the
Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and
your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity
payments actually begin.
Annuity
Option –
Any one of the income options available for a series of payments
after your Annuity Date.
Beneficiary –
A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit
payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner
prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive
remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant
dies after the Annuity Date.
Business
Day –
Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable
Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently
includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for
trading and our administrative offices are open. The New York
Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on
weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day,
Martin Luther King Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday,
Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and
Christmas Day, and the Friday before New Year’s Day, July
Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the
Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas
Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business
conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly
accounting period. In this Prospectus, “day” or
“date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified.
If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is
scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such
transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next
following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any
systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on
December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a
Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day
of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable
Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special
circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than
31 days are discussed in the SAI.
Code –
The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
Contingent
Annuitant –
A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole
surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant (or both
Joint Annuitants) should die before your Annuity Date.
Contingent
Owner –
A person, if named in your Contract, who will succeed to the
rights as a Contract Owner of your Contract if all named
Contract Owners die before your Annuity Date.
Contract
Anniversary –
The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.
Contract
Date –
The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract
Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are
measured from this date.
Contract
Debt –
As of the end of any given Business Day, the principal amount
you have outstanding on any loan under your Contract, plus any
accrued and unpaid interest. Loans are only available on certain
Qualified Contracts.
Contract Owner,
Owner, Policyholder, you, or
your –
Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the
Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract,
including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change
beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and
designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint
Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such
rights.
Contract
Value –
As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable
Account Value, any fixed option value, the value of any other
Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement,
and any Loan Account Value.
Contract
Year –
A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract
Anniversary.
DCA Plus Fixed
Option –
If you allocate all or part of your Purchase Payments to the DCA
Plus Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General Account
and receive interest at rates declared periodically (the
“Guaranteed Interest Rate”), but not less than an
annual rate of 3%. This fixed option may be used for dollar cost
averaging over a 6 or 12 month period.
DCA Plus Fixed
Option
Value –
The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to the DCA
Plus Fixed Option.
Earnings –
As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your
Contract Value less your aggregate Purchase Payments, which are
reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.
Fixed
Option –
If you allocate all or part of your Investments or Contract
Value to the Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General
Account and receive the Guaranteed Interest Rate declared
periodically, but not less than an annual rate of 3%.
Fixed Option
Value –
The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to the
Fixed Option.
Fund –
Pacific Select Fund, AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco
Variable Insurance Funds), AllianceBernstein Variable Products
Series Fund, Inc., BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc.,
Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, GE
Investments Funds, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, and/or PIMCO
Variable Insurance Trust.
General
Account –
Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than
those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of
our other separate accounts.
Guaranteed
Interest
Rate –
The interest rate guaranteed at the time of allocation (or
rollover) for the Guarantee Term on amounts allocated to a fixed
option. All Guaranteed Interest Rates are expressed as annual
rates and interest is accrued daily. The rate will not be less
than an annual rate of 3%.
Guarantee
Term –
The period during which an amount you allocate to any available
fixed option earns interest at a Guaranteed Interest Rate. These
terms are up to 1 year for a fixed option.
Investment
(“Purchase
Payment”) –
An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as
consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.
Investment
Option –
A Subaccount, any fixed option or any other Investment Option
added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement.
Joint
Annuitant –
If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two
Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your
application for your Contract. Special restrictions apply for
Qualified Contracts.
Loan
Account –
The Account in which the amount equal to the principal amount of
a loan and any interest accrued is held to secure any Contract
Debt.
Loan Account
Value –
The amount, including any interest accrued, held in the Loan
Account to secure any Contract Debt.
Net Contract
Value –
Your Contract Value less Contract Debt.
108
Non-Natural
Owner –
A corporation, trust or other entity that is not a (natural)
person.
Non-Qualified
Contract –
A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.
Policyholder –
The Contract Owner.
Portfolio –
A separate portfolio of a Fund in which a Subaccount invests its
assets.
Primary
Annuitant –
The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the
life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing
or amount of the payout under the Contract.
Purchase Payment
(“Investment”) –
An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as
consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.
Qualified
Contract –
A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual
retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof, or a
Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special
tax treatment under the Code.
Qualified
Plan –
A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under
Section 401, 403, 408, 408A or 457 of the Code.
SEC –
Securities and Exchange Commission.
Separate Account
A (the “Separate
Account”) –
A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust
under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the
“1940 Act”).
Subaccount –
An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount
invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.
Subaccount
Annuity
Unit –
Subaccount Annuity Units (or “Annuity Units”) are used
to measure variation in variable annuity payments. To the extent
you elect to convert all or some of your Contract Value into
variable annuity payments, the amount of each annuity payment
(after the first payment) will vary with the value and number of
Annuity Units in each Subaccount attributed to any variable
annuity payments. At annuitization (after any applicable premium
taxes and/or other taxes are paid), the amount annuitized to a
variable annuity determines the amount of your first variable
annuity payment and the number of Annuity Units credited to your
annuity in each Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Annuity
Units, like the value of Subaccount Units, is expected to
fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.
Subaccount
Unit –
Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a
Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of
Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for
accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that
Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to
fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.
Unit
Value –
The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit
Value”) or Subaccount Annuity Unit (“Subaccount
Annuity Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is
subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that
the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The
fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses
of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount
invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against
the Separate Account. Changes in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values
also reflect an additional factor that adjusts Subaccount
Annuity Unit Values to offset our Annuity Option Table’s
implicit assumption of an annual investment return of 5%. The
effect of this assumed investment return is explained in detail
in the SAI. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit or Subaccount
Annuity Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the close of
the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which usually
closes at 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally
closes earlier.
Variable Account
Value –
The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all
Subaccounts.
Variable
Investment
Option –
A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account).
Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under
Options 2 and 4
Corresponding Dates
Age and Sex of Annuitant
Systematic Transfer Programs
Pre-Authorized Withdrawals
More on Federal Tax Issues
Safekeeping of Assets
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT
AUDITORS
You can receive a copy of the Pacific Odyssey SAI without
charge by calling us at
(800) 722-4448
or you can visit our website at www.pacificlife.com to download
a copy. Financial advisors may call us at
(800) 722-2333.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
The examples apply to CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) and
(Joint) unless otherwise noted below.
Example #1 – Setting
of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment
Base = $4,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$8,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$8,280
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is
increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000
($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount
after the Purchase Payment is equal to $8,000 (4% of the
Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).
An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract
Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than
the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected
Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to
$8,280 (4% × $207,000).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year
as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases
and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable
Account.
111
Example #3 – Withdrawals
Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$8,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$8,280
Activity
$5,000
$216,490
$207,000
$3,280
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$207,000
$8,280
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$216,490
$8,660
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary,
since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected
Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base
to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $8,280
(4% × $207,000).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($8,280), the Protected Payment Base remains
unchanged.
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a
result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $8,660 (4% of
the reset Protected Payment Base).
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$8,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$8,280
Activity
$25,000
$196,490
$190,750
$0
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$190,750
$7,630
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$196,490
$7,860
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($25,000 > $8,280), the Protected
Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal is reduced.
112
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $8,280 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $16,720 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$25,000 − $8,280 = $16,720).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount);
the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected
Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal.
The Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the $196,490 after the withdrawal plus the $25,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 7.85%
($16,720 ¸
($221,490 − $8,280);
$16,720 ¸ $213,210 = 0.0785
or 7.85%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$190,750 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$207,000 × (1 − 7.85%);
$207,000 × 92.15% = $190,750).
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (4% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (4% of $190,750 = $7,630), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($25,000), but not less
than zero).
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset).
Example #5 –
Early Withdrawals.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
The oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner; youngest Designated Life for Joint) is
561/2 years
old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3
and 4.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$0
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$0
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$0
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$0
Activity
$25,000
$196,490
$182,000
$0
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$182,000
$0
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$196,490
$0
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$205,000
$196,490
$0
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$205,000
$205,000
$8,200
Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($25,000 > $0), the Protected
Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal is reduced.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the early withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $221,490
•
Protected Payment Base = $207,000
•
No withdrawals were taken prior to the early withdrawal
113
A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $0 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:
First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount ($25,000).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the early withdrawal amount divided by the Contract
Value prior to the withdrawal. The Contract Value prior to the
withdrawal was $221,490, which equals the $196,490 after the
withdrawal plus the $25,000 withdrawal amount. Numerically, the
ratio is 11.29%
($25,000 ¸
$221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base is reduced either on a proportionate basis or by
the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower
Protected Payment Base.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Protected Payment
Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above.
Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $183,630
(Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $207,000
× (1 − 11.29%); $207,000 × 88.71% = $183,630).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Protected Payment Base is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Protected Payment Base is reduced
by the total withdrawal amount, the new Protected Payment Base
is $182,000 (Protected Payment Base − total withdrawal
amount; $207,000 − $25,000 = $182,000).
Therefore, since $182,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $183,630 (proportionate method) the new Protected
Payment Base is $182,000.
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The
Protected Payment Amount remains at $0 since the oldest Owner
(youngest Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners; youngest Designated
Life for Joint) has not reached
age 591/2.
At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base
was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary
(see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The
Protected Payment Amount is set to $8,200
(4% × $205,000) since the oldest Owner (youngest
Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners; youngest Designated Life for
Joint) reached
age 591/2.
Example #6 – RMD
Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the
entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
05/01/2006
$100,000
$4,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$4,000
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$250
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
05/01/2008
$100,000
$4,000
Contract
Anniversary
114
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. In addition, each contract year the
Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each
withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$4,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$4,000
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$250
11/15/2007
$4,000
$95,820
$0
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $4,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (4% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($4,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $95,820.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = $250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $250. The Protected Payment Base will be
reduced based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $3,750 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$4,000 − $250 = $3,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount);
the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected
Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal.
Numerically, the ratio is 4.18%
($3,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $250);
$3,750 ¸ $89,750 = 0.0418
or 4.18%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$95,820 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$100,000 × (1 − 4.18%);
$100,000 × 95.82% = $95,820).
Example #7 – Lifetime
Income.
This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single)
only.
115
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant is 64 years old.
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
Protected
Protected
Contract
End of Year
Payment
Payment
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
1
$4,000
$96,489
$100,000
$4,000
2
$4,000
$94,384
$100,000
$4,000
3
$4,000
$92,215
$100,000
$4,000
4
$4,000
$89,982
$100,000
$4,000
5
$4,000
$87,681
$100,000
$4,000
6
$4,000
$85,311
$100,000
$4,000
7
$4,000
$82,871
$100,000
$4,000
8
$4,000
$80,357
$100,000
$4,000
9
$4,000
$77,768
$100,000
$4,000
10
$4,000
$75,101
$100,000
$4,000
11
$4,000
$72,354
$100,000
$4,000
12
$4,000
$69,524
$100,000
$4,000
13
$4,000
$66,610
$100,000
$4,000
14
$4,000
$63,608
$100,000
$4,000
15
$4,000
$60,517
$100,000
$4,000
16
$4,000
$57,332
$100,000
$4,000
17
$4,000
$54,052
$100,000
$4,000
18
$4,000
$50,674
$100,000
$4,000
19
$4,000
$47,194
$100,000
$4,000
20
$4,000
$43,610
$100,000
$4,000
21
$4,000
$39,918
$100,000
$4,000
22
$4,000
$36,115
$100,000
$4,000
23
$4,000
$32,199
$100,000
$4,000
24
$4,000
$28,165
$100,000
$4,000
25
$4,000
$24,010
$100,000
$4,000
26
$4,000
$19,730
$100,000
$4,000
27
$4,000
$15,322
$100,000
$4,000
28
$4,000
$10,782
$100,000
$4,000
29
$4,000
$6,105
$100,000
$4,000
30
$4,000
$1,288
$100,000
$4,000
31
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
32
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
33
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
34
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment
Base = $4,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($4,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.
Withdrawals of 4% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to
be paid each year (even after the Contract Value has been
reduced to zero) until the date of death of an Owner or the date
of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant
for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.
116
Example #8 –
Lifetime Income.
This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage Plus
(Joint) only.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
All Designated Lives are 64 years old.
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
•
All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income
benefits while the Rider is in effect.
•
Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
Protected
Protected
Contract
End of Year
Payment
Payment
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
1
$4,000
$96,489
$100,000
$4,000
2
$4,000
$94,384
$100,000
$4,000
3
$4,000
$92,215
$100,000
$4,000
4
$4,000
$89,982
$100,000
$4,000
5
$4,000
$87,681
$100,000
$4,000
6
$4,000
$85,311
$100,000
$4,000
7
$4,000
$82,871
$100,000
$4,000
8
$4,000
$80,357
$100,000
$4,000
9
$4,000
$77,768
$100,000
$4,000
10
$4,000
$75,101
$100,000
$4,000
11
$4,000
$72,354
$100,000
$4,000
12
$4,000
$69,524
$100,000
$4,000
13
$4,000
$66,610
$100,000
$4,000
Activity (Death of first
Designated Life)
14
$4,000
$63,608
$100,000
$4,000
15
$4,000
$60,517
$100,000
$4,000
16
$4,000
$57,332
$100,000
$4,000
17
$4,000
$54,052
$100,000
$4,000
18
$4,000
$50,674
$100,000
$4,000
19
$4,000
$47,194
$100,000
$4,000
20
$4,000
$43,610
$100,000
$4,000
21
$4,000
$39,918
$100,000
$4,000
22
$4,000
$36,115
$100,000
$4,000
23
$4,000
$32,199
$100,000
$4,000
24
$4,000
$28,165
$100,000
$4,000
25
$4,000
$24,010
$100,000
$4,000
26
$4,000
$19,730
$100,000
$4,000
27
$4,000
$15,322
$100,000
$4,000
28
$4,000
$10,782
$100,000
$4,000
29
$4,000
$6,105
$100,000
$4,000
30
$4,000
$1,288
$100,000
$4,000
31
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
32
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
33
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
34
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment Base = $4,000
117
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($4,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.
During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life
occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (4% of the
Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even
after the Contract Value was reduced to zero) until the Rider
terminates.
If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status
prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in
the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for
lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits
under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated
Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
The examples apply to CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus
(Single) and (Joint) unless otherwise noted below.
Example #1 – Setting
of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$10,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$10,350
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is
increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000
($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount
after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the
Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).
An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract
Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than
the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected
Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to
$10,350 (5% × $207,000).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year
as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases
and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable
Account.
119
Example #3 – Withdrawals
Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$10,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$10,350
Activity
$5,000
$216,490
$207,000
$5,350
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$207,000
$10,350
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$216,490
$10,825
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary,
since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected
Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base
to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $10,350
(5% × $207,000).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($10,350), the Protected Payment Base remains
unchanged.
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a
result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,825 (5% of
the reset Protected Payment Base).
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is
64 years old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$10,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$10,350
Activity
$25,000
$196,490
$192,634
$0
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$192,634
$9,632
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$196,490
$9,825
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($25,000 > $10,350), the Protected
Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal is reduced.
120
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $10,350 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $14,650 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$25,000 − $10,350 = $14,650).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount);
the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected
Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal.
The Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the $196,490 after the withdrawal plus the $25,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 6.94%
($14,650 ¸
($221,490 − $10,350);
$14,650 ¸ $211,140 = 0.0694
or 6.94%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$192,634 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$207,000 × (1 − 6.94%);
$207,000 × 93.06% = $192,634).
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (5% of $192,634 = $9,632), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($25,000), but not less
than zero).
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset).
Example #5 –
Early Withdrawals.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
The oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner; youngest Designated Life for Joint) is
561/2 years
old.
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3
and 4.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$0
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$0
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$0
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$0
Activity
$25,000
$196,490
$182,000
$0
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$182,000
$0
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$196,490
$0
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$205,000
$196,490
$0
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$205,000
$205,000
$10,250
Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($25,000 > $0), the Protected
Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal is reduced.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the early withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $221,490
•
Protected Payment Base = $207,000
•
No withdrawals were taken prior to the early withdrawal
121
A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $0 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:
First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount ($25,000).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the early withdrawal amount divided by the Contract
Value prior to the withdrawal. The Contract Value prior to the
withdrawal was $221,490, which equals the $196,490 after the
withdrawal plus the $25,000 withdrawal amount. Numerically, the
ratio is 11.29%
($25,000 ¸
$221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base is reduced either on a proportionate basis or by
the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower
Protected Payment Base.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Protected Payment
Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above.
Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $183,630
(Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $207,000
× (1 − 11.29%); $207,000 × 88.71% = $183,630).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Protected Payment Base is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Protected Payment Base is reduced
by the total withdrawal amount, the new Protected Payment Base
is $182,000 (Protected Payment Base − total withdrawal
amount; $207,000 − $25,000 = $182,000).
Therefore, since $182,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $183,630 (proportionate method) the new Protected
Payment Base is $182,000.
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The
Protected Payment Amount remains at $0 since the oldest Owner
(youngest Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners; youngest Designated
Life for Joint) has not reached
age 591/2.
At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base
was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary
(see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The
Protected Payment Amount is set to $10,250
(5% × $205,000) since the oldest Owner (youngest
Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners; youngest Designated Life for
Joint) reached
age 591/2.
Example #6 – RMD
Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the
entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
05/01/2006
$100,000
$5,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
05/01/2008
$100,000
$5,000
Contract
Anniversary
122
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. In addition, each contract year the
Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each
withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$5,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $96,900.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = $1,250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $1,250. The Protected Payment Base will be
reduced based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount);
the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected
Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal.
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10%
($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250);
$2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310
or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$100,000 × (1 − 3.10%);
$100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).
Example #7 – Lifetime
Income.
This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single)
only.
123
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Every Owner and Annuitant is 64 years old.
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
Protected
Protected
Contract
End of Year
Payment
Payment
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
1
$5,000
$96,489
$100,000
$5,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$100,000
$5,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$100,000
$5,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$100,000
$5,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$100,000
$5,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$100,000
$5,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$100,000
$5,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$100,000
$5,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$100,000
$5,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$100,000
$5,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$100,000
$5,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$100,000
$5,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$100,000
$5,000
14
$5,000
$63,608
$100,000
$5,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$100,000
$5,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$100,000
$5,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$100,000
$5,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$100,000
$5,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$100,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$100,000
$5,000
21
$5,000
$39,918
$100,000
$5,000
22
$5,000
$36,115
$100,000
$5,000
23
$5,000
$32,199
$100,000
$5,000
24
$5,000
$28,165
$100,000
$5,000
25
$5,000
$24,010
$100,000
$5,000
26
$5,000
$19,730
$100,000
$5,000
27
$5,000
$15,322
$100,000
$5,000
28
$5,000
$10,782
$100,000
$5,000
29
$5,000
$6,105
$100,000
$5,000
30
$5,000
$1,288
$100,000
$5,000
31
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
32
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
33
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
34
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.
Withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to
be paid each year (even after the Contract Value has been
reduced to zero) until the date of death of an Owner or the date
of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant
for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.
124
Example #8 –
Lifetime Income.
This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus
(Joint) only.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
All Designated Lives are 64 years old.
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
•
All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income
benefits while the Rider is in effect.
•
Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
Protected
Protected
Contract
End of Year
Annual
Payment
Payment
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
1
$5,000
$96,489
$0
$100,000
$5,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$0
$100,000
$5,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$0
$100,000
$5,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$0
$100,000
$5,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$0
$100,000
$5,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$0
$100,000
$5,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$0
$100,000
$5,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$0
$100,000
$5,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$0
$100,000
$5,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$0
$100,000
$5,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$0
$100,000
$5,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$0
$100,000
$5,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
Activity (Death of first
Designated Life)
14
$5,000
$63,608
$0
$100,000
$5,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$0
$100,000
$5,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$0
$100,000
$5,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$0
$100,000
$5,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$0
$100,000
$5,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$0
$100,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
21
$5,000
$39,918
$0
$100,000
$5,000
22
$5,000
$36,115
$0
$100,000
$5,000
23
$5,000
$32,199
$0
$100,000
$5,000
24
$5,000
$28,165
$0
$100,000
$5,000
25
$5,000
$24,010
$0
$100,000
$5,000
26
$5,000
$19,730
$0
$100,000
$5,000
27
$5,000
$15,322
$0
$100,000
$5,000
28
$5,000
$10,782
$0
$100,000
$5,000
29
$5,000
$6,105
$0
$100,000
$5,000
30
$5,000
$1,288
$0
$100,000
$5,000
31
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
32
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
33
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
34
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000
125
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.
During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life
occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (5% of the
Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even
after the Contract Value was reduced to zero) until the Rider
terminates.
If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status
prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in
the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for
lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits
under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated
Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
Example #1 – Setting
of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Rider purchased at Contract issue by a 64-year old.
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$10,350
$207,000
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase
Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The
Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to
$10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase
Payment).
An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract
Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than
the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to $207,000 and the
Protected Payment Amount to $10,350
(5% × $207,000).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year
as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases
and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable
Account.
127
Example #3 – Withdrawals
Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$10,350
$207,000
Activity
$5,000
$216,490
$207,000
$5,350
$202,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$207,000
$10,350
$202,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$216,490
$10,825
$216,490
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($10,350):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $202,000 ($207,000 − $5,000) and
the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $5,350 ($10,350 − $5,000).
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a
result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,825 (5% of
the reset Protected Payment Base).
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$10,350
$207,000
Activity
$25,000
$196,490
$192,634
$0
$182,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$192,634
$9,632
$182,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$196,490
$9,825
$196,490
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($25,000 > $10,350), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after
the withdrawal are reduced.
128
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $10,350 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $14,650 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$25,000 − $10,350 = $14,650).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
The Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the $196,490 after the withdrawal plus the $25,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 6.94%
($14,650 ¸ ($221,490 − $10,350);
$14,650 ¸ $211,140 = 0.0694
or 6.94%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$192,634 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$207,000 × (1 − 6.94%);
$207,000 × 93.06% = $192,634).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $183,002
((Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($207,000 − $10,350) × (1 − 6.94%);
$196,650 × 93.06% = $183,002).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $182,000
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$207,000 − $25,000 = $182,000).
Therefore, since $182,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $183,002 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $182,000.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (5% of $192,634 = $9,632), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($25,000), but not less
than zero).
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset).
Example #5 – RMD Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your
Contract as of the previous year-end.
129
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$98,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
$100,000
$5,000
$90,500
Contract
Anniversary
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected
Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until
the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
$96,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$96,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
$88,300
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,300.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
130
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
•
Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
•
Protected Payment Amount = $1,250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $1,250. The Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the
following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10%
($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250);
$2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310
or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$100,000 × (1 − 3.10%);
$100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,300 ((Remaining Protected
Balance − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($92,375 − $1,250) × (1 − 3.10%);
$91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected
Balance − total withdrawal amount;
$92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).
Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300.
Example #6 – Lifetime
Income.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Owner is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was
taken.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
131
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
14
$5,000
$63,608
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 65 or older
when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5% of the
Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even
after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have
been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an
Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant
(death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever
occurs first.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your contract will actually perform.
Example #1 – Setting
of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date
Annual
Highest
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Credit
Anniversary
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Value
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Annual Credit Value = $100,000
•
Highest Anniversary Value = $100,000
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Annual
Highest
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Credit
Anniversary
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Value
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
$208,000
$210,000
$208,000
$210,000
$10,500
$210,000
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Annual Credit Value, Highest
Anniversary Value, Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount
to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected
Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000
(5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment
since there were no withdrawals during that Contract Year).
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to Year 2 Contract
Anniversary, an annual credit of $10,000 (5% of total Purchase
Payments) is applied to the Annual Credit Value on that Contract
Anniversary, increasing it to $210,000. On Year 2 Contract
Anniversary, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance are reset to $210,000, which is the greater of Annual
Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value. As a result, the
Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal
to $10,500 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract
Anniversary).
133
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases
and/or
decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional
amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and
increases
and/or
decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.
Example #3 – Withdrawals
Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Years 2 and 4.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Annual
Highest
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Credit
Anniversary
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Value
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
$208,000
$210,000
$208,000
$210,000
$10,500
$210,000
Activity
$10,500
$205,000
$210,000
$0
$199,500
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
$205,000
NA
NA
$210,000
$10,500
$199,500
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$215,000
NA
NA
$210,000
$10,500
$199,500
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(After to Automatic Reset)
$215,000
NA
NA
$215,000
$10,750
$215,000
Activity
$10,750
$212,000
$215,000
$0
$204,250
Year 5 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$217,000
NA
NA
$215,000
$10,750
$204,250
Year 5 Contract Anniversary
(After to Automatic Reset)
$217,000
NA
NA
$217,000
$10,850
$217,000
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($10,500):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $199,500
($210,000 − $10,500); and
•
since a withdrawal occurred, the Annual Credit Value and Highest
Anniversary Value are no longer applicable.
Because at Year 4 Contract Anniversary, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The
Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,750 (5% of the reset
Protected Payment Base).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 4 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($10,750):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $204,250 ($215,000 − $10,750).
Because at Year 5 Contract Anniversary, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 5 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 5 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The
Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,850 (5% of the reset
Protected Payment Base).
134
Example #4 – Withdrawals
Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Annual
Highest
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Credit
Anniversary
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Value
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
$208,000
$210,000
$208,000
$210,000
$10,500
$210,000
Activity
$20,000
$195,000
$200,235
$0
$190,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
$195,000
NA
NA
$200,235
$10,011
$190,000
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$215,000
NA
NA
$200,235
$10,011
$190,000
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(After to Automatic Reset)
$215,000
NA
NA
$215,000
$10,750
$215,000
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $20,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($20,000 > $10,500), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after
the withdrawal are reduced. Since a withdrawal occurred, the
Annual Credit Value and Highest Anniversary Value are no longer
applicable.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $20,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $10,500 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $9,500 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount;
$20,000 − $10,500 = $9,500).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $215,000, which
equals the $195,000 after the withdrawal plus the $20,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 4.65%
($9,500 ¸ ($215,000 − $10,500);
$9,500 ¸ $204,500 = 0.0465
or 4.65%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$200,235 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$210,000 × (1 − 4.65%);
$210,000 × 95.35% = $200,235).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $190,223
((Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($210,000 − $10,500) × (1 − 4.65%);
$199,500 × 95.35% = $190,223).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $190,000
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$210,000 − $20,000 = $190,000).
135
Therefore, since $190,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $190,223 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $190,000.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (5% of $200,235 = $10,011), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($20,000), but not less
than zero).
Because at Year 4 Contract Anniversary, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The
Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,750 (5% of the reset
Protected Payment Base).
Example #5 – RMD
Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your
Contract as of the previous year-end.
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$98,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
$100,000
$5,000
$90,500
Contract
Anniversary
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected
Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until
the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
136
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
$96,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$96,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
$88,300
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,300. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following
calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10%
($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250);
$2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310
or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$100,000 × (1 − 3.10%);
$100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,300 ((Remaining Protected
Balance − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($92,375 − $1,250) × (1 − 3.10%);
$91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected
Balance − total withdrawal amount;
$92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).
Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300.
Example #6 – Lifetime
Income.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Owner is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was
taken.
137
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
14
$5,000
$63,608
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no
annual credit will be applied. Since it was assumed that the
Owner was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was
taken, withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will
continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and
Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the
day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural
Owners), whichever occurs first.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
Example #1 – Setting
of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment
Base = $4,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Rider purchased at Contract issue by a 64-year old.
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of contract Year 2.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$8,280
$207,000
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase
Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000).
The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal
to $8,000 (4% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase
Payment).
An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary,
since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected
Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to $207,000 and the Protected
Payment Amount to $8,280 (4% × $207,000).
Also, the Protected Payment Amount will now be paid for life.
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year
as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases
and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable
Account.
139
Example #3 – Withdrawals
Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$8,280
$207,000
Activity
$5,000
$216,490
$207,000
$3,280
$202,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$207,000
$8,280
$202,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$216,490
$216,490
$8,660
$216,490
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($8,280):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $202,000 ($207,000 − $5,000) and
the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $3,280 ($8,280 − $5,000).
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base
was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary
(see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary –
Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which
resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see
balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After
Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount
is equal to $8,660 (4% of the reset Protected Payment Base).
Example #4 – Withdrawals
Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2
and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$207,000
$207,000
$8,280
$207,000
Activity
$25,000
$196,490
$190,750
$0
$182,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$190,750
$7,630
$182,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Reset)
$196,490
$196,490
$7,860
$196,490
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($25,000 > $8,280), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after
the withdrawal are reduced.
140
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $8,280 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $16,720 (total withdrawal amount −
Protected Payment Amount;
$25,000 − $8,280 = $16,720).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the $196,490 after the withdrawal plus the $25,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is
7.85% ($16,720 ¸ ($221,490 − $8,280);
$16,720 ¸ $213,210 = 0.0785
or 7.85%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$190,750 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$207,000 × (1 − 7.85%);
$207,000 × 92.15% = $190,750).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $183,120
((Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($207,000 − $8,280) × (1 − 7.85%);
$198,720 × 92.15% = $183,120).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $182,000
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$207,000 − $25,000 = $182,000).
Therefore, since $182,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $183,120 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $182,000.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (4% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (4% of $190,750 = $7,630), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($25,000), but not less
than zero).
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset).
Example #5 – RMD
Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your
Contract as of the previous year-end.
141
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$4,000
$98,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
$100,000
$4,000
$90,500
Contract
Anniversary
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected
Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until
the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$125
$96,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$4,000
$96,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$2,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$95,820
$0
$88,274
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $4,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (4% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($4,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $95,820 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,274.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
142
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
•
Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
•
Protected Payment Amount = $250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $250. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following
calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $3,750 (total withdrawal
amount − Protected Payment Amount;
$4,000 − $250 = $3,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 4.18%
($3,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $250);
$3,750 ¸ $89,750 = 0.0418
or 4.18%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$95,820 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$100,000 × (1 − 4.18%);
$100,000 × 95.82% = $95,820).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,274 ((Remaining Protected
Balance − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($92,375 − $250) × (1 − 4.18%);
$92,125 × 95.82% = $88,274).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected
Balance − total withdrawal amount;
$92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).
Therefore, since $88,274 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,274.
Example #6 – Lifetime
Income.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Owner is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was
taken.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
143
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$4,000
$96,489
$100,000
$4,000
$96,000
2
$4,000
$94,384
$100,000
$4,000
$92,000
3
$4,000
$92,215
$100,000
$4,000
$88,000
4
$4,000
$89,982
$100,000
$4,000
$84,000
5
$4,000
$87,681
$100,000
$4,000
$80,000
6
$4,000
$85,311
$100,000
$4,000
$76,000
7
$4,000
$82,871
$100,000
$4,000
$72,000
8
$4,000
$80,357
$100,000
$4,000
$68,000
9
$4,000
$77,768
$100,000
$4,000
$64,000
10
$4,000
$75,101
$100,000
$4,000
$60,000
11
$4,000
$72,354
$100,000
$4,000
$56,000
12
$4,000
$69,524
$100,000
$4,000
$52,000
13
$4,000
$66,610
$100,000
$4,000
$48,000
14
$4,000
$63,608
$100,000
$4,000
$44,000
15
$4,000
$60,517
$100,000
$4,000
$40,000
16
$4,000
$57,332
$100,000
$4,000
$36,000
17
$4,000
$54,052
$100,000
$4,000
$32,000
18
$4,000
$50,674
$100,000
$4,000
$28,000
19
$4,000
$47,194
$100,000
$4,000
$24,000
20
$4,000
$43,610
$100,000
$4,000
$20,000
21
$4,000
$39,918
$100,000
$4,000
$16,000
22
$4,000
$36,115
$100,000
$4,000
$12,000
23
$4,000
$32,199
$100,000
$4,000
$8,000
24
$4,000
$28,165
$100,000
$4,000
$4,000
25
$4,000
$24,010
$100,000
$4,000
$0
26
$4,000
$19,730
$100,000
$4,000
$0
27
$4,000
$15,322
$100,000
$4,000
$0
28
$4,000
$10,782
$100,000
$4,000
$0
29
$4,000
$6,105
$100,000
$4,000
$0
30
$4,000
$1,288
$100,000
$4,000
$0
31
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
$0
32
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
$0
33
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
$0
34
$4,000
$0
$100,000
$4,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment
Base = $4,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($4,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 65 or older
when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 4% of the
Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even
after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have
been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an
Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant
(death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever
occurs first.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
Example #1 –
Setting of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$7,000
$100,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 7% of Protected Payment
Base = $7,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$7,000
$100,000
Activity
$20,000
$122,000
$120,000
$7,000
$120,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Step-Up)
$122,000
$120,000
$8,400
$120,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Step-Up)
$122,000
$122,000
$8,540
$122,000
Immediately after the $20,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during
Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount
to $120,000 ($100,000 + $20,000). The Protected
Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment remains at $7,000
until the Protected Payment Amount is determined at Year 2
Contract Anniversary.
At Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base
was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary
(see balances at Year 2 Contract Anniversary –
Prior to Automatic
Step-Up),
an Automatic
Step-Up
occurred which changes the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value (see balances at Year 2 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic
Step-Up).
As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $8,540 (7%
of the
Stepped-Up
Protected Payment Base).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases
and/or
decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional
amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and
increases
and/or
decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.
145
Example #3 –
Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
Automatic Step-Up at the Beginning of Contract Year 2.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Year 2.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$7,000
$100,000
Activity
$20,000
$122,000
$120,000
$7,000
$120,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Step-Up)
$122,000
$120,000
$8,400
$120,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Step-Up)
$122,000
$122,000
$8,540
$122,000
Activity
$8,540
$116,000
$122,000
$8,540
$113,460
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
$116,000
$122,000
$8,540
$113,460
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($8,540):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $113,460 ($122,000 − $8,540).
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic
Step-Up at
Beginning of Contract Year 2 and 4.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$7,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$7,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Step-Up)
$207,000
$200,000
$14,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Step-Up)
$207,000
$207,000
$14,490
$207,000
Activity
$15,000
$206,490
$206,503
$14,490
$192,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
$206,490
$206,503
$14,455
$192,000
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(Prior to Automatic Step-Up)
$220,944
$206,503
$14,455
$192,000
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
(After Automatic Step-Up)
$220,944
$220,944
$15,466
$220,944
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($15,000 > $14,490), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after
the withdrawal are reduced.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
146
A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $14,490 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $510 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount;
$15,000 − $14,490 = $510).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the $206,490 after the withdrawal plus the $15,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 0.24%
($510 ¸ ($221,490 − $14,490);
$510 ¸ $207,000 = 0.0024
or 0.24%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$206,503 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$207,000 × (1 − 0.24%);
$207,000 × 99.76% = $206,503).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $192,047
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($207,000 − $14,490) × (1 − 0.24%);
$192,510 × 99.76% = $192,047).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $192,000
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$207,000 − $15,000 = $192,000).
Therefore, since $192,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $192,047 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $192,000.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $14,490, but at the Beginning on Contract Year 3,
it is adjusted to $14,455 (7% of the Protected Payment Base (7%
of $206,503 = $14,455).
At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base
was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary
(see balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary –
Prior to Automatic
Step-Up),
an automatic step-up occurred which step-ups the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal
to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4
Contract Anniversary – After Automatic
Step-Up).
Example #5 –
RMD Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your
Contract as of the previous
year-end.
147
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$7,000
$100,000
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$7,000
$98,125
05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$7,000
$98,125
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$7,000
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$7,000
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$7,000
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$7,000
$90,500
05/01/2008
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$7,000
$90,500
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$7,000
$100,000
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$7,000
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$7,000
$96,125
05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$7,000
$96,125
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$7,000
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$7,000
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$99,140
$7,000
$88,358
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $7,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (7% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($7,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount and assuming the Contract
Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the
Protected Payment Base is reduced to $99,140 and the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to $88,358.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
148
•
Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
•
Protected Payment Amount less withdrawals already
taken = $7,000 − $3,750 = $3,250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount for the Contract Year. The Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the
following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount less withdrawals already taken.
Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $750 (total
withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount less
withdrawals already taken;
$4,000 − ($7,000 − $3,750) = $750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 0.86%
($750 ¸ ($90,000 − $3,250);
$750 ¸ $86,750 = 0.0086
or 0.86%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$99,140 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$100,000 × (1 − 0.86%);
$100,000 × 99.14% = $99,140).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,358 (Remaining Protected Balance −
Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($92,375 − $3,250) × (1 − 0.86%);
$89,125 × 99.14% = $88,358).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance −
total withdrawal amount;
$92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).
Therefore, since $88,358 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,358.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. They have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the
Contract Prior to the end of a
10-Year Term
effect the values and benefits under this Rider. There may be
minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These
examples are not intended to serve as projections of future
investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your
Contract will actually perform.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received in Contract
Year 1 and $10,000 is received in Contract Year 4.
•
A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 7.
Beginning
Purchase
Guaranteed
Amount
of Contract
Payments
Withdrawal
Contract
Protection
added to the
Year
Received
Amount
Value
Amount
Contract Value
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
Activity
$20,000
$118,119
$120,000
2
$117,374
$120,000
3
$114,439
$120,000
4
$111,578
$120,000
Activity
$10,000
$119,480
$120,000
5
$118,726
$120,000
6
$124,662
$120,000
Step-Up
(New 10-
Year Term
Begins)
$124,662
$124,662
7
$121,546
$124,662
Activity
$10,000
$109,259
$114,209
8
$108,570
$114,209
9
$105,856
$114,209
10
$103,209
$114,209
11
$100,629
$114,209
12
$98,114
$114,209
13
$95,661
$114,209
14
$93,269
$114,209
15
$90,937
$114,209
Values at
End of
15th Year
$88,664
$114,209
$114,209
$0
$25,545
The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to
(a) + (b) − (c) as indicated below:
(a)
is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
(b)
is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received
during the first year of the Term, and
(c)
is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract
during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is
calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior
to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal,
including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes,
and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to
the withdrawal.
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
During Contract Year 1, an additional Purchase Payment of
$20,000 was made. Since this Purchase Payment was made during
the first Contract Year, the Guaranteed Protection Amount will
be increased by $20,000 to $120,000.
($100,000 + $20,000 − 0 = $120,000)
During Contract Year 4, an additional Purchase Payment of
$10,000 was made. However, this Purchase Payment will not
increase the Guaranteed Protection Amount because it was not
made during the first Contract Year (or first year of the
10-Year
Term).
On the
6th Contract
Anniversary, an optional
Step-Up was
elected. The
Step-Up will
reset the Guaranteed Protection Amount equal to the Contract
Value ($124,662) as of that Contract Anniversary.
During Contract Year 7, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made.
This withdrawal will reduce the Guaranteed Protection Amount on
a pro rata basis and will result in a new Guaranteed Protection
Amount. The pro rata adjustment is $10,453 and was determined by
calculating the ratio of the withdrawal to the Contract Value
immediately before the withdrawal
($10,000 / $119,259 = 0.08385)
multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the
withdrawal ($124,662 * 0.08385 = $10,453).
The new Guaranteed Protection Amount
(a) + (b) − (c) = $114,209
($124,662 + 0 − $10,453 = 114,209).
At the end of Contract Year 15 (end of the
10-Year
Term) the Contract Value ($88,664) is less than the Guaranteed
Protection Amount ($114,209). Therefore, $25,545
($114,209 − $88,664 = $25,545) is
added to the Contract Value and the Rider terminates.
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. They have been provided to assist in
understanding the death benefit amount under the Contract and
the optional
Stepped-Up
Death Benefit and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and
withdrawals made from the Contract may effect the values and
benefits. There may be minor differences in the calculations due
to rounding. These examples are not intended to reflect what
your actual death benefit proceeds will be or serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
Death
Benefit Amount
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract
Year 3.
•
A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.
•
A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 11.
Beginning
Purchase
Return of
of Contract
Payments
Withdrawal
Purchase
Year
Received
Amount
Contract
Value1
Payments1
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
2
$103,000
$100,000
3
$106,090
$100,000
Activity
$25,000
$133,468
$125,000
4
$134,458
$125,000
5
$138,492
$125,000
6
$142,647
$125,000
Activity
$35,000
$110,844
$95,000
7
$111,666
$95,000
8
$103,850
$95,000
9
$96,580
$95,000
10
$89,820
$95,000
11
$10,000
$73,530
$83,629
12
$68,383
$83,629
13
$63,596
$83,629
14
Death
Occurs
$59,144
$83,629
1
The greater of the Contract Value
or the adjusted Return of Purchase Payments represents the Death
Benefit Amount.
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
•
Contract Value = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of
$25,000 was made. The Return of Purchase Payment amount
increased to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.
During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made.
This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment amount on
a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to
$110,844. Numerically, the new Return of Purchase Payment amount
is calculated as follows:
First, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value
prior to the withdrawal ($145,844, which equals the $110,844
Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $35,000 withdrawal
amount). Numerically, the ratio is
24.00% ($35,000 ¸ $145,844 = 0.2400
or 24.00%).
Second, determine the new Return of Purchase Payment amount. The
Return of Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
the new Return of Purchase Payment amount is $95,000 (Return of
Purchase Payment amount prior to the
withdrawal × (1 − ratio);
$125,000 × (1 − 24.00%);
$125,000 × 76.00% = $95,000).
152
During Contract Year 11, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made.
This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment amount on
a pro rata basis to $83,629 and decreased the Contract Value to
$73,530. Numerically, the new Return of Purchase Payment amount
is calculated as follows:
First, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value
prior to the withdrawal ($83,530, which equals the $73,530
Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $10,000 withdrawal
amount). Numerically, the ratio is
11.97% ($10,000 ¸ $83,530 = 0.1197
or 11.97%).
Second, determine the new Return of Purchase Payment amount. The
Return of Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
the new Return of Purchase Payment amount is $83,629 (Return of
Purchase Payment prior to the
withdrawal × (1 − ratio);
$95,000 × (1 − 11.97%);
$95,000 × 88.03% = $83,629).
During Contract Year 14, death occurs. The Death Benefit
Amount will be the Return of Purchase Payments reduced by an
amount for each withdrawal ($83,629) because that amount is
greater than the Contract Value ($59,144).
Using the table above, if death occurred in Contract
Year 7, the Death Benefit Amount would be the Contract
Value ($111,666) because that amount is greater than the Return
of Purchase Payment (reduced by an amount for withdrawals) of
$95,000.
Stepped-Up
Death Benefit
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract
Year 3.
•
A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.
•
Annual
Step-Ups
occur on each of the first 7 Contract Anniversaries.
Guaranteed
Minimum
Beginning
Purchase
Return of
(Stepped-Up)
of Contract
Payments
Withdrawal
Contract
Purchase
Death Benefit
Year
Received
Amount
Value1
Payments1
Amount
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
2
$103,000
$100,000
$103,000
3
$106,090
$100,000
$106,090
Activity
$25,000
$133,468
$125,000
$131,090
4
$134,458
$125,000
$134,458
5
$138,492
$125,000
$138,492
6
$142,647
$125,000
$142,647
Activity
$35,000
$110,844
$95,000
$108,412
7
$111,666
$95,000
$111,666
8
$103,850
$95,000
$111,666
9
$96,580
$95,000
$111,666
Death
Occurs
$89,820
$95,000
$111,666
1
The greater of the Contract Value
or the adjusted Return of Purchase Payments represents the Death
Benefit Amount.
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Contract Value = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of
$25,000 was made. This results in an increase in the Return of
Purchase Payment amount to $125,000. The Contract Value
increased to $133,468 and the Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount increased to $131,090.
During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made.
This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment amount on
a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to
$110,844. In addition, the Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit
153
Amount was reduced on a pro rata basis to $108,412. Numerically,
the new Return of Purchase Payment and Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount is calculated as follows:
First, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value
prior to the withdrawal ($145,844, which equals the $110,844
Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $35,000 withdrawal
amount). Numerically, the ratio is
24.00% ($35,000 ¸ $145,844 = 0.2400
or 24.00%)
Second, determine the new Return of Purchase Payment amount. The
Return of Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
the new Return of Purchase Payment amount is $95,000 (Return of
Purchase Payment amount prior to the
withdrawal × (1 − ratio);
$125,000 × (1 − 24.00%);
$125,000 × 76.00% = $95,000).
Third, determine the new Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount. The Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1
less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Guaranteed
Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount is $108,412 (Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount prior to the
withdrawal × (1 − ratio);
$142,647 × (1 − 24.00%);
$142,647 × 76.00% = $108,412).
During Contract Year 9, death occurs. The death benefit
proceeds are the greater of the Death Benefit Amount (Contract
Value or Return of Purchase Payments adjusted for withdrawals)
or the Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount. The Death Benefit Amount is $95,000
because the Return of Purchase Payment Amount ($95,000) is
greater than the Contract Value ($89,820). The death benefit
proceeds are equal to the Guaranteed Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit Amount of $111,666 because it is greater than the
Death Benefit Amount (Return of Purchase Payments of $95,000).
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be
distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent
reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any
day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the withdrawal
percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that
day, less cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset,
whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day
after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
the withdrawal percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment
Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that
Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The Protected Payment Amount will never be less than zero. The
initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is
equal to the applicable withdrawal percentage (based on the
Owner’s age at the time of purchase) multiplied by the
Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will never be less than zero and will remain unchanged
except as otherwise described under the provisions of this
Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the
initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the
Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective
Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
Remaining Protected Balance will never be less than zero. The
initial Remaining Protected Base is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Annual Credit – An amount added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective
Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each contract year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Lifetime
withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may continue
after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to
zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the
case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later. If a withdrawal was taken before age
591/2
and there was no subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).
This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Annual
Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance. Once the Rider is purchased, you
cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the
Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
In addition, beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value.
If applicable, an Annual Credit is added to the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance prior to any
Automatic Reset. If the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary is greater than the Protected Payment Base (which
includes the Annual Credit amount), then the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be automatically reset
to equal the Contract Value.
156
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The addition of an Annual Credit will increase
the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance
by the amount of the Annual Credit. An Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the
Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than
or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and
will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is
greater than Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is
less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an
amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b)
Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may
take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
Percentage
The withdrawal percentage is determined according to the table
below based on the oldest Owner’s age (or youngest
Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) at Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. The
withdrawal percentages are as follows:
Age
Withdrawal Percentage
Before
591/2
5.0
%
591/2 - 74
5.0
%
75 and older
6.0
%
If you purchase the Rider before you reach 75 years of age,
a Reset is required to receive the higher withdrawal percentage
once you are 75 years of age.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a
numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment
Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount
as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater
than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less
than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount
that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
157
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – General Rules – Required
Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid
each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the
date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract
Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death
benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid
to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals
and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the
time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s
death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be
paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the
Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be
adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a
period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life
expectancy.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, this Rider will terminate, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each year until the day of the first
death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving
Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the
Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount
equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal before
age 591/2
and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under
the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and
your first withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or
after
age 591/2.
See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are
younger than
age 591/2
when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value
remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity
for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal
will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
158
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Annual
Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an
Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:
•
no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
that Contract Anniversary is within the first 10 Contract
Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the
most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
The Annual Credit is equal to 5% (7% if your Rider Effective
Date is before January 1, 2009) of the total of:
•
the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Annual Credit is
added.
Once a withdrawal has occurred, including an RMD Withdrawal,
no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal, unless an Automatic Reset or Owner
Elected Reset occurs. If such a Reset occurs, your eligibility
for the Annual Credit will be reinstated as of the Reset
Date.
The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued.
Eligibility for any Annual Credit, the limitations and
restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction
of annual charges and any future reset options available on and
after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from
that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal
to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date and after
any annual credit is applied, we will automatically reset the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected
Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is applied, is less than
the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual
charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset
(see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected
Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any
Annual Credit that may be applied. Generally, the reduction
will occur when your Contract Value is less than the
159
Protected Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you
elected the reset. You are strongly advised to work with your
financial advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset.
We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is
chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your
Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to age
591/2
and no Resets have occurred.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Remaining Protected Balance is zero when the Owner dies,
this Rider will terminate. If the Owner dies while this Rider is
in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner
elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms,
the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the
Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to zero.
The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If an election to reset is made, whether by an
Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset, then the provisions
of this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the
surviving spouse. The withdrawal percentage will be determined
based on the age of the surviving spouse and the new withdrawal
percentage may be higher or lower than what the withdrawal
percentage was prior to death. In addition, if the surviving
spouse is age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most
recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the
surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving
spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
(based on the new Protected Payment Base and withdrawal
percentage) for life.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT
RIDERS – Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues
Contract subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
160
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount. In this case, the
Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, or
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
Flexible
Lifetime Income Plus (Joint)
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be
distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Designated Lives (each a “Designated
Life”) – Designated Lives must be natural
persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider Effective
Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while this Rider is
in effect.
To be eligible for lifetime benefits, a Designated Life must:
•
be the Owner (or the Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned
IRA or TSA),
•
remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first
in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for
payment of any death benefit.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day
after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the withdrawal
percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that
day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year. The
Protected Payment Amount will never be less than zero. The
initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is
equal to the applicable withdrawal percentage (based on the
youngest Designated Life’s age at the time of purchase)
multiplied by the Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will never be less than zero and will remain unchanged
except as otherwise described under the provisions of this
Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the
initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the
Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective
Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
Remaining Protected Balance will never be less than zero. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Annual Credit – An amount added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective
Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
Spouse – The Owner’s spouse who is treated
as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law.
Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of a
deceased Owner.
161
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. This Rider also provides for an
amount (an “Annual Credit”) to be added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. Once the
Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the
Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for
more information).
In addition, on each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in
effect and before the Annuity Date, the Rider provides for
Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal
to 100% of the Contract Value.
If applicable, an Annual Credit is added to the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance prior to any
Automatic Reset. If the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary is greater than the Protected Payment Base (which
includes the Annual Credit amount), then the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be automatically reset
to equal the Contract Value.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The addition of an Annual Credit will increase
the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance
by the amount of the Annual Credit. An Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the
Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than
or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and
will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is
greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value
is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by
an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b)
Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may
take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
Percentage
The withdrawal percentage is determined according to the table
below based on youngest Designated Life’s age at Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later. The withdrawal percentages are as follows:
Age
Withdrawal Percentage
591/2 - 74
5.0
%
75 and older
6.0
%
Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. Immediately following the withdrawal, the
Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal
amount.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical
example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount as a
result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than
the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than
the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is
greater than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
162
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – General Rules – Required
Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the
death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
the payments of the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under
a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency
as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the surviving Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits
dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death,
there is no death benefit, however, any Remaining Protected
Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency (at least
annually) then in effect at the time of the death of the
surviving Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits. If,
however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a
period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the
pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the
withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not
exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
•
if a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal
will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection, and
•
any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Annual
Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an
Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:
•
no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
that Contract Anniversary is within the first 10 Contract
Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the
most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
The Annual Credit is equal to 5% (7% if your Rider Effective
Date is before January 1, 2009) of the total of:
•
the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
163
•
the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Annual Credit is
added.
Once a withdrawal has occurred, including an RMD Withdrawal,
no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal, unless an Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset occurs. If such a Reset occurs, your
eligibility for the Annual Credit will be reinstated as of the
Reset Date.
The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued.
Eligibility for any Annual Credit, the limitations and
restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction
of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and
after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from
that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal
to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date and after
any Annual Credit is applied, we will automatically reset the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected
Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is applied, is less than
the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual
charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset
(see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider
Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected
Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any
Annual Credit that may be applied. Generally, the reduction
will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
164
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is
chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your
Contract, or
•
Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
Surviving Spouse (who is also a Designated Life eligible for
lifetime benefits) elects to continue the Contract in accordance
with its terms, the Surviving Spouse may continue to take
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider,
until the Rider terminates.
The Surviving Spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If a reset takes place, whether by an Automatic
Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset, the withdrawal percentage may
change and will be determined based on the age of the Surviving
Spouse. However, the withdrawal percentage will never be lower
than the withdrawal percentage in effect at the time of death.
The Surviving Spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS –
Death Benefits).
Ownership
and Beneficiary Changes
Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status,
including a dissolution of marriage, may adversely affect the
benefits of this Rider. A particular change may make a
Designated Life ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits
under this Rider. As a result, the Rider may remain in effect
and you may pay for benefits that you will not receive. You
are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor and
consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant
and/or
Beneficiary changes to your Contract.
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day of death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime
benefits,
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the
Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving
Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change
in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of
the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant,
in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day that the Contract is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day of death
of:
•
all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits, or
165
•
the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner if both
Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in
marital status,
if, at the time of these events, the Contract Value is zero
and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the Protected
Payment Amount. In this case, the Rider will terminate when the
Remaining Protected Balance is zero, see Depletion of
Remaining Protected Balance subsection.
Sample
Calculations
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
The examples apply to Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Single)
and (Joint) unless otherwise noted below.
Example #1 –
Setting of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 74 on the Contract Date
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000
Example #2 –
Subsequent Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 74 on the Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
No Automatic Resets or Owner-Elected Resets.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
2
$207,000
$10,000
$210,000
$10,500
$210,000
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase
Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected
Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000
(5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment
since there were no withdrawals during that Contract Year).
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the Beginning of Contract Year 2, an annual credit of $10,000
(5% of the initial Remaining Protected Balance plus cumulative
Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date) is
applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to
$210,000. As a result, the
166
Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal
to $10,500 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract
Anniversary).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases
and/or
decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional
amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and
increases
and/or
decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.
Example #3 –
Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 74 on the Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 4 and 5.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
2
$207,000
$10,000
$210,000
$10,500
$210,000
Activity
$10,500
$209,000
$210,000
$0
$199,500
3
$209,000
$0
$210,000
$10,500
$199,500
Activity
$10,500
$214,845
$210,000
$0
$189,000
4
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$214,845
$0
$210,000
$10,500
$189,000
4
(After Automatic Reset)
$214,845
$0
$214,845
$12,890
$214,845
Activity
$12,890
$216,994
$214,845
$0
$201,955
5
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$216,994
$0
$214,845
$12,890
$201,955
5
(After Automatic Reset)
$216,994
$0
$216,994
$13,019
$216,994
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and
#2.
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($10,500):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $199,500 ($210,000 − $10,500).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($10,500):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $189,000 ($199,500 − $10,500).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 4, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
4 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset
occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
4 – After Automatic Reset). Additionally, the
reset took place after the Owner reached age 75. As a
result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $12,890 (6% of
the reset Protected Payment Base).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 4 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($12,890):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $201,955 ($214,845 − $12,890).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 5, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
5 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset
occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
5 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the
Protected Payment Amount is equal to $13,019 (6% of the reset
Protected Payment Base).
167
Since withdrawals occurred during Contract Years 2, 3 and 4,
annual credits are not applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal. Since a reset occurred at the
beginning of Contract Year 5, eligibility for the annual credit
will again apply.
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s Age = 74 on the Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 3.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
2
$207,000
$10,000
$210,000
$10,500
$210,000
Activity
$15,000
$206,490
$205,527
$0
$195,000
3
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$206,490
$0
$205,527
$10,276
$195,000
3
(After Automatic Reset)
$206,490
$0
$206,490
$12,389
$206,490
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and
#2.
Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($15,000 > $10,500), the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the
withdrawal are reduced.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $10,500 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $4,500 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $15,000 − $10,500 = $4,500).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the $206,490 after the withdrawal plus the $15,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 2.13% ($4,500
¸
($221,490 − $10,500);
$4,500 ¸ $210,990 = 0.0213
or 2.13%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$205,527 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $210,000 ×
(1 − 2.13%); $210,000 ×
97.87% = $205,527).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $195,250
((Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount) ×
(1 − ratio); ($210,000 − $10,500)
× (1 − 2.13%); $199,500 ×
97.87% = $195,250).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the
168
new Remaining Protected Balance is $195,000 (Remaining Protected
Balance immediately before the withdrawal − total
withdrawal amount; $210,000 − $15,000 = $195,000).
Therefore, since $195,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $195,250 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $195,000.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (5% of $205,527 = $10,276), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($15,000), but not less
than zero).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 3, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
3 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset
occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
3 – After Automatic Reset). Additionally, the
reset took place after the Owner reached age 75. As a
result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $12,389 (6% of
the reset Protected Payment Base).
Since withdrawals occurred during Contract Year 2, annual
credits are not applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal. Since a reset occurred at the
beginning of Contract Year 3, eligibility for the annual credit
will again apply.
Example #5 –
RMD Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your
Contract as of the previous year-end.
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$98,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
$100,000
$5,000
$90,500
Contract
Anniversary
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected
Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until
the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
169
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
$96,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$96,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
$88,300
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,300. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following
calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250=$2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10% ($2,750
¸
($90,000 − $1,250); $2,750
¸
$88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $100,000 ×
(1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,300 ((Remaining Protected Balance −
Protected Payment Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($92,375 − $1,250)
× (1 − 3.10%); $91,125 ×
96.90% = $88,300).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance −
total withdrawal amount; $92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).
Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300.
170
Example #6 –
Lifetime Income.
This example applies to Flexible Lifetime Income Plus
(Single) only.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Owner is
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
14
$5,000
$63,608
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
171
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual
credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal. Since it was assumed that the Owner
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5%
of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year
(even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance
have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of
an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant
(death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever
occurs first.
Example #7 –
Lifetime Income.
This example applies to Flexible Lifetime Income Plus (Joint)
Only.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
•
All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income
benefits while the Rider is in effect.
•
Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
Activity (Death of first
Designated Life)
14
$5,000
$63,608
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
172
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life
occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (5% of the
Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even
after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance were
reduced to zero) until the Rider terminates.
If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status
prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in
the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for
lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits
under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated
Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
Automatic Income Builder
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be
distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Amount on
the Rider Effective Date is equal to the applicable withdrawal
percentage (based on the Owner’s age at the time of
purchase) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent
reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any
day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the withdrawal
percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that
day, less cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year.
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner) is younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset,
whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day
after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
the withdrawal percentage multiplied by the Protected Payment
Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that
Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The Protected Payment Amount will never be less than zero.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will never be less than zero and will remain unchanged
except as otherwise described under the provisions of this
Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the
initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the
Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective
Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
Remaining Protected Balance will never be less than zero. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the
Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Rider terminates. Lifetime withdrawals up to the
Protected Payment Amount may continue after the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or
youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later. If a withdrawal was taken before age
591/2
and there was no subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).
If you are older than
591/2
and if you delay taking withdrawals, this Rider also provides
the potential to receive a 0.10% increase
173
in the withdrawal percentage per year, which can increase the
percentage that you may withdraw each Contract Year without
reducing your Protected Payment Base. Once the Rider is
purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see
the Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
In addition, beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will
increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset
Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected
Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by
the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected
Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected
Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater
than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are
greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a
TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on
withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event
(e.g. reaching
age 591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
Percentage
On or prior to the date of the first withdrawal (measured from
the later of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date)
the withdrawal percentage is determined as follows based on the
oldest Owner’s age (or youngest Annuitant in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
If your Rider Effective Date is on or after
January 1, 2009, the following Withdrawal Percentages
will apply:
Age
Withdrawal Percentage
Before
591/2
4.0%
591/2 - 69
4.0%
70 - 84
5.0%
85 and older
6.0%
If your Rider Effective Date is before January 1,2009, the following Withdrawal Percentages will apply:
Age
Withdrawal Percentage
Before
591/2
5.0%
591/2 - 69
5.0%
70 - 84
6.0%
85 and older
7.0%
If the first withdrawal (measured from the later of the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date) is taken on or
after
age 591/2,
the withdrawal percentage will automatically increase according
to the table above based on age as of the most recent Contract
Anniversary.
If the first withdrawal (measured from the later of the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date) is taken prior
to
age 591/2,
the withdrawal percentage will be 4.0% (5.0% if your Rider
Effective Date is before January 1, 2009) until the
Remaining Protected Balance is depleted and will remain
unchanged unless a Reset occurs. If an Automatic Reset or an
Owner-Elected Reset occurs and your first withdrawal after that
Reset is taken on or after age
591/2,
the withdrawal percentage will be the withdrawal percentage that
corresponds to the age at the time of the first withdrawal.
There is an opportunity for an increase in the withdrawal
percentage. The withdrawal percentage in the table above will
increase by 0.10% for each Rider year a withdrawal is not taken
beginning on the later of the Contract Anniversary following the
Owner’s
age 591/2
or the Rider Effective Date. In addition, the increase in the
withdrawal percentage will still be included as you reach a new
age band (for example, if your first withdrawal is taken after
age
591/2
and at age 69 your withdrawal percentage is 4.4%, then your
withdrawal percentage would be 5.4% the Contract Anniversary
immediately after you turn 70). However, once a withdrawal is
taken (including an RMD Withdrawal), regardless of the
Owner’s age when the withdrawal is taken, no further
increase in the withdrawal percentage will be available and
eligibility for the increase cannot be reinstated with a Reset.
174
The withdrawal percentage, including any 0.10% increase, will
not be reduced as a result of a Reset.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. Immediately following the withdrawal the
Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal
amount.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical
example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount as a
result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than
the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than
the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is
greater than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid
each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the
date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
•
the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected
by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
175
If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract
Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death
benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid
to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals
and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the
time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s
death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be
paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the
Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be
adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a
period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life
expectancy.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduces the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, this Rider will terminate, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each year until the day of the first
death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving
Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the
Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount
equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal before
age 591/2
and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under
the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and
your first withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or
after
age 591/2.
See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are
younger than
age 591/2
when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value
remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity
for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued,
except that eligibility for the increase in the withdrawal
percentage cannot be reinstated with a Reset once a withdrawal
is taken. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments
and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future
reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again
apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs
when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
are changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the
Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract
Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage
may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES,
FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected
Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above. If you elect this
option, your opt-out election must be received, in a form
satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within the same
60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the
reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries. If
you previously elected not to participate in Automatic Resets,
you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic Resets at
any time. Your election to resume participation must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this Reset.
176
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount.
Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is
less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract
Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised
to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an
Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written
confirmation of your election.
Subsequent Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached permits Purchase
Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option
is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of
your Contract, or
•
the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity
Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to
age 591/2
and no Resets have occurred.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Remaining Protected Balance is zero when the Owner dies,
this Rider will terminate. If the Owner dies while this Rider is
in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner
elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms,
the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the
Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to zero.
The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If a reset takes place then the provisions of
this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the
surviving spouse. The withdrawal percentage will be determined
based on the age of the surviving spouse and the new withdrawal
percentage may be higher or lower than what the withdrawal
percentage was prior to death. In addition, if the surviving
spouse is age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most
recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the
surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving
spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
(based on the new Protected Payment Base and withdrawal
percentage) for life.
Any 0.10% increase to the withdrawal percentage previously added
will apply but no further increases to the withdrawal percentage
will be added.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS –
Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues
Contract subsection),
177
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount. In this case, the
Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, or
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
Sample
Calculations
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
Example #1 – Setting
of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = Withdrawal percentage
multiplied by the Protected Payment
Base = 4% × $100,000 = $4,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Years 1 and 2.
178
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Automatic Reset at Contract Years 2 and 3.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$207,000
$200,000
$8,200
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$207,000
$207,000
$8,487
$207,000
Activity
$100,000
$307,000
$307,000
$12,587
$307,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$321,490
$307,000
$15,964
$307,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$321,490
$321,490
$16,717
$321,490
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase
Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The
Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to
$8,000 (4.0% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase
Payment).
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to Year 2 Contract
Anniversary, the withdrawal percentage is increased to 4.1%.
Additionally, because at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, the
Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that
Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 2 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 2 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result,
the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $8,487 (4.1% of the
reset Protected Payment Base).
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount
to $307,000 ($207,000 + $100,000). The Protected
Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $12,587
(4.1% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, the withdrawal percentage
is increased to 5.2%. The withdrawal percentage increased from
4.1% to 5.2% because during Contract Year 2 there were no
withdrawals (0.10% added to the withdrawal percentage) and the
Owner reached age 70 (1.0% added to the withdrawal
percentage). Additionally, because at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary, the Protected Payment Base was less than the
Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at
Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic
Reset), an Automatic Reset occurred which resets the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at
Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic
Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal
to $16,717 (5.2% of the reset Protected Payment Base).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases
and/or
decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional
amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and
increases
and/or
decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.
Example #3 – Withdrawals
Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Years 1 and 2.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Year 3.
•
Automatic Reset at Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
179
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$207,000
$200,000
$8,200
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$207,000
$207,000
$8,487
$207,000
Activity
$100,000
$307,000
$307,000
$12,587
$307,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$321,490
$307,000
$15,964
$307,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$321,490
$321,490
$16,717
$321,490
Activity
$16,717
$327,277
$321,490
$0
$304,773
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$327,277
$321,490
$16,717
$304,773
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$327,277
$327,277
$17,018
$327,277
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Years 1 and 2, refer to
Examples #1 and #2.
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, the withdrawal percentage is
increased to 5.2%. The withdrawal percentage increased from 4.1%
to 5.2% because during Contract Year 2 there were no withdrawals
(0.10% added to the withdrawal percentage) and the Owner reached
age 70 (1.0% added to the withdrawal percentage). Additionally,
because at Year 3 Contract Anniversary, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result,
the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $16,717 (5.2% of the
reset Protected Payment Base).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 did not
exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($16,717):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $304,773 ($321,490 − $16,717).
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 3, the
withdrawal percentage will no longer increase as a result of
delaying withdrawals.
Because at the Year 4 Contract Anniversary, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result,
the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $17,018 (5.2% of the
reset Protected Payment Base).
Example #4 – Withdrawals
Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 68
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Years 1 and 2.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 3.
•
Automatic Resets at Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
•
Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the
first day of the applicable Contract Year.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Purchase
Contract
Payment
Payment
Protected
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Base
Amount
Balance
Rider Effective Date
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$4,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$8,000
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$207,000
$200,000
$8,200
$200,000
Year 2 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$207,000
$207,000
$8,487
$207,000
Activity
$100,000
$307,000
$307,000
$12,587
$307,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$321,490
$307,000
$15,964
$307,000
Year 3 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$321,490
$321,490
$16,717
$321,490
Activity
$30,000
$313,994
$308,437
$0
$291,490
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
Prior to Automatic Reset
$313,994
$308,437
$16,038
$291,490
Year 4 Contract Anniversary
After Automatic Reset
$313,994
$313,994
$16,327
$313,994
180
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Years 1 and 2, refer to
Examples #1 and #2.
At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, the withdrawal percentage is
increased to 5.2%. The withdrawal percentage increased from 4.1%
to 5.2% because during Contract Year 2 there were no withdrawals
(0.10% added to the withdrawal percentage) and the Owner reached
age 70 (1.0% added to the withdrawal percentage). Additionally,
because at Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result,
the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $16,717 (5.2% of the
reset Protected Payment Base).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 exceeded
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($16,717), the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $308,437 and
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to $291,490. The
reduction in the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining
Protected Balance is calculated as follows:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $13,283 (total withdrawal amount −
Protected Payment Amount;
$30,000 − $16,717 = $13,283).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value prior to the
withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $343,994, which
equals the $313,994 after the withdrawal plus the $30,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 4.06%
($13,283 ¸ ($343,994 − $16,717);
$13,283 ¸ $327,277 = 0.0406
or 4.06%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$308,437 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio);
$321,490 × (1 − 4.06%);
$321,490 × 95.94% = $308,437).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount and then multiplied by 1 less
the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $292,399
((Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($321,490 − $16,717) × (1 − 4.06%);
$304,773 × 95.94% = $292,399).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $291,490
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$321,490 − $30,000 = $291,490).
Therefore, since $291,490 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $292,399 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $291,490.
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 3, the
withdrawal percentage will no longer increase as a result of
delaying withdrawals.
At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment
Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4 Contract
Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result,
the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $16,327 (5.2% of the
reset Protected Payment Base).
Example
#5 – RMD Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your
Contract as of the previous
year-end.
181
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$5,000
$98,125
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$5,000
$90,500
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected
Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until
the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other
non-RMD
Withdrawals during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount and Contract Anniversary are the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
$96,125
05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$5,000
$96,125
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
$88,300
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD
Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the
Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was
re-calculated
(5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract
Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a
non-RMD
Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals
during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected
Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal exceeded the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is
182
reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,300. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount;
$4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10%
($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250);
$2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310
or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment
Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000
× (1 − 3.10%); $100,000 ×
96.90% = $96,900).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount and
then multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above.
Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300 ((Remaining Protected
Balance − Protected Payment
Amount) × (1 − ratio);
($92,375 − $1,250) × (1 − 3.10%);
$91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance −
total withdrawal amount;
$92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).
Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300.
Example #6 –
Lifetime Income.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
Owner’s age on Rider Effective Date = 65
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Withdrawals, are taken each Contract Year:
•
Equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base in Contract Years
1-5
(age 65-69)
•
Equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base in Contract Years
6-20
(age 70-84)
•
Equal to 6% of the Protected Payment Base in Contract Years
21-35
(age 85-99)
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
183
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$4,000
$99,000
$100,000
$4,000
$96,000
2
$4,000
$97,970
$100,000
$4,000
$92,000
3
$4,000
$96,909
$100,000
$4,000
$88,000
4
$4,000
$95,816
$100,000
$4,000
$84,000
5
$4,000
$94,691
$100,000
$4,000
$80,000
6
$5,000
$92,532
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
7
$5,000
$90,308
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
8
$5,000
$88,017
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
9
$5,000
$85,657
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
10
$5,000
$83,227
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
11
$5,000
$80,724
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
12
$5,000
$78,146
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
13
$5,000
$75,490
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
14
$5,000
$72,755
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
15
$5,000
$69,937
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
16
$5,000
$67,035
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
17
$5,000
$64,046
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
18
$5,000
$60,968
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
19
$5,000
$57,797
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
20
$5,000
$54,531
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
21
$6,000
$50,167
$100,000
$6,000
$0
22
$6,000
$45,672
$100,000
$6,000
$0
23
$6,000
$41,042
$100,000
$6,000
$0
24
$6,000
$36,273
$100,000
$6,000
$0
25
$6,000
$31,361
$100,000
$6,000
$0
26
$6,000
$26,302
$100,000
$6,000
$0
27
$6,000
$21,091
$100,000
$6,000
$0
28
$6,000
$15,724
$100,000
$6,000
$0
29
$6,000
$10,196
$100,000
$6,000
$0
30
$6,000
$4,501
$100,000
$6,000
$0
31
$6,000
$0
$100,000
$6,000
$0
32
$6,000
$0
$100,000
$6,000
$0
33
$6,000
$0
$100,000
$6,000
$0
34
$6,000
$0
$100,000
$6,000
$0
35
$6,000
$0
$100,000
$6,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment
Base = $4,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal:
(a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
(b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no
increases are added to the withdrawal percentage due to delaying
withdrawals.
Since it was assumed that the Owner was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 4%,
5% and 6% of the Protected Payment Base, respectively, will
continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and
Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the
day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural
Owners), whichever occurs first.
184
Flexible
Lifetime Income (Single)
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum
amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing
the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any
day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date
is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Annual Credit – An amount added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary
beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an
Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the
guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the
Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the
Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the
Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to
zero (0). Lifetime withdrawals up to the Protected Payment
Amount may continue after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant,
in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later. If a withdrawal was taken before age
591/2
and there was no subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This
Rider also provides for an amount (an “Annual Credit”)
to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot
request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination
subsection of this Rider for more information).
In addition, beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value.
If applicable, an Annual Credit is added to the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance prior to any
Automatic Reset. If the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary is greater than the Protected Payment Base (which
includes the Annual Credit amount) then the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be automatically reset
to equal the Contract Value.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The addition of an Annual Credit will increase
the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance
by the amount of the Annual Credit. An Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the
Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than
or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and
will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is
greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value
is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by
an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
185
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b)
Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may
take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contact Year, regardless of market
performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of the
Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year
may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a
withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a
numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance as a result of an excess
withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected
Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater
than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to
zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year
until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be
paid each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or
the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
•
the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid
under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment
frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than
annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
186
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract
Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death
benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid
to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals
and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the
time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s
death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be
paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the
Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be
adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a
period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life
expectancy.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, this Rider will terminate, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to 5% of the
Protected Payment Base each year until the day of the first
death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving
Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the
Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount
equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal before
age 591/2
and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under
the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and
your first withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or
after
age 591/2.
See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are
younger than
age 591/2
when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value
remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity
for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal
will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Annual
Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an
Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:
•
no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
that Contract Anniversary is within the first 10 Contract
Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the
most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
The Annual Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:
•
the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Annual Credit is
added.
Once a withdrawal has occurred, including an RMD Withdrawal,
no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal, unless an Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset occurs. If such a Reset occurs, your
eligibility for the Annual Credit will be reinstated as of the
Reset Date.
The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued.
Eligibility for any Annual Credit, the limitations and
restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction
of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and
after the Reset Date, will again apply and will
187
be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are
changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset
Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is
applied, is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and annual
charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before
the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue
in effect in accordance with the Automatic Reset
paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any
Annual Credit that may be applied. Generally, the reduction
will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is
chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your
Contract, or
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base in effect at the maximum
Annuity Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to age
591/2
and no Resets have occurred.
188
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Remaining Protected Balance is zero when the Owner dies,
this Rider will terminate. If the Owner dies while this Rider is
in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner
elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms,
the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the
Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced to zero.
The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If a reset takes place then the provisions of
this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the
surviving spouse. In addition, if the surviving spouse is age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most
recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the
surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving
spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
(based on the new Protected Payment Base) for life.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT
RIDERS – Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the
date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base. In this case,
the Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, or
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
Flexible
Lifetime Income (Joint)
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
189
Designated Lives (each a “Designated
Life”) – Designated Lives must be
natural persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider
Effective Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while
this Rider is in effect.
To be eligible for lifetime benefits, a Designated Life must:
•
be the Owner (or the Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned
IRA or TSA), or
•
remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first
in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for
payment of any death benefit.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum
amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing
the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any
day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the
Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year. The initial Protected
Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the
initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Annual Credit – An amount added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary
beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an
Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the
guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the
Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the
Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
Spouse – The Owner’s spouse who is
treated as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law.
Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of
a deceased Owner.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime
benefits. This Rider also provides for an amount (an
“Annual Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance. Once the Rider is
purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see
the Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
In addition, on each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in
effect and before the Annuity Date, the Rider provides for
Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal
to 100% of the Contract Value.
If applicable, an Annual Credit is added to the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance prior to any
Automatic Reset. If the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary is greater than the Protected Payment Base (which
includes the Annual Credit amount) then the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be automatically reset
to equal the Contract Value.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The addition of an Annual Credit will increase
the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance
by the amount of the Annual Credit. An Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the
Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less
than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and
will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is
greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value
is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by
an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
190
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b)
Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may
take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. Immediately following the withdrawal, the
Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal
amount.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will
(immediately following the excess withdrawal) reduce the
Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount
in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the
Remaining Protected Balance either on a proportionate basis or
by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower
Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in Sample
Calculations below for a numerical example of the
adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a
withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the
Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be
reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount
withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount (or
is an RMD withdrawal) and reduces the Contract Value to zero,
the following will apply:
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until
the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid
under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment
frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than
annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the surviving Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits
dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death,
there is no death benefit, however, any Remaining Protected
Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under a series of
pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency (at least
annually) then in effect at the time of the death of the
surviving Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits. If,
however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a
period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the
pre-
191
authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the
withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not
exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
•
if a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal
will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection, and
•
any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Annual
Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an
Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:
•
no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
that Contract Anniversary is within the first 10 Contract
Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the
most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
The Annual Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:
•
the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Annual Credit is
added.
Once a withdrawal has occurred, including an RMD Withdrawal,
no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal, unless an Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset occurs. If such a Reset occurs, your
eligibility for the Annual Credit will be reinstated as of the
Reset Date.
The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued.
Eligibility for any Annual Credit, the limitations and
restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction
of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and
after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from
that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal
to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is
applied, is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and annual
charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before
the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue
in effect in accordance with the Automatic Reset
paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and
192
before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for
future Contract Anniversaries as described in the Automatic
Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any
Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this Reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any
Annual Credit that may be applied. Generally, the reduction
will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is
chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your
Contract, or
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base in effect at the maximum
Annuity Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
Surviving Spouse (who is also a Designated Life eligible for
lifetime benefits) elects to continue the Contract in accordance
with its terms, the Surviving Spouse may continue to take
withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider,
until the day of the death of such Surviving Spouse. The
Surviving Spouse may elect any of the reset options available
under this Rider for subsequent Contract Anniversaries.
The Surviving Spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT
RIDERS – Death Benefits).
Ownership
and Beneficiary Changes
Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary
designations and changes in marital status, including a
dissolution of marriage, may adversely affect the benefits of
this Rider. A particular change may make a Designated Life
ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits under this Rider.
As a result, the Rider may remain in effect and you may pay for
benefits that you will not receive. You are strongly advised
to work with your financial advisor and consider your options
prior to making any Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary changes
to your Contract.
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day of death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime
benefits,
193
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the
Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit
is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving
Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,
•
if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change
in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of
the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant,
in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day of death
of:
•
all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits, or
•
the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner if both
Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in
marital status,
if, at the time of these events, the Contract Value is zero and
we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of 5% of the Protected
Payment Base. In this case, the Rider will terminate when the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, see Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance subsection.
Sample
Calculations
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
The
examples apply to Flexible Lifetime Income (Single) and (Joint)
unless otherwise noted below.
Example #1 – Setting
of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Example #2 – Subsequent
Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
194
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
No Automatic Resets or Owner-Elected Resets.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
2
$207,000
$12,000
$212,000
$10,600
$212,000
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase
Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected
Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000
(5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the Beginning of Contract Year 2, an annual credit of
$12,000 (6% of the initial Remaining Protected Balance plus
cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective
Date) is applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both
to $212,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that
Contract Anniversary is equal to $10,600 (5% of the Protected
Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year
as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and
other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the
investment performance of the Variable Account.
Example #3 – Withdrawals
Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 4 and 5.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
2
$207,000
$12,000
$212,000
$10,600
$212,000
Activity
$10,600
$210,890
$212,000
$0
$201,400
3
$210,890
$0
$212,000
$10,600
$201,400
Activity
$10,600
$215,052
$212,000
$0
$190,800
4
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$215,052
$0
$212,000
$10,600
$190,800
4
(After Automatic Reset)
$215,052
$0
$215,052
$10,752
$215,052
Activity
$10,600
$219,506
$215,052
$152
$204,452
5
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$219,506
$0
$215,052
$10,752
$204,452
5
(After Automatic Reset)
$219,506
$0
$219,506
$10,975
$219,506
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($10,600):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $201,400 ($212,000 − $10,600).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($10,600):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $190,800 ($201,400 − $10,600).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 4, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
4 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic
reset occurred which resets the Protected
195
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal
to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of
Contract Year 4 – After Automatic Reset). As
a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,752 (5%
of the reset Protected Payment Base).
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 4 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($10,600):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $204,452 ($215,052 − $10,600); and
•
the Protected Payment Amount is reduced to $152 (5% of the
Protected Payment Base less cumulative withdrawals
(5% × $215,052 − $10,600 = $152).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 5, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
5 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic
reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the
Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
5 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the
Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,975 (5% of the reset
Protected Payment Base).
Since withdrawals occurred during Contract Years 2, 3
and 4, no annual credit will be applied to the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract
Anniversary following the withdrawal. Since a Reset occurred at
the beginning of Contract Year 5, eligibility for the
annual credit will again apply.
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Year 4.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Contract
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
2
$207,000
$12,000
$212,000
$10,600
$212,000
Activity
$15,000
$206,490
$207,590
$0
$197,000
3
$206,490
$0
$207,590
$10,379
$197,000
4
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$220,944
$0
$207,590
$10,379
$197,000
4
(After Automatic Reset)
$220,944
$0
$220,944
$11,047
$220,944
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($15,000 > $10,600), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after
the withdrawal are reduced.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $10,600 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $4,400 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $15,000 − $10,600 = $4,400).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the
196
$206,490 after the withdrawal plus the $15,000 withdrawal
amount. Numerically, the ratio is 2.08%
($4,400 ¸
($221,490 − $10,600);
$4,400 ¸
$210,890 = 0.0208 or 2.08%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$207,590 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $212,000 ×
(1 − 2.08%); $212,000 × 97.92% =
$207,590).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $197,210
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount) ×
(1 − ratio); ($212,000 −
$10,600) × (1 − 2.08%);
$201,400 × 97.92% = $197,210).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $197,000
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$212,000 − $15,000 = $197,000).
Therefore, since $197,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $197,210 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $197,000.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (5% of $207,590 = $10,379), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($15,000), but not less
than zero).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 4, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract
Year 4 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract
Year 4 – After Automatic Reset).
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 2, annual
credits are not applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal. Since a reset occurred at the
beginning of Contract Year 4, eligibility for the annual
credit will again apply.
Example #5 –
RMD Withdrawals.
This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals
during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment
Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your
Contract as of the previous year-end.
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$98,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
$100,000
$5,000
$90,500
Contract
Anniversary
197
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected
Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until
the Protected Payment Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
$96,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$96,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
$88,300
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,300.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
•
Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
•
Protected Payment Amount = $1,250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $1,250 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10%
($2,750 ¸
($90,000 − $1,250);
$2,750 ¸
$88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $100,000 ×
(1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% =
$96,900).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,300
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance −
total withdrawal amount; $92,375 − $4,000 =
$88,375).
Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300.
Example #6 – Lifetime
Income.
This example applies to Flexible Lifetime Income (Single)
only.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Owner is
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
14
$5,000
$63,608
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
199
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1 and no
Resets occurred, no annual credit will be applied to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any
Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.
Since it was assumed that the Owner was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5%
of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year
(even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance
have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of
an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant
(death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever
occurs first.
Example #7 – Lifetime
Income.
This example applies to Flexible Lifetime Income (Joint)
only.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
•
All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income
benefits while the Rider is in effect.
•
Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
200
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
Activity (Death of first Designated Life)
14
$5,000
$63,608
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life
occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (5% of the
Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even
after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance were
reduced to zero) until the death of all Designated Lives
eligible for lifetime benefits.
If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status
prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in
the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for
lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits
under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated
Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first
Designated Life.
201
Foundation 10
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
(“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions
in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum
amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing
the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any
day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date
is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Annual Credit – An amount added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.
Maximum Credit Base – An amount equal to
200% of the Remaining Protected Balance as of the Rider
Effective Date and any subsequent Purchase Payments made during
the first year that the Rider is in effect plus 100% of all
subsequent Purchase Payments made after the first year.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary
beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an
Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.
Rider Effective Date – The date the
guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the
Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the
Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the
Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).
Lifetime withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may
continue after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to
zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case
of a Non-Natural Owner) was age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later. If a withdrawal was taken before age
591/2
and there was no subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This
Rider also provides for an amount (an “Annual Credit”)
to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance if no withdrawals are taken. Once the Rider is
purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see
the Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
In addition, beginning with the
1st
anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset
Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic
Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value.
If applicable, an Annual Credit is added to the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance prior to any
Automatic Reset. If the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary is greater than the Protected Payment Base (which
includes the Annual Credit amount) then the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be automatically reset
to equal the Contract Value.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The addition of an Annual Credit will increase
the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance
by the amount of the Annual Credit. An Automatic Reset or
Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the
Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than
or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and
will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is
greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value
is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by
an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For
withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount,
see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.
202
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b)
Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may
take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a
withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical
example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance as a result of an excess
withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected
Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater
than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to
zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year
until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be
paid each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or
the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
203
•
the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid
under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment
frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than
annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract
Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death
benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid
to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals
and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the
time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s
death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be
paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the
Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be
adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a
period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life
expectancy.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduces the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was younger than
age 591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, this Rider will terminate, or
•
was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to 5% of the
Protected Payment Base each year until the day of the first
death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving
Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the
Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount
equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal before age
591/2
and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under
the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and
your first withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or
after age
591/2.
See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are
younger than age
591/2
when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value
remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity
for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal
will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Annual
Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an
Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:
•
no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date,
•
that Contract Anniversary is within the first 10 Contract
Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date, and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is less than the Maximum Credit
Base.
The Annual Credit is equal to 10% of the total of:
•
the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date, or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider
Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Annual Credit is
added.
Once a withdrawal has occurred, including an RMD Withdrawal,
no Annual Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal. In addition, Annual Credit eligibility
cannot be reinstated by any Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset.
The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
204
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued,
except that eligibility for the Annual Credit cannot be
reinstated with a Reset. The limitations and restrictions on
Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual
Charges and any future reset options available on and after the
Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that
Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal to
the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.
If a withdrawal is taken, the Annual Credit will no longer be
applied and cannot be restarted with an Automatic or
Owner-Elected Reset. In addition, an Automatic or Owner-Elected
Reset will not start a new 10 year period for Annual Credit
eligibility.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Annual Credit is
applied, is less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result
of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges). A Reset does
not begin a new 10 year period for the Annual Credit to be
applied.
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and annual
charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before
the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue
in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on
any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while
Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may
change as a result of this reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as
of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option
may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base,
Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any
Annual Credit that may be applied. Generally, the reduction
will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the
reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial
advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will
provide you with written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached permits Purchase
Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is
chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your
Contract, or
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base in effect at the maximum
Annuity Date.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
205
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to age
591/2
and no Resets have occurred.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the
Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may
continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero. If the Remaining Protected Balance is zero when
the Owner dies, this Rider will terminate.
The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options
available under this Rider for subsequent Contract
Anniversaries. If a reset takes place then the provisions of
this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the
surviving spouse. In addition, if the surviving spouse is age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most
recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the
surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving
spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
(based on the new Protected Payment Base) for life.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS –
Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues
Contract subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the
date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base. In this case,
the Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was younger than
591/2
when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the
Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is
later, or
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was
age 591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider
after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later.
206
Sample
Calculations
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
Example #1 –
Setting of Initial Values.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Maximum
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
Credit Base
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
$200,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000
•
Maximum Credit Base = 200% of the Initial Purchase Payment =
$200,000
Example #2 –
Subsequent Purchase Payments.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Years 1 and 2.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 10.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Maximum
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
Credit Base
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
$200,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
$400,000
2
$207,000
$20,000
$220,000
$11,000
$220,000
$400,000
Activity
$100,000
$307,000
$320,000
$16,000
$320,000
$500,000
3
$321,490
$30,000
$350,000
$17,500
$350,000
$500,000
4
$343,994
$30,000
$380,000
$19,000
$380,000
$500,000
5
$368,073
$30,000
$410,000
$20,500
$410,000
$500,000
6
$393,839
$30,000
$440,000
$22,000
$440,000
$500,000
7
$421,407
$30,000
$470,000
$23,500
$470,000
$500,000
8
$450,906
$30,000
$500,000
$25,000
$500,000
$500,000
9
$482,469
$0
$500,000
$25,000
$500,000
$500,000
10
Prior to Automatic Reset
$516,242
$0
$500,000
$25,000
$500,000
$500,000
10
After Automatic Reset
$516,242
$0
$516,242
$25,812
$516,242
$500,000
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount
to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). Since the subsequent Purchase
Payment is received in Contract Year 1, the Maximum Credit Base
is increased by 200% of the Purchase Payment, to $400,000. The
Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to
$10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase
Payment since there were no withdrawals during that Contract
Year).
207
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the Beginning of Contract Year 2, an annual credit of $20,000
(10% of the initial Remaining Protected Balance plus cumulative
Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date) is
applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to
$220,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that
Contract Anniversary is equal to $11,000 (5% of the Protected
Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).
Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment
during Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount
to $320,000 ($220,000 + $100,000). Since the subsequent Purchase
Payment is received in Contract Year 2, the Maximum Credit Base
is increased by 100% of the Purchase Payment, to $500,000. The
Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to
$16,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase
Payment since there were no withdrawals during that Contract
Year).
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the Beginning of Contract Year 3, an annual credit of $30,000
(10% of the initial Remaining Protected Balance plus cumulative
Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date) is
applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to
$350,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that
Contract Anniversary is equal to $17,500 (5% of the Protected
Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).
An Annual Credit is no longer applied after the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance reach the Maximum
Credit Base of $500,000 in Contract Year 8.
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 10, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
10 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset
occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
10 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the
Protected Payment Amount is equal to $25,812 (5% of the reset
Protected Payment Base).
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further
subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year
as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and
other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the
investment performance of the Variable Account.
Example
#3 – Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment
Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Years 1 and 2.
•
A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount
is taken during Contract Years 3 and 4.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 6.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Maximum
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
Credit Base
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
$200,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
$400,000
2
$207,000
$20,000
$220,000
$11,000
$220,000
$400,000
Activity
$100,000
$307,000
$320,000
$16,000
$320,000
$500,000
3
$321,490
$30,000
$350,000
$17,500
$350,000
$500,000
Activity
$17,500
$326,494
$350,000
$0
$332,500
$500,000
4
$326,494
$0
$350,000
$17,500
$332,500
$500,000
Activity
$17,500
$331,848
$350,000
$0
$315,000
$500,000
5
$331,848
$0
$350,000
$17,500
$315,000
$500,000
6
Prior to Automatic Reset
$355,077
$0
$350,000
$17,500
$315,000
$500,000
6
After Automatic Reset
$355,077
$0
$355,077
$17,753
$355,077
$500,000
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and
#2.
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 3 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($17,500):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $332,500 ($350,000 − $17,500).
208
As the withdrawal during Contract Year 4 did not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($17,500):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $315,000 ($332,500 − $17,500).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 6, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
6 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset
occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract Year
6 – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the
Protected Payment Amount is equal to $17,753 (5% of the reset
Protected Payment Base).
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 3, no annual
credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal.
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Years 1 and 2.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 3.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Maximum
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Credit
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
Base
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
$200,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
$400,000
2
$207,000
$20,000
$220,000
$11,000
$220,000
$400,000
Activity
$100,000
$321,490
$320,000
$16,000
$320,000
$500,000
3
$321,490
$30,000
$350,000
$17,500
$350,000
$500,000
Activity
$25,000
$318,994
$341,985
$0
$324,885
$500,000
4
$318,994
$0
$341,985
$17,099
$324,885
$500,000
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and
#2.
Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 3
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($25,000 > $17,500), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after
the withdrawal are reduced.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $17,500 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $7,500 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $25,000 − $17,500 = $7,500).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $343,994, which
equals the $318,994 after the withdrawal plus the $25,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 2.29%
($7,500 ¸
($343,994 − $17,500);
$7,500 ¸
$326,494 = 0.0229 or 2.29%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$341,985 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $350,000 ×
(1 − 2.29%); $350,000 × 97.71% =
$341,985).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
209
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $324,885
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount) ×
(1 − ratio); ($350,000 −
$17,500) × (1 − 2.29%);
$332,500 × 97.71% = $324,885).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $325,000
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$350,000 − $25,000 = $325,000).
Therefore, since $324,885 (proportionate method) is less than
$325,000 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $324,885.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (5% of $341,985 = $17,099), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($25,000), but not less
than zero).
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 3, annual
credits are not applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal. Since a reset occurred at the
beginning of Contract Year 4, eligibility for the annual
credit will again apply.
Example
#5 – Annual Credit & Resets.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments received.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Years 3, 5, 7 and 9.
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Maximum
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Credit
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
Base
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
$200,000
2
$107,000
$10,000
$110,000
$5,500
$110,000
$200,000
3
$125,000
$10,000
$125,000
$6,250
$125,000
$200,000
4
$120,000
$12,500
$137,500
$6,875
$137,500
$200,000
5
$190,000
$12,500
$190,000
$9,500
$190,000
$200,000
6
$180,000
$19,000
$209,000
$10,450
$209,000
$200,000
7
$240,000
$0
$240,000
$12,000
$240,000
$200,000
8
$220,000
$0
$240,000
$12,000
$240,000
$200,000
9
$250,000
$0
$250,000
$12,500
$250,000
$200,000
On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract
Year 2, an Annual Credit of $10,000 (10% of the Remaining
Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance.
An Annual Credit of $10,000 would have been applied on the
Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3,
but an Automatic Reset takes place instead, resetting the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to
$125,000.
On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract
Year 4, an Annual Credit of $12,500 (10% of the Remaining
Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance.
An Annual Credit of $12,500 would have been applied on the
Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 5,
but an Automatic Reset took place instead, resetting the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to
$190,000.
On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract
Year 6, an Annual Credit of $19,000 (10% of the Remaining
Protected Balance) is added, increasing the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance to $209,000. Annual Credits
will no longer be added since the Maximum Credit Base of
$200,000 has been reached.
Example #6 –
RMD Withdrawals.
The effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract
Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for
that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based
on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous
year-end.
210
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$98,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
$100,000
$5,000
$90,500
Contract
Anniversary
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, the Protected Payment Amount is reduced
by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment
Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Contract
Anniversary
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
$96,125
05/01/2007
$100,000
$5,000
$96,125
Contract
Anniversary
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
$88,300
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,300.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
211
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
•
Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
•
Protected Payment Amount = $1,250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $1,250 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10%
($2,750 ¸
($90,000 − $1,250);
$2,750 ¸
$88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $100,000 ×
(1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% =
$96,900).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,300 (Remaining Protected Balance −
Protected Payment Amount) ×
(1 − ratio); ($92,375 −
$1,250) × (1 − 3.10%);
$91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance −
total withdrawal amount; $92,375 − $4,000 =
$88,375).
Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300.
Example
#7 – Lifetime Income.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Owner is age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the
life of the Rider.
212
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Contract
End of Year
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
14
$5,000
$63,608
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment =
$100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual
credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal.
Since it was assumed that the Owner was age
591/2
or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5%
of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year
(even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance
have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of
an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant
(death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever
occurs first.
213
Lifetime
Income Access Plus
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be
distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code
Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and
related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount
that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the
Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day
after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date
is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Income Access Credit – An amount added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Income Access Credit is referred to as Annual Credit in the
Contract’s Rider.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary beginning
with the
1st
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to
Reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract
Anniversary.
Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees
and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider
Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased
within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective
Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).
Lifetime withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may
continue after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to
zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case
of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or older when the first
withdrawal was taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later. If a withdrawal was
taken before age 65 and there was no subsequent Reset, the
Rider will terminate once the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for an amount
(an “Income Access Credit”) to be added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. Once the
Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the
Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for
more information).
In addition, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for
Automatic Annual Resets and Owner-Elected Resets of the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The addition of an Income Access Credit will
increase the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected
Balance by the amount of the Income Access Credit. An Automatic
Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending
on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is
less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce
the Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal
and will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal
is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract
Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be
reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount
withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected
Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment
Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
214
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b)
Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may
take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of
the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract
Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a
withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that
withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess
withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate
basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount.
We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a
proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever
results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See
example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical
example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance as a result of an excess
withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected
Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected
Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater
than the excess amount withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Required
Minimum Distributions
No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a
result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Depletion
of Contract Value
If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed
the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to
zero, the following will apply:
•
if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under
the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent
Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base
will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero, or
•
was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under
the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent
Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base
will be paid each year until the day of the first death of an
Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.
•
the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid
under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment
frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than
annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
215
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and may not be applied to provide payments
under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract
Value is zero as of the date of death, there is no death
benefit, however, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid
to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals
and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the
time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s
death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be
paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the
Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be
adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a
period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life
expectancy.
Depletion
of Remaining Protected Balance
If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the
Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains,
the following will apply:
If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner):
•
was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under
the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent
Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or
•
was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under
the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent
Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to
5% of the Protected Payment Base each year until the day of the
first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole
surviving Annuitant. If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset
occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an
amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract
Anniversary.
Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took
your first withdrawal before age 65 and you would
like to be eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an
Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and your first
withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or after age
65. See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are
younger than age 65 when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero
and Contract Value remains, the Rider will terminate and there
is no opportunity for a Reset.
If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the
Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected
Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals
Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.
Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from
remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death
Benefit provisions of the Contract.
Income
Access Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an
Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract
Anniversary, if:
•
no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
that Contract Anniversary is within the first 5 Contract
Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the
most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
The Income Access Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:
•
the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Income Access Credit
is added.
Once a withdrawal has occurred, including an RMD Withdrawal, no
Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal, unless a reset occurs.
The Income Access Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued.
Eligibility for any Income Access Credit, the limitations and
restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction
of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and
after the Reset Date, will again
216
apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs
when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
are changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the
Reset Date.
If you want to participate in Automatic Resets, you must make an
affirmative election in a form satisfactory to us. Otherwise,
you may reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance as outlined under Owner-Elected Resets
(Non-Automatic) below.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Income Access
Credit is applied, is less than the Contract Value on that
Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as
a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and any
change in the annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in effect in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). On any
Contract Anniversary beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to
reset the Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. The annual
charge percentage may change as a result of this reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. Your election of this option may result in a
reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any Income Access Credit
that may be applied. Generally, the reduction will occur
when your Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base
as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the reset. You are
strongly advised to work with your financial advisor prior to
electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with
written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Annuitization
If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date
specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at
the time of your election and a Life Only annuity option is
chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:
•
the Life Only annual payment amount based on the terms of your
Contract, or
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base in effect at the maximum
Annuity Date.
The annuity payments described in this subsection are available
to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to age 65
and no Resets have occurred.
If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum
Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments
will be determined in accordance with the terms of your
Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not
be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your
financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your
Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the
accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the
Rider.
217
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the
Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may
continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount
under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to zero. The surviving spouse may elect to reset the
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary. In
addition, if the surviving spouse is age 65 or older when the
first withdrawal is taken after the most recent Reset Date and
this Reset Date occurred after the surviving spouse continued
the Contract, then the surviving spouse may take withdrawals of
the Protected Payment Amount (based on the new Protected Payment
Base) for life.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS –
Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues
Contract subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract,
•
the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract
to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified
(excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for
additional information), or
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected
Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or
older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after
the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the
day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the
sole surviving Annuitant.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the
Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized
withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base. In this case,
the Rider and the Contract will terminate:
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest
Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or
older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after
the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date,
whichever is later, or
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if
the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a
Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first
withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective
Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
Income
Access Plus
Rider
Terms
Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to
be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the
minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code
Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and
related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
218
Protected Payment Amount – The maximum
amount that can be withdrawn each Contract Year under this Rider
without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is
equal to the lesser of:
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
•
the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.
The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date
is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.
Protected Payment Base – An amount used to
determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment
Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under
the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base
is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective
Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the
Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.
Remaining Protected Balance – The amount
available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The
initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial
Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract
Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a
Contract Anniversary.
Income Access Credit – An amount added to
the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The
Income Access Credit is referred to as Annual Credit in the
Contract’s Rider.
Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary
beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to
Reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100%
of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract
Anniversary.
Rider Effective Date – The date the
guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the
Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the
Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is
purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.
How the
Rider Works
On any day, this Rider allows for withdrawals up to the
Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance,
until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).
This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Income Access
Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance. This Rider does not provide
lifetime withdrawal benefits. Once the Rider is purchased, you
cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the
Termination subsection of this Rider for more
information).
In addition, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most
recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for
Automatic Annual Resets and Owner-Elected Resets of the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an
amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary.
The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may
change over time. The addition of an Income Access Credit will
increase the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected
Balance by the amount of the Income Access Credit. An Automatic
Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending
on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is
less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce
the Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal
and will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal
is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract
Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be
reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount
withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected
Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment
Amount subsection.
Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract
Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same
conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees,
charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise
made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under
this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally
receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.
If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b)
Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may
take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age
591/2,
separation from service, disability) and you should consult your
tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional
guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing
withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals
and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES –
IRAs and Qualified Plans.
Withdrawal
of Protected Payment Amount
While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the
Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of
market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals
zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn
during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next
Contract Year.
219
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount
immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will
decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the
withdrawal.
Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment
Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal)
causes the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount, we will (immediately
following the excess withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment
Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the
Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the Remaining Protected
Balance either on a proportionate basis or by the total
withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining
Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in Sample
Calculations below for a numerical example of the
adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a
withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the
Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be
reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount
withdrawn.
The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be
sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed
the Protected Payment Amount.
For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and
reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:
•
5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero. The payments
will be made under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under
a payment frequency, as elected by you, but no less frequently
than annually,
•
no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the
Contract,
•
any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for
payment in a lump sum and may not be applied to provide payments
under an Annuity Option, and
•
the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.
If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract
Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected
Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under the series of
pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency then in effect
at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving
Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected
Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life
expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal
amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be
paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s
life expectancy.
Required
Minimum Distributions
On and after August 1, 2005, no adjustment will be made to
the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal, provided:
•
such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes
of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of
Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at
that time,
•
you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic
distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year
required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
•
the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and
•
only RMD withdrawals are made from the Contract during the
Contract Year.
If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, RMD withdrawals will
cease and any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid under a
series of pre-authorized withdrawals in accordance with the
terms of the Rider.
Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected
Balance will decrease by the RMD withdrawal amount.
See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified
Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.
Income
Access Credit
On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, an Income Access Credit will be
added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:
•
no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
that Contract Anniversary is prior to the
6th
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
220
The Income Access Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:
•
the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
•
the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider
Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Income Access Credit
is added.
Once a withdrawal has occurred, including an RMD Withdrawal, no
Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal, unless a Reset occurs.
The Income Access Credit is not added to your Contract Value.
Reset of
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance
Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each
Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same
manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued.
Eligibility for any Income Access Credit, the limitations and
restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction
of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and
after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from
that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal
to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date. Please discuss with
your financial advisor your Contract’s maximum Annuity Date
when considering reset options.
If you want to participate in Automatic Resets, you must make an
affirmative election in a form satisfactory to us. Otherwise,
you may reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance as outlined under Owner-Elected Resets
(Non-Automatic) below.
Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while
this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will
automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract
Value, if the Protected Payment Base, after any Income Access
Credit is applied, is less than the Contract Value on that
Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as
a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND
DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).
Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within
60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic
Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the
Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and any
change in the annual charge percentage to their respective
amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future
Automatic Resets will continue in effect in accordance with the
Automatic Reset paragraph above.
If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
within the same 60 day period after the Contract
Anniversary on which the reset is effective.
Automatic Reset – Future
Participation. You may elect not to participate in
future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be
received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center,
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.
If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic
Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic
Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must
be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center
while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such
election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as
described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.
Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). On any
Contract Anniversary beginning with the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or
the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to
reset the Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Base
to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. The annual
charge percentage may change as a result of this reset.
If you elect this option, your election must be received, in a
form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within
60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset
is effective. Your election of this option may result in a
reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected
Balance, Protected Payment Amount and any Income Access Credit
that may be applied. Generally, the reduction will occur
when your Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base
as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the reset. You are
strongly advised to work with your financial advisor prior to
electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with
written confirmation of your election.
Subsequent
Purchase Payments
If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider
Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase
Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the
right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a
total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of
the 1st
Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st
Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
221
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the
Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of
this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.
The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit
proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see
DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS –
Death Benefits).
Termination
You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as
otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate
on the earliest of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues
Contract subsection),
•
for Contracts with a
Non-Natural
Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including
Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,
•
the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract, except as otherwise provided in the
paragraph below, or
•
the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit
Rider,
•
the Annuity Date.
•
the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a
withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount.
The Rider and the Contract will not terminate on the first death
of an Owner or death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the day
the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of
the Contract if, at the time of those events, the Contract Value
is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the
Remaining Protected Balance under the provisions of the Rider.
If we are making pre-authorized withdrawals, the Contract and
the Rider will terminate on the Contract Anniversary immediately
following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is zero.
Sample
Calculations
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to
demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made
from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values
and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time.
There may be minor differences in the calculations due to
rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as
projections of future investment returns nor are they a
reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.
The
examples apply to Lifetime Income Access Plus and Income Access
Plus unless otherwise noted below.
Example #1 –
Income Access Credit; No Subsequent Purchase Payments; No
Withdrawals; No Reset in Remaining Protected Balance.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
No withdrawals taken.
•
No Reset of the Remaining Protected Balance.
222
Beginning
Income
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Contract
Access
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
2
$103,000
$6,000
$106,000
$5,300
$106,000
3
$106,090
$6,000
$112,000
$5,600
$112,000
4
$109,273
$6,000
$118,000
$5,900
$118,000
5
$112,551
$6,000
$124,000
$6,200
$124,000
6
$115,927
$6,000
$130,000
$6,500
$130,000
7
$119,405
$0
$130,000
$6,500
$130,000
8
$122,987
$0
$130,000
$6,500
$130,000
9
$126,677
$0
$130,000
$6,500
$130,000
10
$130,477
$0
$130,000
$6,500
$130,000
11
$134,392
$0
$130,000
$6,500
$130,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the beginning of Contract Year 6, an Income Access
Credit of $6,000 (6% of initial Remaining Protected Balance) is
added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance on each Contract Anniversary up to the Contract
Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6. As a result, on
the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract
Year 6, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance are equal to $130,000 and the Protected Payment Amount
is equal to $6,500 (5% of $130,000).
No Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment
Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
after the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract
Year 6, as no reset in the Remaining Protected Balance was
assumed.
In addition to the Initial Purchase Payment, the Contract Value
is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each
Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited,
charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or
decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.
Example #2 –
Subsequent Purchase Payment.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $50,000 is received during
Contract Year 2.
•
No withdrawals taken.
Beginning
Income
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Access
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
2
$103,000
$6,000
$106,000
$5,300
$106,000
Activity
$50,000
$154,534
$156,000
$7,800
$156,000
3
$156,834
$9,000
$165,000
$8,250
$165,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access
Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is
added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to
$106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that
Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected
Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).
223
Immediately after the $50,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during
Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining
Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount
to $156,000 ($106,000 + $50,000). The Protected
Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $7,800 (5%
of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment since
there are no withdrawals during that Contract Year).
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the beginning of Contract Year 3, an Income Access
Credit of $9,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance plus
6% of the $50,000 subsequent Purchase Payment) is added to the
Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that
Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $165,000. As a result,
the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is
equal to $8,250 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that
Contract Anniversary).
Example #3 –
Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
A withdrawal of $5,000 is taken during Contract Year 2.
Beginning
Income
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Access
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
2
$103,000
$6,000
$106,000
$5,300
$106,000
Activity
$5,000
$99,534
$106,000
$300
$101,000
3
$101,016
$0
$106,000
$5,300
$101,000
4
$104,046
$0
$106,000
$5,300
$101,000
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase
Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment
Base = $5,000
Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary
at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access
Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is
added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected
Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to
$106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that
Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected
Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).
Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 does
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,300):
•
the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
•
the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the
withdrawal to $101,000 ($106,000 − $5,000); and
•
the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $300 (5% of the
Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of
$106,000 = $5,300), less cumulative withdrawals during
that Contract Year ($5,000)).
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 2, no
Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal.
Example #4 –
Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during
Contract Year 1.
•
A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken
during Contract Year 2.
•
Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 4.
224
Beginning
Protected
Protected
Remaining
of Contract
Purchase
Annual
Payment
Payment
Protected
Year
Payment
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Base
Amount
Balance
1
$100,000
$100,000
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
Activity
$100,000
$200,000
$200,000
$10,000
$200,000
2
$207,000
$12,000
$212,000
$10,600
$212,000
Activity
$15,000
$206,490
$207,590
$0
$197,000
3
$206,490
$0
$207,590
$10,379
$197,000
4
(Prior to Automatic Reset)
$220,944
$0
$207,590
$10,379
$197,000
4
(After Automatic Reset)
$220,944
$0
$220,944
$11,047
$220,944
For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of
and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1
and #2.
Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2
exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to
the withdrawal ($15,000 > $10,600), the Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after
the withdrawal are reduced.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal
A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $10,600 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $4,400 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $15,000 − $10,600 = $4,400).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The
Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which
equals the $206,490 after the withdrawal plus the $15,000
withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 2.08%
($4,400 ¸
($221,490 − $10,600);
$4,400 ¸
$210,890 = 0.0208 or 2.08%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$207,590 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $212,000 ×
(1 − 2.08%); $212,000 × 97.92% =
$207,590).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced
by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate
reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $197,210
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount) ×
(1 − ratio); ($212,000 −
$10,600) × (1 − 2.08%);
$201,400 × 97.92% = $197,210).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $197,000
(Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the
withdrawal − total withdrawal amount;
$212,000 − $15,000 = $197,000).
Therefore, since $197,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is
less than $197,210 (proportionate method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $197,000.
The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is
equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the
withdrawal (5% of $207,590 = $10,379), less cumulative
withdrawals during that Contract Year ($15,000), but not less
than zero).
Because at the Beginning of Contract Year 4, the Protected
Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract
Anniversary (see balances at Beginning of Contract
Year 4 – Prior to Automatic Reset), an
automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of
the Contract Value (see balances at Beginning of Contract
Year 4 – After Automatic Reset).
225
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 2, annual
credits are not applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal. Since a reset occurred at the
beginning of Contract Year 4, eligibility for the annual
credit will again apply.
Example #5 –
RMD Withdrawals.
The effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract
Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for
that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base
and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based
on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous
year-end.
This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD
Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD
amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract
Anniversary is May 1 of each year.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$5,000
$98,125
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$96,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$94,375
12/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$0
$92,500
01/01/2008
$8,000
03/15/2008
$2,000
$100,000
$0
$90,500
05/01/2008
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$5,000
$90,500
Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly
withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by
the RMD withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all
withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there
is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the
Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the
Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each
withdrawal. In addition, the Protected Payment Amount is reduced
by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment
Amount is zero.
This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD
Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year.
The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are
the same as above.
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Activity
RMD
Non-RMD
RMD
Payment
Payment
Protected
Date
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
Amount
Base
Amount
Balance
05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$100,000
01/01/2007
$7,500
03/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$98,125
04/01/2007
$2,000
$100,000
$1,125
$96,125
05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary
$100,000
$5,000
$96,125
06/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$3,125
$94,250
09/15/2007
$1,875
$100,000
$1,250
$92,375
11/15/2007
$4,000
$96,900
$0
$88,300
On 3/15/07
there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on
4/1/07 a
non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals
during the Contract Year
(5/1/06
through
4/30/07) did
not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no
adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a
reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected
Payment Amount equal
226
to the amount of each withdrawal. On
5/1/07, the
Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected
Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.
On 11/15/07,
there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the
cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to
exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal
exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the
withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000
immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base
is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced to $88,300.
The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions
immediately before the excess withdrawal:
•
Contract Value = $90,000
•
Protected Payment Base = $100,000
•
Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
•
Protected Payment Amount = $1,250
A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected
Payment Amount of $1,250 for the Contract Year. The Protected
Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced
based on the following calculation:
First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess
withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the
Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal
amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected
Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).
Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The
ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided
by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount).
Numerically, the ratio is 3.10%
($2,750 ¸
($90,000 − $1,250);
$2,750 ¸
$88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).
Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected
Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The
Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio
determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is
$96,900 (Protected Payment Base ×
(1 − ratio); $100,000 ×
(1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% =
$96,900).
Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate
basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in
the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.
To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining
Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount
multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically,
after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,300 (Remaining Protected Balance −
Protected Payment Amount) ×
(1 − ratio); ($92,375 −
$1,250) × (1 − 3.10%);
$91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).
To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the
Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal
amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is
reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected
Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance −
total withdrawal amount; $92,375 − $4,000 =
$88,375).
Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than
$88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining
Protected Balance is $88,300.
Example 6 applies to the Lifetime Income Access Plus
Rider only.
Example
#6 – Lifetime Income.
The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:
•
Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
•
Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
•
No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
•
Owner is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken.
•
Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are
taken each Contract Year.
•
No Reset in the Remaining Protected Balance is assumed during
the life of the Rider.
227
Contract
End of Year
Annual
Protected
Protected
Remaining
Year
Withdrawal
Contract Value
Credit
Payment Base
Payment Amount
Protected Balance
1
$5,000
$96,489
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$95,000
2
$5,000
$94,384
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$90,000
3
$5,000
$92,215
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$85,000
4
$5,000
$89,982
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$80,000
5
$5,000
$87,681
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$75,000
6
$5,000
$85,311
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$70,000
7
$5,000
$82,871
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$65,000
8
$5,000
$80,357
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$60,000
9
$5,000
$77,768
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$55,000
10
$5,000
$75,101
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$50,000
11
$5,000
$72,354
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$45,000
12
$5,000
$69,524
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$40,000
13
$5,000
$66,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$35,000
14
$5,000
$63,608
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$30,000
15
$5,000
$60,517
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$25,000
16
$5,000
$57,332
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$20,000
17
$5,000
$54,052
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$15,000
18
$5,000
$50,674
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$10,000
19
$5,000
$47,194
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
20
$5,000
$43,610
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
21
$5,000
$39,918
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
22
$5,000
$36,115
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
23
$5,000
$32,199
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
24
$5,000
$28,165
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
25
$5,000
$24,010
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
26
$5,000
$19,730
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
27
$5,000
$15,322
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
28
$5,000
$10,782
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
29
$5,000
$6,105
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
30
$5,000
$1,288
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
31
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
32
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
33
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
34
$5,000
$0
$0
$100,000
$5,000
$0
On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as
follows:
•
Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000
Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the
Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal
($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the
amount of each withdrawal.
Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual
credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and
Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary
following the withdrawal.
Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 65 or older when the
first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5% of the Protected
Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the
Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced
to zero) until the day of the first death of an Owner or the
date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any
Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.
Guaranteed
Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus)
How the
Rider Works
You may, prior to the Annuity Date, choose any of the Annuity
Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA
Plus Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for
at least 10 years from its Effective Date. If you choose
the GIA Plus Annuity
228
Option, you must choose fixed annuity payments and the entire
amount available for annuitization at the time you convert to
the GIA Plus Annuity Option must be annuitized. The guaranteed
income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the
annuity payments will be based on an effective annual interest
rate of 2.0% and the 1996 US Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with
the age set back 8 years.
Annuity Payments – The annuity payments
that may be elected under the GIA Plus Annuity Option are:
•
Life Only,
•
Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
•
Joint and Survivor Life, or
•
20 years or more Period Certain.
The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA Plus Annuity
Option available.
On the Annuity Date, the Net Amount applied to the annuity
payments under the GIA Plus Annuity Option will be equal to the
greater of the Guaranteed Income Base on that day or the GIA
Plus Step-Up
Value on that day, less the following:
•
applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional
benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of
the Annuity Date, and
•
charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes. See CHARGES,
FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Premium Taxes.
For information regarding taxation of annuity payments, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Initial Values – The Guaranteed Income
Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and
GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value are values used in determining the Net Amount applied on
the Annuity Date to provide payments under the GIA Plus Annuity
Option.
The initial values are determined on the Rider Effective Date as
follows:
•
if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed
Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment.
•
if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the
Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that
day.
•
if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Base is equal to the total Purchase Payments received
in the first 60 days since the Rider Effective Date.
•
if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the GIA
Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to the Contract Value on that day
plus any Purchase Payments received in the first 60 days
since the Rider Effective Date.
•
the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning
on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Base.
•
the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value is equal to the Contract Value on the Rider Effective Date.
The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base and GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount
after the Rider Effective Date are recalculated only on each
subsequent Contract Anniversary.
Limitation on Subsequent Purchase
Payments – For purposes of this Rider, we
reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that
result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after
the
1st Contract
Anniversary from the Effective Date of the Rider to exceed
$100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies
if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits
Purchase Payments after the
1st Contract
Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.
Subsequent Values – The Guaranteed Income
Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and
GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value after the Rider Effective Date are determined as follows:
Guaranteed Income Base – On any day after
the Rider Effective Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:
•
the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior day, multiplied by a
daily factor of 1.000133680 which is equivalent to increasing
the Guaranteed Income Base at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
•
Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less
•
adjustments for withdrawals made on that day.
The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying
the Guaranteed Income Base immediately prior to the withdrawal
by the percentage decrease in Contract Value as a result of the
withdrawal.
229
However, on each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective
Date, if there is at least one withdrawal during the prior
Contract Year and the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract
Year do not exceed the sum of:
•
the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year, and
•
any remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s
GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount,
the Guaranteed Income Base as of that Contract Anniversary will
be reset to equal:
•
the Guaranteed Income Base on the Rider Effective Date or prior
Contract Anniversary, whichever is later, increased at an annual
growth rate of 5%, plus
•
the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us
during the prior Contract Year, each increased at an annual
growth rate of 5% from the effective date of that Purchase
Payment, less
•
the amount of cumulative withdrawals during the prior Contract
Year.
The 5% annual growth rate will stop accruing as of the earlier
of:
•
the Contract Anniversary prior to the youngest Annuitant’s
81st birthday, or
•
the day this Rider terminates.
GIA Plus Withdrawal Base – On each
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA
Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to:
•
the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base determined on the Rider Effective
Date, plus
•
the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us
after the Rider Effective Date, up through the day immediately
prior to that Contract Anniversary.
GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount – On each
Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA
Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning on that
Contract Anniversary is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal
Base as of that Contract Anniversary.
GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value – On any day after the Rider Effective
Date, the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value is equal to:
•
the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value as of the prior day, plus
•
Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less
•
adjustment for withdrawals made on that day.
The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying
the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage
decrease in Contract Value as a result of that withdrawal.
On any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date and
prior to the youngest Annuitant’s
81st birthday,
the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value is set equal to the greater of:
•
the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary, or
•
the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.
The GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value will then be adjusted for any Purchase Payments or
withdrawals on that Contract Anniversary in accordance with the
first paragraph of this subsection.
The GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value on each Contract Anniversary on and after the youngest
Annuitant’s
81st birthday
is equal to the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value immediately prior to the Contract Anniversary preceding
that
81st birthday,
adjusted for any Purchase Payments and withdrawals since that
anniversary.
Partial Conversion of Net Contract Value for Annuity
Payments – If a portion of the Net Contract
Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) is converted to
provide payments under an Annuity Option described in the
Contract at any time before you annuitize under the GIA Plus
Annuity Option, the amount converted will be considered a
“withdrawal” for purposes of determining withdrawal
adjustments to the Guaranteed Income Base and GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the
Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of
this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated. If a
death benefit becomes payable after the Contract Anniversary
prior to the youngest Annuitant’s
81st
birthday and the surviving spouse elects to continue the
Contract and the Rider, the 5% annual growth rate to the
Guaranteed Income Base would be applied retroactively for any
period of time that the 5% annual growth rate was not applied
and until the earlier of the Contract Anniversary prior to the
surviving spouse’s
81st birthday
or the day this Rider terminates.
230
Termination
Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will remain in
effect until the earlier of:
•
the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated
according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the day we receive notification from you to terminate the Rider,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms
of the Contract, or
•
the Annuity Date.
Upon your request, the Rider may be terminated at any time. If
your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service
Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the
Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your
request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center
more than 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider
will terminate the day we receive the request.
If the Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract
Anniversary that is at least 1 year from the Effective Date
of the termination before the Rider may be purchased again (if
available).
Sample
Calculations
The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical
assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract
Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific
return percentage. They have been provided to assist in
understanding the benefits provided by the Guaranteed Income
Advantage Plus (“GIA Plus”) Rider, and to demonstrate
how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the
Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and
benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. There
may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding.
These examples are not intended to serve as projections of
future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your
Contract will actually perform.
Example #1 – The initial values on the
Rider Effective Date based on an Initial Purchase Payment of
$100,000. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the
Contract Value if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract
Anniversary.
Remaining
GIA Plus
Dollar
Beginning
Purchase
Guaranteed
GIA Plus
GIA Plus
Withdrawal
Amount of
of Contract
Payments
Withdrawal
Contract
Income
Step-Up
Withdrawal
Amt. (GWA)
Prior Year’s
Year
Received
Amount
Value
Base (GIB)
Value
Base (GWB)
(5% of GWB)
GWA
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
N/A
Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment
received during the first Contract Year and its effect on the
values and balances under this Rider. This example assumes that
no withdrawals have been made.
Remaining
GIA Plus
Dollar
Beginning
Purchase
Guaranteed
GIA Plus
GIA Plus
Withdrawal
Amount of
of Contract
Payments
Withdrawal
Contract
Income
Step-Up
Withdrawal
Amt. (GWA)
Prior Year’s
Year
Received
Amount
Value
Base (GIB)
Value
Base (GWB)
(5% of GWB)
GWA
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
N/A
Activity
$100,000
$200,742
$201,237
$200,000
2
$205,242
$208,717
$205,242
$200,000
$10,000
$5,000
In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is
further subject to increases and/or decreases during a Contract
Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees
and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the
investment performance of the Variable Account.
The Guaranteed Income Base prior to receipt of the
Purchase Payment is assumed to have accumulated to $101,237.
This amount is derived by multiplying each day’s Guaranteed
Income Base by the daily factor of 1.000133680. As a result of
the subsequent Purchase Payment, the Guaranteed Income Base is
increased to $201,237 ($101,237 + $100,000). The
Guaranteed Income Base will assume to accumulate to $208,717 at
the next Contract Anniversary, by multiplying each day’s
Guaranteed Income Base immediately after receipt of the
subsequent Purchase Payment by the daily factor of 1.000133680.
231
The GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value prior to receipt of the Purchase Payment is $100,000.
As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value is increased to
$200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). On the Contract
Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, the
Contract Value ($205,242) is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up
Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary ($200,000).
As a result, the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value as of that Contract Anniversary is equal to the Contract
Value on that Contract Anniversary ($205,242).
The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary
at the beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Base on the Rider Effective Date ($100,000) plus
cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective
Date ($100,000). As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment,
the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary at the
beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to $200,000
($100,000 + $100,000).
The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is
determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of
Contract Year 2, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000).
As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is equal to $10,000.
Since no withdrawals were made during Contract Year 1, the
GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 1 ($5,000)
becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract
Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2.
Example #3 – Cumulative withdrawals during
Contract Year 2 exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2; and (b) the
remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA
Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2. The withdrawal
is assumed to result in a 10% reduction in the Contract Value.
Remaining
GIA Plus
Dollar
Beginning
Purchase
Guaranteed
GIA Plus
GIA Plus
Withdrawal
Amount of
of Contract
Payments
Withdrawal
Contract
Income
Step-Up
Withdrawal
Amt. (GWA)
Prior Year’s
Year
Received
Amount
Value
Base (GIB)
Value
Base (GWB)
(5% of GWB)
GWA
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
N/A
Activity
$100,000
$200,742
$201,237
$200,000
2
$205,242
$208,717
$205,242
$200,000
$10,000
$5,000
Activity
$20,830
$187,468
$192,471
$184,717
-$15,830
= $0
-$5,000
= $0
3
$190,259
$197,237
$190,259
$200,000
$10,000
$0
Since the $20,830 withdrawal exceeded the sum of: (a) the
GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2; and
(b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior
Contract’s Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for
Contract Year 2, the remaining dollar amount of the prior
Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract
Year 3 is zero. Withdrawals are first applied to the
remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA
Plus Withdrawal Amount, if any, until exhausted, then to the GIA
Plus Withdrawal Amount for the current Contract Year, until
exhausted.
The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3
is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of
Contract Year 3, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000).
As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract
Year 3 is equal to $10,000. The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount
for any Contract Year will not be less than zero.
Immediately after the withdrawal, the Guaranteed Income Base
and the GIA Plus
Step-Up
Value are reduced by the percentage decrease (10%) in
Contract Value as a result of the withdrawal.
Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during
Contract Year 2, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the
beginning of Contract Year 3 remains unchanged.
232
Example #4 – Cumulative withdrawals during
Contract Year 3 not exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA
Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and
(b) the remaining dollar value of the prior Contract
Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3.
Remaining
GIA Plus
Dollar
Beginning
Purchase
Guaranteed
GIA Plus
GIA Plus
Withdrawal
Amount of
of Contract
Payments
Withdrawal
Contract
Income
Step-Up
Withdrawal
Amt. (GWA)
Prior Year’s
Year
Received
Amount
Value
Base (GIB)
Value
Base (GWB)
(5% of GWB)
GWA
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
N/A
Activity
$100,000
$200,742
$201,237
$200,000
2
$205,242
$208,717
$205,242
$200,000
$10,000
$5,000
Activity
$20,830
$187,468
$192,471
$184,717
-$15,830
= $0
-$5,000
= $0
3
$190,259
$197,237
$190,259
$200,000
$10,000
$0
Activity
$8,000
$185,092
$193,743
$182,376
-$8,000
= $2,000
-$0
= $0
4
$187,848
$199,099
$187,848
$200,000
$10,000
$2,000
Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not
exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for
Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar amount
of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for
Contract Year 3, the Guaranteed Income Base on the
Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4 is
calculated as follows:
Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the
beginning of Contract Year 3:
$197,237
Increased at an annual rate of 5% to the Contract Anniversary at
the beginning of Contract Year 4:
+ $9,862
Reduced by the amount equal to the amount withdrawn in Contract
Year 3:
− $8,000
Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the
beginning of Contract Year 4:
$199,099
Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during
Contract Year 3, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the
beginning of Contract Year 4 remains unchanged.
The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4
is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of
Contract Year 4, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000).
As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract
Year 4 is equal to $10,000.
Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not
exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for
Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar value of
the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for
Contract Year 3; the dollar amount of the GIA Plus
Withdrawal Amount for Contact Year 3 remaining ($2,000)
becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract
Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4.
233
Example #5 – Rider values on each Contract
Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000
paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no
subsequent Purchase Payments are received and no
withdrawals are taken during the first 10 Contract
Years after the Rider Effective Date. The Initial Purchase
Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider is
effective on a Contract Anniversary.
GIA Plus
Beginning
GIA Plus
GIA Plus
Withdrawal
Remaining Dollar
of Contract
Guaranteed
Step-Up
Withdrawal
Amt. (GWA)
Amount of
Year
Contract Value
Income Base (GIB)
Value
Base (GWB)
(5% of GWB)
Prior Year’s GWA
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
N/A
2
$103,000
$105,000
$103,000
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
3
$106,090
$110,250
$106,090
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
4
$109,273
$115,763
$109,273
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
5
$112,551
$121,551
$112,551
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
6
$115,927
$127,628
$115,927
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
7
$112,450
$134,010
$115,927
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
8
$109,076
$140,710
$115,927
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
9
$105,804
$147,746
$115,927
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
10
$102,630
$155,133
$115,927
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
11
$99,551
$162,889
$115,927
$100,000
$5,000
$5,000
Example #6 – Rider values on each Contract
Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000
paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no
subsequent Purchase Payments are received and withdrawals of
$5,000 are taken each Contract Year for the first
10 Contract Years after the Rider Effective Date. The
Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if
the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary.
GIA Plus
Beginning
GIA Plus
GIA Plus
Withdrawal
Remaining Dollar
of Contract
Guaranteed
Step-Up
Withdrawal
Amt. (GWA)
Amount of
Year
Contract Value
Income Base (GIB)
Value
Base (GWB)
(5% of GWB)
Prior Year’s GWA
1
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$100,000
$5,000
N/A
2
$97,926
$100,000
$97,926
$100,000
$5,000
$0
3
$95,789
$100,000
$95,789
$100,000
$5,000
$0
4
$93,588
$100,000
$93,588
$100,000
$5,000
$0
5
$91,321
$100,000
$91,321
$100,000
$5,000
$0
6
$88,986
$100,000
$88,986
$100,000
$5,000
$0
7
$81,392
$100,000
$83,910
$100,000
$5,000
$0
8
$74,026
$100,000
$78,676
$100,000
$5,000
$0
9
$66,881
$100,000
$73,280
$100,000
$5,000
$0
10
$59,950
$100,000
$67,718
$100,000
$5,000
$0
11
$53,227
$100,000
$61,983
$100,000
$5,000
$0
Should the Contract annuitize immediately after the Rider has
been in effect for at least 10 years and the GIA Plus
Annuity Option has been elected to provide such payments, the
net amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to
provide the payments is equal to the greater of:
(a)
the Guaranteed Income Base; or
(b)
the GIA Plus Step-Up Value; less any:
(c)
applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional
benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of
the Annuity Date; and
(d)
charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.
Under Example #5, the net amount applied on the
Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of
Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base
($162,889), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value
($115,927) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in
(c) and (d) above, if any.
Under Example #6, the net amount applied on the
Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of
Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base
($100,000), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value
($61,983) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in (c)
and (d) above, if any.
234
Guaranteed
Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5)
How the
Rider Works
If you purchased this Rider, you may choose any of the Annuity
Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the
GIA 5 Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect
for at least 10 years from the later of its Effective Date
or the most recent Step-Up Date. You must choose fixed annuity
payments under this GIA 5 Annuity Option. The guaranteed
income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the
annuity payments will be based on an annual interest rate of
2.5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the age set back
10 years. The net amount applied to the annuity payments
under the GIA 5 Annuity Option will be based on the Net
Guaranteed Income Base, which is described below.
Net Guaranteed Income Base – The amount applied
on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide annuity
payments under the GIA 5 Annuity Option. The Net Guaranteed
Income Base is equal to:
•
the Guaranteed Income Base as of the Annuity Date, less
•
any Contract Debt, and less
•
any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes.
Guaranteed Income Base – If you purchased the
Rider on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is
initially set on the Effective Date of the Rider. If the Rider
is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is
equal to the Initial Purchase Payment. If the Rider is effective
on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal
to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The
Guaranteed Income Base on any Business Day after the Effective
Date is the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior Business Day,
increased by any additions on that day as a result of any:
•
Purchase Payments received by us, plus
•
increases at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
•
additional amounts as a result of a Step-Up in the Guaranteed
Income Base
and decreased by any deductions on that day as a result of any:
•
adjustments for withdrawals.
The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying
the Guaranteed Income Base prior to the withdrawal by the ratio
of the amount of the withdrawal to the Contract Value
immediately prior to the withdrawal.
Any portion of the Net Contract Value converted to provide
payments under an Annuity Option, as described in the Contract,
will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of
determining any adjustment to the Guaranteed Income Base.
The 5% annual growth rate will take into account the timing of
when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred. This is
accomplished by applying a daily factor of 1.000133681 to each
day’s Guaranteed Income Base balance. The 5% annual growth
rate will stop accruing as of the earlier of:
•
the Contract Anniversary following the day the youngest
Annuitant reaches his or her
80th
birthday, or
•
the day the Rider terminates.
Election of Step-Up – On any Contract
Anniversary beginning with the
5th
anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the
Annuity Date, you may elect to increase the Guaranteed Income
Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the
Step-Up Date. A Step-Up will begin a new
10-year
period before you may elect to have any annuity payments made
under the GIA 5 Annuity Option.
The Guaranteed Income Advantage Charge (“GIA 5
Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up in the
Guaranteed Income Base. However, the GIA 5 Charge will
never exceed the GIA 5 Charge then being offered for this
same benefit under newly issued riders and will not be more than
a maximum charge of 0.75%. If the Guaranteed Income Base is
never stepped-up, the GIA 5 Charge established on the
Effective Date of this Rider is guaranteed not to change.
Your Step-Up election must be received, in a form satisfactory
to us, at our Service Center within 60 days after the
Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective.
Once a Step-Up has been elected and is in effect, another
Step-Up may not be elected until on or after the
5th
anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date. We will provide you with
written confirmation of your Step-Up election.
235
Guaranteed
Income Advantage (GIA 5) Annuity Option
The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA 5
Annuity Option are:
•
Life Only,
•
Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
•
Joint and Survivor Life, or
•
15 years or more Period Certain.
The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA 5 Annuity
Option available.
For information regarding taxation of annuity payments, see
FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.
Continuation
of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract
If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the
surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the
Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of
this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.
Termination
The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day any
portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according
to the Investment Allocation Requirements,
•
the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day we
receive notification from you to terminate the Rider,
•
the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of
the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the
Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues
Contract subsection),
•
for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first
death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent
Annuitants,
•
the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms
of the Contract, or
•
the Annuity Date.
If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our
Service Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary,
the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.
The Pacific Odyssey variable annuity Contract is offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company, 700 Newport Center Drive. P.O. Box 9000, Newport Beach, California92660.
If you have any questions about the Contract, please ask your financial advisor or contact us.
You will find more information about the Pacific Odyssey variable annuity contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2011.
The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it is incorporated by reference. In this Prospectus, you will find the table of contents for the SAI on page 110.
You can get a copy of the SAI at no charge by calling or writing to us, or by contacting the SEC. The SEC may charge you a fee for this information.
How to Contact Us
Call or write to us at: Pacific Life Insurance Company P.O. Box 2378 Omaha, Nebraska68103-2378
Contract Owners: (800) 722-4448 Financial Advisors: (800) 722-2333 6 a.m. through 5 p.m. Pacific time
Send Purchase Payments, other payments and application forms to the following address:
By overnight delivery service Pacific Life Insurance Company 1299 Farnam Street, 6th Floor, RSD Omaha, Nebraska68102
How to Contact the SEC
Commission’s Public Reference Section
100 F Street, NE
Washington, D.C. 20549
(202) 551-8090
Website: www.sec.gov
e-mail: publicinfo@sec.gov
FINRA Public Disclosure Program
The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) provides
investor protection education through its website and printed
materials. The FINRA regulation website address is
www.finra.org. An investor brochure that includes information
describing the BrokerCheck program may be obtained from FINRA.
The FINRA BrokerCheck hotline number is
(800) 289-9999.
FINRA does not charge a fee for the BrokerCheck program
services.
Pacific Odyssey (the “Contract”) is a variable annuity
contract offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company
(“Pacific Life”).
This Statement of Additional Information (“SAI”) is
not a Prospectus and should be read in conjunction with the
Contract’s Prospectus, dated May 1, 2011, and any
supplement thereto, which is available without charge upon
written or telephone request to Pacific Life. Terms used in this
SAI have the same meanings as in the Prospectus, and some
additional terms are defined particularly for this SAI. This SAI
is incorporated by reference into the Contract’s Prospectus.
The DCA Plus Fixed Option is only available for Contracts issued
before November 14, 2003 with a DCA Plus Rider. The Fixed
Option is only available on Contracts issued before July 1,2003. Accordingly, all references to the DCA Plus Fixed Option
and the Fixed Option throughout this SAI are subject to these
disclosures.
From time to time, our reports or other communications to
current or prospective Contract Owners or our advertising or
other promotional material may quote the performance (yield and
total return) of a Subaccount. Quoted results are based on past
performance and reflect the performance of all assets held in
that Subaccount for the stated time period. Quoted results
are neither an estimate nor a guarantee of future investment
performance, and do not represent the actual experience of
amounts invested by any particular Contract Owner.
A Subaccount may advertise its “average annual total
return” over various periods of time. “Total
return” represents the average percentage change in value
of an investment in the Subaccount from the beginning of a
measuring period to the end of that measuring period.
“Annualized” total return assumes that the total
return achieved for the measuring period is achieved for each
full year period. “Average annual” total return is
computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the
SEC, and is also referred to as “standardized return.”
Average
Annual Total Return
To calculate a Subaccount’s average annual total return for
a specific measuring period, we first take a hypothetical $1,000
investment in that Subaccount, at its applicable Subaccount Unit
Value (the “initial payment”) and we compute the
ending redeemable value of that initial payment at the end of
the measuring period based on the investment experience of that
Subaccount (“full withdrawal value”). The full
withdrawal value reflects the effect of all recurring fees and
charges applicable to a Contract Owner under the Contract,
including the Risk Charge, and the asset-based Administrative
Fee, but does not reflect any charges for applicable premium
taxes and/or any other taxes, any non-recurring fees or charges,
any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit
Rider, or any charge for an optional Rider. The redeemable value
is then divided by the initial payment and this quotient is
raised to the 365/N power (N represents the number of days in
the measuring period), and 1 is subtracted from this result.
Average annual total return is expressed as a percentage.
T = (ERV/P)(365/N)
− 1
where
T
=
average annual total return
ERV
=
ending redeemable value
P
=
hypothetical initial payment of $1,000
N
=
number of days
Average annual total return figures will be given for recent
1-,
3-,
5- and
10-year
periods (if applicable), and may be given for other periods as
well (such as from commencement of the Subaccount’s
operations, or on a year-by-year basis).
When considering “average” total return figures for
periods longer than one year, it is important to note that the
relevant Subaccount’s annual total return for any one year
in the period might have been greater or less than the average
for the entire period.
Aggregate
Total Return
A Subaccount may use “aggregate” total return figures
along with its “average annual” total return figures
for various periods; these figures represent the cumulative
change in value of an investment in the Subaccount for a
specific period. Aggregate total returns may be shown by means
of schedules, charts or graphs and may indicate subtotals of the
various components of total return. The SEC has not prescribed
standard formulas for calculating aggregate total return.
Non-Standardized
Total Returns
We may also calculate non-standardized total returns which may
or may not reflect any increases in Risk Charge for an optional
Death Benefit Rider, charges for premium taxes and/or any other
taxes, any charge for an optional Rider, or any non-recurring
fees or charges.
1
Standardized return figures will always accompany any
non-standardized returns shown.
The “yield” (also called “current yield”) of
the Cash Management Subaccount is computed in accordance with a
standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net change in the
Subaccount’s Unit Value during a seven-day period is
divided by the Unit Value at the beginning of the period to
obtain a base rate of return. The current yield is generated
when the base rate is “annualized” by multiplying it
by the fraction
365/7;
that is, the base rate of return is assumed to be generated each
week over a 365-day period and is shown as a percentage of the
investment. The “effective yield” of the Cash
Management Subaccount is calculated similarly but, when
annualized, the base rate of return is assumed to be reinvested.
The effective yield will be slightly higher than the current
yield because of the compounding effect of this assumed
reinvestment.
The formula for effective yield is: [(Base Period Return +
1) (To the power of
365/7)]
− 1.
Realized capital gains or losses and unrealized appreciation or
depreciation of the assets of the underlying Cash Management
Portfolio are not included in the yield calculation. Current
yield and effective yield do not reflect any deduction of
charges for any applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes,
any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit
Rider, any charge for an optional Rider, but do reflect a
deduction for the Risk Charge and the asset-based Administrative
Fee.
Other
Subaccounts
“Yield” of the other Subaccounts is computed in
accordance with a different standard method prescribed by the
SEC. The net investment income (investment income less expenses)
per Subaccount Unit earned during a specified one-month or
30-day period is divided by the Subaccount Unit Value on the
last day of the specified period. This result is then annualized
(that is, the yield is assumed to be generated each month or
each 30-day
period for a year), according to the following formula, which
assumes semi-annual compounding:
YIELD = 2[(
a – b
cd
+ 1)6
− 1]
where:
a
=
net investment income earned during the period by the Portfolio
attributable to the Subaccount.
b
=
expenses accrued for the period (net of reimbursements).
c
=
the average daily number of Subaccount Units outstanding during
the period that were entitled to receive dividends.
d
=
the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units on the last day of the
period.
The yield of each Subaccount reflects the deduction of all
recurring fees and charges applicable to the Subaccount, such as
the Risk Charge, and the
asset-based
Administrative Fee, but does not reflect any charge for
applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, increase in the
Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, any charge for
an optional Rider, or any non-recurring fees or charges.
The Subaccounts’ yields will vary from time to time
depending upon market conditions, the composition of each
Portfolio and operating expenses of the Fund allocated to each
Portfolio. Consequently, any given performance quotation should
not be considered representative of the Subaccount’s
performance in the future. Yield should also be considered
relative to changes in Subaccount Unit Values and to the
relative risks associated with the investment policies and
objectives of the various Portfolios. In addition, because
performance will fluctuate, it may not provide a basis for
comparing the yield of a Subaccount with certain bank deposits
or other investments that pay a fixed yield or return for a
stated period of time.
In advertisements and sales literature, we may compare the
performance of some or all of the Subaccounts to the performance
of other variable annuity issuers in general and to the
performance of particular types of variable annuities investing
in mutual funds, or series of mutual funds, with investment
objectives similar to each of the Subaccounts. This performance
may be presented as averages or rankings compiled by Lipper
Analytical Services, Inc. (“Lipper”),
2
or Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”), which are
independent services that monitor and rank the performance of
variable annuity issuers and mutual funds in each of the major
categories of investment objectives on an industry-wide basis.
Lipper’s rankings include variable life issuers as well as
variable annuity issuers. The performance analyses prepared by
Lipper and Morningstar rank such issuers on the basis of total
return, assuming reinvestment of dividends and distributions,
but do not take sales charges, redemption fees or certain
expense deductions at the separate account level into
consideration. In addition, Morningstar prepares risk adjusted
rankings, which consider the effects of market risk on total
return performance. We may also compare the performance of the
Subaccounts with performance information included in other
publications and services that monitor the performance of
insurance company separate accounts or other investment
vehicles. These other services or publications may be general
interest business publications such as The Wall Street
Journal, Barron’s, Business Week, Forbes, Fortune, and
Money.
In addition, our reports and communications to Contract Owners,
advertisements, or sales literature may compare a
Subaccount’s performance to various benchmarks that measure
the performance of a pertinent group of securities widely
regarded by investors as being representative of the securities
markets in general or as being representative of a particular
type of security. We may also compare the performance of the
Subaccounts with that of other appropriate indices of investment
securities and averages for peer universes of funds or data
developed by us derived from such indices or averages. Unmanaged
indices generally assume the reinvestment of dividends or
interest but do not generally reflect deductions for investment
management or administrative costs and expenses.
Tax
Deferred Accumulation
In reports or other communications to you or in advertising or
sales materials, we may also describe the effects of
tax-deferred compounding on the Separate Account’s
investment returns or upon returns in general. These effects may
be illustrated in charts or graphs and may include comparisons
at various points in time of returns under the Contract or in
general on a tax-deferred basis with the returns on a taxable
basis. Different tax rates may be assumed.
In general, individuals who own annuity contracts are not taxed
on increases in the value under the annuity contract until some
form of distribution is made from the contract (Non-Natural
Persons as Owners may not receive tax deferred accumulation).
Thus, the annuity contract will benefit from tax deferral during
the accumulation period, which generally will have the effect of
permitting an investment in an annuity contract to grow more
rapidly than a comparable investment under which increases in
value are taxed on a current basis. The following chart
illustrates this benefit by comparing accumulation under a
variable annuity contract with accumulations from an investment
on which gains are taxed on a current ordinary income basis.
The chart shows accumulations on a single Purchase Payment of
$10,000, assuming hypothetical annual returns of 0%, 4% and 8%,
compounded annually, and a tax rate of 33%. The values shown for
the taxable investment do not include any deduction for
management fees or other expenses but assume that taxes are
deducted annually from investment returns. The values shown for
the variable annuity do not reflect the deduction of contractual
expenses such as the Risk Charge (equal to an annual rate of
0.15% of average daily Account Value), the Administrative Fee
(equal to an annual rate of 0.25% of average daily Account
Value), any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death
Benefit Rider (equal to a maximum annual rate of 0.35% of
average daily Account Value), other optional Riders charges
(equal to a maximum annual rate of 1.75% of the Protected
Payment Base) a charge for premium taxes and/or any other taxes
or any underlying Fund expenses. The chart assumes a full
withdrawal, at the end of the period shown, of all Contract
Value and the payment of taxes at the 33% rate on the amount in
excess of the Purchase Payment.
The rates of return illustrated are hypothetical and are not an
estimate or guarantee of performance. Actual tax rates may vary
for different assets (e.g. capital gains and qualifying
dividend income) and taxpayers from that illustrated.
Withdrawals by and distributions to Contract Owners who have not
reached
age 591/2 may
be subject to a tax penalty of 10%.
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc., our subsidiary, acts as the
distributor of the Contracts and offers the Contracts on a
continuous basis. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive,
Newport Beach, California92660. PSD is registered as a
broker-dealer with the SEC and is a member of FINRA. We pay PSD
for acting as distributor under a Distribution Agreement. We and
PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers whose
financial advisors are authorized by state insurance departments
to solicit applications for the Contracts. The aggregate amount
of underwriting commissions paid to PSD for 2010, 2009, and 2008
with regard to this Contract was $0.
PSD or an affiliate does not pay sales compensation to
broker-dealers that solicit applications for the Contracts.
However, PSD or an affiliate may provide reimbursement for other
expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of
applications for the Contracts. You may ask your financial
advisor how he/she will personally be compensated for the
transaction.
Certain broker-dealers may be paid an amount under a persistency
program which will be based on assets under management and
duration of contracts. The amount under the persistency program
for a financial advisor is not expected to exceed 0.25% of their
total assets under management.
In addition to the persistency program described above, we
and/or an affiliate may pay additional cash compensation from
our own resources in connection with the promotion and
solicitation of applications for the Contracts by some, but not
all, broker-dealers. The range of additional cash compensation
based on Purchase Payments generally does not exceed 0.20% and
trailing compensation based on Account Value generally does not
exceed 0.10% on an annual basis.
4
Such additional compensation may give Pacific Life greater
access to financial advisors of the broker-dealers that receive
such compensation. While this greater access provides the
opportunity for training and other educational programs so that
your financial advisor may serve you better, this additional
compensation also may afford Pacific Life a
“preferred” status at the recipient broker-dealer and
provide some other marketing benefit such as website placement,
access to financial advisor lists, extra marketing assistance or
other heightened visibility and access to the
broker-dealer’s sales force that otherwise influences the
way that the broker-dealer and the financial advisor market the
Contracts.
As of December 31, 2010, the following firms have
arrangements in effect with the Distributor pursuant to which
the firm is entitled to receive a revenue sharing payment:
American Portfolios Financial Services Inc., Askar Corporation,
Bancwest Investment Services Inc., C C O Investment
Services Corp, C U N A Brokerage Services Inc.,
C U S O Financial Services LP, Centaurus
Financial, Inc., Citigroup Global Markets Inc., Commonwealth
Financial Network, B B V A Compass Investment
Solutions Inc., Edward D. Jones & Co., LP, Essex
National Securities Inc., F S C Securities
Corporation, Fifth Third Securities Inc., Financial Network
Investment Corp., First Allied Securities Inc., First Heartland
Capital Inc., First Tennessee Brokerage Inc., Geneos Wealth
Management Inc., Great American Advisors Inc., I N G
Financial Partners Inc., Infinex Investments Inc., Invest
Financial Corporation, Investacorp Inc., Investment Centers of
America Inc., Investment Professionals Inc., J J B
Hilliard, W L Lyons Inc., Jacques Financial
L L C, Janney Montgomery Scott Inc., Key Investment
Services L L C, L P L Financial Corp.,
Lincoln Financial Advisors Corp., Lincoln Financial Securities
Corp., M & T Securities Inc., M Holdings
Securities Inc., M M L Investors Services Inc.,
Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith, Morgan
Keegan & Company Inc., Morgan Stanley & Co.
Incorporated, Multi-Financial Securities Corp., Mutual Of Omaha
Investor Services Inc., NF P Securities Inc., National
Planning Corporation, NEXT Financial Group Inc., P N C
Investments L L C, Park Avenue Securities LLC.,
Primevest Financial Services Inc., ProEquities Inc.,
R B C Capital Markets Corporation, Raymond
James & Associates Inc., Raymond James Financial
Services Inc., Robert W Baird & Company Inc., Royal
Alliance Associates Inc., S I I Investments Inc.,
Sagepoint Financial Inc., Securian Financial Services Inc.,
Securities America Inc., Sigma Financial Corp., Signator
Investors Inc., Sorrento Pacific Financial L L C,
Stifel Nicolaus & Company Inc., Suntrust Investment
Services Inc., Tower Square Securities Inc., Transamerica
Financial Advisors Inc., Triad Advisors Inc., U B S
Financial Services Inc., U S Bancorp Investments Inc.,
Unionbanc Investment Services L L C, United
Planners’ Financial Services of America, V S R
Financial Services Inc., Vision Investment Services Inc., Walnut
Street Securities, Wells Fargo Advisors LLC, Wells Fargo
Investments LLC, Wescom Financial Services L L C,
Woodbury Financial Services Inc., Zions Direct Inc.
We or our affiliates may also pay override payments, expense
allowances and reimbursements, bonuses, wholesaler fees, and
training and marketing allowances. Such payments may offset the
broker-dealer’s expenses in connection with activities that
it is required to perform, such as educating personnel and
maintaining records. Financial advisors may also receive
non-cash compensation, such as expense-paid educational or
training seminars involving travel within and outside the U.S.
or promotional merchandise.
All of the compensation described in this section, and other
compensation or benefits provided by us or our affiliates, may
be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or
other products and may influence your financial advisor or
broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment
options. You may ask your financial advisor about these
potential conflicts of interests and how he/she and his/her
broker-dealer are compensated for selling the Contract.
Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under
this Contract may from time to time bear all or a portion of the
expenses of conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or
PSD that are attended by, among others, representatives of PSD,
who would receive information and/or training regarding the
Fund’s Portfolios and their management by the Portfolio
Managers in addition to information regarding the variable
annuity and/or life insurance products issued by Pacific Life
and its affiliates. Other persons may also attend all or a
portion of any such conferences or meetings, including
directors, officers and employees of Pacific Life, officers and
trustees of Pacific Select Fund, and spouses/guests of the
foregoing. The Pacific Select Fund Board of Trustees may hold
meetings concurrently with such a conference or meeting. The
Pacific Select Fund pays for the expenses of the meetings of its
Board of Trustees, including the pro rata share of expenses for
attendance by the Trustees at the concurrent
5
conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD.
Additional expenses and promotional items may be paid for by
Pacific Life and/or Portfolio Managers. PSD serves as the
Pacific Select Fund Distributor.
The Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable
Investment Option is computed at the close of the New York
Stock Exchange, which is usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on
each Business Day. The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was
$10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the
end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is
equal to:
Y × Z
where
(Y)
=
the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the
preceding Business Day; and
(Z)
=
the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a
“valuation period”) between that Business Day and the
immediately preceding Business Day.
The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any
valuation period is equal to:
(A
¸
B) − C
where
(A)
=
the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount
as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c
where
(a)
=
the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio
shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation
period;
(b)
=
the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain
distributions made by the Fund for that Portfolio during that
valuation period; and
(c)
=
any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a
positive number) for any income taxes or other amounts set aside
during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or
any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the
operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes
attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;
(B)
=
the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio
shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding
valuation period; and
(C)
=
a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for
each calendar day in the valuation period, the basic Risk Charge
plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the
Administrative Fee (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS
section in the Prospectus).
The following steps show how we determine the amount of each
variable annuity payment under your Contract.
First:
Pay Applicable Premium Taxes
When you convert any portion of your Net Contract Value into
annuity payments, you must pay any applicable charge for premium
taxes and/or other taxes on your Contract Value (unless
applicable law requires those taxes to be paid at a later time).
We assess this charge by reducing your Account Value
proportionately, relative to your Account Value in each
Subaccount and in any fixed option, in an amount equal to the
aggregate amount of the charges. The remaining amount of your
available Net Contract Value may be used to provide variable
annuity payments. Alternatively, your remaining available Net
Contract Value may be used to provide fixed annuity payments, or
it may be divided to provide both fixed and variable annuity
payments. You may also choose to withdraw some or all of your
remaining Net Contract Value less any applicable optional Rider
Charge, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes
without converting this amount into annuity payments.
6
Second:
The First Variable Payment
We begin by referring to your Contract’s Option Table for
your Annuity Option (the “Annuity Option Table”). The
Annuity Option Table allows us to calculate the dollar amount of
the first variable annuity payment under your Contract, based on
the amount applied toward the variable annuity. The number that
the Annuity Option Table yields will be based on the
Annuitant’s age (and, in certain cases, sex) and assumes a
5% rate of return, as described in more detail below.
Example: Assume a man is 65 years of age at his
Annuity Date and has selected a lifetime annuity with monthly
payments guaranteed for 10 years. According to the Annuity
Option Table, this man should receive an initial monthly payment
of $5.79 for every $1,000 of his Contract Value (reduced by
applicable charges) that he will be using to provide variable
payments. Therefore, if his Contract Value after deducting
applicable fees and charges is $100,000 on his Annuity Date and
he applies this entire amount toward his variable annuity, his
first monthly payment will be $579.00.
You may choose any other Annuity Option Table that assumes a
different rate of return which we offer at the time your Annuity
Option is effective.
Third:
Subaccount Annuity Units
For each Subaccount, we use the amount of the first variable
annuity payment under your Contract attributed to each
Subaccount to determine the number of Subaccount Annuity Units
that will form the basis of subsequent payment amounts. First,
we use the Annuity Option Table to determine the amount of that
first variable payment for each Subaccount. Then, for each
Subaccount, we divide that amount of the first variable annuity
payment by the value of one Subaccount Annuity Unit (the
“Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”) as of the end of the
Annuity Date to obtain the number of Subaccount Annuity Units
for that particular Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Annuity
Units used to calculate subsequent payments under your Contract
will not change unless exchanges of Annuity Units are made, (or
if the Joint and Survivor Annuity Option is elected and the
Primary Annuitant dies first) but the value of those Annuity
Units will change daily, as described below.
Fourth:
The Subsequent Variable Payments
The amount of each subsequent variable annuity payment will be
the sum of the amounts payable based on each Subaccount. The
amount payable based on each Subaccount is equal to the number
of Subaccount Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by
their Subaccount Annuity Unit Value at the end of the Business
Day in each payment period you elected that corresponds to the
Annuity Date.
Each Subaccount’s Subaccount Annuity Unit Value, like its
Subaccount Unit Value, changes each day to reflect the net
investment results of the underlying investment vehicle, as well
as the assessment of the Risk Charge at an annual rate of 0.15%
and the Administrative Fee at an annual rate of 0.25%. In
addition, the calculation of Subaccount Annuity Unit Value
incorporates an additional factor; as discussed in more detail
below, this additional factor adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit
Values to correct for the Option Table’s implicit assumed
annual investment return on amounts applied but not yet used to
furnish annuity benefits. Any increase in your Risk Charge for
an optional death benefit rider is not charged on and after the
Annuity Date.
Different Subaccounts may be selected for your Contract before
and after your Annuity Date, subject to any restrictions we may
establish. Currently, you may exchange Subaccount Annuity Units
in any Subaccount for Subaccount Annuity Units in any other
Subaccount(s) up to four times in any twelve month period after
your Annuity Date. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units in any
Subaccount may change due to such exchanges. Exchanges following
your Annuity Date will be made by exchanging Subaccount Annuity
Units of equivalent aggregate value, based on their relative
Subaccount Annuity Unit Values.
Understanding
the “Assumed Investment Return” Factors
The Annuity Option Table incorporates a number of implicit
assumptions in determining the amount of your first variable
annuity payment. As noted above, the numbers in the Annuity
Option Table reflect certain actuarial assumptions based on the
Annuitant’s age, and, in some cases, the Annuitant’s
sex. In addition, these numbers assume
7
that the amount of your Contract Value that you convert to a
variable annuity will have a positive net investment return of
5% each year during the payout of your annuity; thus 5% is
referred to as an “assumed investment return.”
The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for a Subaccount will increase
only to the extent that the investment performance of that
Subaccount exceeds the Risk Charge, the Administrative Fee, and
the assumed investment return. The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value
for any Subaccount will generally be less than the Subaccount
Unit Value for that same Subaccount, and the difference will be
the amount of the assumed investment return factor.
Example: Assume the net investment performance of a
Subaccount is at a rate of 5.00% per year (after deduction of
the 0.15% Risk Charge and the 0.25% Administrative Fee). The
Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a
rate of 5.00% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value
would not increase (or decrease) at all. The net investment
factor for that 5% return [1.05] is then divided by the factor
for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1 is subtracted
from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in
Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:
1.05
1.05
= 1; 1 − 1 = 0; 0 × 100% = 0%.
If the net investment performance of a Subaccount’s assets
is at a rate less than 5.00% per year, the Subaccount Annuity
Unit Value will decrease, even if the Subaccount Unit Value is
increasing.
Example: Assume the net investment performance of a
Subaccount is at a rate of 2.60% per year (after deduction of
the 0.15% Risk Charge and the 0.25% Administrative Fee). The
Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a
rate of 2.60% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value
would decrease at a rate of 2.29% per year. The net
investment factor for that 2.6% return [1.026] is then divided
by the factor for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1
is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of
change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:
The assumed investment return will always cause increases in
Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat less than if the
assumption had not been made, will cause decreases in Subaccount
Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat greater than if the
assumption had not been made, and will (as shown in the example
above) sometimes cause a decrease in Subaccount Annuity Unit
Values to take place when an increase would have occurred if the
assumption had not been made. If we had assumed a higher
investment return in our Annuity Option tables, it would produce
annuities with larger first payments, but the increases in
subaccount annuity payments would be smaller and the decreases
in subsequent annuity payments would be greater; a lower assumed
investment return would produce annuities with smaller first
payments, and the increases in subsequent annuity payments would
be greater and the decreases in subsequent annuity payments
would be smaller.
If variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2
and 4 (Life with Period Certain and Period Certain Only,
respectively), you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable
payments after the Annuity Date (for more information about
Annuity Options, see ANNUITIZATION – Choosing your
Annuity Option in the Prospectus). Also, under
Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed
variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. If
you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments
in a single sum, we will not make any additional variable
annuity payments during the Annuitant’s lifetime or the
remaining guaranteed period after the redemption. The amount
available upon a full redemption would be the present value of
any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed
investment return.
The variable payment amount we use in calculating the present
value is determined by summing an amount for each Subaccount,
which we calculate by multiplying your Subaccount Annuity Units
by the Annuity Unit Value next computed after we receive your
redemption request. This variable payment amount is then
discounted at the assumed investment return from each future
Annuity Payment date that falls within the payment guaranteed
period. The sum of these discounted remaining variable payment
amounts is the present value of remaining guaranteed variable
payments.
8
If you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable
payments in a single sum, we will not make any additional
variable annuity payments during the remaining guaranteed period
after the redemption.
If you elect to redeem a portion of the remaining guaranteed
variable payments in a single sum, we will reduce the number of
Annuity Units for each Subaccount by the same percentage as the
partial redemption value bears to the amount available upon a
full redemption.
Redemption of remaining guaranteed variable payments will not
affect the amount of any fixed annuity payments.
If any systematic pre-authorized transaction under your Contract
is scheduled to occur on a “corresponding date” that
does not exist in a given calendar period or is scheduled to
occur on the last day of the month that is not a Business Day,
the transaction will be deemed to occur on the last Business Day
of the month.
Example: If your Contract is issued on
February 29 in year 1 (a leap year), your Contract
Anniversary in years 2, 3 and 4 will be on February 28.
Example: If your Annuity Date is January 31,
and you select monthly annuity payments, the payments received
will be based on valuations made on February 28 (or 29 in a
leap year), March 31, April 30, May 31,
June 30, July 31, August 31, September 30,
October 31, November 30, and December 31 if those
days are Business Days. Otherwise, the valuations made will be
based on the last Business Day of the applicable month.
The Contracts generally provide for sex-distinct annuity income
factors in the case of life annuities. Statistically, females
tend to have longer life expectancies than males; consequently,
if the amount of annuity payments is based on life expectancy,
they will ordinarily be higher if an annuitant is male than if
an annuitant is female. Certain states’ regulations
prohibit sex-distinct annuity income factors, and Contracts
issued in those states will use unisex factors. In addition,
Contracts issued in connection with Qualified Plans are required
to use unisex factors.
We may require proof of your Annuitant’s age and sex before
or after commencing annuity payments. If the age or sex (or
both) of your Annuitant are incorrectly stated in your Contract,
we will correct the amount payable to equal the amount that the
annuitized portion of the Contract Value under that Contract
would have purchased for your Annuitant’s correct age and
sex. If we make the correction after annuity payments have
started, and we have made overpayments based on the incorrect
information, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with
interest at 3% a year, from any payments due then or later; if
we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with
interest at 3% a year, of the underpayments to the next payment
we make after we receive proof of the correct age and/or sex.
Additionally, we may require proof of the Annuitant’s or
Owner’s age before any payments associated with the Death
Benefit provisions of your Contract are made. If the age or sex
of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will
base any payment associated with the Death Benefit provisions on
your Contract on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct
age or sex.
The fixed option(s) are not available in connection with
portfolio rebalancing. If you are using the earnings sweep, you
may also use portfolio rebalancing only if you selected the Cash
Management Subaccount, or, for Contracts issued before
July 1, 2003, the Fixed Option as your sweep option. You
may not use dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, and the earnings
sweep at the same time. Only portfolio rebalancing is available
after you annuitize. The systematic transfer options are subject
to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic
transfers. In addition, no fixed option(s) may be used as the
target Investment Option under any systematic transfer program.
Dollar
Cost Averaging
When you request dollar cost averaging, you are authorizing us
to make periodic reallocations of your Contract Value without
waiting for any further instruction from you. You may request to
begin or stop dollar cost averaging at any time prior to your
Annuity Date; the effective date of your request will be the day
we receive notice from you in a form
9
satisfactory to us. Your request may specify the date on which
you want your first transfer to be made. Your first transfer may
not be made until 30 days after your Contract Date, and if
you specify an earlier date, your first transfer will be delayed
until one calendar month after the date you specify. If you
request dollar cost averaging on your application for your
Contract and you fail to specify a date for your first transfer,
your first transfer will be made one period after your Contract
Date (that is, if you specify monthly transfers, the first
transfer will occur 30 days after your Contract Date;
quarterly transfers, 90 days after your Contract Date;
semi-annual transfers, 180 days after your Contract Date;
and if you specify annual transfers, the first transfer will
occur on your Contract Anniversary). If you stop dollar cost
averaging, you must wait 30 days before you may begin this
option again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30 day
waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting
period in the future.
Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must specify the
Investment Option you wish to transfer money from (your
“source account”). You may choose any one Investment
Option as your source account. The Account Value of your source
account must be at least $5,000 for you to begin dollar cost
averaging. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account
Value but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts
in the future.
Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must also specify
the amount and frequency of your transfers. You may choose
monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual transfers. The amount
of your transfers may be specified as a dollar amount or a
percentage of your source Account Value; however, each transfer
must be at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the
minimum transfer amount but we reserve the right to enforce such
minimum amounts in the future. Dollar cost averaging transfers
are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as
other transfers.
Finally, your request must specify the Variable Investment
Option(s) you wish to transfer amounts to (your
“target account(s)”). If you select more than one
target account, your dollar cost averaging request must specify
how transferred amounts should be allocated among the target
accounts. Your source account may not also be a target account.
Your dollar cost averaging transfers will continue until the
earlier of:
•
your request to stop dollar cost averaging is effective, or
•
your source Account Value is zero, or
•
your Annuity Date.
If, as a result of a dollar cost averaging transfer, your source
Account Value falls below any minimum Account Value we may
establish, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that
remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a
proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation
instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the dollar
cost averaging option at any time.
Portfolio
Rebalancing
Portfolio rebalancing allows you to maintain the percentage of
your Contract Value allocated to each Variable Investment Option
at a pre-set level prior to annuitization.
For example, you could specify that 30% of your Contract Value
should be in Subaccount A, 40% in Subaccount B, and
30% in Subaccount C.
Over time, the variations in each Subaccount’s investment
results will shift this balance of these Subaccount Value
allocations. If you elect the portfolio rebalancing feature, we
will automatically transfer your Subaccount Value back to the
percentages you specify.
You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually
or annually. Only portfolio rebalancing is available after you
annuitize.
Procedures for selecting portfolio rebalancing are generally the
same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar
cost averaging: You may make your request at any time prior to
your Annuity Date and it will be effective when we receive it in
a form satisfactory to us. If you stop portfolio rebalancing,
you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not
enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to
enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date
fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first
rebalance will be delayed one
10
month, and if you request rebalancing on your application but do
not specify a date for the first rebalance, it will occur one
period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar
Cost Averaging. We may change, terminate or suspend the
portfolio rebalancing feature at any time.
Earnings
Sweep
An earnings sweep automatically transfers the earnings from the
Fixed Option (if available) or the Cash Management Subaccount
(the “sweep option”) to one or more other Variable
Investment Options (your “target option(s)”). The
Account Value of your sweep option will be required to be at
least $5,000 when you elect the earnings sweep. Currently, we
are not enforcing the minimum Account Value but we reserve the
right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future.
You may choose to have earnings sweeps occur monthly, quarterly,
semi-annually or annually until you annuitize. At each earnings
sweep, we will automatically transfer your accumulated earnings
attributable to your sweep option for the previous period
proportionately to your target option(s). That is, if you select
a monthly earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option
earnings from the preceding month; if you select a semi-annual
earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings
accumulated over the preceding 6 months. Earnings sweep
transfers are not subject to the same requirements and
limitations as other transfers.
To determine the earnings, we take the change in the sweep
option’s Account Value during the sweep period, add any
withdrawals or transfers out of the sweep option Account that
occurred during the sweep period, and subtract any allocations
to the sweep option Account during the sweep period. The result
of this calculation represents the “total earnings”
for the sweep period.
If, during the sweep period, you withdraw or transfer amounts
from the sweep option Account, we assume that earnings are
withdrawn or transferred before any other Account Value.
Therefore, your “total earnings” for the sweep period
will be reduced by any amounts withdrawn or transferred during
the sweep option period. The remaining earnings are eligible for
the sweep transfer.
Procedures for selecting the earnings sweep are generally the
same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar
cost averaging and portfolio rebalancing: You may make your
request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it
in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop the earnings sweep,
you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not
enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to
enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date
fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first
earnings sweep will be delayed one month, and if you request the
earnings sweep on your application but do not specify a date for
the first sweep, it will occur one period after your Contract
Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging.
If, as a result of an earnings sweep transfer, your source
Account Value falls below $500, we have the right, at our
option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target
account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent
allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the
earnings sweep option at any time.
You may specify a dollar amount for your pre-authorized
withdrawals, or you may specify a percentage of your Contract
Value or an Account Value. You may direct us to make your
pre-authorized withdrawals from one or more specific Investment
Options. If you do not give us these specific instructions,
amounts will be deducted proportionately from your Account Value
in each Investment Option.
Procedures for selecting pre-authorized withdrawals are
generally the same as those discussed in detail above for
selecting dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and
earnings sweeps: You may make your request at any time and it
will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to
us. If you stop the pre-authorized withdrawals, you must wait
30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the
30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such
waiting period in the future.
Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to any applicable
charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to federal income
tax on its taxable portion, and, if you have not reached age
591/2,
may be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.
Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments
underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain
diversification requirements. Details on these diversification
requirements appear in the Pacific Select Fund SAI. We believe
the underlying Variable Investment Options for the Contract meet
these requirements. On March 7, 2008, the Treasury Department
issued Final Regulations under Section 817(h). These Final
Regulations do not provide guidance concerning the extent to
which you may direct your investments to particular divisions of
a separate account. Such guidance may be included in regulations
or revenue rulings under Section 817(d) relating to the
definition of a variable contract. We reserve the right to make
such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to ensure that
your Contract continues to qualify as an annuity for tax
purposes. Any such changes will apply uniformly to affected
Contract Owners and will be made with such notice to affected
Contract Owners as is feasible under the circumstances.
For a variable life insurance contract or a variable annuity
contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate
accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned
by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under
current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control
over the investments made by a separate account, or the
underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on
income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in
such a case of “investor control” the contract owner
would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with
variable life insurance or variable annuities.
Generally, according to the IRS, there are two ways that
impermissible investor control may exist. The first relates to
the design of the contract or the relationship between the
contract and a separate account or underlying fund. For example,
at various times, the IRS has focused on, among other factors,
the number and type of investment choices available pursuant to
a given variable contract, whether the contract offers access to
funds that are available to the general public, the number of
transfers that a contract owner may make from one investment
option to another, and the degree to which a contract owner may
select or control particular investments.
With respect to this first aspect of investor control, we
believe that the design of our contracts and the relationship
between our contracts and the Portfolios satisfy the current
view of the IRS on this subject, such that the investor control
doctrine should not apply. However, because of some uncertainty
with respect to this subject and because the IRS may issue
further guidance on this subject, we reserve the right to make
such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to reduce the
risk that your contract might not qualify as a life insurance
contract or as an annuity for tax purposes.
The second way that impermissible investor control might exist
concerns your actions. Under the IRS pronouncements, you may not
select or control particular investments, other than choosing
among broad investment choices such as selecting a particular
Portfolio. You may not select or direct the purchase or sale of
a particular investment of a Separate Account, a Subaccount (or
Variable Investment Option), or a Portfolio. All investment
decisions concerning the Separate Accounts and the Subaccounts
must be made by us, and all investment decisions concerning the
underlying Portfolios must be made by the portfolio manager for
such Portfolio in his or her sole and absolute discretion, and
not by the contract owner. Furthermore, under the IRS
pronouncements, you may not enter into an agreement or
arrangement with a portfolio manager of a Portfolio or
communicate directly or indirectly with such a portfolio manager
or any related investment officers concerning the selection,
quality, or rate of return of any specific investment or group
of investments held by a Portfolio, and you may not enter into
any such agreement or arrangement or have any such communication
with us or PLFA.
Finally, the IRS may issue additional guidance on the investor
control doctrine, which might further restrict your actions or
features of the variable contract. Such guidance could be
applied retroactively. If any of the rules outlined above are
not complied with, the IRS may seek to tax you currently on
income and gains from a Portfolio such that you would not derive
the tax benefits normally associated with variable life
insurance or variable annuities. Although highly unlikely, such
an event may have an adverse impact on the fund and other
variable contracts. We urge you to consult your own tax adviser
with respect to the application of the investor control doctrine.
12
Loans
Certain Owners of Qualified Contracts may borrow against their
Contracts. Otherwise loans from us are not permitted. You may
request a loan from us, using your Contract Value as your only
security if your Qualified Contract is:
•
not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,
•
issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and
•
permits loans under its terms (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).
You will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed
annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to
secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of
3%. The net amount of interest you pay on your loan will be
2.00% annually. This loan rate may vary by state.
Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning
on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan
Account Value accrue daily beginning on the day following the
effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be
transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance
with your most recent allocation instructions.
We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the
Code or interpretations thereof. We urge you to consult with
a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction
under your Contract.
If you purchase any optional living benefit rider (including any
and all previous, current, and future versions), taking a loan
while an optional living benefit rider is in effect will
terminate your Rider. If you have an existing loan on your
Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional
living benefit rider is appropriate for you.
Tax and
Legal Matters
The tax and ERISA rules relating to Contract loans are complex
and in many cases unclear. For these reasons, and because the
rules vary depending on the individual circumstances, these
loans are processed by your Plan Administrator. We urge you
to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any
loan transaction under your Contract.
Generally, interest paid on your loan under a 403(b)
tax-sheltered annuity will be considered non-deductible
“personal interest” under Section 163(h) of the
Code, to the extent the loan comes from and is secured by your
pre-tax contributions, even if the proceeds of your loan are
used to acquire your principal residence.
Loan
Procedures
Your loan request must be submitted on our Non-ERISA TSA
Application and Loan Agreement Form. You may submit a loan
request 30 days after your Contract Date and before your
Annuity Date. However, before requesting a new loan, you must
wait 30 days after the last payment of a previous loan. If
approved, your loan will usually be effective as of the end of
the Business Day on which we receive all necessary documentation
in proper form. We will normally forward proceeds of your loan
to you within 7 calendar days after the effective date of
your loan.
In order to secure your loan, on the effective date of your
loan, we will transfer an amount equal to the principal amount
of your loan into an account called the “Loan
Account.” The Loan Account is held under the General
Account. To make this transfer, we will transfer amounts
proportionately from your Investment Options based on your
Account Value in each Investment Option.
As your loan is repaid, a portion, corresponding to the amount
of the repayment of any amount then held as security for your
loan, will be transferred from the Loan Account back into your
Investment Options relative to your most recent allocation
instructions.
A transfer from the Loan Account back into your Investment
Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer
under the transfer limitations as stated in the HOW YOUR
PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and
Market-timing Restrictions section in the Prospectus.
13
Loan
Terms
You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum
loan amount is $1,000, subject to certain state limitations.
Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not
exceed the lesser of:
•
50% of the amount available for withdrawal under this Contract
(see the WITHDRAWALS – Optional
Withdrawals – Amount Available for
Withdrawal section in the Prospectus), or
•
$50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the
12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your
loan.
You should refer to the terms of your particular Loan Eligible
Plan for any additional loan restrictions. If you have other
loans outstanding pursuant to other Loan Eligible Plans, the
amount you may borrow may be further restricted. We are not
responsible for making any determination (including loan amounts
permitted) or any interpretation with respect to your Loan
Eligible Plan.
Repayment
Terms
Your loan, including principal and accrued interest, generally
must be repaid in quarterly installments. An installment will be
due in each quarter on the date corresponding to the effective
date of your loan, beginning with the first such date following
the effective date of your loan. See the FEDERAL TAX
ISSUES – Qualified Contracts –
Loans section in the Prospectus.
Example: On May 1, we receive your loan
request, and your loan is effective. Your first quarterly
payment will be due on August 1.
Adverse tax consequences may result if you fail to meet the
repayment requirements for your loan. You must repay principal
and interest of any loan in substantially equal payments over
the term of the loan. Generally, the term of the loan will be
5 years from the effective date of the loan. However, if
you have certified to us that your loan proceeds are to be used
to acquire a principal residence for yourself, you may request a
loan term of 30 years. In either case, however, you must
repay your loan prior to your Annuity Date. If you elect to
annuitize (or withdraw) your Net Contract Value while you have
an outstanding loan, we will deduct any Contract Debt from your
Contract Value at the time of the annuitization (or withdrawal)
to repay the Contract Debt.
You may prepay your entire loan at any time. If you do so, we
will bill you for any unpaid interest that has accrued through
the date of payoff. Your loan will be considered repaid only
when the interest due has been paid. Subject to any necessary
approval of state insurance authorities, while you have Contract
Debt outstanding, we will treat all payments you send us as
Investments unless you specifically indicate that your payment
is a loan repayment or include your loan payment notice with
your payment. To the extent allowed by law, any loan repayments
in excess of the amount then due will be applied to the
principal balance of your loan. Such repayments will not change
the due dates or the periodic repayment amount due for future
periods. If a loan repayment is in excess of the principal
balance of your loan, any excess repayment will be refunded to
you. Repayments we receive that are less than the amount then
due will be returned to you, unless otherwise required by law.
If we have not received your full payment by its due date, we
will declare the entire remaining loan balance in default. At
that time, we will send written notification of the amount
needed to bring the loan back to a current status. You will have
60 days from the date on which the loan was declared in
default (the “grace period”) to make the required
payment.
If the required payment is not received by the end of the grace
period, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest will be
withdrawn from your Contract Value, if amounts under your
Contract are eligible for distribution. In order for an
amount to be eligible for distribution from a TSA funded by
salary reductions you must meet one of five triggering events.
The triggering events are:
•
attainment of age
591/2,
•
severance from employment,
•
death,
14
•
disability, and
•
financial hardship (with respect to contributions only, not
income or earnings on these contributions).
If those amounts are not eligible for distribution, the
defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest will be considered
a Deemed Distribution and will be withdrawn when such Contract
Values become eligible. In either case, the Distribution or the
Deemed Distribution will be considered a currently taxable
event, and may be subject to federal tax withholding and may
be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.
If there is a Deemed Distribution under your Contract and to the
extent allowed by law, any future withdrawals will first be
applied as repayment of the defaulted Contract Debt, including
accrued interest and charges for applicable taxes. Any amounts
withdrawn and applied as repayment of Contract Debt will first
be withdrawn from your Loan Account, and then from your
Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to the
Account Value in each Investment Option. If you have an
outstanding loan that is in default, the defaulted Contract Debt
will be considered a withdrawal for the purpose of calculating
any Death Benefit Amount and/or Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.
The terms of any such loan are intended to qualify for the
exception in Code Section 72(p)(2) so that the distribution
of the loan proceeds will not constitute a distribution that is
taxable to you. To that end, these loan provisions will be
interpreted to ensure and maintain such tax qualification,
despite any other provisions to the contrary. Subject to any
regulatory approval, we reserve the right to amend your Contract
to reflect any clarifications that may be needed or are
appropriate to maintain such tax qualification or to conform any
terms of our loan arrangement with you to any applicable changes
in the tax qualification requirements. We will send you a copy
of any such amendment. If you refuse such an amendment, it may
result in adverse tax consequences to you.
We are responsible for the safekeeping of the assets of the
Separate Account. These assets are held separate and apart from
the assets of our General Account and our other separate
accounts.
The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A
as of December 31, 2010, the related statements of
operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes
in net assets for each of the periods presented and the
financial highlights for each of the periods presented are
incorporated by reference in this Statement of Additional
Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated
December 31, 2010. Pacific Life’s consolidated
financial statements as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 and
for each of the three years in the period ended
December 31, 2010 are attached. These financial statements
should be considered only as bearing on the ability of Pacific
Life to meet its obligations under the Contracts and not as
bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the
Separate Account.
The financial statements of Separate Account A of Pacific
Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2010 and for each
of the periods presented have been audited by
Deloitte & Touche LLP, 695 Town Center
Drive, Costa Mesa, CA92626, independent registered public
accounting firm, as stated in their report included in the
Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31,2010, which is incorporated by reference in this Registration
Statement.
The consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life Insurance
Company and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2010 and 2009
and for each of the three years in the period ended
December 31, 2010 have been audited by Deloitte &
Touche LLP, 695 Town Center Drive, Costa Mesa, CA92626, independent auditors, as stated in their report appearing
herein.
We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial condition of Pacific
Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, and
the related consolidated statements of operations, equity and cash flows for each of the three
years in the period ended December 31, 2010. These financial statements are the
responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on
these financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United
States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement.
An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for
designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose
of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial
reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a
test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements,
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well
as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits
provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material
respects, the financial position of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries as of
December 31, 2010 and 2009, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each
of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2010 in conformity with accounting
principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its
method of accounting and reporting for variable interest entities as required by accounting
guidance adopted in 2010, as well as for other than temporary impairments and noncontrolling
interest as required by accounting guidance adopted in 2009.
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) from continuing operations
to net cash provided by operating activities:
Net accretion on fixed maturity securities
(136
)
(142
)
(144
)
Depreciation and amortization
299
281
259
Deferred income taxes
56
451
(511
)
Net realized investment (gain) loss
94
(153
)
749
Other than temporary impairments
113
311
580
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
(109
)
Net change in deferred policy acquisition costs
116
(202
)
(175
)
Interest credited to policyholder account balances
1,317
1,253
1,234
Net change in future policy benefits and other insurance liabilities
648
111
1,182
Other operating activities, net
(5
)
85
(337
)
NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES BEFORE DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
3,024
2,437
2,474
Net cash used in operating activities of discontinued operations
(27
)
(18
)
NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES
3,024
2,410
2,456
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale:
Purchases
(6,503
)
(5,507
)
(2,730
)
Sales
3,572
1,463
2,084
Maturities and repayments
2,138
2,542
2,136
Repayments of mortgage loans
746
406
470
Fundings of mortgage loans and real estate
(870
)
(1,434
)
(1,665
)
Net change in policy loans
(181
)
411
(510
)
Sale of interest in PIMCO
288
Purchases of derivative instruments
(116
)
(20
)
(12
)
Terminations of derivative instruments
(51
)
20
84
Proceeds from nonhedging derivative settlements
9
64
728
Payments for nonhedging derivative settlements
(569
)
(1,540
)
(89
)
Net change in collateral received or pledged
6
(1,226
)
1,056
Purchases of and advance payments on aircraft leasing portfolio
(754
)
(561
)
(694
)
Other investing activities, net
272
48
(316
)
NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) INVESTING ACTIVITIES BEFORE DISCONTINUED
OPERATIONS
(2,301
)
(5,334
)
830
Net cash provided by investing activities of discontinued operations
7
NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) INVESTING ACTIVITIES
(2,301
)
(5,334
)
837
(Continued)
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
PL-6
Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
Years Ended December 31,
(Continued)
2010
2009
2008
(In Millions)
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Policyholder account balances:
Deposits
$
4,272
$
8,003
$
7,320
Withdrawals
(5,162
)
(7,972
)
(7,602
)
Net change in short-term debt
(105
)
(45
)
50
Issuance of long-term debt
1,815
1,692
335
Payments of long-term debt
(1,012
)
(433
)
(381
)
Contribution from (dividend to) parent
(150
)
200
(345
)
Other financing activities, net
(30
)
1
33
NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) FINANCING ACTIVITIES
(372
)
1,446
(590
)
Net change in cash and cash equivalents
351
(1,478
)
2,703
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year
1,919
3,397
694
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, END OF YEAR
$
2,270
$
1,919
$
3,397
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION
Income taxes paid (received), net
$
113
($143
)
($20
)
Interest paid
$
175
$
146
$
195
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
PL-7
Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1.
ORGANIZATION AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS
Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) was established in 1868 and is domiciled in the
State of Nebraska as a stock life insurance company. Pacific Life is an indirect subsidiary
of Pacific Mutual Holding Company (PMHC), a Nebraska mutual holding company, and a wholly
owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, an intermediate Delaware stock holding company. PMHC
and Pacific LifeCorp were organized pursuant to consent received from the California
Department of Insurance and the implementation of a plan of conversion to form a mutual
holding company structure in 1997 (the Conversion).
Effective December 31, 2009, Pacific LifeCorp contributed its 100% stock ownership of Aviation
Capital Group Corp. (ACG) to Pacific Life (Note 9). ACG is engaged in the acquisition and
leasing of commercial jet aircraft. These financial statements and the accompanying footnotes
have been prepared by combining the previously separate financial statements of Pacific Life
and ACG as if the two entities had been combined as of the beginning of 2008, the first period
presented in these consolidated financial statements. This retrospective treatment is
prescribed by accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (U.S.
GAAP) whenever a transfer between entities under common control is effected.
Pacific Life and its subsidiaries and affiliates have primary business operations consisting
of life insurance, annuities, mutual funds, and aircraft leasing.
BASIS OF PRESENTATION AND PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION
The accompanying consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life and its subsidiaries (the
Company) have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP and include the accounts of Pacific
Life and its majority owned and controlled subsidiaries and variable interest entities (VIEs)
in which the Company is the primary beneficiary. Noncontrolling interest is primarily
comprised of private equity funds (Note 4). All significant intercompany transactions and
balances have been eliminated in consolidation.
Pacific Life prepares its regulatory financial statements in accordance with statutory
accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Nebraska Department of Insurance (NE DOI),
which is a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP (Note 2). These
consolidated financial statements materially differ from those filed with regulatory
authorities.
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to
make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as
of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses
during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
In developing these estimates, management makes subjective and complex judgments that are
inherently uncertain and subject to material change as facts and circumstances develop.
Management has identified the following estimates as critical, as they involve a higher degree
of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability:
•
The fair value of investments in the absence of quoted market values
•
Investment impairments
•
Application of the consolidation rules to certain investments
•
The fair value of and accounting for derivatives
•
Aircraft valuation and impairment
•
The capitalization and amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs (DAC)
•
The liability for future policyholder benefits
•
Accounting for income taxes and the valuation of deferred income tax assets and
liabilities and unrecognized tax benefits
•
Accounting for reinsurance transactions
•
Litigation and other contingencies
Certain reclassifications have been made to the 2009 and 2008 consolidated financial
statements to conform to the 2010 financial statement presentation.
PL-8
The Company has evaluated events subsequent to December 31, 2010 through March 7, 2011, the
date the consolidated financial statements were available to be issued.
RECENTLY ADOPTED ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
Effective September 30, 2009, the Company adopted the Financial Accounting Standards Board
(FASB) Accounting Standards Codification (Codification) as the single source of authoritative
U.S. GAAP. The Codification did not create new accounting and reporting guidance, rather it
reorganized then-existing U.S. GAAP pronouncements into approximately 90 Topics within a
consistent structure. All guidance in the Codification carries an equal level of authority.
After the effective date of the Codification, all nongrandfathered accounting literature not
included in the Codification is superseded and deemed nonauthoritative. Adoption of the
Codification also changed how the Company references U.S. GAAP in its consolidated financial
statements.
Effective January 1, 2010, the Company adopted additional guidance to the Codification’s
Consolidation Topic whereby the Company changed the methodology it employs to evaluate if an
entity is a VIE and, once identified, if a VIE should be included in the consolidated
financial statements. The new methodology places emphasis on the Company’s ability to direct
the activities that most significantly impact the VIE’s financial performance. This guidance
provides for enhanced disclosure requirements. The adoption of this guidance did not impact
the Company’s consolidated financial statements, however, adoption did result in additional
disclosure on the consolidated statements of financial condition.
In April 2009, the FASB issued additional guidance under the Codification’s Fair Value
Measurements and Disclosures Topic. This update relates to determining fair values when there
is no active market or where the price inputs being used represent distressed sales. The
Company early adopted this guidance on March 31, 2009. This update provides additional
guidance for estimating fair value when the volume and level of activity for the asset or
liability have significantly decreased. Also included is guidance on identifying
circumstances that indicate a transaction is not orderly. See Note 14 for information on the
Company’s fair value measurements and expanded disclosures.
In April 2009, the FASB issued additional guidance under the Codification’s Investments —
Debt and Equity Securities Topic. For debt securities, this guidance replaces the management
assertion that it has the intent and ability to hold an impaired debt security until recovery
with the requirement that management assert if it either has the intent to sell the debt
security or if it is more likely than not the entity will be required to sell the debt
security before recovery of its amortized cost basis. If management intends to sell the debt
security or it is more likely than not the entity will be required to sell the debt security
before recovery of its amortized cost basis, an other than temporary impairment (OTTI) shall
be recognized in earnings equal to the entire difference between the debt security’s amortized
cost basis and its fair value at the reporting date. After the recognition of an OTTI, the
debt security is accounted for as if it had been purchased on the measurement date of the
OTTI, with an amortized cost basis equal to the previous amortized cost basis less the OTTI
recognized in earnings. The update also changes the presentation in the financial statements
of non credit related impairment amounts for instruments within its scope. When the entity
asserts it does not have the intent to sell the security and it is more likely than not it
will not have to sell the security before recovery of its amortized cost basis, only the
credit related impairment losses are to be recognized in earnings and non credit losses are to
be recognized in other comprehensive income (loss) (OCI). Additionally, this update provides
for enhanced presentation and disclosure of OTTIs of debt and equity securities in the
consolidated financial statements. The Company early adopted this guidance effective January1, 2009, resulting in an after tax decrease to OCI of $170 million, including an after tax DAC
impact of $5 million, and an after tax increase to retained earnings of $175 million.
Effective January 1, 2009, the FASB issued additional guidance to the Codification’s
Consolidation Topic. This guidance improves the relevance, comparability and transparency of
the financial information that a company provides in its consolidated financial statements by
establishing accounting and reporting standards for the noncontrolling interest in a
subsidiary and for the deconsolidation of a subsidiary. As a result of the adoption of this
guidance, which required retrospective application of presentation requirements, total equity
as of December 31, 2008 increased by $244 million representing the noncontrolling interest,
and other liabilities and total liabilities as of December 31, 2008 decreased by $244 million
as a result of reclassifying noncontrolling interest (previously known as minority interest)
to equity.
FUTURE ADOPTION OF NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
In October 2010, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2010-26 to the
Codification’s Financial Services — Insurance Topic. ASU 2010-26 significantly amends the
guidance applicable to accounting for costs associated with acquiring or renewing insurance
contracts. This update addresses the diversity in practice regarding the interpretation of
which costs relating to the acquisition of new or renewal insurance contracts qualify for
deferral. The amendment specifies the following costs incurred in the acquisition of new and
renewal contracts should be capitalized: 1) incremental direct costs of contract acquisition
and 2) certain
PL-9
costs related directly to underwriting, policy issuance and processing, medical and
inspecting, and sales force contract selling activities. This amendment also specifies that
costs may only be capitalized based on successful contract acquisition efforts. Previously,
insurance entities were able to capitalize costs relating to successful and unsuccessful
contract acquisition efforts. The amendment is effective on January 1, 2012 and can be
applied prospectively or retrospectively. The Company is currently evaluating the impact of
this revised guidance on its consolidated financial statements.
INVESTMENTS
Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are reported at estimated fair value,
with unrealized gains and losses, net of adjustments related to DAC, future policy benefits
and deferred income taxes, recognized as a component of OCI. For mortgage-backed securities
and asset-backed securities included in fixed maturity securities available for sale, the
Company recognizes income using a constant effective yield based on anticipated prepayments
and the estimated economic life of the securities. When estimates of prepayments change, the
effective yield is recalculated to reflect actual payments to date and anticipated future
payments. For fixed rate securities, the net investment in the securities is adjusted to the
amount that would have existed had the new effective yield been applied since the acquisition
of the securities. These adjustments are reflected in net investment income. Trading
securities, which are included in other investments, are reported at estimated fair value with
changes in estimated fair value included in net realized investment gain (loss).
Investment income consists primarily of interest and dividends, net investment income from
partnership interests, prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans, and
income from certain derivatives. Interest is recognized on an accrual basis and dividends are
recorded on the ex-dividend date. Amortization of premium and accretion of discount on fixed
maturity securities is recorded using the effective interest method.
The Company’s available for sale securities are regularly assessed for OTTIs. If a decline in
the estimated fair value of an available for sale security is deemed to be other than
temporary, the OTTI is recognized equal to the difference between the estimated fair value and
net carrying amount of the security. If the OTTI for a fixed maturity security is
attributable to both credit and other factors, then the OTTI is bifurcated and the non credit
related portion is recognized in OCI while the credit portion is recognized as an OTTI. If
the OTTI is related to credit factors only, it is recognized as an OTTI.
The evaluation of OTTIs is a quantitative and qualitative process subject to significant
estimates and management judgment. The Company has rigorous controls and procedures in place
to monitor securities and identify those that are subject to greater analysis for OTTIs. The
Company has an investment impairment committee comprised of investment and accounting
professionals that reviews and evaluates securities for potential OTTIs at least on a
quarterly basis.
In evaluating whether a decline in value is other than temporary, the Company considers many
factors including, but not limited to, the following: the extent and duration of the decline
in value; the reasons for the decline (credit event, currency, or interest rate related,
including spread widening); the ability and intent to hold the investment for a period of time
to allow for a recovery of value; and the financial condition of and near-term prospects of
the issuer.
Analysis of the probability that all cash flows will be collected under the contractual terms
of a fixed maturity security and determination as to whether the Company does not intend to
sell the security and that it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to
sell the security before recovery of the investment are key factors in determining whether a
fixed maturity security is other than temporarily impaired.
For mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, scrutiny was placed on the performance of the
underlying collateral and projected future cash flows. In projecting future cash flows, the
Company incorporates inputs from third-party sources and applies reasonable judgment in
developing assumptions used to estimate the probability and timing of collecting all
contractual cash flows.
In evaluating investment grade perpetual preferred securities, which do not have final
contractual cash flows, the Company applied OTTI considerations used for debt securities,
placing emphasis on the probability that all cash flows will be collected under the
contractual terms of the security and the Company’s intent and ability to hold the security to
allow for a recovery of value. Perpetual preferred securities are reported as equity
securities as they are structured in equity form, but have significant debt-like
characteristics, including periodic dividends, call features, and credit ratings and pricing
similar to debt securities.
Realized gains and losses on investment transactions are determined on a specific
identification basis and are included in net realized investment gain (loss).
PL-10
Mortgage loans on real estate are carried at their unpaid principal balance, net of deferred
origination fees and write-downs. Mortgage loans are considered to be impaired when
management estimates that based upon current information and events, it is probable that the
Company will not be able to collect amounts due according to the contractual terms of the
mortgage loan agreement. For mortgage loans deemed to be impaired, an impairment loss is
recorded when the carrying amount is greater than the Company’s estimated fair value of the
underlying collateral of the loan. When the underlying collateral of the loan is greater than
the carrying amount, the loan is not considered to have an impaired loss and no write-down is
recorded. As of December 31, 2010, one loan totaling $6 million was foreclosed upon. Since
the estimated fair value of the collateral was greater than the carrying amount of the loan,
no impairment loss was recorded. This loan was the only default realized during the year
ended December 31, 2010. As of December 31, 2009, two loans totaling $8 million were
considered impaired, however no impairment loss was necessary as the estimated fair value of
the collateral was greater than the carrying amount of the related loans.
Policy loans are stated at unpaid principal balances.
Other investments primarily consist of partnership and joint ventures, real estate
investments, derivative instruments, non-marketable equity securities, and low income housing
related investments qualifying for tax credits (LIHTC). Non-marketable equity securities are
carried at fair value with unrealized gains or losses recognized in OCI. Partnership and
joint venture interests where the Company does not have a controlling interest or majority
ownership are recorded under the cost or equity method of accounting depending on the equity
ownership position. Real estate investments are carried at depreciated cost, net of
write-downs, or, for real estate acquired in satisfaction of debt, estimated fair value less
estimated selling costs at the date of acquisition, if lower than the related unpaid balance.
Real estate investments are evaluated for impairment based on the undiscounted cash flows
expected to be received during the estimated holding period. When the undiscounted cash flows
are less than the current carrying value of the property (gross cost less accumulated
depreciation) the property is considered impaired and will be written-down to its estimated
fair value. During the year ended December 31, 2010, three real estate investments were
written-down for a total of $27 million (Note 14). The Company had no real estate write-downs
during the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008.
Investments in LIHTC are recorded under either the effective interest method, if they meet
certain requirements, including a projected positive yield based solely on guaranteed credits,
or are recorded under the equity method if these certain requirements are not met. For
investments in LIHTC recorded under the effective interest method, the amortization of the
original investment and the tax credits are recorded in the provision (benefit) for income
taxes. For investments in LIHTC recorded under the equity method, the amortization of the
initial investment is included in net investment income, and the related tax credits are
recorded in the provision (benefit) for income taxes (Note 18). The amortization recorded in
net investment income was $1 million, $3 million and $5 million for the years ended December31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
All derivatives, whether designated in hedging relationships or not, are required to be
recorded at estimated fair value. If the derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the
effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in OCI
and recognized in earnings when the hedged item affects earnings. If the derivative is
designated as a fair value hedge, changes in the estimated fair value of the hedging
derivative, including amounts measured as ineffectiveness, and changes in the estimated fair
value of the hedged item related to the designated risk being hedged, are reported in net
realized investment gain (loss). The change in estimated value of the hedged item associated
with the risk being hedged is reflected as an adjustment to the carrying amount of the hedged
item. For derivative instruments not designated as hedges, the change in estimated fair value
of the derivative is recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). Estimated fair value
exposure is calculated based on the aggregate estimated fair value of all derivative
instruments with each counterparty, net of collateral received or pledged, in accordance with
legally enforceable counterparty master netting agreements (Note 10).
The periodic cash flows for all hedging derivatives are recorded consistent with the hedged
item on an accrual basis. For derivatives that are hedging securities, these amounts are
included in net investment income. For derivatives that are hedging liabilities, these
amounts are included in interest credited to policyholder account balances or interest
expense, which is included in operating and other expenses. For derivatives not designated as
hedging instruments, the periodic cash flows are reflected in net realized investment gain
(loss) on an accrual basis. Upon termination of a cash flow hedging relationship, the
accumulated amount in OCI is amortized into net investment income or interest credited to
policyholder account balances over the remaining life of the hedged item. Upon termination of
a fair value hedging relationship, the accumulated adjustment to the carrying value of the
hedged item is amortized into net investment income, interest expense, which is included in
operating and other expenses, or interest credited to policyholder account balances over its
remaining life.
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Cash and cash equivalents include all investments with a maturity of three months or less from
purchase date.
PL-11
RESTRICTED CASH
Restricted cash primarily consists of security deposits, commitment fees, maintenance reserve
payments and rental payments received from certain lessees related to the aircraft leasing
business.
DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS
The costs of acquiring new insurance business, principally commissions, medical examinations,
underwriting, policy issue and other expenses, all of which vary with and are primarily
associated with the production of new business, are deferred and recorded as an asset commonly
referred to as DAC. DAC related to internally replaced contracts (as defined in the
Codification’s Financial Services — Insurance Topic), is immediately written off to expense
and any new deferrable expenses associated with the replacement are deferred if the contract
modification substantially changes the contract. However, if the contract modification does
not substantially change the contract, the existing DAC asset remains in place and any
acquisition costs associated with the modification are immediately expensed. As of December31, 2010 and 2009, the carrying value of DAC was $4.4 billion and $4.8 billion, respectively
(Note 7).
For universal life (UL), variable annuities and other investment-type contracts, acquisition
costs are amortized through earnings in proportion to the present value of estimated gross
profits (EGPs) from projected investment, mortality and expense margins, and surrender charges
over the estimated lives of the contracts. Actual gross margins or profits may vary from
management’s estimates, which can increase or decrease the rate of DAC amortization. DAC
related to traditional policies is amortized through earnings over the premium-paying period
of the related policies in proportion to premium revenues recognized, using assumptions and
estimates consistent with those used in computing policy reserves. DAC related to certain
unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available
for sale, is recorded directly to equity through OCI.
Significant assumptions in the development of EGPs include investment returns, surrender and
lapse rates, rider utilization, interest spreads, and mortality margins. The Company’s
long-term assumption for the underlying separate account investment return ranges up to 8.0%.
A change in the assumptions utilized to develop EGPs results in a change to amounts expensed
in the reporting period in which the change was made by adjusting the DAC balance to the level
DAC would have been had the EGPs been calculated using the new assumptions over the entire
amortization period. In general, favorable experience variances result in increased expected
future profitability and may lower the rate of DAC amortization, whereas unfavorable
experience variances result in decreased expected future profitability and may increase the
rate of DAC amortization. All critical assumptions utilized to develop EGPs are evaluated at
least annually and necessary revisions are made to certain assumptions to the extent that
actual or anticipated experience necessitates such a prospective change (Note 7).
The Company defers sales inducements and amortizes them over the life of the policy using the
same methodology and assumptions used to amortize DAC. The capitalized sales inducement
balance included in the DAC asset were $549 million and $583 million as of December 31, 2010
and 2009, respectively.
AIRCRAFT LEASING PORTFOLIO
Aircraft are recorded at cost, which includes certain acquisition costs, less accumulated
depreciation. Major improvements to aircraft are capitalized when incurred. The Company
evaluates carrying values of aircraft based upon changes in market and other physical and
economic conditions and records impairment losses to recognize a loss in the value of the
aircraft when management believes that, based on estimated future cash flows, the
recoverability of the Company’s investment in an aircraft is unlikely (Note 9). The Company
had five and four non-earning aircraft in the portfolio as of December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively.
GOODWILL FROM ACQUISITIONS
Goodwill represents the excess of costs over the fair value of net assets acquired. Goodwill
is not amortized but is reviewed for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events
occur or circumstances indicate that the goodwill might be impaired. Goodwill from
acquisitions, included in other assets, totaled $43 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.
There were no goodwill impairment write-downs from continuing operations during the years
ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
PL-12
POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES
Policyholder account balances on UL and investment-type contracts, such as funding agreements,
annuities without life contingencies, deposit liabilities and guaranteed interest contracts
(GICs), are valued using the retrospective deposit method and are equal to accumulated account
values, which consist of deposits received, plus interest credited, less withdrawals and
assessments (Note 11). Interest credited to these contracts primarily ranged from 0.2% to
9.0%.
FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS
Annuity reserves, which primarily consist of group retirement and structured settlement
annuities with life contingencies, are equal to the present value of estimated future payments
using pricing assumptions, as applicable, for interest rates, mortality, morbidity, retirement
age and expenses (Note 11). Interest rates used in establishing such liabilities ranged from
0.8% to 11.0%.
The Company offers a rider on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantees net principal
over a ten-year holding period, as well as riders on certain variable annuity contracts that
guarantee a minimum withdrawal benefit over specified periods, subject to certain
restrictions. These variable annuity guaranteed living benefits (GLBs) are considered
embedded derivatives and are recorded in future policy benefits (Note 11).
Policy charges assessed against policyholders that represent compensation to the Company for
services to be provided in future periods, or unearned revenue reserves (URR), are recognized
in revenue over the expected life of the contract using the same methods and assumptions used
to amortize DAC. Unearned revenue related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily
unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is recorded directly to equity
through OCI.
Life insurance reserves are valued using the net level premium method on the basis of
actuarial assumptions appropriate at policy issue. Mortality and persistency assumptions are
generally based on the Company’s experience, which, together with interest and expense
assumptions, include a margin for possible unfavorable deviations. Interest rate assumptions
ranged from 3.0% to 9.3%. Future dividends for participating business are provided for in the
liability for future policy benefits.
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, participating experience rated policies paying dividends
represent less than 1% of direct life insurance in force.
Estimates of future policy benefit reserves and liabilities are continually reviewed and, as
experience develops, are adjusted as necessary. Such changes in estimates are included in
earnings for the period in which such changes occur.
REINSURANCE
The Company has ceded reinsurance agreements with other insurance companies to limit potential
losses, reduce exposure arising from larger risks, provide additional capacity for future
growth and assumed reinsurance agreements intended to offset reinsurance costs. As part of a
strategic alliance, the Company also reinsures risks associated with policies written by an
independent producer group through modified coinsurance and yearly renewable term arrangements
with this producer group’s reinsurance company.
All assets associated with business reinsured on a modified coinsurance basis remain with, and
under the control of, the Company. As part of its risk management process, the Company
routinely evaluates its reinsurance programs and may change retention limits, reinsurers or
other features at any time.
Reinsurance accounting is utilized for ceded transactions when risk transfer provisions have
been met. To meet risk transfer requirements, a reinsurance contract must include insurance
risk, consisting of both underwriting and timing risk, and a reasonable possibility of a
significant loss to the reinsurer.
Reinsurance premiums ceded and reinsurance recoveries on benefits and claims incurred are
deducted from their respective revenue and benefit and expense accounts. Prepaid reinsurance
premiums, included in other assets, are premiums that are paid in advance for future coverage.
Reinsurance recoverables, included in other assets, include balances due from reinsurance
companies for paid and unpaid losses. Amounts receivable and payable are offset for account
settlement purposes for contracts where the right of offset exists. See Note 16.
PL-13
REVENUES, BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Premiums from annuity contracts with life contingencies and traditional life and term
insurance contracts, are recognized as revenue when due. Benefits and expenses are matched
against such revenues to recognize profits over the lives of the contracts. This matching is
accomplished by providing for liabilities for future policy benefits, expenses of contract
administration and the amortization of DAC and URR.
Receipts for UL and investment-type contracts are reported as deposits to either policyholder
account balances or separate account liabilities and are not included in revenue. Policy fees
consist of mortality charges, surrender charges and expense charges that have been earned and
assessed against related account values during the period. The timing of policy fee revenue
recognition is determined based on the nature of the fees. Benefits and expenses include
policy benefits and claims incurred in the period that are in excess of related policyholder
account balances, interest credited to policyholder account balances, expenses of contract
administration and the amortization of DAC.
Investment advisory fees are primarily fees earned by Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), a
wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life formed in 2007, which serves as the investment advisor
for the Pacific Select Fund, an investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable
universal life (VUL) and variable annuity contract holders, and the Pacific Life Funds, the
investment vehicle for the Company’s mutual fund products. These fees are based upon the net
asset value of the underlying portfolios and are recorded as earned. Related subadvisory
expense is included in operating and other expenses and recorded when incurred.
Aircraft leases, which are structured as triple net leases, are accounted for as operating
leases. Aircraft leasing revenue is recognized ratably over the terms of the lease
agreements. ACG has four capital leases, which are accounted for under the provisions in the
Codification’s Leases Topic. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, capital leases in the amount
of $5 million and $8 million, respectively, are classified in other assets.
DEPRECIATION AND AMORTIZATION
Aircraft and certain other assets are depreciated or amortized using the straight-line method
over estimated useful lives, which range from three to 40 years. Depreciation and
amortization of aircraft under operating leases and certain other assets are included in
operating and other expenses. Depreciation of investment real estate is computed using the
straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from five to 30 years.
Depreciation of investment real estate is included in net investment income.
INCOME TAXES
Pacific Life and its includable subsidiaries are included in the consolidated Federal income
tax return of PMHC. Pacific Life and its wholly owned, Arizona domiciled life insurance
subsidiary, Pacific Life & Annuity Company (PL&A), and Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Company of
Vermont (PAR Vermont), a Vermont-based life reinsurance company wholly owned by Pacific Life,
are taxed as life insurance companies for Federal income tax purposes. Pacific Life’s
non-insurance subsidiaries are either included in PMHC’s combined California franchise tax
return or, if necessary, file separate state tax returns. Companies included in the
consolidated Federal income tax return of PMHC and/or the combined California franchise tax
return of PMHC are allocated tax expense or benefit based principally on the effect of
including their operations in PMHC’s returns under a tax sharing agreement. Deferred tax
assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to
differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and
liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured
using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years the differences are
expected to be recovered or settled.
CONTINGENCIES
Each reporting cycle, the Company evaluates all identified contingent matters on an individual
basis. A loss is recorded if probable and reasonably estimable. The Company establishes
reserves for these contingencies at the best estimate, or, if no one number within the range
of possible losses is more probable than any other, the Company records an estimated reserve
at the low end of the range of losses. See Note 21.
SEPARATE ACCOUNTS
Separate accounts primarily include variable annuity and life contracts, as well as other
guaranteed and non-guaranteed accounts. Separate account assets are recorded at estimated
fair value and represent legally segregated contract holder funds. A separate
PL-14
account liability is recorded equal to the amount of separate account assets. Deposits to
separate accounts, investment income and realized and unrealized gains and losses on the
separate account assets accrue directly to contract holders and, accordingly, are not
reflected in the consolidated statements of operations or cash flows. Amounts charged to the
separate account for mortality, surrender and expense charges are included in revenues as
policy fees.
For separate account funding agreements in which the Company provides a guarantee of principal
and interest to the contract holder and bears all the risks and rewards of the investments
underlying the separate account, the related investments and liabilities are recognized as
investments and liabilities in the consolidated statements of financial condition. Revenue
and expenses are recognized within the respective revenue and benefit and expense lines in the
consolidated statements of operations.
FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The estimated fair value of financial instruments, disclosed in Notes 8, 10 and 14, has been
determined using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies.
However, considerable judgment is often required to interpret market data to develop the
estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented may not be indicative of the
amounts the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market
assumptions and/or estimation methodologies could have a significant effect on the estimated
fair value amounts.
2.
STATUTORY FINANCIAL INFORMATION AND DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS
STATUTORY ACCOUNTING PRACTICES
Pacific Life prepares its regulatory statutory financial statements in accordance with
statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the NE DOI, which is a comprehensive
basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP. Statutory accounting practices primarily differ
from U.S. GAAP by charging policy acquisition costs to expense as incurred, recognizing
certain policy fees as revenue when billed, establishing future policy benefit liabilities
using different actuarial assumptions, reporting surplus notes as surplus instead of debt, as
well as the valuation of investments and certain assets and accounting for deferred income
taxes on a different basis.
Pacific Life has one permitted practice approved by the NE DOI that differs from statutory
accounting practices adopted by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners (NAIC).
This permitted practice relates to the valuation of certain statutory separate account assets
that are carried at book value instead of estimated fair value. Pacific Life’s statutory
capital and surplus as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 did not reflect unrealized losses of $24
million and $29 million, respectively, with regard to this permitted practice.
In addition, Pacific Life uses an NE DOI prescribed accounting practice for certain synthetic
GIC reserves that differs from statutory accounting practices adopted by the NAIC. As of
December 31, 2010 and 2009, this NE DOI prescribed accounting practice resulted in statutory
reserves of $27 million and $20 million, respectively, as opposed to statutory reserves of
zero, using statutory accounting practices adopted by the NAIC.
STATUTORY NET INCOME (LOSS) AND SURPLUS
Statutory net income (loss) of Pacific Life was $741 million, $652 million and ($1,529)
million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Statutory capital
and surplus of Pacific Life was $5,867 million and $5,006 million as of December 31, 2010 and
2009, respectively.
RISK-BASED CAPITAL
Risk-based capital is a method developed by the NAIC to measure the minimum amount of capital
appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations in
consideration of its size and risk profile. The formulas for determining the amount of
risk-based capital specify various weighting factors that are applied to financial balances or
various levels of activity based on the perceived degree of risk. Additionally, certain risks
are required to be measured using actuarial cash flow modeling techniques, subject to
formulaic minimums. The adequacy of a company’s actual capital is measured by a comparison to
the risk-based capital results. Companies below minimum risk-based capital requirements are
classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. As of
December 31, 2010 and 2009, Pacific Life, PL&A and PAR Vermont exceeded the minimum risk-based
capital requirements.
PL-15
DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS
The payment of dividends by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp is subject to restrictions set
forth in the State of Nebraska insurance laws. These laws require (i) notification to the NE
DOI for the declaration and payment of any dividend and (ii) approval by the NE DOI for
accumulated dividends within the preceding twelve months that exceed the greater of 10% of
statutory policyholder surplus as of the preceding December 31 or statutory net gain from
operations for the preceding twelve months ended December 31. Generally, these restrictions
pose no short-term liquidity concerns for Pacific LifeCorp. Based on these restrictions and
2010 statutory results, Pacific Life could pay $688 million in dividends in 2011 to Pacific
LifeCorp without prior approval from the NE DOI, subject to the notification requirement.
During the year ended December 31, 2010, Pacific Life paid a cash dividend to Pacific LifeCorp
of $150 million. No dividends were paid during 2009. During the year ended December 31,2008, Pacific Life paid a cash dividend to Pacific LifeCorp of $345 million.
The maximum amount of ordinary dividends that can be paid by PL&A to Pacific Life without
restriction cannot exceed the lesser of 10% of statutory surplus as regards to policyholders,
or the statutory net gain from operations. Based on this limitation and 2010 statutory
results, PL&A could pay $28 million in dividends to Pacific Life in 2011 without prior
regulatory approval. No dividends were paid during 2010, 2009 and 2008.
OTHER
The Company has ceded reinsurance contracts in place with a reinsurer whose financial
stability has deteriorated. In January 2009, the reinsurer’s domiciliary state regulator
issued an order of supervision, which requires the regulator’s consent to any transaction
outside the normal course of business. The Company will continue to monitor the situation and
evaluate its options to deal with any further deterioration in the reinsurer’s financial
condition. As of December 31, 2010, statutory reserves ceded to this reinsurer amounted to
approximately $177 million.
3.
CLOSED BLOCK
In connection with the Conversion, an arrangement known as a closed block (the Closed Block)
was established, for dividend purposes only, for the exclusive benefit of certain individual
life insurance policies that had an experience based dividend scale for 1997. The Closed
Block was designed to give reasonable assurance to holders of the Closed Block policies that
policy dividends will not change solely as a result of the Conversion.
Assets that support the Closed Block, which are primarily included in fixed maturity
securities and policy loans, amounted to $284 million and $285 million as of December 31, 2010
and 2009, respectively. Liabilities allocated to the Closed Block, which are primarily
included in future policy benefits, amounted to $304 million and $307 million as of December31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. The net contribution to income from the Closed Block was
zero, $4 million and $1 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008,
respectively.
PL-16
4.
VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITIES
The Company evaluates its interests in VIEs on an ongoing basis and consolidates those VIEs in
which it has a controlling financial interest and is thus deemed to be the primary
beneficiary. A controlling financial interest has both of the following characteristics: (i)
the power to direct the activities of the VIE that most significantly impact the VIE’s
economic performance, and (ii) the obligation to absorb losses of the VIE that could
potentially be significant to the VIE or the right to receive benefits from the VIE that could
potentially be significant to the VIE. Creditors or beneficial interest holders of VIEs,
where the Company is the primary beneficiary, have no recourse against the Company in the
event of default by these VIEs.
The following table presents, as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the consolidated assets,
consolidated liabilities and maximum exposure to loss relating to VIEs, which the Company (i)
has consolidated because it is the primary beneficiary or (ii) total assets of and maximum
exposure to loss relating to VIEs in which the Company holds a significant variable interest,
but has not consolidated because it is not the primary beneficiary:
ACG has sponsored three financial asset securitizations secured by interests in aircraft. ACG
serves as the remarketing agent and provides various aircraft related services in all three
securitizations for a fee. This fee is eliminated for the two consolidated securitizations
and is included in other income as earned for the unconsolidated securitization.
In 2005, ACG sponsored a securitization transaction whereby Aviation Capital Group Trust III
(ACG Trust III) acquired 74 of ACG’s aircraft through a private placement note offering in the
amount of $1,860 million. ACG owns 100% of the equity and has a controlling financial
interest in this VIE. Therefore, ACG was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE
and ACG Trust III is consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company.
These private placement notes are the obligation of ACG Trust III and represent debt that is
non-recourse to the Company (Note 13). VIE non-recourse debt consolidated from ACG Trust III
was $1,103 million and $1,309 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. As of
December 31, 2010 and 2009, the maximum exposure to loss, based on the Company’s interest in
ACG Trust III, was $201 million and $148 million, respectively.
In 2003, ACG sponsored a securitization transaction whereby Aviation Capital Group Trust II
(ACG Trust II) acquired 37 of ACG’s aircraft through a private placement note offering in the
amount of $1,027 million. ACG owns 100% of the equity and has a controlling financial
interest in this VIE. Therefore, ACG was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE
and ACG Trust II is consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company.
These private placement notes are the obligation of ACG Trust II and represent debt that is
non-recourse to the Company (Note 13). VIE non-recourse debt consolidated from ACG Trust II
was $484 million and $666 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. As of
December 31, 2010 and 2009, the maximum exposure to loss was $188 million and $201 million,
respectively, based on the Company’s interest in ACG Trust II. As of December 31, 2009, the
maximum exposure to loss included a contingent purchase obligation of $100 million. The
Company was contingently obligated to purchase certain notes from ACG Trust II to cover
shortfalls in amounts due to the holders of the notes. This contingent purchase obligation
expired in August 2010.
PL-17
In 2000, ACG sponsored a financial asset securitization of aircraft to Aviation Capital Group
Trust (Aviation Trust). ACG and Pacific Life are beneficial interest holders in Aviation
Trust. Aviation Trust is not consolidated as the Company is not the primary beneficiary as
ACG does not have the obligation to absorb losses of Aviation Trust that could potentially be
significant to Aviation Trust or the right to receive benefits from Aviation Trust that could
potentially be significant to it. The carrying value is comprised of beneficial interests
issued by Aviation Trust. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the maximum exposure to loss,
based on carrying value, was zero.
PRIVATE EQUITY FUNDS
Private equity funds (the Funds) are three limited partnerships that invest in private equity
investments for outside investors, where the Company is the general partner. The Company
provides investment management services to the Funds for a fee and receives carried interest
based upon the performance of the Funds. The Funds are a VIE due to the purpose and design of
the Funds and the lack of control by the other equity investors. The Company has determined
itself to be the primary beneficiary since it has a controlling financial interest in the
Funds and the Funds are consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the
Company. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the
Funds, and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying amounts of its
retained interest. VIE non-recourse debt consolidated from the Funds was $5 million and $2
million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively (Note 13).
ASSET-BACKED SECURITIES
As part of the Company’s investment strategy, the Company purchases primarily investment grade
beneficial interests issued from bankruptcy-remote special purpose entities (SPEs), which are
collateralized by financial assets including corporate debt. The Company has not guaranteed
the performance, liquidity or obligations of the SPEs, and the Company’s maximum exposure to
loss is limited to its carrying value of the beneficial interests in the SPEs. The Company
has no liabilities related to these VIEs. The Company has determined that it is not the
primary beneficiary of these entities since it does not have the power to direct their
financial activities. Therefore, the Company does not consolidate these entities. The
investments are reported as fixed maturity securities available for sale and had a net
carrying amount of $108 million and $103 million at December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Company recorded OTTIs of zero,
$60 million and $117 million, respectively, related to these securities.
5.
INTEREST IN PIMCO
As of December 31, 2007, the Company owned a beneficial economic interest in Pacific
Investment Management Company LLC (PIMCO) through Allianz Global Investors of America LLC
(interest in PIMCO). PIMCO offers investment products through managed accounts and
institutional, retail and offshore mutual funds. The interest in PIMCO was reported at
estimated fair value, as determined by a contractual put and call option price, with changes
in estimated fair value reported as a component of OCI, net of taxes.
During the year ended December 31, 2008, the Company exercised a put option and sold all of
its remaining interest in PIMCO to Allianz of America, Inc., a subsidiary of Allianz SE, for
$288 million. The Company recognized a pre-tax gain of $109 million for the year ended
December 31, 2008.
PL-18
6.
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
The Company’s former broker-dealer operations have been reflected as discontinued operations
in the Company’s consolidated financial statements. Discontinued operations do not include
the operations of Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD), a wholly owned broker-dealer
subsidiary of Pacific Life, which primarily serves as the underwriter/distributor of
registered investment-related products and services, principally variable life and variable
annuity contracts issued by the Company, and mutual funds. In March 2007, the Company
classified its broker-dealer subsidiaries, other than PSD, as held for sale. During 2008 and
2007, these broker-dealers were sold.
Operating results from discontinued operations were as follows:
Cumulative pre-tax effect of adoption of new
accounting principle (Note 1)
7
Additions:
Capitalized during the year
558
777
752
Amortization:
Allocated to commission expenses
(529
)
(446
)
(444
)
Allocated to operating expenses
(145
)
(129
)
(133
)
Total amortization
(674
)
(575
)
(577
)
Allocated to OCI
(255
)
(415
)
356
Balance, December 31
$
4,435
$
4,806
$
5,012
During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Company revised certain
assumptions to develop EGPs for its products subject to DAC amortization (Note 1). This
resulted in increases in DAC amortization expense of $34 million, $23 million and $20 million
for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The revised EGPs also
resulted in increased URR amortization of $20 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an
immaterial decrease in URR amortization for the year ended December 31, 2009 and increased URR
amortization of $2 million for the year ended December 31, 2008.
PL-19
8.
INVESTMENTS
The net carrying amount, gross unrealized gains and losses, and estimated fair value of fixed
maturity and equity securities available for sale are shown below. The net carrying amount of
fixed maturity securities represents amortized cost adjusted for OTTIs recognized in earnings
and changes in the estimated fair value attributable to the hedged risk in a fair value hedge.
The net carrying amount of equity securities represents cost adjusted for OTTIs. See Note 14
for information on the Company’s fair value measurements and disclosure.
U.S.
Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
$
105
$
10
$
115
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
633
12
$
46
599
Foreign governments
389
42
431
Corporate securities
17,256
905
308
17,853
Residential mortgage-backed securities
6,133
105
1,078
5,160
Commercial mortgage-backed securities
1,160
42
23
1,179
Collateralized debt obligations
118
27
33
112
Other asset-backed securities
562
45
17
590
Total fixed maturity securities
$
26,356
$
1,188
$
1,505
$
26,039
Perpetual preferred securities
$
324
$
6
$
55
$
275
Other equity securities
1
2
3
Total equity securities
$
325
$
8
$
55
$
278
PL-20
The Company has investments in perpetual preferred securities that are primarily issued by
European banks. The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of the available for sale
perpetual preferred securities was $387 million and $346 million, respectively, as of December31, 2010. Included in these amounts are perpetual preferred securities carried in trusts with
a net carrying amount and estimated fair value of $88 million and $71 million, respectively,
that are held in fixed maturities and included in the tables above in corporate securities.
Perpetual preferred securities reported as equity securities available for sale are presented
in the tables above as perpetual preferred securities.
The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities available for
sale as of December 31, 2010, by contractual repayment date of principal, are shown below.
Expected maturities may differ from contractual maturities as borrowers may have the right to
call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.
Net
Carrying
Gross Unrealized
Estimated
Amount
Gains
Losses
Fair Value
(In Millions)
Due in one year or less
$
877
$
50
$
1
$
926
Due after one year through five years
5,373
355
32
5,696
Due after five years through ten years
9,324
696
114
9,906
Due after ten years
5,181
406
120
5,467
20,755
1,507
267
21,995
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
6,690
270
642
6,318
Total fixed maturity securities
$
27,445
$
1,777
$
909
$
28,313
PL-21
The following tables present the number of investments, estimated fair value and gross
unrealized losses on investments where the estimated fair value has declined and remained
continuously below the net carrying amount for less than twelve months and for twelve months
or greater. Included in the tables are gross unrealized losses for fixed maturity securities
available for sale and other securities, which include equity securities available for sale,
cost method investments, and non-marketable equity securities.
The Company has evaluated fixed maturity and other securities with gross unrealized losses and
has determined that the unrealized losses are temporary. The Company does not intend to sell
the securities and it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell
the securities before recovery of their net carrying amounts.
Prime mortgages are loans made to borrowers with strong credit histories, whereas sub-prime
mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to customers with weak
credit profiles. Alt-A mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to
customers who have good credit ratings, but have limited documentation for their source of
income or some other standard input used to underwrite the mortgage loan. The slowing U.S.
housing market, greater use of affordability mortgage products and relaxed underwriting
standards by some originators for these loans has led to higher delinquency and loss rates,
especially within the 2007 and 2006 vintage years.
PL-23
The table below presents non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS) and
commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS) by investment rating from independent rating
agencies and vintage year of the underlying collateral as of December 31, 2010.
Net
Rating as % of
Vintage Breakdown
Carrying
Estimated
Net Carrying
2004 and
2008 and
Rating
Amount
Fair Value
Amount
Prior
2005
2006
2007
Thereafter
($ In Millions)
Prime RMBS:
AAA
$
595
$
593
20
%
17
%
3
%
AA
110
104
4
%
3
%
1
%
A
108
106
4
%
1
%
2
%
1
%
BAA
28
25
1
%
1
%
BA and below
2,063
1,752
71
%
3
%
23
%
31
%
14
%
Total
$
2,904
$
2,580
100
%
24
%
29
%
33
%
14
%
0
%
Alt-A RMBS:
AAA
$
44
$
41
5
%
5
%
AA
22
23
3
%
2
%
1
%
BAA
26
24
3
%
1
%
1
%
1
%
BA and below
747
559
89
%
9
%
27
%
53
%
Total
$
839
$
647
100
%
6
%
12
%
29
%
53
%
0
%
Sub-prime RMBS:
AAA
$
212
$
199
52
%
52
%
AA
92
79
23
%
23
%
A
20
13
5
%
5
%
BA and below
83
67
20
%
1
%
17
%
1
%
1
%
Total
$
407
$
358
100
%
81
%
17
%
1
%
1
%
0
%
CMBS:
AAA
$
842
$
888
87
%
59
%
4
%
14
%
10
%
AA
65
66
6
%
3
%
3
%
A
37
33
4
%
4
%
BA
28
24
3
%
3
%
Total
$
972
$
1,011
100
%
66
%
4
%
0
%
17
%
13
%
Pacific Life is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank (FHLB) of Topeka. As of December 31,2010, the Company has received advances of $1.5 billion from the FHLB of Topeka and has issued
funding agreements to the FHLB of Topeka in connection with its institutional investment
products (Note 19). The funding agreement liabilities are included in policyholder account
balances. Fixed maturity securities and cash equivalents with an estimated fair value of $1.7
billion as of December 31, 2010 are in a custodial account pledged as collateral for the
funding agreements. The Company is required to purchase stock in FHLB of Topeka each time it
receives an advance. As of December 31, 2010, the Company holds $78 million of FHLB of Topeka
stock, which is recorded in other investments.
PL&A is a member of FHLB of San Francisco. As of December 31, 2010, no assets are pledged as
collateral. As of December 31, 2010, the Company holds FHLB of San Francisco stock with an
estimated fair value of $28 million, which is recorded in other investments.
PL-24
Major categories of investment income (loss) and related investment expense are summarized as
follows:
Included are $29 million of OTTI recognized in earnings on perpetual
preferred securities carried in trusts.
In accordance with additional guidance under the Codification’s Investments – Debt and Equity
Securities Topic, effective January 1, 2009, the Company began recognizing the credit loss
portion of OTTI adjustments in earnings and the portion related to other factors in OCI. The
table below details the amount of OTTIs attributable to credit losses recognized in earnings
for which a portion was recognized in OCI:
Securities not previously other than temporarily impaired
14
48
Securities previously other than temporarily impaired
46
106
Total additions
60
154
Reductions for credit impairments previously recognized on:
Securities that matured or were sold
(5
)
(40
)
Securities due to an increase in expected cash flows and
time value of cash flows
(10
)
(2
)
Total subtractions
(15
)
(42
)
Cumulative credit loss, December 31
$
245
$
200
PL-26
The table below presents gross unrealized losses on investments for which OTTI has been
recognized in earnings in current or prior periods and gross unrealized losses on temporarily
impaired investments for which no OTTI has been recognized.
Trading securities totaled $349 million and $206 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively. The cumulative net unrealized gains on trading securities held as of December31, 2010 and 2009 were $21 million and $7 million, respectively.
PL-27
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, fixed maturity securities of $12 million were on deposit
with state insurance departments to satisfy regulatory requirements.
Mortgage loans totaled $6,693 million and $6,577 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively. Mortgage loans are collateralized by commercial properties primarily located
throughout the U.S. As of December 31, 2010, $1,047 million, $1,022 million, $716 million,
$562 million and $433 million were located in Washington, California, Florida, Texas and
Maryland, respectively. As of December 31, 2010, $596 million was located in Canada. The
Company did not have any mortgage loans with accrued interest more than 180 days past due as
of December 31, 2010 or 2009. As of December 31, 2010, there was no single mortgage loan
investment that exceeded 10% of stockholder’s equity.
Investments in real estate totaled $547 million and $574 million as of December 31, 2010 and
2009, respectively.
9.
AIRCRAFT LEASING PORTFOLIO, NET
Aircraft leasing portfolio, net, consisted of the following:
As of December 31, 2010, domestic and foreign future minimum rentals scheduled to be received
under the noncancelable portion of operating leases are as follows (In Millions):
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
Thereafter
Domestic
$
32
$
28
$
25
$
25
$
20
$
98
Foreign
517
443
340
272
194
362
Total operating leases
$
549
$
471
$
365
$
297
$
214
$
460
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, aircraft with a carrying amount of $4,802 million and $4,954
million, respectively, were assigned as collateral to secure debt (Notes 4 and 13).
During the year ended December 31, 2010, ACG recognized a $4 million aircraft impairment,
which is included in operating and other expenses (Note 14). There were no impairments
recognized during the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008.
During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, ACG recognized pre-tax gains on the
sale of aircraft of $18 million, zero and zero, respectively, which are included in other
income.
PL-28
10.
DERIVATIVES AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES
The Company primarily utilizes derivative instruments to manage its exposure to interest rate
risk, foreign currency risk, credit risk, and equity risk. Derivative instruments are also
used to manage the duration mismatch of assets and liabilities. The Company utilizes a
variety of derivative instruments including swaps, foreign exchange forward contracts and
options. In addition, certain insurance products offered by the Company contain features that
are accounted for as derivatives.
Accounting for derivatives and hedging activities requires companies to recognize all
derivative instruments as either assets or liabilities at fair value in the consolidated
statement of financial condition. The Company applies hedge accounting by designating
derivative instruments as either fair value or cash flow hedges on the date the Company enters
into a derivative contract. The Company formally documents at inception all relationships
between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and
strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. In this documentation, the Company
specifically identifies the asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted transaction that
has been designated as a hedged item and states how the hedging instrument is expected to
hedge the risks related to the hedged item. The Company formally assesses and measures
effectiveness of its hedging relationships both at the hedge inception and on an ongoing basis
in accordance with its risk management policy.
DERIVATIVES DESIGNATED AS CASH FLOW HEDGES
The Company primarily uses foreign currency interest rate swaps, forward starting interest
rate swaps and interest rate swaps to manage its exposure to variability in cash flows due to
changes in foreign currencies and the benchmark interest rate. These cash flows include those
associated with existing assets and liabilities, as well as the forecasted interest cash flows
related to anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances. Such anticipated
investment purchases and liability issuances are considered probable to occur and are
generally completed within 22 years of the inception of the hedge.
Foreign currency interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed or floating rate,
foreign-denominated asset or liability to a U.S. dollar fixed rate asset or liability. The
foreign currency interest rate swaps involve the exchange of an initial principal amount in
two currencies and the agreement to re-exchange the currencies at a future date at an agreed
exchange rate. There are also periodic exchanges of interest payments in the two currencies
at specified intervals, calculated using agreed upon rates and the exchanged principal
amounts. The main currencies that the Company hedges are the Euro, British Pound, and
Canadian Dollar.
Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a floating rate asset or liability to a
fixed rate to hedge the variability of cash flows of the hedged asset or liability due to
changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominantly used to better match
the cash flow characteristics of certain assets and liabilities. These agreements involve the
exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between
fixed rate and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying
notional amount. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no
principal payments are made by either party.
Forward starting interest rate swaps are used to hedge the variability in the future interest
receipts or payments stemming from the anticipated purchase of fixed rate securities or
issuance of fixed rate liabilities due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These
derivatives are predominantly used to lock in interest rate levels to match future cash flow
characteristics of assets and liabilities. Forward starting interest rate swaps involve the
exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between
fixed and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional
amount to begin at a specified date in the future for a specified period of time. Generally,
no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by
either party. The notional amounts of the contracts do not represent future cash
requirements, as the Company intends to close out open positions prior to their effective
dates.
When a derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the
estimated fair value of the derivative is recognized in OCI and recognized in earnings when
the hedged item affects earnings, and the ineffective portion of changes in the estimated fair
value of the derivative is recognized in net realized investment gain (loss). For the years
ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, hedge ineffectiveness related to designated cash flow
hedges reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) was $5 million, $8 million and ($4)
million, respectively. For the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Company did
not have any net losses reclassified from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) (AOCI)
to earnings resulting from the discontinuance of cash flow hedges due to forecasted
transactions that were no longer probable of occurring. Over the next twelve months, the
Company anticipates that $16 million of deferred losses on derivative instruments in AOCI will
be reclassified to earnings. For the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, all of the
Company’s hedged forecasted transactions were determined to be probable of occurring.
PL-29
The Company had the following outstanding derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:
Notional amount represents a standard of measurement of the volume of derivatives. Notional
amount is not a quantification of market risk or credit risk and is not recorded on the
consolidated statements of financial condition. Notional amounts generally represent those
amounts used to calculate contractual cash flows to be exchanged and are not paid or received,
except for certain contracts such as currency swaps.
DERIVATIVES DESIGNATED AS FAIR VALUE HEDGES
Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed rate asset or liability to a
floating rate to hedge the changes in estimated fair value of the hedged asset or liability
due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are used primarily to closely
match the duration of the assets supporting specific liabilities. Pacific Life uses interest
rate swaps to convert fixed rate surplus notes to variable rate notes (Note 13).
The Company had the following outstanding derivatives designated as fair value hedges:
The Company has certain insurance and reinsurance contracts that are considered to have
embedded derivatives. When it is determined that the embedded derivative possesses economic
and risk characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to those of the host
contract and that a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative
instrument, it is separated from the host contract and accounted for as a stand-alone
derivative.
The Company offers a rider on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantees net principal
over a ten-year holding period, as well as riders on certain variable annuity contracts that
guarantee a minimum withdrawal benefit over specified periods, subject to certain
restrictions. These variable annuity GLBs are considered embedded derivatives and are
recorded in future policy benefits.
GLBs on variable annuity contracts issued between January 1, 2007 and March 31, 2009 are
partially covered by reinsurance. These reinsurance arrangements are used to offset a portion
of the Company’s exposure to the GLBs for the lives of the host variable annuity contracts
issued. The ceded portion of the GLBs is considered an embedded derivative and is recorded in
other assets or other liabilities as either a reinsurance recoverable or reinsurance payable.
The Company employs hedging strategies (variable annuity derivatives) to mitigate equity risk
associated with the GLBs not covered by reinsurance. The Company utilizes total return swaps
based upon the S&P 500 Index (S&P 500) primarily to economically hedge the equity risk of the
mortality and expense fees in its variable annuity products. These contracts provide periodic
payments to the Company in exchange for the total return and changes in fair value of the S&P
500 in the form of a payment or receipt, depending on whether the return relative to the index
on trade date is positive or negative, respectively. Payments and receipts are recognized in
net realized investment gain (loss). The Company has used interest rate swaps to hedge
fluctuations in the valuation of GLBs as a result of changes in risk free rates. These
agreements involved the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from
the difference between fixed rate and floating rate interest amounts
PL-30
calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount. During 2009, all interest rate
swaps held at the beginning of the year were terminated and there were no open interest rate
swaps as of December 31, 2009. The Company had no interest rate swap trading activity for the
year ended December 31, 2010.
The Company also uses equity put options to hedge equity and credit risks. These equity put
options involve the exchange of periodic fixed rate payments for the return, at the end of the
option agreement, of the equity index below a specified strike price. Generally, no cash is
exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party.
The Company offers equity indexed universal life (EIUL) insurance products, which credits the
price return of the S&P 500 to the policy cash value. A policyholder may allocate the
policy’s net accumulated value to one or a combination of the following: fixed return
account, one-year indexed account capped at 12%, or a five-year indexed account. These equity
indexed products contain embedded derivatives and are recorded in policyholder account
balances.
The Company utilizes one-year and five-year S&P call options to hedge against adverse changes
in the equity index. These options are contracts to buy the equity index at a predetermined
time at a contracted price. The contracts will be net settled in cash based on differentials
in the index at the time of exercise and the strike price and the settlements will be
recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).
The Company issues synthetic GICs to Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA)
qualified defined contribution employee benefit plans (ERISA Plan). The ERISA Plan uses the
contracts in its stable value fixed income option. The Company receives a fee for providing
book value accounting for the ERISA Plan stable value fixed income option. The Company does
not manage the assets underlying synthetic GICs. In the event that plan participant elections
exceed the estimated fair value of the assets or if the contract is terminated and at the end
of the termination period the book value under the contract exceeds the estimated fair value
of the assets, then the Company is required to pay the ERISA Plan the difference between book
value and estimated fair value. The Company mitigates the investment risk through
pre-approval and monitoring of the investment guidelines, requiring high quality investments
and adjustments to the plan crediting rates to compensate for unrealized losses in the
portfolios.
Credit default swaps involve the receipt or payment of fixed amounts at specific intervals in
exchange for the assumption of or protection from potential credit events associated with the
underlying security. The Company wrote one credit default swap for which a payment would be
delivered if the underlying security of the derivative defaults. The maximum potential amount
of future payment under the credit default swap was $50 million as of December 31, 2010 and
2009. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the fair value of the credit derivative sold by the
Company was ($10) million and ($17) million, respectively. The term for this instrument is
seven years.
The Company had the following outstanding derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
Derivative instruments are recorded on the Company’s consolidated statements of financial
condition at estimated fair value and are presented as assets or liabilities determined by
calculating the net position for each derivative counterparty by legal entity, taking into
account income accruals and net cash collateral.
The following table summarizes the gross asset or liability derivative fair value and excludes
the impact of offsetting asset and liability positions held with the same counterparty, cash
collateral payables and receivables and income accruals. See Note 14.
Total derivatives not designated as hedging
instruments
387
503
747
917
Total derivatives
$
802
$
836
$
1,382
$
1,559
Location on the consolidated statements of financial condition:
(1)
Other investments
(2)
Other assets
(3)
Future policy benefits
(4)
Policyholder account balances
(5)
Other liabilities
PL-32
Cash collateral received from counterparties was $251 million and $237 million as of December31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. This unrestricted cash collateral is included in cash and
cash equivalents and the obligation to return it is netted against the estimated fair value of
derivatives in other investments or other liabilities. Cash collateral pledged to
counterparties was $145 million and $137 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively. A receivable representing the right to call this collateral back from the
counterparty is netted against the estimated fair value of derivatives in other investments or
other liabilities. If the net estimated fair value of the exposure to the counterparty is
positive, the amount is reflected in other investments, whereas, if the net estimated fair
value of the exposure to the counterparty is negative, the estimated fair value is included in
future policy benefits or other liabilities, depending on the nature of the derivative.
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company had also accepted collateral consisting of
various securities with an estimated fair value of $36 million and $14 million, respectively,
which are held in separate custodial accounts. The Company is permitted by contract to sell
or repledge this collateral and as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, none of the collateral had
been repledged. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company provided collateral in the form
of various securities with an estimated fair value of $15 million and zero, respectively,
which are included in fixed maturity securities. The counterparties are permitted by contract
to sell or repledge this collateral.
The following table summarizes amounts recognized in net realized investment gain (loss) for
derivatives designated as fair value hedges. Gains and losses include the changes in
estimated fair value of the derivatives as well as the offsetting gain or loss on the hedged
item attributable to the hedged risk. The Company includes the gain or loss on the derivative
in the same line item as the offsetting gain or loss on the hedged item. The net of the
amounts presented for each year represents the ineffective portion of the hedge. The amounts
presented do not include the periodic net settlements of the derivatives or the income
(expense) related to the hedged item.
For the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, hedge ineffectiveness related to
designated fair value hedges reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) was ($13)
million, $4 million and ($1) million, respectively. No component of the hedging instrument’s
estimated fair value is excluded from the determination of effectiveness.
PL-33
The following table summarizes amounts recognized in the consolidated financial statements for
derivatives designated as cash flow hedges. Gain and losses include the changes in estimated
fair value of the derivatives and amounts realized on terminations. The amounts presented do
not include the periodic net settlements of the derivatives.
The following table summarizes amounts recognized in net realized investment gain (loss) for
derivatives not designated as hedging instruments. Gains and losses include the changes in
estimated fair value of the derivatives and amounts realized on terminations. The amounts
presented do not include the periodic net (settlements) proceeds of ($560) million, ($1,476)
million and $639 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively,
which are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).
CREDIT EXPOSURE AND CREDIT RISK RELATED CONTINGENT FEATURES
Credit exposure is measured on a counterparty basis as the net positive aggregate estimated
fair value, net of collateral received, if any. The credit exposure for over the counter
derivatives as of December 31, 2010 was $100 million. The maximum exposure to any single
counterparty was $17 million at December 31, 2010.
For all derivative contracts, excluding embedded derivative contracts such as variable annuity
GLBs and synthetic GICs, the Company enters into master agreements that may include a
termination event clause associated with Pacific Life’s insurer financial strength ratings
assigned by certain independent rating agencies. If Pacific Life’s insurer financial strength
rating were to fall below a specified level, as defined within each counterparty master
agreement or, in most cases, if one of the rating agencies ceased to provide an insurer
financial strength rating, the counterparty could terminate the master agreement with payment
due based on the estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives. As of December 31, 2010,
Pacific Life’s insurer financial strength ratings were above the specified level.
The Company enters into collateral arrangements with derivative counterparties, which require
both the pledging and accepting of collateral when the net estimated fair value of the
underlying derivatives reaches a pre-determined threshold. Certain of these arrangements
include credit-contingent provisions that provide for a reduction of these thresholds in the
event of downgrades in the credit ratings of the Company and/or the counterparty. If Pacific
Life’s insurer financial strength rating were to fall below a specific investment grade credit
rating, the counterparties to the derivative instruments could request immediate and ongoing
full collateralization on derivative instruments in net liability positions. The aggregate
fair value of all derivative instruments with credit risk related contingent features that are
in a liability position on December 31, 2010, is $244 million for which the Company has posted
collateral of $160 million in the normal course of business. If certain of Pacific Life’s
insurer financial strength ratings were to fall one notch as of December 31, 2010, the Company
would have been required to post an additional $29 million of collateral to its
counterparties.
The Company attempts to limit its credit exposure by dealing with creditworthy counterparties,
establishing risk control limits, executing legally enforceable master netting agreements, and
obtaining collateral where appropriate. In addition, each counterparty is reviewed to
evaluate its financial stability before entering into each agreement and throughout the period
that the financial instrument is owned. All of the Company’s credit exposure from derivative
contracts is with investment grade counterparties.
11.
POLICYHOLDER LIABILITIES
POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES
The detail of the liability for policyholder account balances is as follows:
SEPARATE ACCOUNTS AND VARIABLE ANNUITY GUARANTEED BENEFIT FEATURES
The Company issues variable annuity contracts through separate accounts for which investment
income and investment gains and losses accrue directly to, and investment risk is borne by,
the contract holder (traditional variable annuities). These contracts also include various
types of guaranteed minimum death benefit (GMDB) and GLB features. For a discussion of
certain GLBs accounted for as embedded derivatives, see Note 10.
The GMDBs provide a specified minimum return upon death. Many of these death benefits are
spousal, whereby a death benefit will be paid upon death of the first spouse. The survivor
has the option to terminate the contract or continue it and have the death benefit paid into
the contract and a second death benefit paid upon the survivor’s death. The GMDB features
include those where the Company contractually guarantees to the contract holder either (a)
return of no less than total deposits made to the contract less any partial withdrawals
(return of net deposits), (b) the highest contract value on any contract anniversary date
through age 80 minus any payments or withdrawals following the contract anniversary
(anniversary contract value), or (c) the highest of contract value on certain specified dates
or total deposits made to the contract less any partial withdrawals plus a minimum return
(minimum return).
The guaranteed minimum income benefit (GMIB) is a GLB that provides the contract holder with a
guaranteed annuitization value after 10 years. Annuitization value is generally based on
deposits adjusted for withdrawals plus a minimum return. In general, the GMIB requires
contract holders to invest in an approved asset allocation strategy.
PL-36
Information in the event of death on the various GMDB features outstanding was as follows (the
Company’s variable annuity contracts with guarantees may offer more than one type of guarantee
in each contract; therefore, the amounts listed are not mutually exclusive):
The determination of GMDB and GMIB liabilities is based on models that involve a range of
scenarios and assumptions, including those regarding expected market rates of return and
volatility, contract surrender rates and mortality experience. The following table summarizes
the GMDB and GMIB liabilities, which are recorded in future policy benefits, and changes in
these liabilities, which are reflected in policy benefits paid or provided:
Reinsurance recoverables related to GMDB reserves totaled zero as of December 31, 2010 and
2009. Reinsurance recoverables related to GMIB reserves are not significant.
PL-37
Variable annuity contracts with guarantees were invested in separate account investment
options as follows:
Fair value adjustment for derivative hedging
activities
84
(13
)
Non-recourse long-term debt:
Debt recourse only to ACG
2,499
1,636
ACG non-recourse debt
621
761
Other non-recourse debt
120
121
ACG VIE debt (Note 4)
1,587
1,975
Other VIE debt (Note 4)
5
2
Total long-term debt
$
6,516
$
5,632
SHORT-TERM DEBT
Pacific Life maintains a $700 million commercial paper program. There was no commercial paper
debt outstanding as of December 31, 2010 and 2009. In addition, Pacific Life has a bank
revolving credit facility of $400 million maturing in 2012 that serves as a back-up line of
credit for the commercial paper program. This facility had no debt outstanding as of December31, 2010 and 2009. As of and during the year ended December 31, 2010, Pacific Life was in
compliance with the debt covenants related to this facility.
PL&A maintains reverse repurchase lines of credit with various financial institutions. These
borrowings are at variable rates of interest based on collateral and market conditions. There
was no debt outstanding in connection with these lines of credit as of December 31, 2010 and
2009.
Pacific Life has approval from the FHLB of Topeka to receive advances up to 40% of Pacific
Life’s statutory general account assets provided it has available collateral and is in
compliance with debt covenant restrictions and insurance laws and regulations. There
PL-38
was no debt outstanding with the FHLB of Topeka as of December 31, 2010 and 2009. The Company
had zero and $127 million of additional funding capacity from eligible collateral as of
December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
PL&A is eligible to borrow from the FHLB of San Francisco amounts based on a percentage of
statutory capital and surplus and could borrow up to amounts of $120 million. Of this amount,
half, or $60 million, can be borrowed for terms other than overnight, out to a maximum term of
nine months. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest, collateralized by certain
mortgage loan and government securities. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, PL&A had no debt
outstanding with the FHLB of San Francisco.
In October 2010, ACG entered into a revolving credit agreement with a bank for a $200 million
borrowing facility. Interest is at variable rates and the facility matures in October 2013.
There was no debt outstanding in connection with this revolving credit agreement as of
December 31, 2010. This credit facility is recourse only to ACG.
ACG had a revolving credit agreement with a bank for a $105 million borrowing facility, which
was entered into in May 2009. Interest was at variable rates and the facility matured and was
repaid in March 2010. The amount outstanding as of December 31, 2009 was $105 million bearing
an interest rate of 4.8%.
LONG-TERM DEBT
In June 2009, Pacific Life issued $1.0 billion of surplus notes at a fixed interest rate of
9.25%, maturing on June 15, 2039. Interest is payable semiannually on June 15 and December
15. Pacific Life may redeem the 9.25% surplus notes at its option, subject to the approval of
the Nebraska Director of Insurance for such optional redemption. The 9.25% surplus notes are
unsecured and subordinated to all present and future senior indebtedness and policy claims of
Pacific Life. All future payments of interest and principal on the 9.25% surplus notes can be
made only with the prior approval of the Nebraska Director of Insurance. The Company entered
into interest rate swaps converting $650 million and $350 million of the 9.25% surplus notes
to variable rate notes based upon the London InterBank Offered Rate (LIBOR) during the years
ended December 31, 2009 and 2010, respectively. The interest rate swaps were designated as
fair value hedges of these surplus notes and the changes in fair value of the hedged surplus
notes associated with changes in interest rates are reflected as an adjustment to their
carrying amount. This adjustment to the carrying amount of the 9.25% surplus notes, which
increased (decreased) long-term debt by $53 million and ($35) million as of December 31, 2010
and 2009, respectively, is offset by a fair value adjustment which has also been recorded for
the interest rate swap derivative instruments.
Pacific Life has $150 million of surplus notes outstanding at a fixed interest rate of 7.9%,
maturing on December 30, 2023. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 30.
The 7.9% surplus notes may not be redeemed at the option of Pacific Life or any holder of the
surplus notes. The 7.9% surplus notes are unsecured and subordinated to all present and
future senior indebtedness and policy claims of Pacific Life. All future payments of interest
and principal on the 7.9% surplus notes can be made only with the prior approval of the
Nebraska Director of Insurance. The Company entered into interest rate swaps converting these
surplus notes to variable rate notes based upon the LIBOR. The interest rate swaps were
designated as fair value hedges of these surplus notes and the changes in fair value of the
hedged surplus notes associated with changes in interest rates are reflected as an adjustment
to their carrying amount. This adjustment to the carrying amount of the 7.9% surplus notes,
which increased long-term debt by $31 million and $22 million as of December 31, 2010 and
2009, respectively, is offset by a fair value adjustment which has also been recorded for the
interest rate swap derivative instruments.
In March 2010, the Nebraska Director of Insurance approved the issuance of an internal surplus
note by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp for $450 million. Pacific Life is required to pay
Pacific LifeCorp interest on the internal surplus note semiannually on February 5 and August 5
at a fixed annual rate of 6.0%. All future payments of interest and principal on the internal
surplus note can be made only with the prior approval of the Nebraska Director of Insurance.
The internal surplus note matures on February 5, 2020.
ACG enters into various secured loans that are guaranteed by the U.S. Export-Import bank or by
the European Export Credit Agencies. Interest on these loans is payable quarterly and ranged
from 0.4% to 4.5% as of December 31, 2010 and from 0.3% to 4.5% as of December 31, 2009. As
of December 31, 2010, $1,524 million was outstanding on these loans with maturities ranging
from 2014 to 2022. Principal payments due over the next twelve months are $113 million. As
of December 31, 2009, $1,253 million was outstanding on these loans. These loans are recourse
only to ACG.
ACG enters into various senior unsecured loans with third-parties. Interest on these loans is
payable monthly or semi-annually and ranged from 5.7% to 7.2% as of December 31, 2010 and from
1.5% to 6.8% as of December 31, 2009. As of December 31, 2010, $975 million was outstanding
on these loans with maturities ranging from 2012 to 2020. As of December 31, 2009, $320
million was outstanding on these loans. These loans are recourse only to ACG.
PL-39
ACG enters into various secured bank loans to finance aircraft and aircraft order deposits.
As of December 31, 2010, ACG had an $88 million facility to finance aircraft order deposits
with no amounts outstanding. This facility matures in 2013 and interest accrues at variable
rates and is payable monthly. As of December 31, 2009, ACG had a facility to finance aircraft
and aircraft order deposits with $63 million outstanding. Interest on this loan accrued at
variable rates, was payable monthly and with an interest rate of 2.0% as of December 31, 2009.
These loans are recourse only to ACG.
ACG enters into various acquisition facilities and bank loans to acquire aircraft. Interest
on these facilities and loans accrues at variable rates, is payable monthly and ranged from
1.6% to 3.3% as of December 31, 2010 and from 1.6% to 3.2% as of December 31, 2009. As of
December 31, 2010, $621 million was outstanding on these facilities and loans with maturities
ranging from 2011 to 2014. Principal payments due over the next twelve months are $395
million. As of December 31, 2009, $761 million was outstanding on these facilities and loans.
These facilities and loans are non-recourse to the Company.
Certain subsidiaries of Pacific Asset Holding LLC, a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life,
entered into various real estate property related loans with various third-parties. Interest
on these loans accrues at fixed and variable rates and is payable monthly. Fixed rates range
from 5.8% to 6.2% as of December 31, 2010 and 2009. Variable rates range from 1.4% to 2.0% as
of December 31, 2010 and 2009. As of December 31, 2010, there was $120 million outstanding on
these loans with maturities ranging from 2011 to 2012. Principal payments due over the next
twelve months are $87 million. As of December 31, 2009, there was $121 million outstanding on
these loans. One of these loans, totaling $32 million and maturing in 2012, is currently in
the process of foreclosure that is expected to be completed in 2011. All of these loans are
secured by real estate properties and are non-recourse to the Company.
14.
FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic establishes a hierarchy that
prioritizes the inputs of valuation methods used to measure fair value for financial assets
and financial liabilities that are carried at fair value. The hierarchy consists of the
following three levels that are prioritized based on observable and unobservable inputs.
Level 1
Unadjusted quoted prices for identical instruments in active markets. Level 1
financial instruments would include securities that are traded in an active exchange
market.
Level 2
Observable inputs other than Level 1 prices, such as quoted prices for similar
instruments in active markets; quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in
inactive markets; and model-derived valuations for which all significant inputs are
observable market data. Level 2 instruments include most fixed maturity securities that
are valued by models using inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by
observable market data.
Level 3
Valuations derived from valuation techniques in which one or more significant
inputs are unobservable. Level 3 instruments include less liquid securities for which
significant inputs are not observable in the market, such as certain structured
securities and variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives that require significant
management assumptions or estimation in the fair value measurement.
This hierarchy requires the use of observable market data when available.
PL-40
The following tables present, by fair value hierarchy level, the Company’s financial
assets and liabilities that are carried at fair value as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of
U.S. government authorities and agencies
$
109
$
6
$
115
Obligations of states and political
subdivisions
565
34
599
Foreign governments
323
108
431
Corporate securities
15,566
2,287
17,853
RMBS
1,510
3,650
5,160
CMBS
852
327
1,179
Collateralized debt obligations
8
104
112
Other asset-backed securities
355
235
590
Total fixed maturity securities
19,288
6,751
26,039
Perpetual preferred securities
205
70
275
Other equity securities
$
3
3
Total equity securities
3
205
70
278
Trading securities (2)
92
85
29
206
Other investments
163
163
Derivatives:
Interest rate swaps
94
3
$
97
($130
)
(33
)
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
267
267
(299
)
(32
)
Equity derivatives
410
410
(133
)
277
Embedded derivatives
52
52
52
Other
8
2
10
(33
)
(23
)
Total derivatives
369
467
836
(595
)
241
Separate account assets (3)
52,305
116
101
52,522
Total
$
52,400
$
20,063
$
7,581
$
836
($595
)
$
79,449
Liabilities:
Derivatives:
Interest rate swaps
$
260
$
260
($130
)
$
130
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
384
384
(299
)
85
Equity derivatives
$
94
94
(133
)
(39
)
Embedded derivatives
798
798
798
Other
1
22
23
(33
)
(10
)
Total
—
$
645
$
914
$
1,559
($595
)
$
964
(1)
Netting adjustments represent the impact of offsetting asset and liability
positions on the consolidated statement of financial condition held with the same
counterparty as permitted by guidance for offsetting in the Codification’s Derivatives
and Hedging Topic.
(2)
Trading securities are presented in other investments in the consolidated
statements of financial condition.
PL-42
(3)
Separate account assets are measured at fair value. Investment performance
related to separate account assets is offset by corresponding amounts credited to
contract holders whose liability is reflected in the separate account liabilities.
Separate account liabilities are measured to equal the fair value of separate account
assets as prescribed by guidance in the Codification’s Financial Services — Insurance
Topic for accounting and reporting of certain non traditional long-duration contracts and
separate accounts. Separate account assets as presented in the tables above differ from
the amounts presented in the consolidated statements of financial condition because cash
and receivables for securities are not subject to the guidance under the Codification’s
Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic.
FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT
The Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic defines fair value as the
price that would be received to sell the asset or paid to transfer the liability at the
measurement date. This “exit price” notion is a market-based measurement that requires a
focus on the value that market participants would assign for an asset or liability.
The following section describes the valuation methodologies used by the Company to measure
various types of financial instruments at fair value.
FIXED MATURITY, EQUITY AND TRADING SECURITIES
The fair values of fixed maturity securities available for sale, equity securities available
for sale and trading securities are determined by management after considering external
pricing sources and internal valuation techniques.
For securities with sufficient trading volume, prices are obtained from third-party pricing
services. For structured or complex securities that are traded infrequently, estimated fair
values are determined after evaluating prices obtained from third-party pricing services and
independent brokers or are valued internally using various valuation techniques. Such
techniques include matrix model pricing and internally developed models, which incorporate
observable market data, where available. Matrix model pricing measures fair value using cash
flows, which are discounted using observable market yield curves provided by a major
independent data service. The matrix model determines the discount yield based upon
significant factors that include the security’s weighted average life and rating.
Where matrix model pricing is not used, particularly for RMBS and other asset-backed
securities, estimated fair values for these securities are determined by evaluating prices
from third-party pricing services and independent brokers or other internally derived
valuation models are utilized. The inputs used to measure fair value in the internal
valuations include, but are not limited to, benchmark yields, issuer spreads, bids, offers,
reported trades, and estimated projected cash flows that incorporate significant inputs such
as defaults and delinquency rates, severity, subordination, vintage and prepayment speeds.
For non-agency RMBS backed by prime, sub-prime and Alt-A collateral, the Company determined in
the first quarter of 2009 that there had been a significant decrease in the volume and level
of transaction activity indicating the need for a valuation technique not solely based on
observable transactions and/or quoted market prices. As permitted by guidance in the
Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic beginning March 31, 2009, the
Company determined the estimated fair value for these assets utilizing an internally developed
weighting of valuations derived from internal pricing models and independent pricing services.
This approach utilized multiple valuation techniques incorporating an income approach
(maximizing the use of relevant observable inputs and minimizing the use of unobservable
inputs) and a market approach (based on data provided by independent pricing services)
produced a result more representative of an investment’s fair value as compared to a single
valuation technique. The income approach incorporated cash flows for each investment adjusted
for expected losses assuming various interest rates and housing price-level scenarios. The
adjusted cash flows were discounted using a risk premium that market participants would demand
given the risk in the modeled cash flows. The risk premium utilized was reflective of an
orderly transaction between market participants under current market conditions and included
considerations such as liquidity and structure risk. These internally generated prices were
then reviewed in conjunction with prices obtained from multiple independent pricing services.
The internally generated prices were weighted with the prices obtained from independent
pricing services, with consideration given to the relative range of values that were most
representative of fair value under the market conditions. These securities were classified as
Level 3 financial assets.
During the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company determined that there has been an increase in
the volume and level of trading activity for these non-agency RMBS, as indicated by a
significant decrease in liquidity risk premiums and more consistency in prices quoted in the
market. Therefore, the Company believes that the non-agency RMBS market is no longer an
inactive market as of December 31, 2010. Beginning December 31, 2010, the Company primarily
utilizes prices obtained from third-party pricing services to determine fair value for
non-agency RMBS.
PL-43
Prices obtained from independent third-parties are generally evaluated based on the inputs
indicated above. The Company’s management analyzes and evaluates these prices and determines
whether they are reasonable estimates of fair value. Management’s analysis may include, but
is not limited to, review of third-party pricing methodologies and inputs, analysis of recent
trades, and development of internal models utilizing observable market data of comparable
securities. Based on this analysis, prices received from third-parties may be adjusted if the
Company determines that there is a more appropriate fair value based on available market
information.
Most securities priced by a major independent third-party service have been classified as
Level 2, as management has verified that the inputs used in determining their fair values are
market observable and appropriate. Other externally priced securities for which fair value
measurement inputs are not sufficiently transparent, such as securities valued based on broker
quotations, have been classified as Level 3. Internally valued securities, including adjusted
prices received from independent third-parties, where significant management assumptions have
been utilized in determining fair value, have been classified as Level 3.
OTHER INVESTMENTS
Other investments include non-marketable equity securities that do not have readily
determinable fair values. Certain significant inputs used in determining the fair value of
these equities are based on management assumptions or contractual terms with another party
that cannot be readily observable in the market. These investments are classified as Level 3
assets.
DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS
Derivative instruments are reported at fair value using pricing valuation models, which
utilize market data inputs or independent broker quotations. Excluding embedded derivatives,
as of December 31, 2010, 99% of derivatives based upon notional values were priced by
valuation models. The remaining derivatives were priced by broker quotations. The
derivatives are valued using mid-market inputs that are predominantly observable in the
market. Inputs used to value derivatives include, but are not limited to, interest swap
rates, foreign currency forward and spot rates, credit spreads and correlations, interest and
equity volatility and equity index levels. In accordance with the Codification’s Fair Value
Measurements and Disclosures Topic, a credit valuation analysis was performed for all
derivative positions to measure the risk that one of the counterparties to the transaction
will be unable to perform under the contractual terms (nonperformance risk) and was determined
to be immaterial as of December 31, 2010.
The Company performs a monthly analysis on derivative valuations, which includes both
quantitative and qualitative analysis. Examples of procedures performed include, but are not
limited to, review of pricing statistics and trends, analyzing the impacts of changes in the
market environment, and review of changes in market value for each derivative including those
derivatives priced by brokers.
Derivative instruments classified as Level 2 primarily include interest rate, currency and
certain credit default swaps. The derivative valuations are determined using pricing models
with inputs that are observable in the market or can be derived principally from or
corroborated by observable market data.
Derivative instruments classified as Level 3 include complex derivatives, such as equity
options and swaps and certain credit default swaps. Also included in Level 3 classification
for derivatives are embedded derivatives in certain insurance and reinsurance contracts.
These derivatives are valued using pricing models, which utilize both observable and
unobservable inputs and, to a lesser extent, broker quotations. A derivative instrument
containing Level 1 or Level 2 inputs will be classified as a Level 3 financial instrument in
its entirety if it has at least one significant Level 3 input.
The Company utilizes derivative instruments to manage the risk associated with certain assets
and liabilities. However, the derivative instrument may not be classified within the same
fair value hierarchy level as the associated assets and liabilities. Therefore, the realized
and unrealized gains and losses on derivatives reported in Level 3 may not reflect the
offsetting impact of the realized and unrealized gains and losses of the associated assets and
liabilities.
VARIABLE ANNUITY GLB EMBEDDED DERIVATIVES
Fair values for variable annuity GLB and related reinsurance embedded derivatives are
calculated based upon significant unobservable inputs using internally developed models
because active, observable markets do not exist for those items. As a result, variable
annuity GLB and related reinsurance embedded derivatives are categorized as Level 3. Below is
a description of the Company’s fair value methodologies for these embedded derivatives.
PL-44
The Company’s fair value is calculated as an aggregation of fair value and additional risk
margins including Behavior Risk Margin, Mortality Risk Margin and Credit Standing Adjustment.
The resulting aggregation is reconciled or calibrated, if necessary, to market information
that is, or may be, available to the Company, but may not be observable by other market
participants, including reinsurance discussions and transactions. Each of the components
described below are unobservable in the market place and requires subjectivity by the Company
in determining their value.
•
Behavior Risk Margin: This component adds a margin that market
participants would require for the risk that the Company’s assumptions about
policyholder behavior used in the fair value model could differ from actual
experience.
•
Mortality Risk Margin: This component adds a margin in mortality
assumptions, both for decrements for policyholders with GLBs, and for expected payout
lifetimes in guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits.
•
Credit Standing Adjustment: This component makes an adjustment that market
participants would make to reflect the chance that GLB obligations or the GLB
reinsurance recoverables will not be fulfilled (nonperformance risk).
SEPARATE ACCOUNT ASSETS
Separate account assets are primarily invested in mutual funds, but also have investments in
fixed maturity and short-term securities. Separate account assets are valued in the same
manner, and using the same pricing sources and inputs, as the fixed
maturity and equity securities available for sale of the Company. Mutual funds are included
in Level 1. Most fixed maturity securities are included in Level 2. Level 3 assets include
any investments where fair value is based on management assumptions or obtained from
independent third-parties and fair value measurement inputs are not sufficiently transparent.
PL-45
LEVEL 3 RECONCILIATION
The tables below present reconciliations of the beginning and ending balances of the Level 3
financial assets and liabilities, net, that have been measured at fair value on a recurring
basis using significant unobservable inputs.
Purchases,
Total Gains or Losses
Transfers
Sales,
Unrealized
In and/or
Issuances,
Gains
January 1,
Included in
Included in
Out of
and
December 31,
(Losses)
2010
Earnings
OCI
Level 3 (1)
Settlements
2010
Still Held (2)
(In Millions)
U.S. Treasury securities and
obligations of U.S. government
authorities and agencies
$
6
($6
)
Obligations of states and
political subdivisions
34
$
4
($7
)
($4
)
12
$
39
Foreign governments
108
7
(43
)
(2
)
70
Corporate securities
2,287
38
25
(547
)
(175
)
1,628
($2
)
RMBS
3,650
(44
)
500
(2,407
)
(631
)
1,068
CMBS
327
20
(59
)
(34
)
254
Collateralized debt obligations
104
5
7
2
(3
)
115
Other asset-backed securities
235
7
65
(27
)
280
Total fixed maturity securities
6,751
3
559
(2,993
)
(866
)
3,454
(2
)
Perpetual preferred securities
70
3
(42
)
(19
)
12
Other equity securities
1
1
Total equity securities
70
4
(42
)
(19
)
13
Trading securities
29
2
27
8
66
Other investments
163
6
4
173
Derivatives, net
(447
)
11
1
48
(387
)
426
Separate account assets (3)
101
6
(7
)
100
7
Total
$
6,667
$
22
$
570
($3,008
)
($832
)
$
3,419
$
431
PL-46
Purchases,
Total Gains or Losses
Transfers
Sales,
Unrealized
In and/or
Issuances,
Gains
January 1,
Included in
Included in
Out of
and
December 31,
(Losses)
2009
Earnings
OCI
Level 3 (1)
Settlements
2009
Still Held (2)
(In Millions)
U.S. Treasury securities and
obligations of U.S. government
authorities and agencies
$
6
$
6
Obligations of states and
political subdivisions
($3
)
7
$
30
34
Foreign governments
$
22
$
2
5
71
8
108
Corporate securities
2,243
(28
)
644
(974
)
402
2,287
($5
)
RMBS
3,355
(115
)
437
427
(454
)
3,650
CMBS
201
1
26
60
39
327
Collateralized debt obligations
104
(67
)
71
(4
)
104
Other asset-backed securities
210
2
10
42
(29
)
235
Total fixed maturity securities
6,135
(205
)
1,190
(361
)
(8
)
6,751
(5
)
Perpetual preferred securities
12
(17
)
12
(5
)
68
70
Other equity securities
1
4
(28
)
23
Total equity securities
12
(16
)
16
(33
)
91
70
Trading securities
97
(51
)
(17
)
29
2
Other investments
150
24
(11
)
163
Derivatives, net
(2,042
)
1,504
1
90
(447
)
1,597
Separate account assets (3)
61
6
20
14
101
12
Total
$
4,413
$
1,289
$
1,231
($425
)
$
159
$
6,667
$
1,606
(1)
Transfers in and/or out are recognized at the end of each quarterly reporting
period.
(2)
Represents the net amount of total gains or losses for the period, recorded in
earnings, attributable to the change in unrealized gains (losses) relating to assets and
liabilities classified as Level 3 that were still held as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.
(3)
The realized/unrealized gains (losses) included in net income (loss) for
separate account assets are offset by an equal amount for separate account liabilities,
which results in a net zero impact on net income (loss) for the Company.
During the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company transferred $923 million of fixed
maturity securities out of Level 2 and into Level 3, and transferred $3,916 million of fixed
maturity securities out of Level 3 and into Level 2. The net transfers into Level 2 were
primarily attributable to the increased availability and use of market observable inputs to
estimate fair value. During the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company did not have any
significant transfers between Level 1 and 2.
During the year ended December 31, 2009, the Company transferred $1,507 million of fixed
maturity securities out of Level 2 and into Level 3, and transferred $1,868 million of fixed
maturity securities out of Level 3 and into Level 2. The net transfers into Level 2 were
primarily attributable to the increased availability and use of market observable inputs to
estimate fair value. During the year ended December 31, 2009, the Company did not have any
significant transfers between Level 1 and Level 2.
PL-47
NONRECURRING FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS
Certain assets are measured at estimated fair value on a nonrecurring basis and are not
included in the tables presented above. The amounts below relate to certain investments
measured at estimated fair value during the year and still held at the reporting date.
During the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company recognized an impairment of $27 million,
which is included in OTTIs. The impaired investments presented above were accounted for using
the cost basis. Real estate investments are evaluated for impairment based on the
undiscounted cash flows expected to be received during the estimated holding period. When the
undiscounted cash flows are less than the current carrying value of the property (gross cost
less accumulated depreciation), the property may be considered impaired and written-down to
its estimated fair value. Estimated fair value is determined using a combination of the
present value of the expected future cash flows and comparable sales. These write-downs to
estimated fair value represent nonrecurring fair value measurements that have been classified
as Level 3 due to the limited activity and lack of price transparency inherent in the market
for such investments.
AIRCRAFT
During the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company recognized an impairment of $4 million,
which is included in operating and other expenses, as a result of declines in the estimated
future cash flows to be received from two aircraft. The Company evaluates carrying values of
aircraft based upon changes in market and other physical and economic conditions and records
write-offs to recognize losses in the value of aircraft when management believes that, based
on future estimated cash flows, the recoverability of the Company’s investment in an aircraft
has been impaired. The fair value is based on the present value of the future cash flows,
which include contractual lease agreements, projected future lease payments as well as a
residual value. The cash flows were based on unobservable inputs and have been classified as
Level 3.
The Company did not have any other nonfinancial assets or liabilities measured at fair value
on a nonrecurring basis resulting from impairments as of December 31, 2010 and 2009. The
Company has not made any changes in the valuation methodologies for nonfinancial assets and
liabilities.
PL-48
The carrying amount and estimated fair value of the Company’s financial instruments that are
not carried at fair value under the Codification’s Financial Instruments Topic are as follows:
Balance excludes embedded derivatives that are included in the fair
value hierarchy level tables above.
The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of these financial
instruments as of December 31, 2010 and 2009:
MORTGAGE LOANS
The estimated fair value of the mortgage loan portfolio is determined by discounting the
estimated future cash flows, using current rates that are applicable to similar credit
quality, property type and average maturity of the composite portfolio.
POLICY LOANS
Policy loans are not separable from their associated insurance contract and bear no credit
risk since they do not exceed the contract’s cash surrender value, making these assets fully
secured by the cash surrender values of the contracts. Therefore, the carrying amount of the
policy loans is a reasonable approximation of their fair value.
OTHER INVESTED ASSETS
Included in other invested assets are private equity investments in which the estimated fair
value of private equity investments is based on the ownership percentage of the underlying
equity of the investments.
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
The carrying values approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these
instruments.
RESTRICTED CASH
The carrying values approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these
instruments.
FUNDING AGREEMENTS AND GICs
The fair value of funding agreements and GICs is estimated using the rates currently offered
for deposits of similar remaining maturities.
PL-49
ANNUITY AND DEPOSIT LIABILITIES
Annuity and deposit liabilities primarily includes policyholder deposits and accumulated
credited interest. The estimated fair value of annuity and deposit liabilities approximates
carrying value based on an analysis of discounted future cash flows with maturities similar to
the product portfolio liabilities.
DEBT
The carrying amount of short-term debt is a reasonable estimate of its fair value because the
interest rates are variable and based on current market rates. The estimated fair value of
long-term debt is based on market quotes, except for VIE debt and non-recourse debt, for which
the carrying amounts are reasonable estimates of their fair values because the interest rate
approximates current market rates.
15.
OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)
The Company displays comprehensive income (loss) and its components on the consolidated
statements of equity. The disclosure of the gross components of other comprehensive income
(loss) and related taxes are as follows:
Allocation of holding (gain) loss to future policy benefits
41
85
(119
)
Income tax expense (benefit)
75
113
(83
)
Cumulative effect of adoption of new accounting principle
(263
)
Income tax expense
93
Unrealized gain (loss) on derivatives and securities available for sale, net
669
1,385
(1,896
)
Other, net:
Holding gain (loss) on other securities and interest in PIMCO
9
22
(24
)
Income tax (expense) benefit
(4
)
(8
)
9
Reclassification of realized gain on sale of interest in PIMCO
(109
)
Income tax on realized gain
42
Net unrealized gain (loss) on other securities and interest in PIMCO
5
14
(82
)
Other, net of tax
(3
)
33
(15
)
Other, net
2
47
(97
)
Total other comprehensive income (loss), net
$
671
$
1,432
($1,993
)
PL-50
16.
REINSURANCE
Certain no lapse guarantee rider (NLGR) benefits of Pacific Life’s UL insurance products are
subject to Actuarial Guideline 38 (AG 38) statutory reserving requirements. AG 38 results in
additional statutory reserves on UL products with NLGRs issued after June 30, 2005. U.S. GAAP
benefit reserves for such riders are based on guidance in the Codification’s Financial
Services — Insurance Topic for accounting and reporting of certain non traditional
long-duration contracts and separate accounts. Substantially all the U.S. GAAP benefit
reserves relating to NLGRs issued from June 30, 2005 through March 31, 2010 were ceded from
Pacific Life to
Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Ltd. (PAR Bermuda), a Bermuda-based life reinsurance company
wholly owned by Pacific LifeCorp and PAR Vermont under reinsurance agreements. Effective
October 1, 2010, 100% of the PAR Bermuda reinsurance was novated to PAR Vermont, consolidating
all such NLGR reinsurance in PAR Vermont. Funded economic reserves and an irrevocable letter
of credit held in the PAR Vermont trust account with Pacific Life as beneficiary provide
security for statutory reserve credits taken by Pacific Life. See Note 21 for further
discussion of this letter of credit.
Between January 1, 2006 and March 31, 2009, the Company reinsured a portion of variable
annuity business under modified coinsurance agreements. Additionally, between January 1, 2007
and March 31, 2009, the Company reinsured a portion of variable annuity living and death
benefit riders under coinsurance agreements. Business ceded during such periods ranged
between 12% and 45%. While the Company stopped reinsuring variable annuity business effective
April 1, 2009, new business related to the aforementioned periods continues to be reinsured.
Reinsurance receivables and payables generally include amounts related to claims, reserves and
reserve related items. Reinsurance receivables, included in other assets, were $326 million
and $404 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. Reinsurance payables,
included in other liabilities, were $47 million and $37 million as of December 31, 2010 and
2009, respectively.
The ceding of risk does not discharge the Company from its primary obligations to contract
owners. To the extent that the assuming companies become unable to meet their obligations
under reinsurance contracts, the Company remains contingently liable. Each reinsurer is
reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each reinsurance contract
and throughout the period that the reinsurance contract is in place.
The components of insurance premiums presented in the consolidated statements of operations
are as follows:
Included are $21 million, $21 million and $13 million of reinsurance ceded
to PAR Bermuda for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
(2)
Included are $11 million and $4 million of assumed premiums from Pacific
Life Re Limited (PLR), an affiliate of the Company and a wholly owned subsidiary of
Pacific LifeCorp, for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
PL-51
17.
EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS
PENSION PLANS
Prior to December 31, 2007, Pacific Life provided a defined benefit pension plan (ERP)
covering all eligible employees of the Company. Certain subsidiaries did not participate in
this plan. The full-benefit vesting period for all participants was five years. Pacific
Life’s funding policy was to contribute amounts to the plan sufficient to meet the minimum
funding requirements set forth in ERISA, plus such additional amounts as was determined
appropriate. All such contributions were made to a tax-exempt trust.
The Company amended the ERP to terminate effective December 31, 2007. In anticipation of the
final settlement of the defined benefit pension plan, the plan’s investment strategy was
revised and the mutual fund investments were sold, transferred to a separate account group
annuity contract managed by the Company and invested primarily in fixed income investments to
better match the expected duration of the liabilities.
In September 2009, the Company received regulatory approval to commence the final
termination of the ERP and payment of plan benefits to the participants. The Company
completed the final distribution of plan assets to participants in December 2009. The
Company recognized settlement costs of $5 million in 2008 and recognized the final
settlement costs for the ERP totaling $72 million in 2009.
Pacific Life maintains supplemental employee retirement plans (SERPs) for certain eligible
employees. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the projected benefit obligation was $44 million
and $37 million, respectively. The fair value of plan assets as of December 31, 2010 and 2009
was zero. The net periodic benefit expense of the SERPs was $5 million, $4 million and $5
million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
The following table sets forth the benefit obligations, plan assets and funded status of the
defined benefit plans:
The Company incurred a net pension expense of $5 million, $79 million and $8 million for
the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, as detailed in the following
table:
Weighed-average assumptions used to determine
the ERP’s net periodic benefit expense:
Discount rate
N/A
6.30
%
6.25
%
Expected long-term return on plan assets
N/A
N/A
5.25
%
The salary rate used to determine the net periodic benefit expense for the SERP was 4.50% for
the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
Pacific Life expects to contribute $4 million to the SERP in 2011. The expected benefit
payments are as follows for the years ending December 31 (In Millions):
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016-2020
$4
$4
$4
$4
$3
$14
RETIREMENT INCENTIVE SAVINGS PLAN
Pacific Life provides a Retirement Incentive Savings Plan (RISP) covering all eligible
employees of Pacific LifeCorp and certain of its subsidiaries. The RISP matches 75% of each
employee’s contributions, up to a maximum of 6% of eligible employee compensation in cash.
Contributions made by the Company to the RISP, including the matching contribution, amounted
to $27 million, $26 million and $29 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and
2008, respectively, and are included in operating expenses.
POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS
Pacific Life provides a defined benefit health care plan and a defined benefit life insurance
plan (the Plans) that provide postretirement benefits for all eligible retirees and their
dependents. Generally, qualified employees may become eligible for these benefits if they
have reached normal retirement age, have been covered under Pacific Life’s policy as an active
employee for a minimum continuous period prior to the date retired, and have an employment
date before January 1, 1990. The Plans contain cost-sharing features such as deductibles and
coinsurance, and require retirees to make contributions, which can be adjusted annually.
Pacific Life’s commitment to qualified employees who retire after April 1, 1994 is limited to
specific dollar amounts. Pacific Life reserves the right to modify or terminate the Plans at
any time. As in the past, the general policy is to fund these benefits on a pay-as-you-go
basis.
The net periodic postretirement benefit cost for each of the years ended December 31, 2010,
2009 and 2008 was $1 million. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the accumulated benefit
obligation was $19 million. The fair value of the plan assets as of December 31, 2010 and
2009 was zero.
The discount rate used in determining the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation was
4.85% and 5.50% for 2010 and 2009, respectively.
PL-53
Benefit payments for the year ended December 31, 2010 amounted to $2 million. The expected
benefit payments are as follows for the years ending December 31 (In Millions):
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016-2020
$2
$2
$2
$2
$2
$8
OTHER PLANS
The Company has deferred compensation plans that permit eligible employees to defer portions
of their compensation and earn interest on the deferred amounts. The interest rate is
determined quarterly. The compensation that has been deferred has been accrued and the
primary expense related to this plan, other than compensation, is interest on the deferred
amounts. The Company also has performance-based incentive compensation plans for its
employees.
18.
INCOME TAXES
The provision (benefit) for income taxes is as follows:
Provision (benefit) for income taxes from continuing operations
63
44
(315
)
Benefit from income taxes from discontinued operations
(11
)
(3
)
Total
$
63
$
33
($318
)
A reconciliation of the provision (benefit) for income taxes from continuing operations based
on the Federal corporate statutory tax rate of 35% to the provision (benefit) for income taxes
from continuing operations reflected in the consolidated financial statements is as follows:
Provision (benefit) for income taxes at the statutory rate
$
205
$
170
($199
)
Separate account dividends received deduction
(106
)
(93
)
(107
)
LIHTC and foreign tax credits
(18
)
(19
)
(31
)
Singapore transfer
(17
)
Other
(1
)
(14
)
22
Provision (benefit) for income taxes from continuing operations
$
63
$
44
($315
)
In December 2010, ACG and an unrelated third-party transferred aircraft to Singapore in
connection with a joint venture (Singapore Transfer). The Singapore Transfer reduced the
provision for income taxes for the year ended December 31, 2010 by $17 million, primarily due
to the reversal of deferred taxes related to bases differences in the interest transferred.
ACG plans to reinvest any income generated by these aircraft indefinitely outside of the U.S.
PL-54
A reconciliation of the changes in the unrecognized tax benefits is as follows (In Millions):
During the year ended December 31, 2008, the Company’s tax contingency related to the
accounting for uncertainty in income taxes increased by $402 million for a tax position for
which there was uncertainty about the timing, but not the deductibility, of certain tax
deductions. Since the benefits of the tax position were not being claimed on an original
return and the Company did not receive cash, interest or penalties were not accrued. Due to
the nature of deferred tax accounting, the tax position does not have an impact on the annual
effective tax rate.
During the year ended December 31, 2009, the Company’s contingency related to the accounting
for uncertainty in income taxes decreased by $420 million. The Company resolved an uncertain
tax accounting position on certain tax deductions resulting in a $402 million decrease. The
Company also effectively settled $18 million of the gross uncertain tax position related to
separate account Dividends Received Deductions (DRD), which resulted in the realization of $9
million of tax benefits.
Depending on the outcome of Internal Revenue Service (IRS) audits, approximately $7 million of
the unrecognized DRD tax benefits may be realized during the next twelve months. All realized
tax benefits and related interest are recorded as a discrete item that will impact the
effective tax rate in the accounting period in which the uncertain tax position is ultimately
settled.
During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Company paid an insignificant
amount of interest and penalties to state tax authorities.
PL-55
The net deferred tax liability, included in other liabilities, is comprised of the following
tax effected temporary differences:
Net deferred tax liability from continuing operations
(536
)
(480
)
Unrealized (gain) loss on derivatives and securities available for sale
(143
)
101
Deferred taxes on cumulative changes in accounting principles
120
Minimum pension liability and other adjustments
(12
)
(10
)
Net deferred tax liability
($691
)
($269
)
The tax net operating loss carryforwards relate to Federal tax losses incurred in 1998 through
2010 with a 20-year carryforward for non-life losses and a 15-year carryforward for life
losses, and California tax losses incurred in 2004 through 2010 with a ten-year carryforward.
The tax credit carryforwards relate to LIHTC, foreign tax credits, and alternative minimum tax
(AMT) credits generated from 2000 to 2010. The LIHTC begin to expire in 2020. The foreign
tax credits begin to expire in 2016. The AMT credits have no expiration date.
The Codification’s Income Taxes Topic requires the reduction of deferred tax assets by a
valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not
that a portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. Based on management’s
assessment, it is more likely than not that the Company’s deferred tax assets will be realized
through future taxable income, including the reversal of deferred tax liabilities.
The Company files income tax returns in U.S. Federal and various state jurisdictions. The
Company is under continuous audit by the IRS and is audited periodically by some state taxing
authorities. The IRS has completed audits of the Company’s tax returns through the tax years
ended December 31, 2005 and has commenced audits for tax years 2006, 2007 and 2008. The State
of California concluded audits for tax years 2003 and 2004 without material assessment. The
Company does not expect the Federal and state audits to result in any material assessments.
PL-56
19.
SEGMENT INFORMATION
The Company has three operating segments: Life Insurance, Retirement Solutions and Aircraft
Leasing. These segments are managed separately and have been identified based on differences
in products and services offered. All other activity is included in the Corporate and Other
segment.
Prior to January 1, 2010, the Company’s financial reporting structure included the Investment
Management segment. Effective January 1, 2010, structured settlement and group retirement
annuities were moved to the Retirement Solutions segment. Other institutional investment
products and the Company’s securities portfolio management became part of the Corporate and
Other segment. The segment information included herein has been retrospectively adjusted to
reflect the current operating segments for comparable purposes.
The Life Insurance segment provides a broad range of life insurance products through multiple
distribution channels operating in the upper income and corporate markets. Principal products
include UL, VUL, survivor life, interest sensitive whole life, corporate-owned life insurance
and traditional products such as whole life and term life. Distribution channels include
regional life offices, marketing organizations, broker-dealer firms, wirehouses and M
Financial, an association of independently owned and operated insurance and financial
producers.
The Retirement Solutions segment’s principal products include variable and fixed annuity
products, mutual funds, and structured settlement and group retirement annuities, which are
offered through multiple distribution channels. Distribution channels include independent
planners, financial institutions and national/regional wirehouses. This segment’s name was
changed from Annuities & Mutual Funds effective March 1, 2010.
The Aircraft Leasing segment offers aircraft leasing to the airline industry throughout the
world and provides brokerage and asset management services to other third-parties.
The Corporate and Other segment consists of assets and activities, which support the
Company’s operating segments. Included in these support activities is the management of
investments, certain entity level hedging activities and other expenses and other assets
not directly attributable to the operating segments. The Corporate and Other segment
also includes the operations of certain subsidiaries that do not qualify as operating
segments and the elimination of intersegment transactions. Discontinued operations (Note
6) are also included in the Corporate and Other segment.
The Company uses the same accounting policies and procedures to measure segment net income
(loss) and assets as it uses to measure its consolidated net income (loss) and assets. Net
investment income and net realized investment gain (loss) are allocated based on invested
assets purchased and held as is required for transacting the business of that segment.
Overhead expenses are allocated based on services provided. Interest expense is allocated
based on the short-term borrowing needs of the segment and is included in net investment
income. The provision (benefit) for income taxes is allocated based on each segment’s actual
tax provision (benefit).
The operating segments, excluding Aircraft Leasing, are allocated equity based on formulas
determined by management and receive a fixed interest rate of return on interdivision
debentures supporting the allocated equity. The debenture amount is reflected as investment
expense in net investment income in the Corporate and Other segment and as investment income
in the operating segments.
The Company generates substantially all of its revenues and net income from customers located
in the U.S. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company had foreign investments with an
estimated fair value of $8.0 billion and $7.2 billion, respectively. Aircraft leased to
foreign customers were $5.1 billion and $5.0 billion as of December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively. Revenues derived from any customer did not exceed 10% of consolidated total
revenues for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
PL-57
The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2010:
Life
Retirement
Aircraft
Corporate
Insurance
Solutions
Leasing
and Other
Total
REVENUES
(In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
$
1,092
$
1,265
$
10
$
2,367
Net investment income
924
748
450
2,122
Net realized investment gain (loss)
55
(73
)
($2
)
(74
)
(94
)
OTTIs
(21
)
(10
)
(82
)
(113
)
Investment advisory fees
21
224
245
Aircraft leasing revenue
591
591
Other income
11
141
57
21
230
Total revenues
2,082
2,295
646
325
5,348
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits
432
923
(4
)
1,351
Interest credited
700
282
335
1,317
Commission expenses
355
475
1
831
Operating expenses
297
339
60
65
761
Depreciation of aircraft
241
241
Interest expense
178
84
262
Total benefits and expenses
1,784
2,019
479
481
4,763
Income (loss) from continuing operations before
provision (benefit) for income taxes
298
276
167
(156
)
585
Provision (benefit) for income taxes
93
(9
)
41
(62
)
63
Net income (loss)
205
285
126
(94
)
522
Less: net income attributable to the
noncontrolling interest from continuing operations
(9
)
(41
)
(50
)
Net income (loss) attributable to the Company
$
205
$
285
$
117
($135
)
$
472
Total assets
$
30,337
$
67,415
$
6,893
$
10,017
$
114,662
DAC
1,598
2,836
1
4,435
Separate account assets
5,982
49,701
55,683
Policyholder and contract liabilities
21,776
13,743
6,637
42,156
Separate account liabilities
5,982
49,701
55,683
PL-58
The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009:
Life
Retirement
Aircraft
Corporate
Insurance
Solutions
Leasing
and Other
Total
REVENUES
(In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
$
1,063
$
1,209
$
3
$
2,275
Net investment income
892
610
$
1
359
1,862
Net realized investment gain (loss)
311
7
(165
)
153
OTTIs
(63
)
(53
)
(195
)
(311
)
Investment advisory fees
18
190
208
Aircraft leasing revenue
578
578
Other income
10
112
13
2
137
Total revenues
1,920
2,379
599
4
4,902
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits
363
863
1,226
Interest credited
681
193
379
1,253
Commission expenses
353
337
1
691
Operating expenses
290
285
59
148
782
Depreciation of aircraft
227
227
Interest expense
182
55
237
Total benefits and expenses
1,687
1,678
468
583
4,416
Income (loss) from continuing operations before
provision (benefit) for income taxes
233
701
131
(579
)
486
Provision (benefit) for income taxes
66
147
39
(208
)
44
Income (loss) from continuing operations
167
554
92
(371
)
442
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
(20
)
(20
)
Net income (loss)
167
554
92
(391
)
422
Less: net (income) loss attributable to the
noncontrolling interest from continuing operations
(9
)
23
14
Net income (loss) attributable to the Company
$
167
$
554
$
83
($368
)
$
436
Total assets
$
28,589
$
63,277
$
6,091
$
10,520
$
108,477
DAC
1,865
2,939
2
4,806
Separate account assets
5,590
46,907
67
52,564
Policyholder and contract liabilities
21,133
12,677
7,577
41,387
Separate account liabilities
5,590
46,907
67
52,564
PL-59
The following is segment information for the year ended December 31, 2008:
Life
Retirement
Aircraft
Corporate
Insurance
Solutions
Leasing
and Other
Total
REVENUES
(In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
$
943
$
1,054
$
1,997
Net investment income
855
482
$
657
1,994
Net realized investment gain (loss)
24
(695
)
(78
)
(749
)
OTTIs
(69
)
(83
)
($3
)
(425
)
(580
)
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
109
109
Investment advisory fees
22
233
255
Aircraft leasing revenue
571
571
Other income
11
117
38
1
167
Total revenues
1,786
1,108
606
264
3,764
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits
372
834
1,206
Interest credited
661
133
440
1,234
Commission expenses
268
443
4
715
Operating expenses
263
330
40
99
732
Depreciation of aircraft
208
208
Interest expense
221
17
238
Total benefits and expenses
1,564
1,740
469
560
4,333
Income (loss) from continuing operations before
provision (benefit) for income taxes
222
(632
)
137
(296
)
(569
)
Provision (benefit) for income taxes
61
(336
)
48
(88
)
(315
)
Income (loss) from continuing operations
161
(296
)
89
(208
)
(254
)
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
(6
)
(6
)
Net income (loss)
161
(296
)
89
(214
)
(260
)
Less: net (income) loss attributable to the
noncontrolling interest from continuing operations
(8
)
11
3
Net income (loss) attributable to the Company
$
161
($296
)
$
81
($203
)
($257
)
20.
TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES
PLFA serves as the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund, an investment vehicle
provided to the Company’s variable life insurance policyholders and variable annuity contract
owners, and the Pacific Life Funds, the investment vehicle for the Company’s mutual fund
products. Investment advisory and other fees are based primarily upon the net asset value of
the underlying portfolios. These fees, included in investment advisory fees and other income,
amounted to $291 million, $244 million and $287 million for the years ended December 31, 2010,
2009 and 2008, respectively. In addition, Pacific Life provides certain support services to
the Pacific Select Fund, the Pacific Life Funds and other affiliates based on an allocation of
actual costs. These fees amounted to $8 million, $9 million and $7 million for the years
ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Additionally, the Pacific Select Fund has a service plan whereby the fund pays PSD, as
distributor of the fund, a service fee in connection with services rendered or procured to or
for shareholders of the fund or their variable contract owners. These services may include,
but are not limited to, payment of compensation to broker-dealers, including PSD itself, and
other financial institutions
PL-60
and organizations, which assist in providing any of the services.
For the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, PSD received $100 million, $86 million
and $100 million, respectively, in service fees from the Pacific Select Fund, which are
recorded in other income.
ACG has derivative swap contracts with Pacific LifeCorp as the counterparty. The notional
amounts total $1.5 billion and $2.0 billion as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
The estimated fair values of the derivatives were net liabilities of $62 million and $48
million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
21.
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
COMMITMENTS
The Company has outstanding commitments to make investments primarily in fixed maturity
securities, mortgage loans, limited partnerships and other investments, as follows (In
Millions):
Years
Ending December 31:
2011
$
606
2012 through 2015
647
2016 and thereafter
46
Total
$
1,299
The Company leases office facilities under various operating leases, which in most, but not
all cases, are noncancelable. Rent expense, which is included in operating and other
expenses, in connection with these leases was $9 million, $8 million and $10 million for the
years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. In connection with the sale of a
block of business in 2005, PL&A is contingently liable until March 31, 2013 for certain future
rent and expense obligations, not to exceed $11 million, related to an office lease that has
been assigned to the buyer. Aggregate minimum future commitments are as follows (In
Millions):
Years Ending December 31:
2011
$
9
2012 through 2015
22
2016 and thereafter
1
Total
$
32
ACG entered into a sale leaseback transaction, the subject of which was two commercial
aircraft on long-term lease to a U.S. airline. As a result of this transaction, ACG has
committed to two operating leases expiring December 2025 and in turn benefits from operating
leases on the two sale leaseback aircraft which expire July 2021 and April 2024. Aggregate
minimum future lease commitments and minimum rentals to be received in the future are as
follows (In Millions):
Minimum Future
Minimum Rentals to
Years Ending December 31:
Commitments
be Received
2011
$
11
$9
2012 through 2015
23
37
2016 and thereafter
64
63
Total
$
98
$109
PL-61
As of December 31, 2010, ACG has commitments with major aircraft manufacturers and other
third-parties to purchase aircraft at an estimated delivery price of $6,125 million with
delivery from 2011 through 2017. These purchase commitments may be funded:
•
up to $1,205 million in less than one year,
•
an additional $2,297 million in one to three years,
•
an additional $1,699 million in three to five years, and
•
an additional $417 million thereafter.
As of December 31, 2010, deposits related to these agreements totaled $507 million and are
included in other assets.
In connection with an acquisition in 2005, ACG assumed residual value support agreements with
remaining expiration dates ranging from 2011 to 2015. The gross remaining residual value
exposure under these agreements was $99 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009. As of
December 31, 2010, the Company has estimated that it has no measurable liability under the
remaining residual value guarantee agreements.
In connection with the reinsurance of NLGR benefits ceded from Pacific Life to PAR Vermont
(Note 16), PAR Bermuda and PAR Vermont entered into a three year letter of credit agreement
with a group of banks in April 2009. This agreement allows for the issuance of letters of
credit with an expiration date of March 2012 to PAR Bermuda and PAR Vermont for up to a
combined total amount of $650 million. As of December 31, 2010, the letter of credit issued
from this facility for PAR Bermuda was cancelled. In addition, as of December 31, 2010, a
letter of credit was issued for PAR Vermont totaling $355 million. Pacific LifeCorp
guarantees the obligations of PAR Vermont under the letter of credit agreement.
On March 29, 2010, the Company entered into an agreement with PLR to guarantee the performance
of unaffiliated reinsurance obligations of PLR. PLR will pay the Company a fee for its
guarantee. For the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company earned $2 million under the
agreement for its guarantee. This guarantee is secondary to a similar guarantee provided by
Pacific LifeCorp and would only be triggered in the event of nonperformance by both PLR and
Pacific LifeCorp. Management believes that any additional obligations, if any, related to the
guarantee agreement are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s
condensed consolidated financial statements. PLR is incorporated in the United Kingdom (UK)
and provides reinsurance to insurance and annuity providers in the UK, Ireland and to insurers
in selected markets in Asia.
CONTINGENCIES — LITIGATION
The Company is a respondent in a number of legal proceedings, some of which involve
allegations for extra-contractual damages. Although the Company is confident of its position
in these matters, success is not a certainty and it is possible that in any case a judge or
jury could rule against the Company. In the opinion of management, the outcome of such
proceedings is not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated
financial position. The Company believes adequate provision has been made in its consolidated
financial statements for all probable and estimable losses for litigation claims against the
Company.
CONTINGENCIES — IRS REVENUE RULING
On August 16, 2007, the IRS issued Revenue Ruling 2007-54, which provided the IRS’
interpretation of tax law regarding the computation of the DRD. On September 25, 2007, the
IRS issued Revenue Ruling 2007-61, which suspended Revenue Ruling 2007-54 and indicated the
IRS would address the proper interpretation of tax law in a regulation project that is on the
IRS’ priority guidance plan. Although no guidance has been issued, if the IRS ultimately
adopts the interpretation contained in Revenue Ruling 2007-54, the Company could lose a
substantial amount of DRD tax benefits, which could have a material adverse effect on the
Company’s consolidated financial statements.
CONTINGENCIES — OTHER
In connection with the sale of certain broker-dealer subsidiaries (Note 6), certain
indemnifications triggered by breaches of representations, warranties or covenants were
provided by the Company. Also, included in the indemnifications is indemnification for
certain third-party claims arising from the normal operation of these broker-dealers prior to
the closing and within the nine month period following the sale. Management believes that
judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a
material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
In the course of its business, the Company provides certain indemnifications related to other
dispositions, acquisitions, investments, lease agreements or other transactions that are
triggered by, among other things, breaches of representations, warranties or covenants
provided by the Company. These obligations are typically subject to time limitations that
vary in duration,
PL-62
including contractual limitations and those that arise by operation of law, such as applicable
statutes of limitation. Because the amounts of these types of indemnifications often are not
explicitly stated, the overall maximum amount of the obligation under such indemnifications
cannot be reasonably estimated. The Company has not historically made material payments for
these types of indemnifications. The estimated maximum potential amount of future payments
under these obligations is not determinable due to the lack of a stated maximum liability for
certain matters, and therefore, no related liability has been recorded. Management believes
that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a
material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
Most of the jurisdictions in which the Company is admitted to transact business require life
insurance companies to participate in guaranty associations, which are organized to pay
contractual benefits owed pursuant to insurance policies issued by insolvent life insurance
companies. These associations levy assessments, up to prescribed limits, on all member
companies in a particular state based on the proportionate share of premiums written by member
companies in the lines of business in which the insolvent insurer operated. The Company has
not received notification of any insolvency that is expected to result in a material guaranty
fund assessment.
The Asset Purchase Agreements of Aviation Trust, ACG Trust II and ACG Trust III (Note 4)
provide that Pacific LifeCorp will guarantee the performance of certain obligations of ACG, as
well as provide certain indemnifications, and that Pacific Life will assume certain
obligations of ACG arising from the breach of certain representations and warranties under the
Asset Purchase Agreements. Management believes that obligations, if any, related to these
guarantees are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated
financial statements. The financial debt obligations of Aviation Trust, ACG Trust II and ACG
Trust III are non-recourse to the Company and are not guaranteed by the Company.
In connection with the operations of certain subsidiaries, Pacific Life has made commitments
to provide for additional capital funding as may be required.
See Note 10 for discussion of contingencies related to derivative instruments.
See Note 18 for discussion of other contingencies related to income taxes.
PL-63
PART II
Part C: OTHER INFORMATION
Item 24.
Financial Statements and Exhibits
(a)
Financial Statements
Part A: NONE
Part B:
(1)
Registrant’s Financial Statements
Audited
Financial Statements dated as of December 31, 2010 and for each
of the periods presented which are incorporated by reference from
the 2010 Annual Report include the following for Separate Account A:
Statements of Assets and Liabilities
Statements of Operations
Statements of Changes in Net Assets
Notes to Financial Statements
Report
of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
(2)
Depositor’s Financial Statements
Audited
Consolidated Financial Statements dated as of December 31, 2010
and 2009, and for each of the three years in the period ended
December 31, 2010, included in Part B include the following for Pacific Life:
Independent Auditors’ Report
Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition
Consolidated Statements of Operations
Consolidated Statements of Stockholder’s Equity
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
(b)
Exhibits
1.
(a)
Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Depositor authorizing establishment of Separate
Account A and Memorandum establishing Separate Account A.1
(b)
Memorandum Establishing Two New Variable Accounts—Aggressive Equity and Emerging
Markets Portfolios.1
(c)
Resolution of the Board of Directors of Pacific Life Insurance Company authorizing conformity
to the terms of the current Bylaws.1
II-1
2.
Not applicable
3.
(a)
Distribution Agreement between Pacific Life Insurance Company (formerly Pacific
Mutual Life Insurance Company) and Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (“PSD”) (formerly
Pacific Equities Network)1
(b)
Form of
Selling Agreement between Pacific Life, PSD and Various Broker-Dealers16
Addendum to Pacific
Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add Strategic Value and Focused 30
Portfolios)2
(c)
Addendum to Pacific
Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add nine new Portfolios)2
(d)
Addendum to Pacific
Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add the Equity Income and Research
Portfolios)4
(e)
Fund Participation Agreement Between Pacific Life
Insurance Company, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc., American Funds Insurance Series, American Funds Distributors,
and Capital Research and Management Company12
(f)
Form of
Exhibit B to the Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add
International Small-Cap and Diversified Bond)16
(g)
Form
of AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc.
Participation Agreement21
(h)
Form of BlackRock Variable Series Fund, Inc. Participation Agreement21
(1) Amendment to Participation Agreement26
(i)
Form of Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust Participation Agreement21
(1) First Amendment to Participation Agreement26
(2)
Second Amendment to Participation Agreement
(j)
Form of AllianceBernstein Investments, Inc. Administrative Services Agreement21
(k)
Form of BlackRock Distributors, Inc. Administrative Services Agreement21
(1) Amendment to Administrative Services Agreement26
(l)
Form of Franklin Templeton Services, LLC Administrative Services Agreement21
(1) First Amendment to Administrative Services Agreement26
(m)
Form of
AIM Variable Insurance Funds Participation Agreement23
(n)
Form of Invesco Aim Distributors, Inc. Distribution Services Agreement23
(o)
Form of Invesco Aim Advisors, Inc. Administrative Services Agreement23
(p)
Form of GE Investments Funds, Inc. Participation Agreement23
(1)
Amendment to Participation Agreement26
(q)
Form of GE Investment Distributors, Inc. Distribution and Services Agreement (Amended and Restated)26
(r)
Form of
Van Kampen Life Investment Trust Participation Agreement23
(s)
Form of
Van Kampen Funds, Inc. Shareholder Service Agreement23
(t)
Form of
Van Kampen Asset Management Administrative Services Letter Agreement23
(u)
Form of
GE Investments Funds, Inc. Investor Services Agreement26
(1) First Amendment to Investor Services Agreement26
(v)
Form of
PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust Participation Agreement26
(1)
First Amendment to Participation Agreement
(2)
Second Amendment to Participation Agreement
(w)
Form of
Allianz Global Investors Distributors LLC Selling Agreement26
(x)
Form of PIMCO LLC Services Agreement26
(y)
Form of MFS Variable Insurance Trust Participation Agreement28
(1)
First Amendment to Participation Agreement28
(2)
Second Amendment to Participation Agreement
(z)
Form of
MFS Variable Insurance Trust Administrative Services Agreement28
9.
Opinion and Consent of legal officer of Pacific Life as to the legality of Contracts being
registered.1
II-2
10.
Consent of
Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm and Consent of
Independent Auditors
Item 26. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control with Pacific Life or Separate Account A.
The following is an explanation of the organization chart of Pacific Life’s subsidiaries:
Pacific Life is a Nebraska Stock Life Insurance Company wholly-owned by Pacific LifeCorp (a
Delaware Stock Holding Company), which is, in turn, 100% owned by Pacific Mutual Holding Company (a
Nebraska Mutual Insurance Holding Company).
The Distribution Agreement between Pacific Life and Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) provides substantially as
follows:
Pacific Life hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless PSD and its officers and directors, and employees for any
expenses (including legal expenses), losses, claims, damages, or liabilities incurred by reason of any untrue or alleged
untrue statement or representation of a material fact or any omission or alleged omission to state a material fact required to
be stated to make other statements not misleading, if made in reliance on any prospectus, registration statement, post-effective amendment thereof, or sales materials supplied or approved by Pacific Life or the Separate Account. Pacific Life
shall reimburse each such person for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred in connection with investigating or
defending any such loss, liability, damage, or claim. However, in no case shall Pacific Life be required to indemnify for
any expenses, losses, claims, damages, or liabilities which have resulted from the willful misfeasance, bad faith,
negligence, misconduct, or wrongful act of PSD.
PSD hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Pacific Life, its officers, directors, and employees, and the Separate
Account for any expenses, losses, claims, damages, or liabilities arising out of or based upon any of the following in
connection with the offer or sale of the contracts: (1) except for such statements made in reliance on any prospectus,
registration statement or sales material supplied or approved by Pacific Life or the Separate Account, any untrue or alleged
untrue statement or representation is made; (2) any failure to deliver a currently effective prospectus; (3) the use of any
unauthorized sales literature by any officer, employee or agent of PSD or Broker; (4) any willful misfeasance, bad faith,
negligence, misconduct or wrongful act. PSD shall reimburse each such person for any legal or other expenses reasonably
incurred in connection with investigating or defending any such loss, liability, damage, or claim.
(b)
The Form of Selling Agreement between Pacific Life, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) and Various Broker-Dealers
and Agency (Selling Entities) provides substantially as follows:
Pacific Life and PSD agree to indemnify and hold harmless Selling Entities, their officers,
directors, agents and employees, against any and all losses, claims, damages, or liabilities to
which they may become subject under the Securities Act, the Exchange Act, the Investment Company
Act of 1940, or other federal or state statutory law or regulation, at common law or otherwise,
insofar as such losses, claims, damages or liabilities (or actions in respect thereof) arise out of
or are based upon any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or any
omission or alleged omission to state a material fact required to be stated or necessary to make
the statements made not misleading in the registration statement for the Contracts or for the
shares of Pacific Select Fund (the “Fund”) filed pursuant to the Securities Act, or any prospectus
included as a part thereof, as from time to time amended and supplemented, or in any advertisement
or sales literature provided by Pacific Life and PSD.
II-5
Selling Entities agree to, jointly and severally, hold harmless and indemnify Pacific Life and PSD
and any of their respective affiliates, employees, officers, agents and directors (collectively,
“Indemnified Persons”) against any and all claims, liabilities and expenses (including, without
limitation, losses occasioned by any rescission of any Contract pursuant to a “free look” provision
or by any return of initial purchase payment in connection with an incomplete application),
including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and any loss attributable to
the investment experience under a Contract, that any Indemnified Person may incur from liabilities
resulting or arising out of or based upon (a) any untrue or alleged untrue statement other than
statements contained in the registration statement or prospectus relating to any Contract, (b) (i)
any inaccurate or misleading, or allegedly inaccurate or misleading sales material used in
connection with any marketing or solicitation relating to any Contract, other than sales material
provided preprinted by Pacific Life or PSD, and (ii) any use of any sales material that either has
not been specifically approved in writing by Pacific Life or PSD or that, although previously
approved in writing by Pacific Life or PSD, has been disapproved, in writing by either of them, for
further use, or (c) any act or omission of a Subagent, director, officer or employee of Selling
Entities, including, without limitation, any failure of Selling Entities or any Subagent to be
registered as required as a broker/dealer under the 1934 Act, or licensed in accordance with the
rules of any applicable SRO or insurance regulator.
II-6
Item 29.
Principal Underwriters
(a)
PSD also acts as principal underwriter for Pacific
Select Variable Annuity Separate Account, Separate Account B, Pacific
Corinthian Variable Separate Account, Pacific Select Separate Account, Pacific Select Exec
Separate Account, COLI Separate Account, COLI II Separate Account, COLI III Separate Account,
COLI IV Separate Account, COLI V Separate Account, Separate Account A of Pacific Life & Annuity Company, Pacific Select Exec Separate Account of Pacific Life &
Annuity Company, Separate Account I of Pacific Life Insurance Company, Separate Account I of Pacific Life
& Annuity Company.
(b)
For information regarding PSD, reference is made to Form B-D, SEC File No. 8-15264, which is herein incorporated by
reference.
(c)
PSD retains no compensation or net discounts or commissions from the Registrant.
Item 30.
Location of Accounts and Records
The accounts, books and other documents required to be maintained by Registrant pursuant to Section 31(a) of the
Investment Company Act of 1940 and the rules under that section will be maintained by Pacific Life at 700 Newport
Center Drive, Newport Beach, California92660.
Item 31.
Management Services
Not applicable
Item 32.
Undertakings
The registrant hereby undertakes:
(a)
to file a post-effective amendment to this registration statement as frequently as is necessary to ensure that the audited
financial statements in this registration statement are never more than 16 months old for so long as payments under
the variable annuity contracts may be accepted, unless otherwise permitted.
(b)
to include either (1) as a part of any application to purchase a contract offered by the prospectus, a space that an
applicant can check to request a Statement of Additional Information, or (2) a post card or similar written
communication affixed to or included in the prospectus that the applicant can remove to send for a Statement of
Additional Information, or (3) to deliver a Statement of Additional Information with the Prospectus.
(c)
to deliver any Statement of Additional Information and any financial statements required to be made available under
this Form promptly upon written or oral request.
II-7
Additional Representations
(a) The Registrant and its Depositor are relying upon American Council of
Life Insurance, SEC No-Action Letter, SEC Ref. No. 1P-6-88 (November 28, 1988)
with respect to annuity contracts offered as funding vehicles for retirement
plans meeting the requirements of Section 403(b) of the Internal Revenue Code,
and the provisions of paragraphs (1)-(4) of this letter have been complied
with.
(b) The Registrant and its Depositor are relying upon Rule 6c-7 of the
Investment Company Act of 1940 with respect to annuity contracts offered as
funding vehicles to participants in the Texas Optional Retirement Program, and
the provisions of Paragraphs (a)-(d) of the Rule have been complied with.
(c)
REPRESENTATION PURSUANT TO SECTION 26(f) OF THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940:
Pacific Life Insurance Company and Registrant represent that the fees and
charges to be deducted under the Variable Annuity Contract (“Contract”)
described in the prospectus contained in this registration statement are, in
the aggregate, reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses
expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed in connection with the Contract.
II-8
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment
Company Act of 1940, the Registrant certifies that it meets the requirements of Securities Act Rule 485(b) for effectiveness of this Registration Statement and
has caused this Post-Effective Amendment No. 35 to the Registration Statement on
Form N-4 to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned thereunto duly
authorized in the City of Newport Beach, and the State of California
on this 18th day of April, 2011.
SEPARATE ACCOUNT A
(Registrant)
By:
PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
By:
James T. Morris*
Director, Chairman, President
and Chief Executive Officer
By:
PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
(Depositor)
By:
James T. Morris*
Director, Chairman, President
and Chief Executive Officer
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Post-Effective
Amendment No. 35 to the Registration Statement has been signed by the following
persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated:
Signature
Title
Date
James T. Morris*
Director, Chairman, President and Chief
Executive Officer